Home

CGS Manual

1. P as eee E Create Graphic Objects A quick tip to remember from this procedure is that selecting a 4 Select Style 16 from the Formatting palette and switch to the graphic object and pressing ENTER on the keypad not the number View tab pad creates a duplicate of the selected graphic object 5 Change the Baseline to 15 and the Left Edge to 15 Click on the 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry rectangle in the layout drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the graphic 6 Press ENTER on the keyboard to create a duplicate of the layer selected graphic object 2 Select Style 16 from the Formatting palette A rectangle 7 Switch to the Size amp Attribute tab appears in the lower half of the layout Press CTRL X to delete g the only object on the layout Click on OK 3 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and change the Vertical Change the Vertical value to 350 Switch to the View tab 9 Change the Baseline to 115 and the Left Edge to 300 value to 450 and the Horizontal value to 35 CG 139 Formatting Graphic Objects The Formatting palette options change when you switch to a graphic layer Several options on other CG tabs also change to show the graphic formatting options The following table identifies all of the available Graphic Formatting Palette Tools Tool Name Explanation Example e moves single or multiple graphic object s within the CG Editor Logo e
2. 0 0 0000 220 Logo Compose Module eeeee0 Logo Compose Interface Overview 226 Logo Compose Concepts 00 00 ee ee 228 Working with Files ooann 230 Working with Tools i a apnea sncciteds otviokas Saseddunds 232 Setting Brush Attributes 00 000 234 Working with Alpha Tools and Logos 236 Understanding Alpha 0 0000 238 Understanding Selections 0 0000 240 Using the Selection Tools 0 0 0000 242 Modifying Selections with the Select Tab 0 00 244 Using the Transformation Tools 0 000 246 Table of Contents Understanding News Edit 0 0002 158 Creating News Edit Tables 0 0 00 160 Formatting News Edit Tables 0 0 00 000 162 Formatting Tabs in News Edit Tables 164 Using the News Edit Registry 000 166 Preparing Subtitle Files 0 0 0 000 168 Importing Subtitle Files 0 0 0 0 0 0000 170 Playing Subtitle Files Versioning and Troubleshooting 172 he eee E 175 215 Understanding Trigger Types 000 196 Configuring GPI and PC Clock Trigger Types 198 Configuring for Time Code Use 0 00002 200 Using the Run Tab 0 0 0 000 00008 202 Render Location and Rendered Images 204 WBC MONG 2h st acanay sah a a aaa 206 Setting Up Channels
3. 45 Modify a Layout 000a aana 4 Choose a Layout Type 0 eee eee eee 49 Create Complex Lists Using Reveals 5 Enter Text in a Roll or Crawl Layout 0002 53 Use Softness in a Crawl Layout 0000000000 55 Add a Clock to a LOVOUT 2s x codteute nananana 57 Change Colors with the HSV Model 0 0 59 Change Colors Using RGB amp HLS Color Models 6 Change the Video Transparent Pattern 63 Create a Simple Color Background 65 Create a Complex Background 004 6 7 Create Color Image and Video Backgrounds 69 FOMO IEN peress gagro prod ieadade beiei Use Text and Graphic Object Style and Color Groups 3 Use Advanced Text Formatting 0 00 5 WOK WIN OXI tronics dear catee enlg ti tee eee tg ee 7 Use Advanced Text Formatting 0000 79 Use Character Maps and Keycodes 83 Use the Font Manager 0 00 0 00 85 Apply Different Type Styles 0 0 000 87 Create Text Shadows cincse ca aediice Sao ae ols 89 Create an Embossed Edge 0000 9 Apply a Bevel nonan 93 Select and Modify Colors 0 0000 95 Use Gradient Options 0 0 0000 97 Use Transparency 0 0 cece cece ee eee 99 Import an Animation in C6 naaa 2 Pnt Medi 2 5 re aedieem ne meee atid inhaa 23 Apply Depth Shadow and
4. 0 0 0000 86 Se eee ee ee er ere 9 33 COS OUE castes a5 eae ra a 24 Working on a Network 0 0 0 cece eee 26 Inscriber Preferences ooon nunnnona aa 28 Cache Preferences o n cte was w aea e septe eaaa 30 Online Output Folders 0000an 31 NSCUDE IN E EE EEE S 32 EEE EE E E ae rae 33 173 Understanding Classic Shadow 200000 88 Understanding Classic Edges 0 000 90 Using Classic Beveled Text 0 0 0 00 0002 92 Understanding Text Color 2 eee 94 Working with Classic Color Gradients 00 96 Using Transparency o on nunnana 98 Using Additional Type Style Settings 0 100 Setting Depth Shadow and Sheen 102 Using Additional Beveled Text 0 0 104 Changing Recessed Settings 084 106 Changing Embellished and Edge Over Face Settings 108 Changing 10 Edges Settings 0 0 110 Changing Sheen Settings 0 084 112 Changing Neon Settings 0 0 0 0004 114 Manipulating Text Lines 0 000 0 0004 116 Moving Text Lines cists tects teace se a haha dewstdce dre tscaetty 3 118 Working with Markers 0 0 0 0 000 eee 120 Using Tabs and Text Entry Features 122 Using Advanced Text Features 0000 124 Using the Spell Checker 0 00 0000 126 MNPOTING Ei ennnen 128 Defining Classic Textures
5. Switch to Frame Grab and click on the Grab button to grab a frame from your video signal A Right click on the Scrapbook and select Add to add your grab to the Scrapbook Switch to Sequencer click on a blank Play List slot and select Use from the Scrapbook menu Your frame grab is added to the Play List Scroll through the Scrapbook and go back to the first image you added Right click and select Delete from the menu The selected image is deleted from the Scrapbook Overview 17 Working with Files You can use options on the File menu in CG S to open close and save jobs that you create A job consists of all of the elements the Event List or Play List Open a Job Bak Files Save a Job Close a Job Delete a Job Understand Job Folder Extensions Share the Font Database File Overview When you open a new or saved job CG S always asks you if you want to save the current job You can choose to save your work or delete it You can also use File Recent Files to open jobs that you access frequently The filenames of the jobs you have worked on most recently appear beside the menu when you place your mouse pointer over the Recent Files option Selecting a job file using this method avoids having to find the filename on the Open dialog Whenever you open a job a backup file of the job is created using the same filename and a bak extension If something happens to the job file you can replace the ba
6. 130 131 Enab actrees 136 from Scrapbook sseeseeeeeeeeees 130 Horizontal alignment 132 Vit COMP Ate Sexes EE 136 Logo Compose in CG eeeeeeeeee 231 on monochrome logos sssss s 136 OPaclty cured inratcacaneemastecat 233 OPUONS cccenceriteanvemaeeed 130 132 DEAUMIES E E wis wcusnns 256 SEn n a A A 134 TAMING ne RE 134 TUNE adonan nan 133 134 Vertical alignment a sscivesasevouasens 132 Texture mapping sssssesssessess 130 134 Adding tertur S neouncrcenrenni 130 Tere Sona nian 130 132 256 APIA aa E 257 Creatine x carted ss ratcelesretactsatactpavates 256 Tle Transin nanana 190 iE e LAEN AO VTE EEES 188 190 Tilingga textures panana 134 Vitti COGGAIEIC seracsaeontiessuatovsuiaces 203 Time Code reddet asrpiemeneaeegete 200 Seng WPu 200 SUD DON CC rina ratieorsare tees aces 201 Time Code Source seca niiccicuneneemires 200 SEMIN Uaioe R 200 Time Code trigger sai sissinvedn ronan 196 197 CONMOUTING doornen 200 Time codes cecsecdaceccccesecusscocsousees 200 210 Dela eenean a a 210 OlSCl EE E SEEE 210 Regd Soei 201 Running a sequence sssssssssesseseeses 200 Troubleshooting ssssessessesssseeses 210 Timecode format for subtitles 169 Timecode e rE aeda 201 Timecoded subtitles cccceeeeees 168 DMC COGS cists i tagaiuctaeieen 200 Timed ATIOS Cl ana e 196 TNE eraon aeia aaa 179 Preni a abetioennstns 179 values for subtitles cccccceeeeee
7. Recessed displays face edge face depth body depth and Changing Neon Settings on page 114 shadow elements plus an edge that draws a line around all the Recessed elements combined except shadow See Changing Recessed Settings on page 106 for details Sheen emphasizes sheen highlights on up to four edges two innermost edges located on the face and two outermost edges The size and angle of each edge s sheen can be adjusted See Changing Sheen Settings on page 112 for details Apply Different Type Styles the Size amp Attributes tab Select the Documentation Template trom the Templates registry 6 Set the Edging value to 10 and set the Shadow value to 20 ee n ee ae make sure the cursor is 7 Cycle to the Size amp Attributes tab Select the Embellished type etween the brackets In the Uo Latfor style from the type style list The appearance of the text 2 Type the word Test Use the Move tool to move the rn changes tab constrained text to the middle of the CG Editor S B Switch to the Color amp Texture tab Cycle to Face Drag one of Set the height to 224 and the width to 140 the red color chips to each of the black color chips to change 4 Select the Classic Inscriber type style from the type style list on the color of the text face 7 Cycle to Edge Change the black color chips to green Cycle to 5 Cycle to the Color amp Texture tab Set the FACE color chip to red Depth Change the
8. ssessesssssseseese 122 TECOU ONS anin a letter 49 ELEMENTS aiig a a 46 Eliminate Text Element ee 101 Elliptical Brush enorer ne 233 Elliptical Selection tool eeeeeeeeeee 242 Embellished wsssusacnrelinsion 86 108 109 Embossed edge Creating sees 9 Enabling textures sssessessessessssssssse 136 Enabling Word Wrap sesseeeeeeees 49 ENCOde COLO cicustscosusvencescaseaenncanate 264 Ending Transformations 247 304 Index ENTER Key ssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseseeees 184 ETterine EXC ne aA 46 Eraser SUD PONE one 233 Event attributes aieri 180 SELECEING pca 182 Event Dryn ON enana EE 192 Setting from Speed y sesssaserdensaanes 193 Event Editor tab 183 186 204 Event GrOUPS eass aa 179 Event LADe le hice si aliess n 202 EVENES e 178 Channel Tipp eC cnau 209 Crean ienna 178 DESCHIDEC tunina ae E 176 Edi E a EE 182 GTOUDS eiea r En 179 180 Mpoo RS 192 TAVOUPCATES sneinen concen 203 COOP OT an RA 203 Man AGING oaea a 182 Out pois ionikoa 192 Event Num bDerssirinerinimnoen 202 Event Sequence seess 179 212 213 ROMAIN a 179 Event Timing Setting eee 179 EVEIES A E E S 180 GING o ee S 182 COPDE niere Ea 182 Deleting eiai 182 Described adna a 180 EdNINO minuri eia aaa 182 Effect events sun class inceteaiuaniansieanets 180 GIOUDING ennea aA 179 LOCATIONS so cwsanianevinsinanesasiocavonunayiids 204 M M De orana a 202 Pas enen OR 182
9. 154 Based on same template 157 Checking Spelling cs ssacsorsaedonecsyss 126 Creating duplicates ssi scisssavstecteresons 44 Creating from template 45 Default Temp la tees sciences ccesmveacs 156 EXPOrHN asjsivdeate anemones 36 PAPON aa ta enesate e at 36 Moving TINGS nissan 116 PAS OS EOE 120 PAS thie cacectones N 46 SONES ITEA Siea sane 55 Subtitle layout ssessesseseesesseseeseess 169 TCU D ALCS eiea 154 UnGer stan dine srcenienoninunani 46 UPd UNE ge a 157 Using News Edit text 0 0 0 tees 166 Lead ionann ua 76 78 Leedo O anaa 120 146 Leet a Dianka a 122 Lepal COLOLS sar soveronsaedodapecewennier 263 264 Legalize Filter Srsserscucsasstunsacacue 254 263 Level of selection cisun uatevecssccbeet ewe 240 Levels image filters 00 228 255 Library See Templates Registry Light source See also Bevel direction 147 TVONICS states ela laate na E 60 iA ea D E EEE E A ENE 267 Linean dan eet i 97 IME EVE EEA EAA A T 51 Line See Text Linear aieo 97 148 Linear Lasso tool arenneren 242 Live Playlist checkbox ssseeseeeeeee 203 Live Update checkboX ceeeeeeeeees 203 TIVE TPC ALCS anaoa totiatesececenstestes 15 AUTOMA tunapoona a 15 Event EEn arnik 203 Play LSU sis aciaesaaauas iene 203 Program Preview palette 15 Local Disk cenin 204 Local formating ay sieviraderwiesRecsonsenvsces 75 Local RAM aeeie 204 Location symbols ssssssessesse
10. e eee 38 Character map pin Gries caauesmensine 82 Windows version aj sicsiisaieveieciavsaevens 82 Character reveal vcicnssriceersetesanocapiuse 51 Checking spelling jscwssvectevevevedieneesapons 126 Choosing layout types eeesseseeeeees 48 Chromideisi haee aneurin 264 Chrome simulating eeeeeeeseeees 255 CHEOMMNATICE arutan 264 Classic type style seitei 76 86 Ceanna 243 Background images esseeseeeee 68 E EEA ETA 228 236 243 ClipWOatd esiin 129 Importing tromini ainsi 129 Clipped corner rectangle e 140 CUPS cus tae aah aeuca tacetaattantes 206 IIMPOLUING bra retain mae 20 TON enade 206 Usine AS eveni cassant 20 Clone toolirocineanrcmnn 251 USO e a 252 COSINE sairip aE e 18 Pilea nannaa nN 230 JOD MES iausen aa 18 CIOS 11S TES ao a A 230 Closing Job MES isiin 18 Collapsing groups sessessessessssssssse 182 Collecting job files sccsucnsminsmuean 19 O L E OE 58 97 Adjusting in Bevel sessessessesssssssses 104 BEVEl O ET 101 Beveling tef berennnnm iig 104 BOLTO Moriani AR 65 Calibra NoNo iana 266 CHANGING nesaet 59 65 Changing gradient ssessssseesesessese 96 Character Glliosrninsnenasna 97 Chrominance roars a 264 Combinations tosses 264 Combining with patterns 67 Correction siccestscevesdecdecedecacses 228 255 Elmina ennnen aa 101 Encoder aona nY 264 Pull APid 101 Pall plac koncina tees 97 302 Index Color continued Gana oa ira aE aE 265 OE E EES A
11. 0 Now click on Add to IFT Only the lowercase letters are rendered to the font database CG 85 86 Understanding Type Styles Type styles are preset character styles found on the Size amp Attributes tab that consist of complex edging and shadow options You can customize these styles by setting values on the Colors amp Texture tab Classic Type Style Additional Type Styles Embellished Edge Over Face GG Previous versions of CG featured a Size amp Attributes tab consisting of two sections Type Specs and Attributes The Attributes section included Shadow and Edging options The Classic Inscriber type style lets you create all the character effects you have in the past Simply select the Classic type style radio button from the type styles section of the Size amp Attributes tab Face edge and shadow options are located on the Color amp Texture tab For details on setting Classic type style color transparency and texture edge and shadow values see Understanding Text Color on page 94 Using Classic Beveled Text on page 92 Understanding Classic Shadow on page 88 Using Transparency on page 98 and Working with Classic Color Gradients on page 96 CG offers you six type styles that let you create complex text effects in addition to the Classic Inscriber type f Classic Inseriber f 10 Edges Edge over Face Sheen style Recessed Edge Over Face m Embellished TA Embellis
12. Select the Program Channel The Program buttons on the Event Editor tab allow you to quickly set the Program Channel for each event in your Event fr 2 3 Program List Simply select the event line in the Event List and click on Program button 1 2 or 3 to set the output channel See Setting Up Channels and Channel Ripples on page 208 for details on configuring CG S for multiple channel output Add Groups to an Event List 1 Crate a Play List with at least ten events 2 Click on the Sequencer button to switch to the Sequencer module 3 Click on event number 00007 in the Event List 4 Select Edit Insert Group Header to insert a group Event number 00007 becomes event number 01001 The first two digits represent the group number starting at group 00 The last three digits represent the event position in the group 5 Click on the second group header number 01000 Click on the arrow icon on the group header line to collapse the group view Notice only the first event thumbnail is displayed in the Play List for the collapsed group Click on event number 00004 in the Event List Select Edit Insert Group Header to insert a group Now the Event List contains three groups Collapse the group view for the new group The Play List should now contain thumbnails for each event in the first group and only thumbnails for the first events of the second and third groups Right click on each group trigger type and
13. The Play List vs the Event List l Click on the CG icon on the G S toolbar to switch to CG The first slot in the Play List is highlighted Enter some text in the layout the Play List thumbnail is updated to reflect your changes Click on the next blank slot in the Play List and enter some more text Repeat step 3 until you have a Play List with at least six events Click on the Sequencer icon on the CG S toolbar to switch to Sequencer Click on the event numbered 00003 in the Event List Event 00003 is also selected in the Play List Select an event in the Play List The corresponding event is also selected in the Event List In the Play List double click on the event numbered 00002 to do a take of the event The event is displayed on your output monitor and on the Program palette Select another event trom the Play List and drag it to the Program palette to do a take To preview an event select and drag an event from the Play List to the Preview palette The event is displayed on your Preview Channel if you have one Select the Play Direct button on the toolbar to run ren the entire event sequence Sequencer goes online j automatically Watch how both the Play List and the Event List run the sequence The Event List highlights the current event line while the Play List visually identifies the current event by highlighting the image thumbnail as the sequence plays You can cut copy paste aa previe
14. Contrast with Graphic Object Text Plane In CG The plane containing all of the text elements for the CG layer Each layer is divided into a text plane and a graphics plane The text plane is always located on top of the graphics plane for the layer See also Layer 294 Glossary Texture In CG An effect that simulates a pattern or tactile surface on a CG object such as marbling or basket weave In Logo Compose A graphic image pattern that can be applied to objects and images Textures simulate a tactile or three dimensional surface Logo Compose has two types of textures seamless and alpha Time Code In Sequencer An indexing method that uniquely identifies each frame of frame based media Denotes hours minutes seconds and frames elapsed for the medium HH MM SS FF Time Code Field In Sequencer A field that displays the current time code when your system is configured to use an external time code reader Time Code Offset In Sequencer A feature that offsets all the events in a time code group by a specific amount Time Code Reader In Sequencer A device that reads time codes from a time code source and translates them into a format CG S can understand Time Code Source A device usually a video playback device like a VCR that generates time codes Time Code Trigger Type In Sequencer A group trigger type that uses a time code reader and time code source as a trigger source for takes
15. In Sequencer The point specifying when the current event ends and Sequencer takes the next event Outline Edging In CG An edging effect that draws a hard edged outline around each character Only available with the Classic Inscriber type style A text element that draws a hard edge to the existing face edge face depth and body depth elements combined You can apply multiple colors and transparency values to the outline edge Only available with the Recessed type style Oval In CG An elliptical or circular graphic object P Paint Inscriber application that lets you create edit retouch and add alpha to bitmap images and Paint files Paint is only available with VMP Studio Paint File Format See ipt 288 Glossary PAL Phase Alternating Line One of several video standards developed for television broadcast transmission and reception A PAL TV image has 625 horizontal scan lines per frame Each half frame screen scan takes approximately 1 50 of a second and a complete frame is scanned every 1 25 of a second 25 frames per second Typically this standard has been adopted in countries where the power line frequency is 50 Hz to allow a simple relationship to the scan rate Palette Files See aco Palette Pop Ups In Logo Compose The pop up tool selection menus that appear when you place the pointer on top of a tool on the Tool palette and hold down the left mouse button Tools that have pop ups ha
16. The video channel used to preview video before it goes live Program Board A frame buffer dedicated to the Program channel Program Channel The video channel to be broadcast or to be sent to tape In multiple frame buffer systems you may have several Program channels Program Preview Palette The CG S component that allows you to view the contents of the Program and Preview channels PRV Button The Program Preview palette button that when selected sets automatic online updates for the Preview channel Glossary 289 Q Quick Preview A preview of a take made while CG S is offline Quick Take A take made while CG S is offline Radial Blur Filter In Logo Compose A distortion filter that blurs an image around a center point Raster Image See Bitmap Rectangle In CG A square or rectangular shaped graphic object Rectangular Brush In Logo Compose A basic tool with a square or rectangular shape used for painting or editing large areas The Rectangular brush is also used to create calligraphic effects and diamond patterns Red Channel In Logo Compose The channel that stores all of the red information in the image See also Channel Redraw Updates the screen display Complex layouts or images may take longer to redraw than simpler ones You can force a redraw by pressing CTRL D Reduce Flicker Filter In Logo Compose A video cleanup filter that blurs the image in the vertical directio
17. clicking the middle color chip selector then setting an element color You cannot tell the difference between the innermost edge and inside edge and between the outermost edge and outside edge Set the sheen color chip to bright white Set the innermost edge and inside edge size to 28 and angle to 25 Set the outermost edge and outside edge size to 25 and angle to 49 Different edge sheens cut through the edges in a cross pattern The red face is visible Cycle to Shadow Set the shadow color chip to black Set offset to 27 angle to 37 and soft to 6 Set transparency to 77 Experiment with different edge sheen sizes colors and angles CG 113 Changing Neon Settings The Neon type style creates text with two elements tube and glow The tube defines the character shape and the glow radiates out from the tube Face Tube Color and Texture Options Glow 114 CG CG lets you customize the shape color transparency and EEEE texture of your text On Face adjust the values in the Distort X and Distort Y fields to manipulate the shape of each character Distortvf0 For details on distorting text shape see Distort Text on page 100 The tube forms the outline of each character and Color Chip can contain up to four colors and transparency Selectors values Use the Color Picker options to set color chips and transparency values You can also apply a texture using Texture options on the Color amp Text
18. first frame of your Spell Check Preferences animation is displayed in the Play List All animations Exit have a via extension Recent Files a You can create an animation in via format by exporting it from MotionPak or by creating it in Via Builder The via format is a proprietary Inscriber animation file format Any animation you create in an external animation application can be added to the Play List You can create an animation in any multimedia or 3D software package and import it into the Sequencer or CG module You need to follow these steps to use the animation in CG S create the animation export the individual animation frames create a via file using Inscriber Via Builder and import the via file into CG or Sequencer When you export the individual animation frames make sure that the file format you export to is supported by Via Builder Sequential tga files are the recommended file format If your software supports the functionality you can export the frames as full 32 bit files complete with alpha CG S recognizes and uses any alpha in your tga output files To create a via file use the Via Builder program that comes with CG S You can find it in the Utilities folder on the CG S CD ROM See the Via Builder online help for details on using Via Builder to create animations Once you have created a via file open CG S switch to CG or Sequencer and select File gt Import Animation to import your v
19. CG SUPREME 4 1 ONLINE i BDNF Dow doies 56 34 Crue 1 38 CHARACTER BLE Due unday pth CTV GENERATOR i ma y ai ATA aL e FOR WIN NT inscriper User Guide Copyright 1999 Inscriber Technology Corporation All rights reserved Inscriber Technology Corporation 26 Peppler Street Waterloo Ontario Canada N2J 3C4 No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Inscriber Technology Corporation Inscriber is a registered trademark of Inscriber Technology Corporation Inscriber CG Supreme and the Inscriber logo are trademarks of Inscriber Technology Corporation All other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners This document describes Inscriber CG Supreme version 4 1 Subsequent revisions of the product may provide additional functionality or modify the limits described in this document The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Inscriber Technology Corporation Inscriber Technology Corporation SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 1 NOTICE Inscriber Technology Corporation IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE
20. In CG Determines how much of an object is covered by a gradient blend Blends can cover the entire object or just a portion of the object Graphic Object In CG A shape such as a rectangle or circle or a picture such as a logo in a layout Graphic objects appear on separate planes from the text in your layouts and always appear behind any text that shares the same layer Each graphic object consists of three parts face edge and shadow Graphics Plane In CG The plane containing all of the graphic elements for the CG layer In CG each layer is divided into a text plane and a graphics plane The graphics plane is always located under the text plane for the layer See also Layer Graphics Tablet A device for controlling the cursor used instead of a mouse A pen is used as a drawing device on the tablet and pen motions are translated into cursor movement on the interface Unlike a mouse a graphics tablet is pressure sensitive Glossary 281 Grayscale An image that is represented by up to 256 shades of gray In a grayscale image every pixel has a brightness value ranging from 0 black to 255 white The monochrome filter converts a color image to a grayscale image Green Channel In Logo Compose The channel that stores all of the green information in an image See also Channel Group In Sequencer A container used to group events with common characteristics Group Attributes In Sequencer Chara
21. Leading In CG The space between lines of text in a layout Leading is measured from baseline to baseline Contrast with Kerning Lett Tab In CG A tab alignment option where the left most text character of the line is aligned with the tab and the rest of the characters flow to the right from the tab stop Legalize Filters In Logo Compose Inscriber filters that convert illegal colors image colors outside the broadcast range to legal colors colors within the broadcast range If colors are not legalized before they are broadcast as an NTSC or PAL signal they will produce inferior results and possibly even technical problems See also Video Legalize Filter Level Curves Filter In Logo Compose A color adjustment filter that adjusts the tonal range of an image at any point along a 0 255 scale This allows for smoother adjustments to the tonal value of an image replicating high end color correction systems Levels Filter In Logo Compose A color adjustment filter that makes gradual adjustments to the brightness contrast and midtones of an image Igo Format See lgo Lightness An element of the HLS color model Lightness determines the brightness or darkness of a color A lightness value of 0 is black a value of 100 is white For maximum saturation lightness must be set to 50 See also HLS Color Model Line Art See Clip Art Live Playlist Checkbox In Sequencer A Run tab option that turns l
22. Output Internal Produces a key signal for boards with on board linear keying Internale Produces an anti aliased key and fill signal External Produces a signal where the RGB channel contains only color information Externale Produces a signal where the RGB channel contains blended text to background color information for keyers that need a luminance variance at the edges of characters If you have more than one frame buffer set up on your system enabling multi channel operation forces your frame buffers to act as separate program channels instead of as a Preview Program system Enabling this option prevents you from sending information to your frame buffer and displaying anything on your output monitor Selecting this option does not mean that you can run CG S without the interlock device VGA computer monitors and video output monitors use different display methods and color gamuts Use the Windows Gamma options to adjust the VGA display to match the video output Set the gamma separately for the red green and blue channels The default value is 1 0 The dither settings apply a dither filter to improve the look of gradient fills Choose the settings based on your current frame buffer Video Transparent Pattern Custom Settings The video transparent or alpha background pattern Wideo Transparent Pattern represents video transparent areas of you images or layouts Select the pattern you wish to use to a a 2 identify alp
23. Reimport the image and set the clone source over the bug s head this time holding down ALT SHIFT instead of just ALT Repeat step 6 Because you held down the SHIFT key as you set the source point the Clone tool always copies the original source data even when you paint over the source point Switch to the Clone Fill tool and click on the image The image is filled with the original image data Select around the bug with the Lasso tool On the Select tab enter 5 in the Feather field and click on the Feather button Switch to the Clone Fill tool hold down ALT SHIFT and click in the selection to select the entire selection as the clone source Select Edit gt Create New Image and increase the width to Select the Tile checkbox on the Brush tab Click in the image to tile the image with bugs Logo Compose 253 254 Applying Filters Inscriber filters extend the functionality of Logo Compose All filters appear in the Inscriber Filters list on the Filter tab Logo Compose does not support third party plug in filters Why Use Filters Inscriber Filters Logo Compose View Brush select Transform Filter E Recent B E lnscriber H E Alpha Adjustment Color Adjustment Inscriber Filters Toni Brightness amp Contrast a po Select Opacity i o0 Filters can be used to refine your images Take the images on the right as an example The image on the top is fairly bland By ap
24. Time In See In Point Time Out See Out Point Timecode exe A program provided with CG S that makes all the changes to Inscribe ini required for time code access Timed Trigger Type In Sequencer A group trigger type that uses stop watch type timing as a trigger source for takes Timeline See Track Slider Tolerance Fill In Logo Compose A tool that fills a layer or selection based on luminance values in the image Use the Tolerance field to specify how close luminance values need to be in order to be filled in Total Take Duration In Sequencer The sum of the event duration and event wait time Transition In Sequencer An effect that takes place at the in point for an event There are six types of transitions cuts wipes tiles louvres dissolves and pushes Transition Direction In Sequencer The direction a new image takes as it starts to appear on screen Applies only to wipe tile louvre and push transitions Transition Event In Sequencer An image file that has been combined with a transition such as a push cut wipe or tile transition Transition Granularity See Transition Size Transition Size In Sequencer A setting that determines how much of the transition image is revealed at a time Only applies to certain transitions tile louvre and some wipe transitions Size ranges from one small to five large Transition Softness In CG A roll crawl or reveal setting
25. determines where the depth is displayed See Depth on page 102 for details on setting depth angle Size on Body Depth sets the depth size Shadow and Sheen Shadows are soft offset highlights of the side of an object opposite an imaginary light source they follow the shape of the entire object Using Shadow you can set shadow options You can also set sheen highlight effects to the text face edge face depth body depth and outline edge See Setting Depth Shadow and Sheen on page 102 for details Customize Recessed Type Style 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is between the brackets in the CG Editor 2 Type the word Wow Use the Move tool to center rn the line of text and increase the text size 3 Select the Recessed type style on the Size amp Attributes tab oP 4 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab Because Recessed type style is complex set each element a different solid color Cycle to Face Set the Face color chips to red Cycle to Edge Set the edge color chips to blue Set size to 15 Cycle to Outline Edge Set the outline edge to green Set the size to 26 Cycle to Face Depth Set the face depth color chips to yellow Set depth to 19 and angle to 72 Cycle to Body Depth Set the body depth color chips to black Set size to 19 Cycle to Shadow Set the shadow color chip to grey Set offset to
26. 0 00 00000 130 Defining Additional Textures 0 00000 132 Mapping and Compositing Classic Textures 134 Using Classic Textures 20 Aibiror op icadaddece sos 136 Creating Graphic Objects 0 0 0 0004 138 Formatting Graphic Objects 0 0 00000 140 Table of Contents CG Module continued Understanding Graphic Shadows and Edges 142 Manipulating Graphic Objects 0 020 000000 144 Changing and Moving Graphic Objects 146 Transparency Gradients and Layering 148 Adding Logos to Layouts 00 005 150 Modifying Logos 20 eee eee ee eee 152 Understanding Templates 0 0000 154 Using Templates 0 0 0 0 eee eee 156 Sequencer Module cccecccccccccs Sequencer tntertace Overview 0 000 176 Getting Started in Sequencer 0 000 178 Groups and Events 0c cece eee ee 180 Managing and Editing the Event List 182 Outputting Events to Video 0 0 0000 00 008 184 Using the Event Editor Tab 0 0000 186 Creating Transition Events 0 0008 188 Selecting a Transition Type and Direction 190 Understanding Event Duration 0 00 192 Understanding Effect Events 0000 194 Frame Grab Module ccccceeees Frame Grab An Overview 0000 218 Using the Image Filters
27. 161 Create and Format Tabular Text 0 00 165 Procedures vii viii CG Procedures continued Adding Editing and Updating a News Edit Table 167 Create a Subtitle File 0 naana 169 Sequencer Procedures Create a Group and Change the Trigger Type 181 AC AE EEE EEEE 183 Take Images nonan nananana 185 Add Groups to an Event List o onone 187 Define a Transition 0 0 0 0 cece eee 189 Change Transition Directions 0 19 Set Up and Run Events for Subtitling 0 0 193 Stop Resume and Exit Takes 0000 195 Create an Event List for a Talk Show 0 0 197 Frame Grab Procedures Grob OMIMOGC 625 284 t cnnaraeytaansaankeseueed 219 Use Fiese ea a 221 Logo Compose Procedures Experiment with Logo Compose 002 229 Experiment with Import Export Options 231 Experiment with Tools 0 0 0 00 cee 233 Experiment with Brush Attributes 0000 235 Experiment with Alpha Tools 000 23 Working with Alpha Gradient Tools 239 Experiment with Opacity and Level of Selection 24 Clean Up a Logo cs att naana 243 Import a Selection to Create an Effect 245 Experiment with Transformations and Create a Shadow 247 Procedures Create a TimeCoded Subtitle File 0 0 171 Create a Subtitle File Using Formatting Codes 173
28. Adrienne Electronics AEC Box 20 BCD Associates TC100 Telcom Research TC 102 and Easy Reader II Skotel Corporation Little Red Support for other time code readers may be available Contact Inscriber Technical Support for more information See page XX for details Timecode exe is a program provided with CG S that makes all the changes needed to Inscribe ini that are required for time code access Depending on the time code reader you choose you may be asked for the following information COM port COM1 COM2 COM3 or COM4 Input type LTC or VITC Frame rate 25 or 30 Baud rate usually 19200 or 38400 Broadcast mode ASCII or Binary For each device only appropriate choices are supplied Not all devices require all this information If you change your setup run Timecode exe again and fill in the new values to properly update the Inscribe ini file Set Times Using a Time Code Source 1 Click on the Sequencer button to switch to Sequencer 7 Click on the out point button on the Event Editor to set the out 2 Click on the Online Toggle button to go online C6 S point for the first event Sequencer inserts the in point for the muhe canine made hired ime cues x4 next event using the out point for the current event 3 Prepare and run your time code source 4 Click on the group header and select Time Code trom the Trigger drop down list on the Event Editor tab Event Editor tab so that the arrow turns 5 Click on the Cur
29. By default the Play List palette is located on the left side of the display but you can convert it to a floating palette by dragging it anywhere on the screen Add to and Create an Event Sequence Edit the Play List Overview Using the Play List palette you can add to an existing event sequence or create an entirely new one Use the creation options in CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab to create the layouts for the Play List For example when you create an image in CG the image automatically appears in the Play List At this point the event has a default transition applied to it To create a new event simply select a blank slot in the Play List or select Playlist Log Event The new events are based on the current Registry template See Understanding Templates on page 122 for details on the Templates Registry You can rearrange the event sequence by dragging the event thumbnails from one spot to another in the Play List palette Click on the event you want to copy the selected event and drag it to a new position The Play List scrolls up or down when you hold the cursor at the top or bottom of the list The cursor shape indicates whether the event you are dragging is inserted above below or as a replacement for the event under your mouse cursor the active event Cursor Description i e inserts the selected event above the active event K e replaces the active event with the selected event K inserts the selected even
30. Event List 5 Click on the black Text color swatch to select the new text color then click on the white Background color swatch to select the new background color 10 Select Selected Postage Border trom the list to change the display colors for the selected event thumbnail in the Play List Click on the red Background color swatch to select the new outline color Select Unselected Text from the list and Reset Reset All All button _Reset ll Click on the OK button in the Sequencer click on the Reset button to reset the Unselected Text colors tab to make the changes to CG S s preferences To reset all the colors click on the Reset Sequencer 215 216 Sequencer Frame Grab Frame Grab allows you to capture a single frame from an incoming video signal and save it as a still image Frame Grab includes special tools to crop ragged edges from the grab filters to apply to the grab and a variety of methods to save the image as a bitmap file In this Section About Frame Grab 0 00005 218 Setting Up Frame Grab 04 222 Cropping B GLAD es acacts 26ncraeahava amaweetees 218 Saving GAD S saree nie EAE woos 223 Image Filters Described 220 218 Frame Grab An Overview Frame Grab allows you to capture a single frame from an incoming video signal and save it as a still image Frame Grab includes special tools to crop ragged edges from the grab filters to apply t
31. F E F Reset to Defaults Take Page Based Crawls Crawl Options Crawl Direction Note that you can t use the Zoom option on the View tab to zoom in on a crawl layout the way you can on a still layout The value in the Softness field blurs the text entry or exit border Each Softness value is equal to the number of pixels used to create the softness area at the layout border Not all frame buffers support softness The graphic below shows you the softness area identified by a box filled with diagonal lines The size of the box changes as you adjust the number of Softness pixels If you leave the Softness value at zero the border is identified by a thin white line The Softness value has a maximum value of 100 pixels Y Turning Word Wrap off for crawls is essential or your text automatically wraps to the next line when it reaches the right border instead of continuing on the selected text line Word Wrap is automatically turned off when you select Crawl as your layout type but you can make sure that Word Wrap is off by navigating to the Element Constrain menu Word Wrap is off when there is no checkmark beside it in the menu Crawl Direction Speed Page Based Crawls You can select the crawl direction by clicking on the Crawl Left or Crawl Right buttons Check what your frame buffer wh fc will support The Frames field and Speed field adjust the speed of your crawl by modifying wait times The total lengt
32. In Sequencer Expands or collapses the view for the selected groups in the Event List and the Play List Extruded Shadow In CG An effect where CG text and graphic objects appear to have a three dimensional shadow extending from the element to a specified distance behind the element Extruded shadows apply color from the top to the bottom of the shadow Contrast with Drop Shadow Eye Dropper See Color Picker Face In CG The main body of a text character or graphic object sometimes known as foreground Face Color In CG The color that appears in the main body of a text character or graphic object The face color is identified by the face color chip on the Color amp Texture Tab Contrast with Background Color Face Depth In CG A text element that adds a hard extruded edge to the existing combined face and edge elements Only available with the Recessed type style Field One half of a complete video frame A field will contain every second line in an image either all odd scan lines or all even scan lines See also Interlaced Fields Field Filters See Video Cleanup Filters File Format See Image File Format Fill Pattern See Video Transparent Pattern Glossary 279 Fill Tools In Logo Compose Tools that let you quickly cover portions of an image with color alpha image data or texture Filters In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab Filters that operate on the interlaced fields in a c
33. Pirs hes eiun 188 Q Quality of CG characters eee 34 Quick keys in Logo Compose 227 268 Oui ktk i Senn ete renee oats oaads 15 Radialinis 97 148 RAN aeann ena an 204 RED sa e et ees E 101 Raster based images seeeeeeeeeeees 262 Rasterizing iMages ceseeeeeeeeseees 237 RatlOs AS PCClvecrcGsi S E 259 263 Real alpha channel iccccatceecuanioe 238 Real world Colofciisnsinvcenuinits 265 Recessed aisvatk avennseaanicacsoanes 87 106 107 Record CAGE aienea costes uses 30 Recording online actiVity eee 213 Recan lensin e 140 REClANOUI ateiciai 140 PIRES E E anna 263 Selechion too berean 242 Rectangular Brush cscccsiovaes swans 233 Rectangular Selection tool 242 Rede hannel a iernare 260 REIST aoaeiaa e ia 44 Manabe osea aE 44 News Edit renin in 44 166 SAUD aion eiA R 26 Template nmana 44 156 Regulating Speeds vvcsssvecsuesevayouen s 52 55 Relative 2D Transform sssssssseseese 248 Relative Corner Offsets eee 248 Relative COmersssssiis an tuina 248 Remembered alpha values 237 238 Remote subtitle entries eee 172 REMOVING Fontsanta 81 RETAUA IG ar vomneuuseaiearemusentie 212 EVEUUS atana a 186 GOUD S A 186 Render locatiotiaainsmpensmneaeetts 204 CHANG ierindas 186 Local DIS Kosa reutisnesitstomssncn 204 Local RAM aca naceseincemmnieirns 204 Location symbols seeeeeeeeeees 205 Remote subtitle entries 4 204 Rendered file
34. This second line is loctaed on the thrd layer Select Element Layer Contol Layer List Click on the start of the second line of text hold down SHIFT CTRL and drag the mouse pointer up to move the text line to the third layer If the second line fills more than one text line move the second half of the line to the third layer Click on layer one on the Layers palette and select Element Spell Check Layout Select This trom the suggestion list and then click on Replace to correct the first spelling error in the text Click on Replace to correct the second spelling error in the text Click on Replace to correct the third spelling error in the text Click on Replace to correct the fourth spelling error in the text CG does not update the layout with corrected spelling until the spell check is complete After you click on Replace to correct the fourth spelling error CG finishes the spell check and after finding no other errors updates the entire display with the corrected spelling When you are checking a job each layout is generally updated after it has been checked CG 127 Importing Text For layouts involving large amounts of text like roll or crawl layouts you may find it more convenient to create your text in a word processor and then import it into the layout Prepare a Roll or You should prepare your layout before you create the text you want to import into Crawl Layout the layout If you prepare yo
35. Use a GPI Trigger to Trigger Events 0000an 199 Set Times Using a Time Code Source 0 201 Use the Run Tab onoo 203 Experiment with Location Options 205 Trim a Video Clip sous thiieaetecdaacevethaaen 207 Set Ripples for Multiple Boards 0 209 Edit and Offset In and Out Points Using Time Codes 211 Change the Online Directory 0 0 00 213 Change the Display Colors 0 0002 215 Save a Frame Grob ooann 223 Use the Transform Tab 0 0 00 eee 249 Experiment with the Image Editing Tools 251 Clone an Image 4 2cirieagekedes toctineoadaeand 253 Use Filters to Correct Color and Create Effects 255 Fill with a Seamless Pattern 0000 257 Experiment on Individual Channels 261 Scale an Image ania dia dadarde ham say adndie des 263 Mark and Legalize Illegal Colors 0 00 265 Experiment with Short Cut Keys 0 0000 269 CG Supreme is an integrated environment where you can create broadcast quality titles and sequence events in online and post production suites CG S also supports logo creation flying text and video capture CG S does not support flying text If you want flying text you can purchase the CG Xtreme plug in option which will enable the FX module and allow you to animate your layouts In this Section Inscriber CG S Overview 005 10 11 Using
36. You can click on the G or B buttons to display those values on the Color Slider and the Color Selection Box then displays the remaining two values You can select colors in three ways using the Color Selector and Color Slider using the numeric Value fields or using the Color Picker The Color Selector and Color Slider let you select specific colors using the mouse Move the Color Selector and Color Slider over the color that you want to select The color in the Color Picker box changes as you move the Color Selector and Color Slider to show you the selected color The Value fields let you make fine corrections to selected colors or specify exact colors Enter the values of the color you want to select or use the arrow buttons or drag up or down within a field to change the number in each Value field The currently selected color appears in the Color Picker box and you can see the changes that you make reflected in both the Color Picker box and the position of the Color Selector and Color Slider The Color Picker lets you copy a color from anywhere on the screen Click on the Color Picker and drag it to the color on the screen that you want to copy The color can be in the current layout in one of the Play List thumbnails or even in another application As you drag the Color Picker on the screen the color in the Color Picker box changes The color of the pixel under the tip of the Color Picker is the Select Colors Full Black Bac
37. always be guaranteed The Import Layout and Export Layout options let you import or export a single layout from a play order Exported layouts have a sly extension and you can only import layout files with a sly extension Exported layouts are not rendered files instead they contain the information that allows CG to recreate the layout when you import it Exported layouts maintain references to graphics which means that when you import the layout CG expects to find graphics in the original location If you don t have your graphics in the same location you can move the necessary graphics to the samples folder under the CG S program files CG looks in the samples folder if it can t find graphics in their specified location Graphics that were placed in the layout from the Scrapbook and not saved on disk are saved in the layout when you export it File size increases dramatically when graphics are saved in the layout file The icg file format allows files to be transferred between Inscriber and Inscriber compatible applications An icg file contains an image thumbnail a fully rendered image and the layout information Files exported in icg format are editable in CG when you import them Text files are imported into the selected line at the current cursor position CG understands end of line markers when you import a text file unless you are importing text for a crawl Text is formatted using the current style and color groups
38. and then send them all to the back starting with the object you want on top and finishing with the object you want on the bottom The example above shows a simple layout that has been reordered The object labeled 1 was sent to the back first and the object labelled 4 was sent to the back last You can see that the object sent to the back first is now on top and the object sent to the back last is now on the bottom When you reorder objects transparency can make a difference If you change the order of transparent semi transparent and opaque objects you may inadvertently cover or reveal areas of the layout Make sure that you consider your transparent and semi transparent objects when you are reordering graphic objects in a stack Arrange Graphic Objects in a Stack 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the graphic layer 2 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab select Rectangle from the Graphic Type drop down list and change the Vertical and Horizontal values to 100 3 Press ENTER three times to create three copies of the rectangle and move the rectangles on your layout to create the graphic on the right 4 lick on the top right rectangle and press ENTER to create a copy of the rectangle Change the Vertical value to 300 and position the rectangle to create this object Click on the long rectangle on top and select Element Send to Back or cl
39. ares an z three events and enter 60 in the Frames field if you are working in NTSC or 50 if you are working in PAL The transition will be completed in 2 seconds 8 Click on the Run Job button on the Run tab to run the event sequence Note the effects of the different transition size values Run Job Sequencer 189 190 Selecting a Transition Type and Direction Transition type determines how each new image moves onto the screen CG S supports six types of transitions cut wipe tile louvre dissolve and push The transitions available to you in CG S depend on the frame buffer you are using Transition Types All CG S transition types are described in detail in the table below All transitions except dissolves maintain the key signal during the transition Transition Cut Wipe Tile Louvre Dissolve Push Appearance Displays the entire image instantly This is the fastest image display Gradually wipes the new image on screen in a specific direction or pattern There are up to 31 patterns available Reveals the new image one square at a time You can set the size of the square and the general direction of the transition There are up to 31 directions available Divides the image into strips and displays the strips in a specified direction or pattern You can set the size of the strips and the transition direction This effect looks like you are opening venetian blinds or a louvred shutter
40. leave original text in place Insert contents of clipboard into current line starting at cursor Switch to and from vertical text processing Toggle between tab constrained and non tab constrained text Decrease kerning between letters on either side of cursor Increase kerning between letter on either side of cursor On Move Up Down buttons move text line up down 10 scan lines On Move Up Down buttons move text line up down 1 scan line Remove selected text if none selected remove character to right of cursor Add spline control point Remove spline control point Rotates selected text 90 degrees 43 Use the CG Toolbar Switch Between Layers Non Tab Constrained Lines CG The CG toolbar appears when the CG Editor is active within CG S and lets you access the Templates registry and layout type switch between text and graphic layers and position objects in the layout Layout Type Text Move up drop down list Layer Previous Insert Send to back ird DG F Rega F Gel E Templates Registry Transition Graphic Next Append Move down drop down list Settings Layer Move to front To use the positioning tools click on a graphic object and then click on a button on the CG toolbar CG lets you hold down CTRL and click on an element of the layout to select that element You can click on text lines graphic objects or the background When you hold down CTRL and click on the background CG automatically changes to the Backgroun
41. pattern that is effective for the types of layouts you create Video CG 63 Using Color Backgrounds Color backgrounds begin with a basic background consisting of one solid color You can then use a number of other options to add complexity and interest to your backgrounds Color Background Options Understand Color Selection Tools Use Color Selection Tools 64 CG The basic color background is a Color single opaque color You can modify this simple background to ee create more complex backgrounds by adding a second color adding transparency adding a pattern or Gradient Transparency Pattern changing the angle of the gradient Saint Tronsporeny Pater or transparency See Using Complex Color Backgrounds on page 66 for details The Color Selection tools on the Color Selector Color Slider Background tab let you select colors based on one of three color models rca lt a Model poe Ist RGB HLS or HSV See Understanding the HSV Color Model on page 58 and ala2 lt Value Fields B127 Understanding RGB and HLS Color ue Rodi Models on page 60 for details on color 7 ve Radio uttons models In the graphic to the right the color Color Selection Box Color Picker model is RGB The R button is selected which means that all of the currently available values for Red are displayed on the Color Slider The Color Selection Box displays the currently available values of Green and Blue
42. you perceive the images You usually want to make sure light levels are consistent from one day to the next You also want to minimize glare on the monitors Logo Compose 267 268 Using Short Cut Keys In Logo Compose one of the main ways to speed up your work is to use the short cut keys You can use short cut keys for selecting tools and using Logo Compose functionality Tools Many but not all Logo Compose tools have a short cut keys They are listed below Tool Short Cut Key Tool Short Cut Key Transform Tools Alpha Tools e Move CTRL SHIFT ALT V Alpha Add CTRL SHIFT ALT J e Rotate CTRL T e Alpha Subtract CTRL ALT J e Scale CTRL SHIFT ALT T Alpha Memory CTRL SHIFT ALT R e Skew CTRL ALT T Alpha Linear Gradient CTRL SHIFT ALT P e Freeform CTRL SHIFT T e Alpha Radial Gradient CTRL ALT P Selection Tools Image Editing Tools e Wand CTRL SHIFT ALT W Dodge CTRL SHIFT ALT 0 e Luminance Wand CTRL ALT W e Burn CTRL ALT 0 Brush Selection CTRL SHIFT ALT C e Luminance Add CTRL SHIFT ALT Q e Rectangular Selection CTRL SHIFT ALT M Luminance Subtract CTRL ALT Q Elliptical Selection CTRL ALT M e Clone CTRL SHIFT ALT S e Lasso CTRL SHIFT ALT L e Clone Fill CTRL ALT S e Linear Lasso CTRL ALT L e Offset CTRL ALT U General Tools e Smear CTRL SHIFT ALT U e Scroll CTRL SHIFT ALT H Zoom In CTRL SHIFT ALT Z Zoom Out CTRL ALT Z Logo Compose Fu nctionality These features are listed below Functionality
43. your keyboard while the event is playing on your output monitor This functionality is available in all CG S modules when you take a roll or crawl You can stop any effect event mid take This is useful when you are preparing material for a live broadcast and you are experimenting with effect events If for example you are attempting to achieve a certain speed or frame rate on a long roll you can exit the roll after a few lines if you decide the speed is too slow or too fast To exit a take press the ESC escape key If you are running a job and you want to stop the entire job immediately press ESC twice in quick succession If you press ESC only once CG S stops playing the current event waits until the next in point is reached then continues playing the rest of the job You can also use the Stop button on the Run tab to stop a job When you click on the Stop button CG S finishes playing the current event before stopping the playback You can stop a single take or an entire job in any CG S module when you run effect events You cannot resume a take or job once you stop it Stop Resume and Exit Takes 2 Create a roll and a crawl in CG and drag them in the Play List so that the roll is before the crawl in the job Click on the Sequencer button to switch to the Sequencer module Click on the first event Hold down the SHIFT key and click on the second event Enter 200 in the Frames field on the Even
44. 21 and soft to 31 Review your text and its complex edges and shadow settings Once you understand the various text elements experiment with the Color Options on the drop down list and the Face on Top checkbox cG 107 Changing Embellished and Edge Over Face Settings The Embellished and Edge Over Face type styles provide complex depth and shadow details Embellished lets you create text elements that cast a shadow but do not contain any color transparency or texture values The Edge Over Face type style emphasizes text edges by layering them on both on top and beside the text face Face Color and Texture Options Depth Shadow and Sheen Options Ghost Checkbox 108 CG You can customize the shape color transparency and texture of x b your text On Face adjust the values in the Distort X and Distort __ ores Y fields to manipulate the shape of each character For detailson Ptt p distorting text shape see Distort Text on page 100 Text elements can each contain up to four colors and four transparency values Use the Color Picker options to set color chips and transparency values You can also apply a texture to face edge or depth elements using Texture options on the Color amp Texture tab See Defining Additional Textures on page 132 for details on type style textures See Understanding Text Color on page 94 for details on setting text color and texture See Transparency on page 98 for details
45. 258 Z LOO r A 258 Zoom levels cccccssesesecececeeeeeee 226 258 ZOOUN O11 layout enis eane 35 WCG 35 ZOOM OU aree eena 258 LOOM tO ana NE 232 Index 317 318 Index Technical Support There are several sources for CG Supreme technical support Technical Support from your dealer If your dealer can t help you Product Updates Contact your dealer first Since your dealer helped you configure your system your dealer is also the best resource for system configuration issues and problems If your local dealer is unable to resolve your technical support problems contact Inscriber Technology Corporation Please have your software serial number available when you call Inscriber Technical Support Your serial number can be found in a number of places including software packaging on the dongle and on your install disks Phone 519 570 9111 9 00 a m to 5 00 p m EST Fax 519 570 9140 Email support inscriber com You can also post a technical support question on our web site and our support staff will answer your questions You can download product updates from our web site or you can use one of these methods to receive updates Web site www inscriber com Email support inscriber com Technical Support 319
46. 41 samples folder to use as a texture and click on Open Select the Size radio button The vertical and horizontal tile options are unavailable CG 133 Mapping and Compositing Classic Textures Several CG options let you control and modify the appearance of textures Texture Mapping Tint a Texture 134 CG Texture mapping modifies the way a texture is placed on an object The Tile and Size options on the Color amp Texture tab let you control texture mapping The graphics on this page show you the difference between tiled and sized textures applied to the face of both a text object and a graphic object The Tile option uses the texture a ae cara Cane Tiled at its original size and tiles it as necessary to fill the entire layout area The texture is visible only on the element of the object with the texture applied but if you move the object a different part of the texture is visible The texture does not move along with the object You can use the alignment options to place the top left corner of the texture at different positions in relation to the object See Using Classic Textures on page 136 for details The Size option scales the selected texture so that it fits onto the object Because the entire texture must fit onto the object the texture may appear distorted The example to the right shows you the same texture applied to the face of various rectangles The Tint Texture option
47. 48 Backerounnd enisinia 69 Creating template for eee 128 Creatine text flecie 128 Direct Otce ie aA E 53 DOW ecien A J3 mpor Une TEX sescesinsacuenvendecatearice 128 e E a KA cence E 52 193 NSP I EE A EETA I E 53 Word Wrap eaae 53 Roll settings ienten 52 Chane LING ass acid caueiceeas ceed elsseia teas 52 SOES S desai ia 52 PO mea neste vacsee tts 52 Rotate 1001 enana 246 Rta is chet tnieonsnea a 76 Rotating continued Around baseline seesseseeesesssossesesese 79 Characier naen a SS 79 Individual character ceeeeseeee 79 OXI vests A 79 ROUNG C06 sisimictetnucenns 142 Rounded rectanel enc iissesnceesisiny 140 RG aane 202 Tea Del butions perenn 203 Running sequences eeeeeeeeeeeeee 202 TakeOpUOS onena i 202 TimeCode teldu arsane 203 R nning JODSis ays iia 179 S Sale TEATE dns 121 Saturation eain Or IT 58 60 WIO r a N 264 Saturation Add tool ssssssseseeseeeseese 250 Saturation Subtract tool eee 250 SAVIN Fleien 230 Savine JOD less siassessescnessncanseucevnvoens 18 Saving News Edit tables eee 160 DCA O OOla NA 246 SANG ieia a 246 NARESE 262 POS EE 236 Scan Line Selection tool cesses 242 SCANMMES eiaeiercenrvncermatnccnnclaeeselcocs 218 Serap DOO K ia 16 17 Adding LEMS irissen cortantes 16 Delete hems eeana n 16 in Logo COMPOSE sssssessessessessesese 221 a EETA TEETE EA 17 right click menu scedsssieesanesedacvaroees 16 Textes POM ar 131 UU SHS ALENT S peia Ea 16 Usio 1 CX
48. ALT key enter the dialog so that the text line brackets are visible numbers 0163 on the number pad and release the ALT key Click on characters on the character map to enter this text line 6 Repeat the above step using each of these numbers SO e im Mu Use the BACKSPACE button fo erase any mistakes you make 0169 0176 032 0149 032 0174 0153 7 Remember to release the ALT key after you enter each number LO A TM Your second line of text should look exactly the same as your first line of text CG 84 Using the Font Manager The Font Manager is not necessary if you are using only TrueType fonts TrueType fonts contain additional functionality itf fonts don t have The Font Manager lets you add delete and modify fonts in the CG font database Using the CG font database lets you retrieve and display fonts more quickly and makes your font sets safer and more mobile If a font is in the font database CG always has access to it even if the original font file is deleted from Windows You can also copy the Inscribe ift file to any other computer or give other users a copy Add Fonts to the Database Duplicate Font Names Select Multiple Fonts for Batch Processing GG When you add fonts to the database using the Font Manager the original TrueType or Inscriber font is rendered and added to the database file Inscribe ift You can add fonts or parts of fonts to the database one font at a time o
49. Beve chip 2 H 241 L 18 S 94 Trans 32 NY Ns NA JJ cG 105 Changing Recessed Settings The Recessed type style lets you customize every aspect of your text and provides complex depth and shadow details You can apply color transparency or a texture for outline edge face depth and body depth Face Face On Top Checkbox Color and Texture Options Outline Edge 106 CG CG lets you customize the shape color or texture and Distort lt o transparency of your text On Face adjust the values in the Distort X and Distort Y fields to manipulate the shape ofeach Distort po character For details on distorting text shape see Distort Text on page 100 The face can appear on top of all other text elements or it can appear underneath the edge On Face click the Face On Top checkbox to display the face on top th of other elements Clear the Face g On Top checkbox to place the face below the edge Face on Top Checkbox Face on Top Checkbox Not Selected Selected Text elements can each contain up to four colors and Color Chip four transparency values Use the Color Picker Selectors options to set color chips and transparency values d R Color Chips located in the Color section on the Color amp Texture E Preview Color Chip tab Z Alpha 0 You can apply a texture to the face edge or depth elements using the Texture options on the Color amp Texture tab See De
50. Bottom o half of the layout displays a solid color and the other half displays the video feed Bottom Gradient Position Transparency is measured as a Angle O Gradient Angle percentage and only affects the color Gradient Lock background 100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely opaque Any other value is semi transparent The number of transparency levels available depends on your frame buffer Bottom Transparency Value faj Top a Top Gradient Position Fl Bottom 0 When selected the transparency Lock button sets the top and bottom transparency to the same value If you adjust one value the other value is changed to match it You can create a transparency gradient by setting the Top and Bottom Transparency values to different percentages Transparency gradients work exactly the same as color gradients See Working with Classic Color Gradients on page 96 for details The way backgrounds behave for rolls crawls and reveals depends on your frame buffer Some frame buffers scroll backgrounds with text and others place text over a static background You need to experiment with your frame buffer to determine its capabilities Create Color Image and Video Backgrounds l Switch to the Background tab and select Color as your 6 Click on the up arrow beside the bottom transparency value background type by selecting the Color radio button The Top and Bottom transparency values change to 1 Click
51. Brush window provides a preview of the current brush The preview shows certain brush attributes size softness angle and aspect You can change the size angle and aspect in the Brush window on the Brush tab Cursor is Size cursor EN Angle cursor cy Aspect cursor How TO to change size click and drag in the Brush window e to change angle hold down the SHIFT key and drag in the Brush window to change Aspect hold down the CTRL key and drag in the Brush window You can reset a brush to its default value by clicking on the Reset button You can reset all the brushes to their defaults by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the Reset button Experiment with Brush Attributes 2 Select File Import Export mport Image and select an image Select the Alpha Add tool from the Tool palette and ni switch to the Brush tab a Hold down the SHIFT key and click on the Reset button to reset all brushes to their default values Select the third brush in the first row of the Brush list and paint a bit e Enter 64 in the Size field 14 in the Spacing field and 100 in the Softness field and paint a bit The strokes have a much softer look due to the Softness value Click on the Reset button and enter 50 in the Opacity field Now when you paint some of your image still shows through your strokes No oe Double click in the Opacity field to reset the value t
52. Brush Attributes on page 234 for details Memory is a characteristic specific to the alpha tools No matter what alpha tool you use to manipulate the alpha channel the Alpha Memory tool can restore it Some logos are stored in vector based file formats such as eps or Illustrator files Logo Compose cannot use vector based files so you need to convert these files to raster based images such as bmp or jpg Programs like Adobe Illustrator and Photoshop are capable of making these conversions Most of the time you will need to resize your logos to get them to the size you need for output to video You will get better results if you start with a large image 720 NTSC or PAL and scale it down later If you are scanning a logo scan it in at 200 to 400 of the image size to give yourself more detail to work with Scale your logo to the size you need when you finish editing it or when you import it into CG Once you ve cleaned up your logo you can export it from Logo Compose and add it to the Logo Map in CG to use it as a text or graphic object See Adding Logos to Layouts on page 150 for details on using logos in CG You can also import images from Logo Compose to use as backgrounds or textures for text and graphic objects See Using Video and Image Backgrounds on page 68 and Defining Classic Textures on page 130 for details Experiment with Alpha Tools 1 Select File Import Export Import Image and select an 4
53. C cgs41 SpellXEnglishUS User Lex a C 4 egs41 Spell EnglishUK User Lex oo b Close have available to the Spell Checker click on Done to return to the Preferences dialog Change Font Sample Strings Select File Preferences and click on the Font Manager tab Replace the text in the Sample Text String box with Test String and click on OK Select Tools Font Manager and click on a font in the Fonts List The sample text that appears now says Test String Close the Font Manager dialog Select File Preferences and click on the Character Generator tab Now change the first default sample string to g change the second default sample string to Gy and change the third default sample string to AefpkY Click on OK The letter in the un Format Sample on the Formatting palette has changed to g 5 Switch to the Styles tab The sample characters have all changed to Gy 6 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and click on Browse The sample strings for each font have changed to AefpkY You can change these sample strings to any characters that help you choose fonts more effectively including punctuation characters 40 Using the Formatting Palette The Formatting palette located near the upper right corner of your screen gives you a quick way to access text and graphic tools color groups and style groups It also provides you with information about the current text
54. Change Colors Using RGB amp HLS Color Models l Type the words Changing colors and click on the FACE color chip on the Color amp Texture tab Click on the Color Models drop down list and i select the RGB color model from the list Now LEYE change the R value to 247 the G value to 4 i and change the B value to 8 HLS Select the HSL color model from the list The values change but the selected color remains the same Select the RGB color model from the list and click on R and move the Slider up and down Moving the Slider affects whatever value is selected Moving the Color Slider atfects the two unselected values Click on G and move the Slider up and down and click on B and move the Slider up and down 6 Select the HSL color model from the list and repeat steps 11 to 13 with H L and S Color Selector Color Slider RGE lt Color Model nce list o 6 142 lt Value Fields E127 Value Radio Buttons Color Selection Box Color Picker CG l 62 Understanding Backgrounds You can create a virtually unlimited number of background designs by using the video image or color background capabilities Backgrounds are created using the Background tab in CG Background Types Overlay Backgrounds Video Background Basics CG CG backgrounds consist of three types color backgrounds image backgrounds and video ie backgrounds that can be combined in various e ways to create your layout backg
55. Click on the second item in the list 20 Results The News Edit items are listed in alphabetical order starting with the format codes cG 167 Preparing Subtitle Files CG lets you create subtitles by importing text files using one of three file formats You can also use the CG subtitle features to do versioning and use the News Edit special character features to automatically format your subtitles Subtitle File Types Prepare Subtitle Only Files 168 CG You can create three types of subtitle files to use in CG File Type Explanation Subtitle Only e atext file containing subtitles e a blank line separates each subtitle page Timecoded Subtitles a text file containing subtitles and timecode time in and out codes separate each subtitle page EBU Format a file containing subtitles and timecodes using standard EBU N19 formatting conventions You can use News Edit formatting commands with subtitle only and timecoded subtitle files to automatically format and comment your text See Creating News Edit Tables on page 160 for details A Subtitling Tutorial located in your CGS41 Utilities folder contains text formatting code examples See Supported EBU Format Features on page 173 for details on EBU features You can use any text editor or word processing program to create a subtitle only file Save your subtitle file as DOS ASCII or plain text Generally these files have a txt extension To create a
56. Color logos already contain color information in the face and can t have textures applied to the face However you can still use textures on the edge and shadow of these logos Texture maps are saved with any layout you store in the Templates registry When you create a new layout based on a template from the registry you can also access the textures associated with that template The alignment options are used to tile a texture to objects and to determine the position of the top left corner of the texture image You can anchor the texture to the frame buffer the object or a specific point on the frame buffer based on the object position The texture anchor point determines how the texture image is tiled on the screen No matter what anchor you select the texture image always repeats to fill the screen Button EJ Screen H Object Left zl Object Top Bl Object Align Textures l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and draw a rectangle in the upper left corner of the layout approximately 100 scan lines by 140 pixels On the Color amp Texture tab click on the Texture box Now click on a blank slot and then click on Define Find the file Abstrwav jpg on the CG S CD Roam and click the Enable checkbox Select Tile as your texture mapping option and press ENTER five times to create tive copies of the rectangle Set the Baseline and Lett edge of each recta
57. Displays the frame number of the Mark Out Point Button Function Jumps to the first frame in the clip Moves the clip back one frame Stops clip playback Plays the clip starting from the current frame Moves the clip forward one frame Jumps forward to the last frame in the clip Plays only that section of the clip between the Mark In Mark Out Points Sets the Mark In Point at the current frame Sets the Mark Out Point at the current frame ane Displays the frame in the Mark In Mark Out field on the video monitor BEREREREEE 1 Add a video clip to the Event List in Sequencer does not change The blue segment on the Timeline is also 2 Right click on one of the clip s timing fields in the event line shorter and select Edit to launch the Trim Editor Note the number of 4 Jump to the first frame in your clip frames in the Clip Duration and Trim Duration fields of pinata eat z 3 Move the Speed Bar slider slightly to the right to preview your ay the clip fom fhe curent frame ill clip 8 Stop the clip playback 4 Enter 3 in the Mark In field to set frame 3 as the Mark In Point 9 Play the section of the clip set between the Mark In and Mark for your clip Click on the Goto button to display the new Mark Out Points TT In Point on your output monitor 5 Enter 100 in the Mark Out field to set frame 100 as the Mark Out Point for your clip The value in the Trim Duration field 10 Use the Up Down arrow keys beside th
58. EC W W The Frames field and Speed field adjust the speed of your roll by modifying wait times The total length of your roll doesn t change You are simply adjusting how many frames your total roll is divided into which affects the speed of playback You can adjust your roll speed by setting a speed value or by setting a frames value When adjusting the speed value the larger the number the faster the speed of the roll For example a speed value of one creates a very slow roll a speed value of eight creates a very fast roll The drop down list of frames values changes depending on the length of your roll For example if you create a relatively short roll the drop down list contains small values if you create a relatively long roll the drop down list contains larger values Each of the frames values corresponds to a proportionate speed If you want to specify the number of frames your roll needs the speed value adjusts Likewise if you specify the speed of your roll the frames value adjusts If you click on the Take button you can test the speed of your roll Press the PLUS Sub Pixel Processing Roll Direction Rolls and Word Wrap key on the number pad to increase test speed and the MINUS key on the number pad to decrease test speed Smooth or sub pixel processing is not available on all frame buffers If sub pixel processing is available and you click on the Sub Pixel checkbox your rolls will appear smoo
59. EE 265 Gradient cceeeeeceecceeeeee 66 96 148 HOU si aeia aveimeate 95 Mlesal valieses cucieaeuses 95 263 264 Dime fiiria a 97 Linear fll eociseivseucsanaavadeceaeees 97 148 RODOS sass anareseetacalesensereereedton 153 PUM ANCe apone 264 Monochrome 1ogo eseeseeeseeees 153 MUP E soran eee ctaceces 100 Numeric value fields eee 64 Options drop down list 0 101 PLO DICMALIE moninas 264 Radia sc iaseeeccaunishegtedesnevondss 97 148 RAD arate ate irae ane 101 Reali world st sisianaieainaeescsseaccagsens 265 SAUL ATION a A 264 a e E 64 65 94 95 Selection too niii 64 Sod onne a 65 Solid Blend DOX ciaisensis 96 Tinting textures ti sersaaensscrannmieoiontie 133 M ODE A 65 UDC EPA EE E ect 114 Unsal eeen 95 263 264 Color amp Texture tab 61 94 130 137 Additional type styles 77 86 Classic type style sensasie 77 86 Text re 108816 a ioana 132 Color Adjustment Filters ee 254 Color background es eeeeeeeeeeseeeees 64 COMPIE seeseneviessecesendaeen cavrcavecuareony 66 OPLIONS esnan 64 OVELVICW ccceeeseecccccceceseeseeeees 62 63 Patte Deaiseune e cured 63 Color Balance image filters 255 Colore Mpa n r aN 94 Color OLA ieM tose nines iana 96 T E pacers E NE E 66 AS Back rotn diaranan 63 Color croup ea unin L2 APPI DE can aa I2 Assigning to News Edit tables 162 CHANGING oaia an 73 74 COPYING moriren E 4 Formatting Pale
60. EEs 70 72 TOR arai 74 TEE A 78 Formatting palette 34 72 138 139 Clor Erp S eeaeee 4 Right click Menu eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 SOY Le steel eet TTE 4 USIO oain RROAN 40 PE eenaa a 266 Frame DUIS aivarassmteeeaniel 10 Borders cigi oie We leunduorsuosiutessten 50 Channel pple senserint 209 Multiple boards suncvssysccesseaiteances A Multiple Program channels 14 ONSCFEEN area issira ei ein 121 Program Preview channels 15 Program Preview palette 208 SECS UP chavastnciatenns enna 222 Frame Ghab ercsereiasecnusseescin 217 223 Applying filters isis sieiversseavesiens 218 Cropping iMageS eeeeeeeeeeseees 218 GrAD DING sicseseinepau nemesis 218 mage ltet S sso arate 220 Meis esnuaoa eE 218 OVEN EW e ER 218 SN e 223 DECI Ups accelerates a vereneunnaes 222 Freeform Color eeeeeececeeeees 45 73 74 Freeform silean 45 73 74 PReetorny TOON arn 246 Pull Alphas i 101 Full black background 65 97 Full VideO ishinvecescucetosocessvstoncationcacsyeioays 97 G Gana n a A 28 265 Calibrations 266 Computer MONItOT ssssssessesessesesees 267 Correc HNE nienn aa 267 Output Monitor seessssesessesssssrsesesees 267 GaU eeit Sounentantanes 265 General ta Donera a EA 99 Generic channel dialog eee 260 GHOSE oaan u ues snes aa 108 GIANG T E A A E E 267 EO A E E EA ET 114 Glowedge type uc uarsccnn eas 90 Glyph processed fonts ese
61. For three 23 channe Pippi 3 2 1 Channel Ripple board setup select events 3 and 4 in z your Event List Select Playlist Cut Event to aaps delete these events from the Undo Event List The events in the Setup Event Event List are no longer properly iae veri staggered Log Event Select all the events in the Event ee eee Mie eee ones Li St Cut Event Copy Event Select Edit 1 2 Channel tis Ripple for a two board setup or Edit 1 2 3 Channel Ripple for a three board setup The icons representing event output channels are quickly re ordered in a ripple pattern Select Edit 2 1 Channel Ripple or Edit 3 2 1 Channel Ripple to reverse the stagger order Sequencer 209 Understanding Time Code Details The following topic outlines some of the finer details of working with time codes such as clearing to video between events setting time code offset and using quick keys Some troubleshooting tips are also given Clear to Video Quick Keys Time Code Offset litest exe Troubleshooting Tips 210 Sequencer If you do not want to have consecutive titles there are two ways to clear the screen to video insert a 100 alpha event in the Event List or define a cut transition with a set duration and a wait time Cuts occur instantly so the Frames and Wait values are not normally used When you set the Frames value on a Cut transition to any number other than 0 Sequencer treats the command as a special case and
62. From Top 0 Tile Ch From Side 0 The dialog displays four groups of ery channel settings They are Source options Scale Offset and Options The Be eke 0 h C Add to Selection ptions settings only appear wnen Subtract From Selection Ok there is an active selection in the C Intersect with Selection cancel image The Source group settings determine what channels of the source image you use as the selected channel The available channels are Luminance All Channels Grayscale RGB Channels Red Channel Green Channel Blue Channel and Alpha Channel Selecting Luminance All Channels combines the red green blue and alpha channels You can also invert and tile the selected channel The Scale and Offset settings let you scale and offset the selected channel The Scale values are factors and the Offset values are measured in pixels The Options settings let you specify how to use the selected channel with the existing selection or transformation The default setting is to use the selected channel as a new transformation but you can also add the selected channel to the existing transformation subtract the selected channel from the existing transformation or intersect the selected channel with the existing transformation These options allow you to create interesting effects Experiment on Individual Channels 1 Select File gt Import Export Import Image and import 9 Click on OK to close the dialog and selec
63. Imported text files must be in plain text format ASCII ANSI MS DOS text etc News Edit tables are imported into the 0 Import Text slot CG respects end of line markers when you import a News Edit table Generally News Edit tables are used when you want to import formatted text using the News Edit special characters or you want to rearrange the text as you place it in the layout News Edit tables are not automatically added to the registry Once you add a News Edit table to the registry all the information in the table is sorted alphabetically See Understanding News Edit on page 158 for details Export IPS Files Export Images Export Sequence Text Files Import and Export Subtitle Files Export IPS Files exports the layout as IPS code which is readable by Inscriber RTX 2 0 or higher Unless you are using RTX you do not need to export files in this format Export Images lets you export a rendered image of the current layout in a variety of bitmap formats You can select an image type from the drop down list on the Export Images dialog These exported files can then be imported into other graphics packages including Logo Compose or imported into other software including animation or paint software You can also import these image files back into CG S but the layouts are no longer editable Export All Images lets you export rendered images of all layouts in the Play List A sequence text file is a Play List in text fo
64. In Sequencer set the Frames value to zero for the fastest available reveal or set the value to the number of characters or lines you want to display each second You can also set wait time with the Wait field See Reveals on page 49 for details Animations move text and graphics around in 3D space Animations can be created in FX or imported from an external animation application You can loop the event in Sequencer using the Frames field You can also add wait time to the event See Use an Animation as an Event on page 20 for details To loop an animation click the button next to the Frames field on the Event hl Editor tab Each time you click the button the number of frames in the Frames field is increased by the total number of frames in the animation For example if your animation is 60 frames and you click the button four times the value in the Frames field will be 240 60 frames x 4 and your animation will Alter Playback Speed During a Take Pause and Resume Effect Takes and Jobs Stop Takes and Jobs loop four times when you do a take You can also type the total number of frames directly into the Frames field You can change the speed of a roll or a crawl while you are doing a take by pressing the PLUS and MINUS keys on the number pad Pressing the PLUS key speeds up the playback pressing the MINUS key slows the playback down You can pause and resume rolls and crawls in mid take by pressing SPACEBAR on
65. List You can print an entire Play List in CG S but you must be in the CG module to do it All print options are located on the File menu Print options include Page Setup Print Preview and Print Print a Play List Page Setup Print Preview Overview You can print the current Play List from the Preview window only If you are in Sequencer and you want to print the Play List switch to the Preview window and select Print When you select Page Setup from the File menu the Print Preferences Print Preferences x Rows a T Number dialog opens This dialog includes Text options and Image options Text i OA columns 3 options set the information that AT thet accompanies each printed image You ee can include the image Number Name Timecodes Transition Direction Duration Wait or Quick Print option in the print out Checked items appear in the print out f Duration SJ Wait el Quick Print Image options determine how many items are printed per page Set the number of images to print per column and per row For example if you set four rows and three columns 12 images will print per page The print preview called from the File menu shows you how your images will look on a printed page Each image appears in thumbnail format accompanied by the Text options set in the Print Preferences dialog If you are printing multiple pages click on the Next Page button to view the rest of the pages set
66. Memory tool cannot restore alpha when you use the image editing or transform tools because they affect the real alpha channel the same channel the Alpha Memory tool uses as its memory Logo Compose provides eight alpha tools Alpha Add Alpha Subtract Alpha Memory Alpha Fill Alpha Tolerance Fill Alpha Luminance Fill Alpha Linear Gradient and Alpha Radial Gradient The alpha tools have two special Alpha Tools An Example characteristics they manipulate only the alpha channel and they remember what the alpha values were before you manipulated the image alpha For example if you import an image and paint it with the Alpha Add tool it may appear as though you are erasing the image If you paint over the newly created transparent areas with the Alpha Memory brush the alpha values in the image are restored to their original values Remember though if you use the selection tools to cut areas out of an image instead of the Alpha Add tool to add transparency the Alpha Memory brush cannot restore the alpha values This example applies all of the information about the Real Disp alpha channels that you now know The illustration on the right has two columns containing small diagrams The A column labeled Real shows the real alpha channel and the column labeled Disp shows the displayed alpha channel B for the four steps A B C D In step A the image is a circular object such as a 32 bit C image of a chocolate cake At this p
67. Names Repeat Field Filters In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab Video cleanup filters that duplicate the even or odd numbered scan lines in an image replacing the odd or even numbered ones respectively The image will appear to shift either up or down depending on the filter Restoring Alpha See Alpha Memory Tool Retouching In Logo Compose The process of removing unwanted elements from an image For example if you want to use an image of a cloudscape with two airplanes but only want to have one of the airplanes in your final image you can retouch the image to remove the second airplane Reveal In CG and Sequencer A layout or transition that displays text one line or character at a time In Sequencer a reveal is recognized as an effect event See also Layout Type RGB Color Model A color model that describes colors in terms of the amount of red green and blue light in the signal The values of the three components are added together to determine the final color White is defined with red green and blue set to full intensity 255 black is defined with red green and blue set to zero intensity Any color definition with equal amounts of red green and blue is gray Right Tab In CG A tab alignment option where the right most character of a line is aligned with the tab and the rest of the characters flow to the left from the tab stop Roll In CG and Sequencer A transition or layout in which text
68. Render menu as well as from the Size amp Attributes tab The Outlined Only checkbox option on the Size amp Attributes tab is a type of edging Outlined Only makes the face transparent to any objects underneath Text layers still appear on top of graphic objects on the same layer number A number of methods such as the right click menu and shortcut keys are available for selecting and manipulating graphic objects You can only perform cut copy and paste actions on a single object at a time Common shortcut keys are listed below e to select an object click anywhere on the object e to cut or delete selected objects press CTRL X or press DELETE e to copy selected objects to the clipboard press CTRL C e to paste objects from the clipboard press CTRL V e to select multiple objects to be moved hold down CTRL and click on each object To create a copy of a graphic object select the graphic object and press ENTER on the keyboard not the number pad CG duplicates the current object offset slightly down and to the right You can then drag the new object to a new position with the mouse See Changing and Moving Graphic Objects on page 146 for details on positioning graphic objects You can also create another graphic object by clicking on the Insert or Append buttons on the CG toolbar Select and Moving Graphic Objects Between Layers Change Arc and Wedge Directions Draw Lines When you have multiple graphic o
69. S sends any changes you make to an event directly to the channels enabled for live updates The PGM button enables live updates for the current Program Channel The PRV button enables live updates for the Preview Channel Set Online Updates Click on the CG button to switch to CG The following steps require that you have a Preview PPY Channel output monitor 7 Enter some text in the layout The preview display is automatically updated 8 Press the ENTER key on the number pad to do a take on the Program Channel 9 Click on the PRV button to disable automatic Preview Channel updates Program Ea 2 di Click on the CLR button on the Program Preview CLR palette to clear the output monitor Click on the PGM button to turn on automatic PGM online updates for the Program Channel G S performs a take of the selected Play List event Enter some text in the layout The online display is automatically updated Click on the PGM button on the Program Preview palette to ree turn off automatic online updates for the Program Channel Click on the CLR button to clear the frame butter Click on the PGM PRV CLR CLR PRV button to enable automatic Preview Channel updates Overview 15 Using the Scrapbook The Scrapbook is a temporary parking space for layouts frame grabs logos and other images The Scrapbook is useful for transferring images between modules If you drag or add an image to the Scrapbo
70. Scrapbook Program Preview Palette Sequencer Tabs Te size j1 wait f0 F remote 00 00 02 15 a 00 00 02 15 ji 2j 5 Program fea re Trigger Manual gt Ready gt Sy Switch to Sequencer To switch to Sequencer click on the Sequencer icon on the CG S toolbar You can also select a specific module from the Tools menu which is accessible throughout CG S The Sequencer The Sequencer toolbar contains some of ies even Toolbar the common Sequencer actions You can Gis Bide belo ena evens cut copy and paste events in the Event List add new events and expand or nH jen S collapse the Event List view Copy Addevent Collapse Event List above Event List The Event List is the Sequencer workspace window It displays all relevant information for each event and group header You can apply timing transitions and trigger information to each event in the Event List Effect Options WY 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00001 Report Title 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00002 Web Site 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 176 Sequencer Sequencer Tabs Play List Program Preview Palette Both the Event List and the Play List contain the events for the current project in the order that they are output While the Play List only allows you to arrange the output order of the events the Event List manages all event and group att
71. Text Width Only If you click on a line and then use the mouse to change the character size the entire line is affected If you select a portion of the line and use the mouse to change the size only selected text is affected k lt notate Text Leading Leading refers to the amount of space between lines of text In CG leading is the number of scan lines between the lowest A possible descender in one line and the highest possible ascender pe z in the next line The value in the Leading field on the Size amp leading Attributes tab represents the number of scan lines used between A i lines AY CG does not automatically update the display to reflect your leading changes because it requires redrawing the entire screen You can manually update the layout display by clicking on the first line in your layout and selecting Element Apply Leading Your display is redrawn starting from the selected text line GG Kerning Rotation Small Caps The Kerning value determines how much space is used between pairs of characters Kerning is always measured as a percentage of the normal character spacing for the current font Kerning lets you adjust the spacing between letters which is useful for displaying characters with very wide ascenders or descenders Kerning can also be used to achieve special typographic effects To change the kerning for an entire line select the line Normal and change the Kerning value on the Size amp At
72. Textures from the Scrapbook on page 131 and Apply Textures on page 136 for details on using textures with type styles Texture mapping modifies the way a texture is placed on an object or text The Tile and Size options on the Color amp Texture tab let you control texture mapping The graphics to the right show you the difference between tiled and sized textures applied to the text face The Tile option uses the texture at its original size and tiles it as necessary to fill the entire layout area The texture is visible only on the section of the element you applied it to If you move the element a different part of the texture is visible The texture does not move along with the element Tiled You can use the Horizontal and Vertical alignment fields to place the top left corner of the texture at different positions in relation to the object See Using Classic Textures on page 136 for details Tint a Texture The Size option scales the selected texture so that it fits onto the text element Because the entire texture must fit the texture may appear distorted The example to the right shows you the same texture applied to the face element of various rectangles Textures can be tinted with multiple colors and transparency using the Color Picker options the color chips and the Trans field The Tint option blends the colors in the texture image with selected color and transparency values For example if
73. Transition Type Duration Direction Size Dissolve soo oo Louvre Jv J Transition type assigned to the image appears in the Event List Select a new transition from the Event Type drop down list on the Event Editor tab Direction There are up to 31 transition directions to choose from The transition direction only applies to wipe tile louvre and push transitions Direction determines where the new image starts to appear on the screen Wipes can use any transition direction tiles and louvres only use some of the directions Sequencer Size Duration Define a Transition Choose a new transition direction in Sequencer with the options on the Event Editor tab or in Store with the direction buttons on the Transition tab When you look at the direction buttons think of the button as the entire display screen The image appears in the dark area first and spreads to the light area See Selecting a Transition Type and Direction on page 190 for a graphical description of transition directions The transition size value is used by some transitions to determine how much of the image is revealed at one time This is sometimes referred to as the transition granularity If the transition is a louvre for example Size sets the size of the slats If the transition is a tile Size determines how large the image squares are Size ranges from 1 small to 5 large There are two places to change the transition size In Sequencer use the
74. Troubleshooting Supported EBU Format Features When you create subtitle files make sure that they are saved as pure ASCII text If you are not sure how your text editor saves files open the file in Windows Notepad to make sure there are no hidden control characters If odd or unexpected characters appear in CG after you import a text file or CG stops or freezes when importing a file the file probably contains some hidden control characters Re open the file in your text editor and check for unexpected characters Notepad from Windows generally shows you all control characters You can also try saving the title with another text format If your subtitles lag behind during playback clear the Live Update and Live Program checkboxes on the Run tab in Sequencer Clearing these checkboxes disables the Program Preview palette and improves the playback speed When you reduce the amount of updating you do on a computer screen your playback speed improves significantly CG supports the EBU file format for subtitles with non overlapping timecodes CG ignores any other elements of the EBU N19 specification When creating EBU based subtitle files make sure that your editor follows EBU N19 guidelines To create EBU format files use an EBU subtitling editor to create stl files These files can be imported into CG using the File Import Import EBU Subtitle File option Only text and timing options are used Any positioning and formatting options
75. Tubed Checkbox To create a tubed bevel using the Embellished type style apply the Bevel color option to the text edge by selecting Bevel from the Color Options drop down list You can select the Tubed checkbox to create a tube effect where color and transparency are beveled from one color to the other color and back to the first color The graphic below shows you the difference between a beveled edge and a tubed bevel edge Both examples use the same face color but the light tube edge next to the face makes the face in the second example lighter in color See Using Additional Beveled Text on page 104 for more information on beveled text elements Beveled Edge Tubed Beveled Edge Customize Embellished Type Style 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 7 Cycle to Shadow Set the shadow color chip to gray set offset drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is to 14 and soft to 12 The shadow begins where the depth between the brackets in the CG Editor ends 2 Type the word Edges Use the Move tool to center rn 8 Cycle back to Face and select Bevel from the Color Options the line of text and increase the text size ab drop down list The face is beveled using the top two color 3 Select the Embellished type style from the Type Style chips you set previously Change angle located under sheen to section on the Size amp Attributes tab adjust bevel amounts 4 Switch to the Color amp Text
76. Type and Direction on page 190 for details The Default Trigger drop down list allows you to set the default trigger applied to new group headers Select a trigger from the drop down list to set the default You can change the trigger type for any group using the Event Editor tab in Sequencer See Understanding Trigger Types on page 196 for details Online Output Directory Use the Online Output Directory field to enter the folder for all rendered files The rendered files for each job file are saved in a separate subdirectory within the Online Output Directory If the ins filename is Trees the rendered files are saved in Trees OnlineFiles If you leave this field blank the rendered files are stored in a folder below the folder containing the ins file Click on the Browse button to select a system folder See Render Location and Rendered Images on page 204 for details on rendered files Change the Display Colors 1 Select File Preterences to edit the CG S preferences 2 Choose Selected Text on the Sequencer tab to change the display colors for the selected object lines in the Event List 3 Click on the white Text color swatch to select the new text color then click on the dark gray Background color swatch to select the new background color The new colors are displayed in the dialog 4 Select Unselected Text from the list to change the display colors for the unselected object lines in the
77. a separate text file CG uses standard ASCII keyboard mapping so you can use accented characters and special copyright and other symbols in standard ASCII fonts If you use other display fonts you wont see your special characters until you change the font of those characters in CG to match the original creation font Once your text has been entered save it as a txt file If your word processor gives you a choice save the text without line breaks CG can import ANSI ASCII or DOSText formats current cursor location When you import a text file CG discards all text formatting and applies the style or color group of the current line to all imported text Text is inserted at the You can import your text file by selecting File Import Import Text and then selecting the filename that you saved the text file under You can also import text from any Windows program using the clipboard From your text editor or word processing program copy the text to the clipboard Switch to CG S and select Edit Paste to paste your text into the current layout at the cursor Import Roll Text Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the View tab Check the Video Safe Title Area checkbox Edit Hold down CTRL and drag the first line up to the top left of the layout just inside the video safe area Press TAB twice to align the text insertion point with the th
78. amp offset value to 21 and soft to 31 Attributes tab 4 Cycle back to Face Set the Sheen to bright white Set size to 8 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab Set each element a different offset to 4 and angle to 45 solid color 5 Experiment setting sheen highlights to the text edge Cycle to Face Set the Face color chips to red Cycle to Edge Set the edge color chips to blue Set size to 15 cG 103 Using Additional Beveled Text Beveled text gives standard two dimensional characters a three dimensional look Beveling involves s shading text with color and transparency so that it appears three dimensional Beveling with color and transparency is available for all type styles except Classic Bevel Color Option Mix Through to Key Checkbox Adjust Color and Transparency Gradients 104 CG You can apply bevels to face edge and depth elements The Bevel option on the Color Option drop down list displays a gradient of two colors plus transparency When you select Bevel only the top two color chips are active For best results select a unique color and transparency value for each color chip The Mix Through to Key checkbox is located on the Size amp Attributes tab under the type style radio buttons When you select the Mix Through to Key checkbox transparency cuts through to the alpha channel video behind any existing background The element displays the video feed The graphic below shows you how the transparency mixe
79. and Blue light in the signal RGB is an additive model where the values of the three components are added together to determine the final color The RGB color space can Blue 0 0 255 be described by a cube White is defined with Red Green and Blue all set to full intensity 255 black is defined with Red Green and Blue all set to zero Black 0 0 0 7 intensity Any setting Red 255 0 0 gt A with equal values of K Red Green and Blue produces a shade of gray White 255 255 255 lt Green 0 255 0 When you select the R G or B radio button the Color Slider shows you the result of choosing all 256 values of that parameter given the current settings for the other two parameters The other two colors are displayed in the selection block showing you the 256x256 possible colors that can be defined given the current selection on the Color Slider If you select Red the Color Slider shows you the colors for all the values of Red from 0 to 255 given the current values of Green and Blue The selection block shows you the 65 536 possible colors that can be defined by changing Green and Blue given the current Red value If you change the Slider and select a new value for Red the color square changes to show you the new 65 536 colors that can be selected by changing Blue and Green Selected Horizontal Adjust The HLS color definition model defines colors in terms of hue lightness and saturation The HLS c
80. and Channel Ripples 208 Understanding Time Code Details 0 210 Sequencer Tips and Tricks 0 0000 212 Setting Sequencer Preferences 0 0002 214 ay Sarena wieieeie a anes wwe eienlaeacarnas 217 223 Setting Up Frame Grab and Saving Files 222 E seule eeu Vai sake takes 225 269 Using the Transform Tab 0 0 00 0 200 248 Editing an Image iscsi sca wisin odes tratensctes aheacad 250 Using the Clone Tools sib soca vesuraviiaueiwedas 252 Applying Filters o oo pie core cate teen de ac eet 254 Creating Textures 2x05 tacnnatdcatart ee tad ahewets 256 Viewing Your Image 0 0 cece eee 258 Understanding Channels in Logo Compose 260 Understanding Video Images 0 262 Understanding Video Color 0 0000 264 Understanding the Calibration Process 266 Using Short Cut Keys 0 0 0 000 0 eee eee 268 Table of Contents V vi Table of Contents Procedures Overview Procedures The Play List vs the Event List 000 000 0000 13 Set Online Updates sa eces eae nceed deduegientes 15 Transfer Images Between Modules 17 CG Procedures View the CG Workspace 000 0000 008 35 Import and Export Layouts 000000 37 Change Font Sample Strings 0 000 39 Copy Style and Color Groups 00 4 Create a Layout from a Template
81. and Logos on page 236 for details You can retouch images or remove unwanted Gi objects or artifacts such as telephone poles or scratches from your images to make them more presentable on air You can also selectively copy and offset areas using the Clone and Offset tools and you can edit the luminance values of your image You can also apply color correction filters to adjust the image color contrast or levels Logo Compose has eleven image editing tools Clone Clone Fill Offset Smear Blur Luminance Add Luminance Subtract Saturation Add Saturation Subtract Dodge and Burn tools See Editing an Image on page 250 for details The selection tools make it easy to edit parts of images To edit a certain area of an image simply make a selection around the area You can also import and export selections for later use Logo Compose has nine selection tools Wand Luminance Wand Brush Selection Rectangular Selection Elliptical Selection Column Selection Scan Line Selection Lasso and Linear Lasso tools See Understanding Selections on page 240 for details Apply Transformations Create Textures and Patterns Apply Filters and Create Effects You can apply transformations to an entire image or to selected areas of an image Logo Compose has five transformation tools the Move Scale Skew Rotate and Freeform tools See Understanding Channels in Logo Compose on page 260 for details Textures
82. and click on the Feather button to feather the selection slightly Click on Invert to invert the selection Select File Import Export Export Selection Contents name the file in the Save As dialog and save it as a Igo file You can now use the logo in another Logo Compose image or in a CG layout j Logo Compose 243 Modifying Selections with the Select Tab Selections can be powerful tools and you can create modify and use them in numerous ways with the options on the Select tab View Brush Color Select Transform Layers l Filter Select Luminance Wand 0 Expand IE Crow BE 2a gr contract T S similar T S 2 g t Ta Xj fe A a 2 An 2 ety d MAMA een eee 3 yy ip Mla BS 3 Layer Image Border F Select Fully a BL Pz S al j None Visible Invisible invert crop Selection Buttons The selection buttons on the Select tab affect the current selection They are described below Button Description Image as Selection e calls the Channels dialog in order to select a specific image channel All e selects all the pixels in the image None e deselects all selected pixels and ends a transformation Visible e selects all visible pixels in the image all pixels that are not 100 transparent Invisible e selects all invisible pixels in the image all pixels that are not 100 opaque Invert e inverts the current selection Crop crops the image to the curr
83. and patterns can accentuate text and graphics in CG and can also be used as backgrounds You can usethe e image editing tools to create seamless we textures for use in CG See Creating Textures on page 256 for details Logo Compose s image filters let you adjust image color and create a variety of effects You can clean up images grabbed from video colorize black and white photographs or legalize image colors for display to video You can apply filters to an entire image to selected areas of an image to imported files or images transferred into Logo Compose from the Scrapbook See Applying Filters on page 254 for more details Experiment with Logo Compose 1 Click on the Logo Compose button to switch to Logo 6 Select the Alpha Add tool from the Tool palette and Aus paint the image with alpha to add transparency s A cal sala n Compose 7 Switch to the Filter tab then select and apply a filter by 2 Select File Import Export lImport Image and select an double clicking on the filter name in the Filters list image in the Open dialog 8 Select the Rectangular Selection tool from the Tool r 7 3 Switch to the Brush tab select a square brush from the brush palette and make a selection oe list and set Opacity to 50 9 Switch to the Select tab and enter 5 in the Feather field then 4 Select the Dodge tool trom the Tool palette and paint aik click on the Feather button to apply the
84. applies a different shape to the bevel Flat Sharp Concave Rounded Soft CG Bevel Color Apply a Bevel The graphic to the right shows you a cross section representation of each type of bevel The shading of each bevel type is determined by the shape of the bevel For example a flat bevel is a single shade on each face because light hits every point on the face in the same way However a concave bevel has shading differences because light hits every point on the face at a slightly different angle Face Face Face Face Face f f f f f Flat Edge Sharp Edge Concave Edge Round Edge Soft Edge You can select one of three color attributes located in the bottom right corner of the Size amp Attributes tab when you create beveled text These color attributes usually affect the text face rather than the bevel edge Color Type Properties Color Options uses standard CG options for face including transparency and texture Single Color e allows a single face color and no CG options Match Edge e automatically finds an edge color that matches the face color after the face color has been corrected for lighting effects 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 6 Click on the Edge color chip and set the H value to 218 the L drop down list on the CG toolbar and type the word Bevel value to 65 and set the S value to 62 2 Switch to the View tab and change the Baseline to 300 7 Switch to the Size amp At
85. average along a Gaussian or bell shaped curve of the pixels where significant color transitions occur General Purpose Interface Trigger See GPI Trigger Ghost Checkbox In CG An option that draws text elements without color texture and transparency Text elements cast a shadow without being visible Only available with the Embellished type style Glow In CG A text element that creates a highlighting effect centered directly behind the text tube Only available for the Neon type style Increasing the thickness of the Neon value intensifies the radiating glow effect Glow Edge In CG An edging effect where a text character is outlined with pixels of color in a diffuse pattern GPI General Purpose Interface Trigger In Sequencer A simple electro mechanical cueing trigger that uses a contact closure GPI Trigger Type In Sequencer A trigger type setting used with a GPI trigger Grab Handle In Logo Compose and CG Small black squares on the corners and midpoints of the bounding box outline of a selected object Click and drag the grab handles to change the size of an object Gradient In CG and Logo Compose A blend from one color to another or from one level of transparency to another Gradient Angle In CG A setting that determines whether a gradient blend is applied from the top to the bottom of the text or graphic object or at another angle Gradient Blend See Gradient Gradient Position
86. based That is they edit the image as if you were using a paint brush on canvas Select a Tool Tool Palette and Palette Pop Ups General Tools Brush Based Tools 232 Logo Compose You can select a tool by clicking on a Tool palette button or from the right click menu The Attributes tabs contain options for various tools The View tab contains options for the Zoom tool The Brush tab contains brush attributes for the image editing and alpha tools The Select tab contains options for the selection tools The Transform tab contains options for the transformation tools The tool palette is separated into groups of similar tools a Many tool buttons on the palette contain pop up menus that 2 reveal additional tools For example the Alpha Add and 8 A Alpha Subtract tools share one button When you click and hold this button a pop up menu appears with both tools l E The tool that you select from the pop up menu is the one i that appears on the tool button DOG e E i There are two general tools in Logo Compose They are described below Tool Description Zoom e zooms the view in or out To zoom in a click on the image To zoom out hold down the ALT key while clicking Scroll e scrolls or pans a zoomed in view You can TY hold down the SPACEBAR to quickly switch to and use the Scroll tool while using another tool Most of the image editing and alpha tools along with the Brush Selection tool are all
87. black color chips to blue the EDGE color chip to green and the SHDW color chip to blue 10 Cycle to Shadow Enter an offset value of 10 angle value of See Understanding Text Color on page 94 for details on setting color chips 120 and soft value of 10 Set the shadow color chip to black CG 87 88 Understanding Classic Shadow Shadows add depth to flat 2D characters and provide you with an additional way of adding visual interest to your layouts CG provides a number of Classic Type Style shadow options that you can combine with Classic Type Style edges to create complex and interesting characters All shadow options are located on the Size amp Attributes tab Shadow Basics Shadow Type Shadow Size GG Shadows require three values shadow type shadow size and shadow angle Soft shadows require an additional value softness You can set all of the shadow values in the Attributes section of the Size amp Attributes tab You can also change the shadow size by selecting a value from the Attributes Shadow drop down list If you understand ini files you can also change the options on the drop down list by editing the TextShadow line in Inscribe ini CG provides four shadow types drop offset extrude and soft Drop and extrude shadows appear to move back in a third dimension from the character face Offset shadows appear below the text line as if the character was suspended above a solid surfac
88. does not cast a shadow and has no attributes because it does not exist However all remaining text elements cast a shadow Available with all type styles except Classic Inscriber Embellished In CG One of seven available type styles consisting of face edge shadow and depth text elements Text elements can appear invisible while covering layers underneath Emboss In Logo Compose A distortion filter that makes an image appear raised or embossed by adding highlights and shadows based on the edges in the image Color information is suppressed Contrast with Color Emboss Embossed Edging In CG An edging effect where text characters appear to be pushed out from the background in a CG layout Event In Sequencer A layout that has been combined with transition or motion effect information and added to the Play List or Event List See also Transition Event and Effect Event Event Attributes In Sequencer The event number event label event type render location and wait time Event Duration In Sequencer The duration of the transition for transition events the duration of the effect for effect events Event List In Sequencer The workspace window that lists all the events in the current job Event Name See Label Event Number In Sequencer The position of an event in the event sequence The event number is displayed in the Event List and can be displayed in the Play List Expand Collapse Arrow
89. example you can create three lines of cascaded text followed by a fourth line that is tab aligned to the second line and a fifth line tab aligned to the first line The first line of text contains no spaces or format characters because it starts at the first tab stop The second line contains a space plus one underscore character which force the text line to begin at the first tab stop plus one tab jump The third line contains a space plus two underscore characters which B reset cascade text txt Notepad File Edt Search Help tab one _tab two tab one __tab three tab two tab tw tab one tab three tab two tab one tell the force the text line to begin at the first tab stop plus two tab jumps Create Column Text The fourth line contains the same formatting as the second and the fifth line is the same as the first Column text such as sports scores election results and most tabular text displays requires a variation on cascaded text plus the ability to reset text as described above For example You can create a table of text consisting of a title 2 primary columns for Names and 2 secondary columns for Scores The firstlineof pe text contains no File Edt Search Help spaces or format TEIE characters Nane_ _Name Title because it starts at anes Nae the first tab stop __Score___Score Name Name Score Name Score Score Name Score The second and fourth line each
90. feather over the image fo lighten it Hold down ALT as you 10 Select Edit Cut to remove the selected area paint with the Dodge tool to switch to the Burn tool The image becomes darker wherever you paint 11 Select the Alpha Memory tool from the Tool palette Aue 5 Select the Smear tool from the Tool palette and paint fa and paint to restore image opacity a bit Use fast and slow strokes The image smears more when you use slower strokes Logo Compose 229 Working with Files The main thing to remember about working with files in Logo Compose is that Logo Compose files are not saved with the ins file You should also remember to save your Logo Compose files often Logo Compose File The Logo Compose file format lgo is more than just another bitmap file format Format Logo Compose files contain opacity settings and alpha values If you save your image in any other format you may lose the alpha channel Create a New Logo You can create a new Logo Compose file by selecting Edit Create New Image You Compose File can specify the image size in pixels and the background color and opacity When you create a new image Logo Compose creates a blank canvas showing 100 alpha Because there are no color tools you must either use the Alpha Subtract tool to add opacity or use the Edit menu to copy another image onto your canvas Open or Import When you want to work with an existing image use the Import Export options on a File
91. file you just generated 13 Click on the OK button in the Sequencer tab to make the change to CG S s preferences 7 Switch back to C6 S Click on the Online Toggle button to switch to offline mode 8 Select File Preferences to edit the CG S preferences Sequencer 213 214 Setting Sequencer Preferences The Sequencer tab of the Preferences dialog lets you customize Sequencer s display and features You can set or reset the display colors for the Event List and the Play List You can also set defaults for the insertion of groups non keyed cuts group trigger types and the online files folder Change Display Colors Group Headers Sequencer Inscnber Preferences General Sequencer Cache character Generator Selected Text Text Unselected Text o _ E E selected Postage Border i Unselected Postage Border E i _ Group 1 Background Color l _ E Group 2 Background Color Group 3 Background Color x E El E Group 4 Background Color Background ym Group 5 Background Color Group Background Color E Ej _ R EE in o E Reset m z Sample Text A_I Reset al Default to Group Headers On Line Output Directory Default to Mon Keyed Cuts Default Trigger Timed Browse In the Preferences dialog you can set the text and background display colors for objects in the Event List and Play List You can use different colors for selected and unselected objects The Selected Tex
92. group only the color not the size or appearance of the text changes CG 13 Formatting Text and Graphics Text and graphic objects can be modified with style and color groups or with local formatting and Freeform Style and Color Both local formatting and Freeform Style and Color formatting provide you with precise control over all of your objects Style and color groups can also be modified quickly based on changes you make to individual characters and objects Format Right Click Menu Modify Lines or Characters Work with Advanced Formatting Options 74 G The Formatting palette right click menu can be accessed by placing the mouse pointer over a style or color group on the Formatting palette and clicking 5 the right mouse button The options on the right Update line to style 12 click menu only apply to the style or color group Update all style 12 lines P your mouse pointer was placed over Sens e EA Freeform Style The right click menu lets you change and update style and color groups using the Format Sample on the Formatting palette You can modify selected characters selected lines or all lines formatted with a style or color group Freeform Style and Freeform Color let you modify each text or graphic object separately You can turn Freeform Style or Freeform Color on or off by right clicking on a style or color chip and selecting it from the menu You must turn it on or off separately for each style
93. groups when you need multiple trigger types If you want a set of events to be automatically triggered as an opening sequence then want manual control over a series of layouts for live presentation you need two groups with two different trigger types See Managing and Editing the Event List on page 182 for details on adding groups The following table describes the five trigger types available in Sequencer Trigger Type Description Manual Waits for an operator to press SPACEBAR to trigger the next event Wait durations and in and out points are ignored Timed Starts the clock at 00 00 00 every time you run a sequence and uses the out point to trigger the next event GPI Trigger Waits for an external GPI button press to display the next event Wait durations and in and out points are ignored Time Code Waits for the next in or out point to be reached using an external time code source PC Clock Waits for the next in or out point to be reached on the PC system clock This runs in 24 hour format GPI Trigger Manual and GPI trigger types ignore the set Wait value because you control when the next event Video Output runs These trigger types are considered manual since they both require some external input a message from the keyboard PA or GPI trigger before doing a 0000 O fe oz take See Configuring GPI and ee PC Clock Trigger Types on Gy ta Other Computer page 198 for details Manua
94. high by 16 pixels wide The screen grid is intended as a reference only You cannot change the grid size but there is a snap to functionality associated with the screen grid See Use the Grid on page 146 for details on aligning objects to the screen grid View and Modify Markers 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 5 Now click on the Screen Vert Center checkbox to display a drop down list on the CG toolbar vertical line marking the vertical center of the screen and click 2 Switch to the View tab and click on the Video Safe Title Area on the Screen Horz Center checkbox to display a horizontal line checkbox to view the Video Safe Title Area Click on Edit beside marking the horizontal center of the screen the Video Safe Title Area checkbox to adjust the Video Safe 6 Click on the 0 100 Title Area Text Baseline l T checkbox to me 3 Adjust the edges of the Video Safe Title Area by clicking on the ene edge you want to adjust and dragging the Slider to a new ee n ct position The Slider represents the width or height of the screen ach area Click on OK when you finish lat a 4 lick on the Video Sate Title Area checkbox to hide the Video adjust i Safe Title Area markers baseline value 100 CG 121 Using Tabs and Text Entry Features Text entry features let you enter and modify text quickly in CG Tab stops let you align text in a variety of ways and word wrap automatically shifts words onto
95. includes two instances of tabbed text The first column contains a space plus one underscore character which force the text line to begin at the first tab stop plus one tab jump The second column contains no space and three underscore characters which force the text to begin three tab jumps over thus creating your column effect The third and fifth line also include two instances of tabbed text The first column contains a space plus two underscore characters which force the textline to begin at the first tab stop plus two tab jumps Like the second and fourth line the second column contains no space and three underscore characters Create and Format Tabular Text 1 Enter these lines in a text editor and save them as a text file called election txt Note that represents a space 20 Election 20 Results 12Samantha Tunstalle 14234 15Region 15 12Simon Fraser 9 141979 15Region 15 2 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry and switch to the View Tab 3 Change the layer value to 2 and click on the current text line Now on the View tab adjust the baseline to 60 Switch to the News Edit tab Select File Import Import News Edit Table and import the tile you created in Step 1 Click on the 0 Imported News Edit Table entry in the Title Templates dialog Click on Load and Close Click on Append All on the News Edit tab Your layout should look like this CG 165 Usin
96. moves vertically up or down the screen In Sequencer a roll is recognized as an effect event See also Layout Type Round Corner Rectangle In CG A rectangle that has rounded corners Round Edging In CG An edging option for graphic objects Round edging gives objects rounded beveled edges Rounded Rectangle In CG A rectangle that has all of its edges rounded If the width equals the height it becomes a circle If it is stretched horizontally the horizontal sides remain flat Run Job Button In Sequencer A button on the Run tab that takes all the events in your event list in sequence S Safe Title Area In CG The area of the video screen where text is legible on a typical television screen This generally includes the center 80 of the total screen area Saturation The amount of pure color 100 saturation is pure color with no black or white mixed in 0 saturation is a shade of gray with no hint of color See also HLS Color Model and HSV Color Model In Logo Compose A tool on the Tool palette that increases or decreases the size of an object or selection without constraining its proportions Scan Line A single horizontal sweep across the face of a video display by the electron beam that creates the picture NTSC uses 525 scan lines PAL uses 625 Scanned Image A printed image that has been converted by a scanning device into a graphics file for the purposes of electronic transmission or mod
97. multiple users To select multiple fonts from the list use SHIFT or CTRL when you choose a font name Use the SHIFT key to select part of the list or the entire list Use the CTRL key to select specific fonts within the list To clear the list of fonts you have selected click on Clear or on any font name without holding down SHIFT or CTRL Modify Fonts You can use several options to modify the mapping and style of TrueType fonts when you add them to the font database These options are located at the bottom of the Font Manager dialog Unlike Windows which allows you to add families of fonts plain bold and italic versions at once you need to add different versions of fonts to the font database individually For example if you want a plain version and a bold version of a font you have to add each one separately selecting Bold to add the Bold version or making no selection to add the plain version When you add a group of fonts the options you select apply to all of the fonts in the group Modifier Mapping Range Effect e affects the character keyboard assignment e determines which portion of a font is added to the database e the default is to add all of the characters in the set 0 to 255 to the database but some files such as a logo file only have a few characters in the set e most fonts have printable characters in character positions 32 to 255 Style Form e determines which direction text is processed in as
98. name 177 202 212 Rendered images exporting 4 37 Rendered symbols s ssssssssesssssssessese 205 Re O1Ger ins astuntiaratetisbinteituaeetincsesee 12 Resetting Brushes 235 RESIZING sasaisretattintney ae eain 262 Graphic OD CC Sviscassnwenencasayuemerniens 146 Graphics in Logo Compose 262 Images in Logo Compose 262 LOCOS en 236 Resizing continued Logos 110 C Geninen eE 151 ES a anes EE T 78 Resolution s scearsareseivenicearnamanees 28 Resource Filesiena strann 27 STENI A ees 26 Resuming Takess ssicscievneteassussacsaeresovs 195 RETOUCHING ogrnuti 251 EXAMPle leaa 251 UMA SES da 228 250 REV Gal t 49 Layer cOnstraint wisssassewnanennn 49 QV ELIA cctusechaketeiea avenues 5l Perehataciehocieire mai 5l PEE IC EEE E 5l Pedase a sos tunel on tence nets 51 Reveal background sssesseseesessssssseee 69 Reveal avout viscosa acm aren 49 SEU ESE E nausea 50 51 Reveal setin S nni reana 50 CAMPING EEEE A E TEE 51l Rewrappine tex imone ei 123 RGB color Mmodel viaaseii eeu 60 RGB Vie W tarot iA 258 RGBA channels c ccccceee eee 238 260 Right Tab NEO 122 Right click Menwwecscaseseareswenstses 35 74 for Color groups sssessessessssssssesessese 74 for Scrapbook sidcee cess aiceese cases 131 for Style STOMP Siasissuasesnincruntomite 74 MI D O EREE E E S 35 in Logo COMPOSE ssesssssesssssssssseeses Zod RSG tie Perennis 38 Rolasan ie aN 48 194 Appear ane rae ath vaca
99. on group 02 and select Edit Delete Group Header 7 Click on event 00003 and select Paste Event from 4 lick on the Collapse Expand arrows for the second aye the Sequencer toolbar The cut event now appears and third groups to collapse the group views Only in group 00 the group headers appear in the Event List and only the first 8 Click on the Collapse Sequencer Display button in the event in each group appears in the Play List Sequencer toolbar to view only the group headers in the Event List Sequencer 183 184 Outputting Events to Video Sequencer provides various options for you to output an Event List You can toggle between online and offline modes you can run an entire sequence or take a single event you can send events directly to video or preview them on a Preview Channel Online vs Offline Sequencer operates in two distinct modes online and offline To switch Ess Mode between online and offline mode click on the Online Toggle button located on the CG S toolbar You can switch modes from any module The following table describes the differences and similarities between online and offline mode Online Mode Offline Mode e allows you to edit preview and e allows you to edit preview and take events take events all events are pre rendered for e events must be rendered each faster takes time you do a take slowing down take times events are re rendered each time events are not rendered until you a change i
100. on setting transparency values The Color Options drop down list available for many of the text color Ramp e elements contains four color display options to create complex Color Ramp text Color Ramp Bevel Full Alpha and Eliminate See Color Bevel Options on page 101 for details on each item and Using iain Additional Beveled Text on page 104 for details on creating bevels On Depth and Shadow you can set depth and shadow options You can also set sheen highlight effects to the face edge and depth elements See Setting Depth Shadow and Sheen on page 102 for details Using the Embellished type style you can draw the face edge or depth elements that cast a shadow but do not contain any color transparency or texture values Click the Ghost checkbox to draw an invisible element with a visible shadow Clear the Ghost checkbox to draw the element with color texture and transparency On Shadow you must set shadow options offset angle and soft to use the Ghost effect Any sheen highlight applied to the element is invisible when you use the Ghost effect The Ghost option creates the same effect as selecting Full Alpha from the Color Options drop down list See Using Additional Type Style Settings on page 100 for details The graphic below shows you the ghost effect applied to each of face edge and depth elements AAA Ghost Applied Ghost Applied Ghost Applied to Face to Edge to Depth
101. only by free hard drive space and installed RAM Dealing with pixel shape different aspect ratios and video legal colors are part of the challenge of creating graphics for video Logo Compose has tools and features that are designed specifically for creating images for video In the world of computers and print pixels are square Pixel shape may seem obvious but it is important because in the world of video and television pixels are usually not square Video pixels are actually slightly rectangular so when you output images to video your circles become ellipses and your squares become rectangles Pixel aspect ratio is defined as the relationship between the width and height of a pixel Computer monitor pixel aspect ratio is 1 1 Television and video output ratios are not 1 1 The output picture aspect ratio depends on the standard NTSC PAL or HDTV you are creating the image for Some older frame buffers let you define the output resolution separately The picture aspect ratio for NTSC and PAL is 4 3 width height For HDTV the picture aspect ratio is 16 9 Logo Compose provides a group of video legal filters on the Filter tab These filters allow you to identify illegal colors and provide several ways of converting them to video safe colors for NTSC or PAL See Applying Filters on page 254 or the procedure Mark and Legalize Illegal Colors on page 265 for details Select File mport Export lmport Image and import th
102. options on the Select tab You can make complex selections using the Add Subtract and Intersect Selection options You can invert a selection add or remove edge pixels change the degree to which pixels are selected or select only the pixels around the edge of the selection See Modifying Selections with the Select Tab on page 244 for details on making complex selections and modifying your selections Selection vs Each selection has two parts the selection outline and the selection contents The Contents selection tools and the options on the Select tab affect the selection outline The brush based tools transformation tools and filters modify the contents Selection Marquee The selection area is outlined by a flashing dotted line called the selection marquee or marching ants The selection marquee only shows you which pixels are selected as long as a pixel is at least 1 selected it appears within the selection marquee To see which pixels are more selected than others look at the selection channel thumbnail You can hide the marquee by selecting the Hide Selection checkbox on the Select tab The marquee disappears but the pixels remain selected Hide Selection Selection Channel The Selection Channel thumbnail on the Select tab shows the degree to which individual pixels are selected Black represents areas that are 0 selected white presents areas that are 100 selected and shades of gray show areas that are onl
103. options on the Event Editor tab In Store use the options on the Transition tab All tile and louvre directions need a size value Two wipe directions also need a size value horizontal gate and vertical gate When assigning a size value you should note that some transition types such as louvres may appear jumpy with small size values 1 or 2 The transition duration determines how long your transition takes to display the image Set duration from the Frames field on the Event Editor tab If you don t set a duration the field will read 0 but your transitions will actually play out in 30 frames 1 second in NTSC You can also click on the Frames button to set the transition speed rather than number of frames See Understanding Event Duration on page 192 for details 1 Create an Event List containing three transition events 5 Select the horizontal gate transition direction button 2 Select all three events below the Event Type drop down list and enter 5 in the Size field on the Event 3 Click on the Online Toggle button from the v 6 Set the transition size Select the first event a BE toolbar to set C6 S to online mode Editor tab Select the second event and enter 3 in the Size field 4 Select all three events and click on the Transition Type drop Select the third event and enter 1 in the Size field down list on the Event editor tab and select Wipe Event Editor 7 Set the transition duration Select all
104. or bevel on all four edges Horizontal Panel sets the size of the edge or bevel for top and bottom edges Shape Edging Value Vertical Panel e sets the size of the edge or bevel for left and right edges Logo e sets the size of the edge or bevel on all four edges Wedge e sets the size of the edge or outline on the hypotenuse Polygon e sets the size of the edge around the polygon e the Outlined Only option is not available Spline Curve e sets the size of the edge around the spline e the Outlined Only option is not available Clipped Corner e sets the size of the edge or outline on all four edges Rectangle e determines how much of the corner is clipped off Arc e sets the size of the edge or outline around the arc side Oval e sets the size of the edge or outline around the oval Round Rectangle sets the size of the edge or outline on all four edges Round Corner Rectangle Modity Graphic Object Shadows and Edges e sets the size of the edge or outline on all four edges e determines the degree of the corner curve 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 5 Now change the shadow size to 0 the edge type to Tube and drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the graphic change the edge size to 20 layer 6 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab and click on the Edge color 2 Switch to the Styles tab and click on Style 17 chip 3 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and change the shadow size 7 Now
105. or color chip If Freeform Style or Freeform Color is on any change that you make is treated as local formatting If Freeform Style is not checked any changes that you make automatically affect all of the other lines formatted with the same style or color group If Freeform Style is checked any changes that you make only affect the current line and are not applied to any other lines formatted with the same color or style group Local formatting can be done with Freeform Style on or off Use the mouse pointer to select some of the text in the line The selected text is surrounded by a semi transparent white rectangle Any changes you make affect only the selected text You can use modified text lines to update style and color groups and you can also use style and color groups to get rid of any modifications You can access these advanced formatting options with the right click menu or with the mouse The following table explains how to use the right click menu for advanced formatting Menu ltem Result Update line to e changes the style or color group formatting to match the format style sample and applies the new formatting to all lines tagged with the style or color group Update all style re applies the formatting of the current style or color group to lines all lines tagged with the style or color group and discards any local or Freeform Style or Freeform Color formatting The following table explains how to use the mouse f
106. or graphic object The Formatting palette changes slightly depending on whether you are on a text or graphic layer See the graphic on the next page for details on these changes Text and Graphic Tools Format Sample GG The text and graphic tools let you select what kind of text or graphic object you want to create Most of the common text and graphic tools are represented on the Formatting palette Move Wedge Text Cursor Polygon A e Text Path Spline pir Text Box Clipped Corner A Rectangle Rectangle Arc Horizontal Panel Oval 7 Ea Vertical Panel Round Rectangle E o Logo Round Corner i Rectangle The format sample shows you some of the attributes of the current object The number in the lower right corner of the sample area tells you mega what style or color group the current object belongs to If the cost Freeform option is on for the group the word FREE appears after e 14 FREE the number at the bottom of the sample The format sample also tells you the height and font of text objects and the size of graphic object Style and Color Groups You can use the style and color groups on the Formatting palette to apply styles and colors to text and graphic objects Style and color groups can also be modified based on the selected text or graphic objects The Formatting palette changes slightly depending on whether you are on a text layer or a graphic layer To apply a style or color group to an object click on
107. over top of the image There are up to 17 directions available Fades from one image to the next This effect is subject to the hardware limits of your frame buffer Pushes a new image onscreen and the current image offscreen in the specified direction Four directions are available up down left and right Not all frame buffers support all directions Transition Directions CG S supports many different transition directions The supported directions are listed below The directions available for transitions other than cuts and dissolves are dependent on the frame buffer you are using The black portion of the following icons show where the transitions begin and the text describes the resulting direction up left Fi up right ml Ea d Sequencer down left up diagonal up left down right down a diagonal up right left random ES AQ E o e a a Le Change Transition Directions 1 Create a Play List with four events 2 Click on the Sequencer button to switch to Sequencer 3 Select all the events in the Event List use the SHIFT key 4 Enter 60 in the Frames field on the ee jn E Event Editor tab Press the TAB key to set the transition duration 5 Enter 30 in the Wait field on the Event Editor tab Press TAB or click away from the field to set the wait duration 6 Click on the first event in the Event List and select Tile from the Transition Type drop down list on the Event Editor tab C
108. removed and you may not be able to retrieve the effect All events have a number name type wait time and render location These attributes control how the event is output to video e The event number describes the position of the event within the group e The event name is automatically filled in but you can enter a descriptive name on the Event Editor tab The event type describes the transition or effect associated with the event e The wait time controls how long Sequencer waits before going to the next event e The render location determines where the final events are rendered when you go online on local disk local RAM or remote Event Number Event Type Transition Duration Render Location Event Out Point g of 00 00 00 00 aatan 0 00 00 00 10 01002 Wwashington CG Effect 00 00 00 10 00 00 04 10 00 00 04 00 Event Name Transition Direction Size Wait Time Event In Point Event Duration What are Groups Groups are used to separate events into categories For example you may want to group a set of events by reporter name sporting event or time slot Groups are helpful for chunking large event categories into manageable units You can create a group by inserting a group header in the Event List Edit Insert Group Header Every event that falls between the new group header and the next header belongs to the new group Group headers contain the trigger information that applies to an entire group of events If y
109. removing odd or even numbered scan lines Video Frame An interlaced image consisting of two separate fields odd and even numbered scan lines taken from a video signal See also Field and Interlaced Fields Video Legalize Filter In CG and Frame Grab A legalize filter that performs a simple NTSC or PAL legalize depending on the settings in the General tab of the Preferences dialog See also Legalize Filters Video Signal The video feed over which you place your layouts and images Video Standards Standards that specify the protocol for television broadcast transmission and reception Common standards include NTSC PAL and HDTV Video Transparent Pattern The pattern CG S uses to represent video transparency set on the General Preferences tab This pattern is not included in your final rendered images VMAXX 10 A brand of frame buffer VMAXX 20 A brand of frame buffer VRAM Video RAM on a frame buffer or video card W Z Wait Time In Sequencer The time to wait after a transition is complete and before the next event begins Wedge In CG A triangular shaped graphic object White Point A setting for the output monitor set during calibration Word Wrap In CG A setting where words that do not fit inside the video safe title area on the current line are automatically moved to the next line Zoom In Out In Logo Compose A tool that magnifies an image in the Logo Compose workspa
110. strip and in the Event List in Sequencer Job List See Play List K Kerning In CG The spacing between two adjacent text characters Contrast with Leading Key The alpha signal as seen on the video output monitor See also Alpha Label In Sequencer The name given to a transition event The label or event name is displayed in the Event List and can be displayed in the Play List Label Button In Sequencer A button on the Run tab that enables you to use the keyboard to preview or take an event or group by its name Last Out Point In Sequencer The specified ending frame for a group Layer In CG A level of the CG workspace that allows you overlap text and graphic objects There are 10 main layers with each main layer divided into separate text and graphic planes Text planes always appear on top of their respective graphic planes See also Text Plane and Graphics Plane Layout In CG The overall appearance of an image created in CG consisting of three main elements background text and graphic objects Layout Type In CG A motion setting that determines how your work displays to video CG S supports four types of layouts stills crawls rolls and reveals Stills display static text and graphics Crawls move text and graphics horizontally across the screen Rolls move text and graphics vertically on the screen Reveals display text and graphics in sequential order See also Effect Event
111. template when you add it to the Templates registry Select eens Layouts and then ia OK ee p field represents the position of the template in the registry list If you don t change the number your new template overwrites any template already in that position CG S comes with a number of standard templates which generally occupy positions above 1000 Always name your templates distinctively so that you can tell what they are when you are looking at the names in the Templates registry Template Examples Below are some examples of the kinds of templates you can create Five of the templates are full screen layouts and three of them are lower third layouts In a lower third layout the video feed is visible behind the layout elements which appear in the bottom third of the screen Barre Rings ondon oronio E Dow Jones 56 04 Brule Dil 1 38 S2225 Create a Template Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the graphic layer Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and select Rectangle from the Graphic Type drop down list Switch to the Styles tab and select Style 20 and change the Vertical value to 45 and the Horizontal value to 450 Switch to the View tab change the Baseline to 385 and the Lett Edge to 75 Now click on the rectangle and press ENTER to create a copy of it m ST LOUIS com TORONTO DETROIT
112. templates that appear in the Template drop down list on the CG toolbar By default CG S uses the Inscribe reg in its startup folder as the registry database In a network situation you may want to have all the systems sharing a central registry database Edit Inscribe ini and add a new section to the Preferences section Inscribe reg z shared Inscribe reg Replace z shared Inscribe reg with the full path name for the registry database you want to use The only restriction with a shared registry is that the file is read only on startup and when you open the Registry Manager dialog If another user changes the template registry you cannot see the changes until you restart CG S or go to the Registry Manager Sharing Resource Files Inscriber files can be opened from any shared drive on the system However these files save the absolute path names for textures logos and backgrounds If you insert a logo from d logos and then open it on another system that does not have d logos CG S cannot locate the file When CG S cannot find an image it replaces the image with gray and black bars There are two ways to work around the problem e Designate a central network drive to hold all the resources you use Create folders for logos textures and backgrounds and make sure all the users map those folders to the same drive letter e Copy the resources to CGS41 Samples CG S always checks this folder as a backup location when it cann
113. that blurs the text entry or exit point There are 0 to 100 lines of softness available The softness begins at the line set for the Bottom or Top border When you adjust the softness guides appear in the CG Window to indicate the level of softness applied to the current layout Transparency In CG and Logo Compose The amount of background information that you can see through a graphic object text or image An object with 0 transparency is opaque an object with 100 transparency is fully transparent you can see right through it Contrast with Opacity Trigger Type In Sequencer A particular method of telling Sequencer to take the current event There are five trigger type settings in CG S Manual Timed GPI Time Code and PC Clock Trim Editor In Sequencer A dialog that allows you to crop your video clips by setting Mark In and Mark Out Points at specific frames CG S only runs the portion of the clip that falls between these Trim points Portions of the clip outside the trim points are retained by CG S but are not played Trim Points See Mark In and Mark Out Points Glossary 295 TrueType Fonts In CG Fonts packaged with Windows and available in all Windows applications TrueType fonts offer better anti aliasing than Inscriber fonts TrueType fonts can be converted to Inscriber fonts and then added to the Inscriber font database Inscribe ift but they lose their improved anti aliasing qualities in the pro
114. the Talk Show Guests group the Final Credits group will be triggered automatically Sequencer 197 Configuring GPI and PC Clock Trigger Types You can use GPI triggers in numerous situations like on the evening news when weather reporters need to trigger their own events live The GPI trigger setup allows you to remotely trigger event takes PC Clock triggers are used in situations where someone sets up the Event List in advance and lets it run automatically such as on an automated information channel where events are sent to video at regular intervals and can be created days in advance In this situation there is little need for an operator to monitor the output How GPI Triggers Work Wiring a GPI Trigger INI File Changes for GPI Triggers 198 Sequencer You can trigger movement through an Event List with a GPI trigger connected to a serial port on your system The GPI takes the voltage from a serial port pin to close a switch and complete the circuit triggering the event To successfully use a GPI trigger with CG S you need to use a properly wired trigger device and you need to make changes to Inscribe ini The diagram below shows the pin closures for 25 pin and 9 pin serial port connectors Reverse movement is not supported Forward Forward otf 4 5 7 8 OOODWDNOOO O IOOCO In addition to hooking up a properly wired trigger you must also configure CG S to look for the GPI trigger CG S lo
115. the Logo Map first The Logo Map is found on the Logos tab and keeps track of all the logos in a layout You can define up to 36 logos for each layout View Size amp Attributes l Color amp Texture Styles z Logos Background Mews Edit Effect Settings Tine a lt Aa et nuk lt lt Since logo definitions are saved with the layout in the Registry layouts based on the same template have the same logos available to them See Understanding Templates on page 154 for details on using logos with templates To add a new logo to the Logo Map right click on a blank slot on the Logo Map Use the Open dialog options to locate and select the graphic file you want to use as a logo You can use the SHIFT and CTRL keys to select more than one image file When you click on Open the image or images you selected are added to the Logo Map starting at the slot you selected Any logos previously in the slots are overwritten by your selections If you add a logo to the Logo Map and then move the logo file CG first looks on the path previously used and then looks in the Samples folder directly below the CG S program files If the graphic file can t be found in either of these places CG leaves the slot on the Logo Map blank but saves the name of the graphic file assigned to the slot You can view the name by placing the mouse pointer over the slot on the Logo Map and waiting a second or two until the name and path are displayed in
116. the Play List seeding paattorawened 12 13 Using the Program Preview Palette 14 15 Using the Scrapbook 0005 16 17 Files Clips and Animations 18 21 Overview Print the Play Lisbon saioen tinia eoi 22 23 COS OUUU eeraa EA 24 25 Working on a Network 0 26 27 Setting Preferences i ecce i dia a 28 31 Configuring Inscribe ini 0 32 10 Inscriber CG S An Overview Inscriber CG S is an integrated environment where you can create broadcast quality titles and sequence events in online and post production suites CG S also offers video capture and flying text Titles created in CG S can be keyed over video in a live environment using a third party video frame buffer CG S is a 32 bit application that runs under Windows NT Not all frame buffers are supported in both operating systems How CG S Works Overview CG S is divided into five main modules that are all interconnected When you first open CG S the character generator module CG is active and it is your starting point in CG S The event sequencer module Sequencer is your ending point in CG S when you send layouts to video The following diagram explains how the modules relate to each other amp Logo Compose rreren ITT You can use CG S in a variety of ways Here are some of the most common workflow scenarios e create one off titles in CG and output them directly e creat
117. the Zoom tool on the Tool palette oom 100 Y To zoom in with the Zoom tool click on the image To zoom out hold down the ALT key and click on the image All zoom levels are corrected 2y for the current video aspect ratio While zoomed in on an image you can move around the image using the Scroll tool To pan select the Scroll tool or hold down the SPACEBAR then i7 click and drag The Scroll tool is useful when you are making selections while zoomed in on your image You can also use the scroll bars on the right and bottom edges of the Logo Compose workspace The View radio buttons change the views between the RGB channels and the alpha channel With RGB selected the image is seen as full color With Alpha selected only the alpha channel is seen Image transparency is represented by a grayscale image with full transparency appearing as black full opacity appearing as white and various shades of gray representing the gradations from transparent to opaque See Understanding Channels in Logo Compose on page 260 for details on channels The View checkboxes let you select a variety of options including grid view cursor view and video safe title area To enable an option select the checkbox To disable an option click in the checkbox to deselect it Read on for descriptions of the various checkbox options The grid provides a rudimentary way of manually aligning images selections or brush strokes To view the grid select
118. the back of the shadow Contrast with Extruded Shadow Edge In CG The outline of a text character or graphic object Edge amp Sheen In CG A text element that creates one sheen highlight for each of four edges Only available with the Sheen type style Edge Over Face In CG One of seven available type styles consisting of face edge shadow and depth text elements Pixels are added inside and outside the face edge 278 Glossary Recessed In CG One of seven available type styles consisting of face edge outline edge face depth body depth and shadow text elements You can set complex layered edging options Edging In CG An effect where text characters or graphic objects are outlined with pixels of color ina sharply defined pattern Text and graphic objects have different edging options Effect Event In Sequencer Image files created in CG that include motion effects Sequencer recognizes four types of effect events rolls crawls reveals and animations Applying a transition such as a wipe dissolve or louvre to an effect event can permanently remove the motion effects from your event See also Layout Type Element In CG A text character line of text or graphic object Elliptical Brush In Logo Compose A standard brush with a round or oval shape used to paint or edit an image Eliminate In CG A color option that does not draw the text element at all The selected text element
119. the bottom color appears at the bottom of the object Changing the number beside the Radial Linear Fill cycle button changes the number of times the gradient is repeated in an object The maximum number of gradient repeats is 63 See the procedure below for details Use Gradient Options 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 4 Click on the Solid Blend cycle box until BOTTOM drop down list on the CG toolbar and type the following lines appears and change the bottom color to yellow Line one 5 Click on the Radial Linear fill button to select Line two Radial fill and enter 3 in the field beside the Circle Linear fill 2 Select the Classic type style option on the Size amp Attributes tab button to repeat the fill three times Change the Shadow size to 0 and the Edge size to 1 6 Click and drag on the second line to select the text Line two S i ae toore Tatre abaid dikinithe and select Line from the Character Line drop down list Solid Blend cycle box until TOP appears Now change the top color to blue 7 Switch to the graphic layer and draw a rectangle 8 Repeat steps 4 to 12 for the rectangle CG 98 Using Transparency Transparency and gradients can be combined with your text and graphic objects to create complex effects Transparency Set Classic Transparency Values GG Each text and graphic element face edge and shadow can have its own transparency value When working with transparen
120. the next line when the current line is filled Tab Stops CG has ten tab stops that you can set to any position or alignment in your layout Click on Tab Stops on the View tab to display the five default tab positions in your current layout Tab stops 6 to 10 are not visible on the default layout because their default positions are at the right edge of the layout You can move them into new positions using the Tab Stops Edit button on the View tab Each tab has two properties position and alignment Position is the horizontal location of the tab stop in the layout Alignment defines how the line is justified at that tab stop By default tab stops 1 and 2 are left aligned tab stop 3 is center aligned and tab stops 4 and 5 are right aligned You can change the position or alignment of any tab by clicking on Edit beside the Tab My ard Stops checkbox To change a tab stop position click on its number and move the Edit Tab Position amp Alignment dialog s Slider to a new position To change a tab stop s alignment click on an alignment button Update the layout with the new settings by clicking on Apply then on OK Edit Tab Position amp Alignment Pf E i E AE 4 5 aie a 9 10 Align Right Center i Align Left Reset To Defaults Apply OR Cancel CG s default template has five of the tab stops set up for you The example to the right shows you where the tab stops are left aligned set and what their ali
121. the object and then click on the color chip of the style or color group All text and graphic objects must belong to either a style or a color group Style groups save all formatting options for an object including options set on the Color amp Texture tab and on the Size amp Attributes tab font height width shadow size edge type etc Color groups only save options set on the Color amp Texture tab See Understanding Text Color on page 94 for details on using the Color amp Texture tab The Formatting palette lets you access the 8 color groups and 8 of the 24 style groups All the style groups can be found on the Styles tab Color groups are numbered from 1 to 8 Style groups are numbered from 9 to 32 Whenever you make a change to an object any other objects in the layout that share the same style or color group are updated Objects that share a color group can have different options selected on the Size amp Attributes tab Copy Style and Color Groups The following chart explains what attributes are carried over when 1 Click on a style or color chip or the format sample you copy styles and colors among the style and color chips and the format sample Source color group style group style group color group format sample format sample Target color group colors and textures copied style group color group colors and textures copied style group color group color and textures copied styl
122. the outside towards the center of the cone Decreasing Value without changing Saturation is the same as adding black pigment which creates shades Tones are created by decreasing both Saturation and Value Grays fall along the center Value line with Black at the bottom with a value of 0 When you are on the center line when Saturation is 0 then Hue is meaningless GG Using the HSV Model When you select the H S or V button the Color Slider shows you the result of choosing all the possible values of that parameter given the current settings for the other two parameters The other two parameters are displayed in the Color Selection box showing you all the possible colors that can be defined given the current selection in the Color Slider If you select Hue the Color Slider shows you all of the hues that can be defined given the current Saturation and Value selections To change the Hue slide the marker up and down in the Color Slider To change the Saturation move the Color Selector in the selection block left or right to move from gray to fully saturated Move the Color Selector up and down to change the Value If you move the selector to the bottom of the selection block the color is black If you select the Saturation button instead of the Color Slider the colors that can be defined with Saturation values of 0 at the bottom gray and 100 at the top fully saturated color are displayed To change the Hue move the sele
123. the return at the end of the line that you removed text from the text from the next line is moved up to the cursor and all subsequent text that was on the next line is reflowed You can turn Word Wrap on or off by selecting Constrain Word Wrap from the Element menu If you edit text on a layout and want to re wrap the lines to remove spaces you can use Element Re Wrap Selection to reflow the text CG only rewraps selected text If you simply click on a line CG does not re wrap the text on the layout To rewrap text click and drag on the text you want to re wrap Next select Element Re Wrap Selection CG re wraps the highlighted text View and Modity Tab Stops 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 5 Change the alignment of tab stop 4 by clicking on Center and drop down list on the CG toolbar click on OK when you finish 2 Switch to the View tab and click on the Tab Stops checkbox to show the tab stop positions and click on Edit beside the Tab Stops checkbox 3 Set the position of the first tab stop to 0 by selecting the tab stop and dragging the Slider to a new position The Slider within the Edit Tab Position Alignment dialog represents the width of the screen area Align Right Center and Align Left change how text is aligned to the tab stop 4 Now set each subsequent tab stop to a setting 5 higher than the last tab stop Tab stop 2 should be at 5 tab stop 3 should be at 10 a
124. the text belongs to a color group you see a single vertical line If the text belongs to a style group you see a double vertical line See Using Style and Color Groups on page 72 for details Color Group Style Group ae 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry lines indicating that the formatting for the text line is being drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is taken from a color group between the brackets in the CG Editor 4 Hold down CTRL and click and drag the text line to a new h 2 Type the sentence This is a test The vertical lines of the bounding brackets are double ae position Alternately you can use the Move tool to move hisis atest text up or down when it is tab constrained oe Hold down CTRL and press TAB lines indicating that the A white box now surrounds the formatting for the text line is being taken from a style group text line instead of two 3 Click on one of the color chips on the Formatting palette The color of the text changes brackets The text is no longer tab constrained This ts a 6 Use the Move tool to click and drag the text line to a new position You can now drag the text line in any direction and the vertical lines of the bounding brackets change to single instead of just vertically CG Setting Text Attributes The Type Specs section of the Size amp Attributes tab lets you control the face of your
125. the types and sizes of shadows and edges applied to the graphic object wiew Size amp Attributes Color amp Texture Styles Logos Background Mews Edit Effect Settings Rectangle Shadow E Edging 4 m G y n f Mormal D Size Face s s t Flat on eR LA A uw C r T 2 Vertical 133 f Mormal r fe Ppa i Use Background FA A gee il Fadl i Horizontal 206 m Soft Outlined nly When you draw a graphic object CG uses the formatting defaults from the current style or color group You can select a specific style or color group on the Formatting palette or the Styles tab before selecting a tool if you want to use the defaults from a particular style or color group as your initial setting When you select a style or color group and then a tool the object that you draw uses the attributes of the style or color group but its shape is determined by the tool that you select from the Formatting palette However if you select a graphic object that has already been drawn and then click on a style group the shape of the graphic object changes to match the default shape of the style group The shape stays within the boundaries of the box surrounding the graphic object when it is a s changed The example to the right shows you Before After Applying Style Group that the size of the bounding box stays the same even though the shape changes ee Crs de es s p a
126. the vertical resolution The formula below gives the correction value that Logo Compose uses This value is used for the views and the Aspect parameter in the Brush tab HorsResolution VertResolution Aspect Vertical Aspect Horizontal The parameters in the formula are taken from the Configuration section of the Inscribe ini file HorsResolution and VertResolution are actual entries that are set in the Preferences dialog The Aspect parameter may or may not be in the ini file The Aspect parameter should be added as follows Aspect x y where x is the horizontal value and y is the vertical value The default aspect ratio for NTSC and PAL is 4 3 The default aspect ratio for HDTV is 16 9 If you need to change the corrected views in Logo Compose make sure the formula above equals the correction you need For example the numbers for NTSC are 720 486 3 4 1 111 If you are creating images for square pixel use for example the web and you do not want video corrected views make sure the formula equals 1 You don t always have to change the ratio when creating uncorrected images since you can adjust the aspect of the brush based tools using the Aspect field on the Brush tab The default value for the Aspect field on the Brush tab is set to the current video aspect Any brush strokes you make with the default aspect settings are corrected for output For example if you are working in NTSC the default aspect is 1 111 If you view images create
127. to draft mode on the Windows Printer Properties dialog You can print directly from Print Preview or you can close the window make changes then select Print from the File menu nt Media In CG create the Play List you want to print To set up how the images will appear when printed select File Page Setup In the Print Preferences dialog select the text options that you want to appear with each printed image The text will appear beneath each thumbnail To change how many images appear on each page enter new values in the Rows and Columns fields The default is set to three Rows and four Columns so a total of 12 images will appear on each page Click on OK to save your changes or Cancel to close the dialog without saving changes Select File Print Preview to see how each page will look when printed You can view one page or two pages at a time If you are satistied with the preview click on Print to print the pages Otherwise click on Close and choose Page Setup to change the options selected or make changes to the Play List To print the images without previewing the pages choose Print from the File menu Overview 23 24 CG S Output You can use several methods to send your completed layouts to the output channel One Off Titles Exported Images and Integration with Other Software Random Access Display Overview You can use CG S to create layouts that are displayed or recorded to tape
128. to locate specific settings don t change them Comment lines start with a semi colon CG S automatically ignores everything on a line after the first semi colon Comments Section Label This line is a comment In the next line the comment starts with Use KeyingType EXTERNAL Use a downstream keyer Inscribe ini Main The table below provides a description of the main sections in the CG SINI file Sections Your INI file may contain other sections as well Section Contents Configuration Basic hardware configuration options for your frame buffer boards Preferences Program customization options Job List References to the last five Inscriber files you used GPI Trigger Port information for a GPI remote trigger TimeCodeReader Setup strings for a timecode reader File Reader Directory and search options for the Open Image dialog IFT Preferences Font Manager settings 32 Overview a x ANCISCO NAT CG is a full featured character generator that lets you create layouts for stills rolls crawls and reveals for display to video It offers extensive typographic and color controls for design flexibility producing text characters that are always fully anti aliased and broadcast quality In this Section Layou ainera eera era aE 46 57 Graphic ODJECiSirrserestakrcrrsrr ress 138 149 Back Crounds snanavtee ceclagtnaneeeeees 62 69 OC OS a deuce oon ation tiene EEN 150 153 KOD CCUS oreari ere mek anae
129. to print Examine the preview and make sure all the images you want to print are included Click on the Zoom In button to get a closer look at the images If you want to make changes to an image or to the text options included with the printout close the Print Preview and go back to Page Setup If you are satisfied with the way the preview looks click on the Print button and select print options from the Print dialog Print Next Page Frew Page Iwo Page Zoom ln Zoom Out Close Change Printing Speed Print Pri Printing speed depends on whether you print high resolution rendered images or low resolution image thumbnails The high resolution images are about 10 times the size of the lower quality images and take considerably longer to print When you print CG S checks to see if Inscniber CG Supreme BETA 4 1 0 27 online files exist If they do it prints those high resolution rendered images If there are no online files for the images you want to print CG S asks Your online output files are not up to c date This will result in a lower s resolution print job Would you like to render the output files now you whether you want to render the images and print the high quality ones or just print the low resolution images Yes If you have rendered the images but only want to print them at low resolution you can select Quick Print in the Print Preferences dialog Make sure your printer is set
130. toward the top of the screen Your text path should look like this 4 Click on the last control point and drag it toward the bottom left corner of the layout so that the path forms an arc Your text path should look like this Click on the second control point of the text path and press CTRL SPACEBAR Drag the new control point toward the top right corner of the layout Your text path should a look like this ATENI CG 125 Using the Spell Checker In CG you can use the Spell Checker to check the spelling accuracy of your layouts You can check your spelling on a layer in a single layout or throughout an entire Play List You can also add custom terms to the Spell Check dictionaries and customize the Spell Check options Spell Check Text Use the Spell Check Dialog Add Words to Dictionaries 126 CG You can spell check your text in a number of ways The options on the Element menu let you check a single layer an entire layout or an entire job Text on a spline and text in a box can also be spell checked in CG When you check the text on a layout CG checks all of the layers as well as any text in a box or on a spline When you check the text in a job CG checks all of the layers in each layout starting with the first layout in the Play List Element Ering to Erorit Eti tE send ta Back Etri tE Constrain b Align All i Layer Layout Job Apply Leading Layer Control Me
131. transformed when you select a transformation tool or use a transform option Many of the options on the Transform tab act like transformation tools but are not tools in the strictest sense The values on the tab mimic the transformation tools as closely as possible but they may not always do what you expect The Transform tab also includes several transformation options that are not accessible through the Transform tools The five transformation tools available on the Tool palette are described below You can also alter the move scale skew and rotate values from the Transform tab e moves the selection E e scales the selection a7 e skews the selection E Freeform e transforms individual points of the selection 5 e rotates the selection You can import an image as a transformation into the current Logo Compose document This is the method the Scrapbook uses to place images in Logo Compose To import an image as a transformation select File gt Import Export Import Transformation and navigate to your image location There are two modifier keys you can use when you apply transformations with the transformation tools Holding down the ALT key pastes copies of the selection contents while you are transforming Holding down the CTRL key pastes a copy when the mouse button is pressed Exit Transformations You can use several methods to exit a transformation Method Outcome SHIFT ESC e exits the transformation without applying
132. types continued U Typeface continued Configuring for Time Codes 200 Gade TAD A A E EEEE 258 DetS CIN ia 215 S A E 255 View menu in Logo Compose 227 CGP EEOAE 196 Ungate colors OONN 95 263 264 View tab ceeeeeeeee 116 117 120 146 Mammal e 51 196 Updating sssscssscsssssseesscsssssseessesseen 157 Gi o EAE AENEA RA 258 Multiple tri ober Sore 196 Color SfOUPS eesesscssssssesscssssssseseeee 74 OPAOS ona REEE AI 258 PO Clo ec instasaucncticiace 196 197 203 Job Templates s sssseessesssseeeseeeee 157 PHelelenCeSiswitieoteiiwiideeeiisice 258 Time Code ssscrsacdevieneconsnencnes 196 197 SE csssssssscccssssssesseccssssssessees 157 Zoom levels ioivacsstosavescsccedesverensedess 258 Pied certs gactsessonesiatseaseereatteascaies 196 NEWS Edit able fcccc sncnce peers dco 166 TAT cats ET A couse aseanc secs sas dos 267 ERM BOHON tte tates san eiaa 206 Style GrOUPS ssssesscssssssssevescsesssssessees 74 ASPECT AN Otic tint aaa 259 PUN CLIGINS a cma caieoauveiss 206 Uppercase letters essscsssseessecssseeesseeesee 79 Font IITE Sai a emaanea 80 Mark In points ssessseesessessessrssseseese 206 Using texture vecccccsssssessscsssssseeeseeseen 130 List of MOCINCES cetinatnrcasenias 226 Mark Out points sssessesssssressesessee 206 Utility Word import eesscccssssseeesecseeeee 19 Market Sentan E E 121 Trimming aciei 206 Screen coordinates sssssesessessesee 226 TrueType tontoen 76 80 y SIZE OP IMAS Een rai 226 R
133. waaga 13 89 00 00 1358 00 00 000 0 Group and Event Event Type Transition Size s Event Out Point Numbers l l Event Wait Time Group and Event Names Transition Duration Event In Point Event Total Duration Transition Direction Render Location Create an Event List The Event List provides detailed information for managing and outputting every event in the Play List There are two main objects in the Event List the event line and the group header To build an Event List add graphics layouts and animations to the Play List from other CG S modules or external applications then click on the Sequencer button on the CG S toolbar to switch to Sequencer and set timing and transition options for each event Set Transitions Transitions determine the way each new image appears on screen when you do a take CG S offers six transition types and you can set direction duration and size options for each transition in your Event List Transitions are set from the Event Editor tab See Creating Transition Events on page 188 for details Set the Trigger Type Trigger types control how you output events to video You can trigger events manually or with a timed method There are five trigger types available in Sequencer Manual Timed GPI Trigger Time Code and PC Clock Triggers are set for an entire group not for individual events To change the trigger type right click on the group trigger type and select a new type from the right cl
134. you type e lets you select special versions of the font Bold and Italic are TrueType versions of the original font e Heavy and Oblique are created by Windows functions if no Bold or Italic versions of the font are present Use the Font Manager 1 Select Tools Font Manager and select File FNT Files Directory from the Font Manager dialog 2 Select the location of your fnt fonts The fnt fonts are shipped with CG S and can be found on the CG S CD ROM 3 Scroll down the list of system fonts aF Inscriber fonts are identified by FT and TrueType fonts are identified by T 4 Look at the Times fnt fonts Notice the four Times styles bold bold italic italic and roman Now look at the TrueType Times New Roman font The TrueType font has only one entry 5 Select the four Times tnt fonts and click on Add to IFT When you add multiple fonts the Font Manager does not show you the rendering process 6 9 Select the Truelype Times New Roman font and click on Add to Add to IF Th IFT When you add a single font the Font Manager shows you the rendering process Select the TrueType Times New Roman font and click on the Bold checkbox Click on Add to IFT To add an entire family of TrueType fonts to the font database you have to select each variation bold italic bold italic and add it separately Select the TrueType Times New Roman font and type 97 in the first Range field and 122 in the second Range field
135. 00 Index Alpha continued E R E E 255 MEMO aerar n 237 238 Mix through to Key checkbox 104 SELECUNG oies aa aa 244 TELTE Saa 23 E E E E T 236 VIEW Saone sss vacated 258 Alpha Add 100lcstesievatesseceraccuecutee 236 Alpha Adjustment Filters 254 Alpha chamielos tonnum anna 260 Compositing texture with 135 TOOTING sena 68 WOS OS gnn e ques 150 Alpha PI tOO I cenana 236 Alpha information ssesseessessessessssses 68 in image backgrounds sees 68 Alpha Linear Gradient tool 236 Alpha Luminance Fill tool 236 Alpha Memory tool 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeees 236 Alpha Radial Gradient tool 236 Alpha Subtract tool eee eeeeeeeeeeee 236 Alpha eX WUT CS sas ssiccaneratdivedarrncaee 237 Crea IG oani 256 Alpha Tolerance Fill tool 236 AlpRa tOOls anire ennea 236 238 Pi E A TETEN 236 257 Pieca test 236 Linear Gradient sciainsiecsusrcctsadies 236 Luminance Tl snseia a 236 MEMO iaire a aaa 236 Radial Gradients tasinia 236 SUDA e r 236 Tolerance Fillon a sevinsinswasasiocavionunagiids 236 Al pla ViGW cases sascenagany eee eosaunnmmetant 258 TNC eis E E E E 96 Depta cae te oaes 102 Gradi eii arinetan 148 GEBUISD sanana E 234 SAC OW norta 89 TANS PALM CY aA 148 Angled LEXI saropan annans 76 AIMMAUONS aaen A 194 Impor enano 20 Importing to Sequencer 212 LOOPING maai 194 USING as evei enengena 20 ANSI keycod osaceae 82 ANS Mea lenasresgnr 128 129 for subi aeee
136. 173 Anti aliased edges ssesseseesessesesse 262 ADP nann n eriecietaiet 254 a DEVELEG UGE hna 93 Filters tsaprcteecsescistasssmenecnaccans 254 255 Filters to selections ccccceeeceeeeees 241 IAS KS EE EA AAEE 228 Mae ia 228 Transformations cccccccsesseeeeees 246 Arc direction changing 140 145 ARGB channels seeeeeeeees 238 260 ASCU keyc d s iotsseitpaassivenaaronneiresen 82 ASCE nenarik 128 129 FOMSU DUES nnna 173 ASDECU TAL Oixsn others detentions 259 263 Corrected Simcor 259 HDU asien 259 263 NTSC urn NA 259 263 OUUPUL PICKING rana 263 Pe AN 259 263 TOO iea cuca 259 E EAN stances PEA 259 Aspect of brush sssssesssseeesess 234 259 Attributes tabs ccccccessssssscsssseeeeeee 34 BLES ie ananena naa an 234 Fvent Editor isre 186 P e e EA 254 LMC C EEEE AE ESE E 34 in Logo COMPOSE ssssssssssseseesessesees 221 Vi SCQUENICOL Siiri 183 204 PA LD saank nmousenannasanes deosactdensosaese 202 B Back sround cxasiaainpiveanctvginatss 62 69 BASICS cose pee 62 Coltan 63 64 67 Color Options scscuceteasiceese eve towne 64 66 COMPLEX csi n aE E NS 69 CAW eeN 69 from Frame Gra Divcesccosnsnsahesacccecsbhons 68 Pull blare iaieineea 65 Gradient naaar 66 IASG A EES A EE ERES 63 68 Image alpha information 68 Image file location eee eeeeseeeees 68 Imported graphics a5 eeeeeeeeeees 63 Mix through to Key checkbox 104 Overlay cincinnati i
137. 50 X amp Y 0 X amp Y 50 X amp Y 100 100 CG Color Options Depth vs Shadow CG provides four color options for many of the text elements Color Ramp Bevel Full Alpha and Eliminate You can select color options from the Color Options drop down list Color Ramp displays gradients of color transparency and sheen set on the Color amp Texture tab Bevel displays a two color gradient and transparency from the element edge using color and transparency values instead of simple shading using a static light source See Using Additional Beveled Text on page 104 for details on beveled text elements Full Alpha draws the o element with 100 a Full Alpha alpha Though the asis No Casts a Shadow Shadow element isn t visible a full alpha element casts a shadow Applying the Full Alpha Color Option gives you the same effect as applying the Ghost effect with the Embellished type style Eliminate doesn t draw the element at all Since the element isn t drawn it cannot take attributes such as shadow The graphic above shows you the difference between applying the Eliminate and Full Alpha Color Option to the face Depth creates the illusion of 3 D text by extruding an edge in one direction Depth does not contain a softness value but can contain up to four colors and transparency values or a texture Shadows are soft offset highlights of the side of an object opposite an imaginary light source Shadows follow the sha
138. 7 wait fo V 5 a remote ja 00 24 15 foon 6 15 a Joo 00 02 0 fr 2 3 Pro Program al triper Timea E EG o 7A Channel Transition Directions Event In Point Event Out Point Event Total Duration Current Time Code Group Trigger Type Lan D D i Rename Groups and The Name field on the Event Editor tab allows you to rename your groups and Events events so they can be easily identified in the Event List Click on the group or event name in the Event List or click directly in the name field and type in a new name When you are finished press TAB to update the changes Change the Trigger Trigger types control how you run event sequences Type online and are set on a group by group basis not by Trigger Manual event Select a new trigger type from the Trigger Type Manual drop down list on the Event Editor tab or from the Timed GFI Trigger Time Code Y right click menu on the current trigger type field on the group header in the Event List See Understanding Trigger Types on page 196 for details Add a Transition Transitions control the way an image moves onto the screen CG S offers six different transition types cut wipe tile louvre dissolve and push Availability of these transitions depends on which type of frame buffer you are using When you add an event to the Play List Sequencer event Editor automatically assigns the default Cut transition You can change the transition type direction size and d
139. 8 CROCUS Ol esn 48 ChOPPING scat ect iecis anaua 228 MD E E EET TEE 206 Ceo EE E 218 E E o i AA E ET 244 Cite TAO a 116 CT SOPS ai T Sevateteeien 235 BEAS ii S 235 Brush Preview 226 234 258 Coordinafes esiseina 226 Cursors continued aE E E E 46 77 in Logo COMPOSE ssessessessessessssese 226 Large Crosshairs ccssssasesssseveaccerveie 258 OPUONS ane vadeareaacreetesieercetete 258 Posio eanan 226 Small Crosshairs ssesseseessessessesese 258 Curves image filters 228 255 CUE Transi Honn aneen eiei 190 CUTS 188 190 192 CE aca ccrrcu sec uaruwutatinenceiehpesianunes 183 VEU Sahat wins ans a a 182 Graphic ODIECIS zaina 144 Terea reverent 71 CYCLE CHECK DON sicidnsessdvsspeamnate emerson 203 Cycle Event Listisciussicunmceisercanaah 203 D Decrement Speed sc cscscscsdevtnetseicensests 193 Peril eann 76 CG text attributes siana 76 Defining source points 252 Delenio niteat 144 183 Control Points cesta a ceuseaciein saceeeticess 124 Event orup soiuri maiki 182 ESENES sra 182 OMS eni aE 81 TOD E LCase haahaencpmatecbua tascam 18 Deleting group headers eee 182 DG iiss sscest pat cnsevaesaedniniseauehsceeant 101 102 Adding to transformations 249 Transform OptiONn sceeeceeseeeees 246 VS SNAGOW wuccsacasnocess ena 101 Desat rated COl risiste 264 DGSELECIIING annenin 244 Transformation sce s veneteveceacdeaece 247 Device SATIN faci aai 265 Direcoiysararen n 55 OF TIW scarce 55 Or
140. AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE OPENING THE SEALED DISK PACKAGE BY OPENING THIS PACKAGE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS WE ARE UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU AND YOU SHOULD NOT OPEN THE DISK PACKAGE IN SUCH CASE PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNOPENED DISK PACKAGE AND ALL OTHER MATERIAL IN THIS PACKAGE ALONG WITH PROOF OF PAYMENT TO THE AUTHORIZED DEALER FROM WHOM YOU OBTAINED IT FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE PRICE YOU PAID 2 Ownership and License This is a license agreement and NOT an agreement for sale We continue to own the copy of the software contained in this package and any other copy that you are authorized by this Agreement to make the Software Your rights to use the Software are specified in this Agreement and we retain all rights not expressly granted to you in this Agreement Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a waiver of our rights under any copyright law or any other law 3 Permitted Uses 3 01 Right to Install and Use You may install and use the Software on the hard disk drive of any single compatible computer that you own However you may not under any circumstances have the Software installed onto the hard drives of more than one computer at the same time nor may you install the Software onto the hard disk drive of one computer and then use the original distribution media on another computer If you wish to use the Software on more tha
141. BOSTON Nane Location EaR EPORTSNITLE Change the Baseline to 365 and the Left Edge to 100 Switch to the text layer and type the words Report Title Select Style 29 from the Styles tab and switch to the View tab Change the Baseline to 410 and the Left Edge to 75 Select File Registry CG Layouts and click on Add Change the template name to Title Template and click on OK and Close Click on the next blank slot in the Play List The new layout is based on the template you just created CG 155 Using Templates You can use templates to provide a standard starting point for all layouts in a Play List You can also update the layouts in a Play List using a new template or use existing layouts to create new templates Templates Registry The Templates registry is a collection of templates created by Inscriber that provides you with a starting point for creating your own layouts in CG You can load a template from the registry using the drop down list on the CG toolbar The Templates registry contains all of the available templates You can also create your own templates and add them to the Templates registry The Templates Title Templates registry collects and organizes all of your O Default layout ae templates You can 1 Learning InscribereCG Supreme ode 2 Intro Registry Samples Update work with the 3 Default Style amp Colour Chips _ Update r 4 LowerThirds 1 Templates repy 5 LowerT
142. Between Events In Points and Out Points Preserve In Points Sequencer Event duration is set from the Frames field on the Event Editor tab This value determines how long CG S takes to play an event For example if a transition is set to 50 frames CG S completes the transition in 50 frames 2 seconds in PAL You can change the speed and duration of an event by adding or removing frames An event with a Frames value set to 0 plays in 120 frames A transition with a Frame value of 0 is completed in 30 frames You can force an image to stay on screen after the event is complete by adding wait time in the Wait field For example if you want an image to stay on screen for 3 seconds after it has transitioned on set the Wait value to 90 frames for NTSC If no wait time is set CG S takes the next event as soon as it reaches the last frame of the transition or motion effect roll crawl animation or reveal The total take duration is the sum of the event duration Frames field and the wait time Wait field For example for an image set to transition on screen in 30 frames and then wait for 90 frames the total take duration is 120 frames This is the difference between the in point and the out point for the event You do not need to set duration for cuts because they occur instantly To leave the image on screen until the next event is triggered adjust the Wait value to how long you want the image displayed on screen but leave the Fram
143. C vaania liar 131 Screen center in CG eeeeeeee 120 121 Screen coordinates sie rier esceusseaaecescueent 226 SEL CCM OTIC xs uve hos sunevurviosavanveate emery 121 Screen horizontal center e0 121 Screen vertical center sseseseeeeseese 121 Scroll Ol cick rests cweenccen 232 258 SELON ea a a 48 Scrolling in a craWwl esssesssseesessessesee 48 Seamless TERTU ES eniros 256 CEEAUIING ari aiaa e i 256 Searching News Edit tables 167 Select Channel dialog ee eeeeeeee 260 Select Mennarar mear cece anaes 227 SELECUING vanes sceteg iors ee Aloncrtns 183 244 IA Wp ideianarsiesasestancpumenaarccescterceusdeuas 244 BiUis NGS 5 ssceesdenenesane a 232 COlb isa a aes 64 94 Event a HTD S eneen 182 EVE O A OE 182 E ETE E E EE EE N 244 Graphic objects sssssessessesessesessse 144 Group attributes ssseesessessesessesesees 182 GOUD Sian ar E 182 Lot type nenau 34 48 Program channel seses 186 FG DIAS ema receccliccanuce 34 E a A TEN 71 FOUIS ra OEA ties ts 232 selectins dll menenie 244 Selectine events rennin 183 Dye lac RES E E TOE teae 202 Dyna mbe iacci noon 202 selectins NONE ereraa 244 Sele TO e O 244 BOfdel ian a T 244 COPPIE ieia ecesatycauvatronssuateans 244 Pathe rasne 244 DSOMMETIN Gy iseirsrne esnan 244 Selection Move tool sesssessseseesesesess 242 Selection opacity ecenin nenii 240 Selection tools eure aaan an 242 EPICA eiie 242 E S T E E EEE E A 242 Linedt CASSO n
144. CIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFITS REVENUE DATA OR DATA USE OR MACHINE USE INCURRED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT EVEN IF WE HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OUR LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY LOSSES SHALL NOT EXCEED THE GREATER OF 500 AND THE AMOUNT YOU ORIGINALLY PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions so they may not apply to you 7 United States Government Restricted Rights The enclosed Software and documentation are provided with Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or any agency or instrumentality thereof is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 48 C FR 252 227 7013 or in subdivision c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights Clause at 48 C ER 52 227 19 as applicable Contractor Manufacturer is Inscriber Technology Corporation 26 Peppler Street Waterloo Ontario Canada N2J 3C4 8 Termination This license and your right to use this Software automatically terminate if you fail to comply with any provisions of this Agreement destroy the copies of the Software in your possession or voluntarily return the Software to us Upon termination you will destroy all copies of the Software and documentation Otherwise the restrictions o
145. E Sci niun 255 Bringing objects to front eee 145 Browsing FONtS scerna ieena 80 Bens I cones at aici R 252 TIONG aa ha lacrenmerecanrrcticass 234 ISD CCl E vances 234 259 Brush continued Caliorap ly sininen 234 CUTS OS a eines 235 FPLC Al esaerea 233 OPa ensaia 232 Rectaneilitesunossresnnenam 233 ROSELUING aeae 235 Selec NN ned a s 292 Smelle P Kelennet 233 SIZE seca gscndie tivanie any aiebagaeandinns 234 SO MINE SO aE OEE 234 SPACIAS aaaea 234 E a E T 234 SO ane aa 233 Sa E A 233 TOO anna a 232 Brush preview cursor 226 234 258 Brush Selection tool sssseseesessersseese 242 Brusi SUVIC scrsdseacsiasiushaseaudsedsadargarte 292 Brivis E 1e EPT A ETS 234 Brush based tools eseeeseeeeeeees 252 Boll QUp aA Ni 233 Buln tO0l te aa aa aans 264 C OT A A T 30 CONDITA ON seckane 266 Computer MONItOL 0 eeeeeeeeeees 266 Frame buffers sesssssesseseseesessoeseeeo 266 Gla oiae 267 LENN cpana 267 Odette Mein aT 266 OutputmOnitOr inenen st 266 SyS Miep 266 Calligraphy eleccion 234 Canvas Senini 231 Capre MIES ana 218 Centera Diskni aa 122 Center vertical yosin eiei 122 CG pais 34 173 CG HOILOT iesse eeoa iena 34 Character MaPonsisuigno nacon 82 CONGCEDIS a R 44 EXpOrtNE ioa A 36 IM PO LUE roseta n sansenenceans 36 MENU Sings saiiaes re chesioeemsemaaiades 71 OVELVIEW rrinin 34 44 Preferences vo cc sassniueecemonacuwoeucrs 38 99 SHOTECUL keysunanarsaicaniarat 42 Toolbar nee 34 43 CG conti
146. EMOVING esseeri aa Ton ani 81 ee eet oie en tee 58 TAD COPS eel 123 TODE ornon ERARA 114 E tala eetate ae 237 262 Zoom E A SEEE A 226 Tubed eiiean ia 142 E ics otececue vemoarcans 172 Visible Layer 10 Edges eeeeeee 110 Tabe Colia ai a 114 Ye neei eee 12 WASIDIG SCLC CHING ain a 244 DE een rare D Noreal El ogen a 248 A Race SONU feonachastiaiye Vertical panel itccusui ee thes i elec 140 W dE ol ence erence E 62 Verea edon E a accom 28 Wacon supposons 233 Edge sssssssssssrsrssrresrsnsssessrnsrnensrens A EE aT poi Watiddsasisitaenee 192 of background sssssssseseeesnneseseeen O E o aa De Wae Keena 192 196 of edge sssssssssessesserserssssessessresten WON ire eet ire nn i esk ay Wando esae 242 a A sorcens 140 Via Builder ossssessssssssssssse 20 213 Warn Layout Changes svssssssnsesee 38 DT ODE eintiid rein OD Ce Ae ate eee eee ee COM ee ee 140 141 E TE A T T 88 e e r ea 266 Wedge direction changing 145 Of subtitle file 168 OAT T E CS E 264 Wite POT eiie a ace lessiead 267 Transformation ssesseseseessen 248 CePA eects hehe Be teon ee eee 265 Widths OF Gxteysiices sectors seein msienaus 76 TYPO syl Steara a 86 PETT ATN 262 Windows character Map 82 10 Edges sssesssesssssessessseessenssees or U Ilegal colors sssssseseseseeeeeees 263 264 Wipe TransiNon neronen 190 CaCa aan 76 86 ee cae hy 564 Wipes ire cein conn aerate 188 190 Dep iaoeia 102 Oe e aeaea sat aes 264 Word import utility cccecsese
147. Filter M Video Legalize M Monochrome _ Dither M Footprint Removal Field 1 Footprint Removal Field 2 E Computes new data for odd numbered scan lines from the scan lines directly above and below The even numbered scan lines remain unchanged The Interpolate Field filters remove inter field jitter but increase vertical image softness These filters generally do not increase visual steps in the image Adaptive Field 1 Modifies the luminance values for each pixel on even numbered scan lines based on the luminance values for the pixels directly above and below The odd numbered scan lines remain unchanged Adaptive Field 2 Modifies the luminance values for each pixel on odd numbered scan lines based on the luminance values for the pixels directly above and below The even numbered scan lines remain unchanged The Adaptive Field filters remove inter field jitter without increasing vertical image softness These filters generally do not increase visual steps in the image The Adaptive Field filters are recommended for general frame grab clean up Average Field 1 Computes new data for even numbered scan lines by averaging each one with the line directly above Average Field 2 Computes new data for odd numbered scan lines by averaging each one with the line directly above The Average Field filters average the two fields to remove flicker In averaging the fields these filters tend to blur motion and slightly so
148. Gradient Value 25 ak 45 degrees Angle 45 degrees Patterns Patterns add interest to color and video backgrounds Use the Fatterr Pattern list to select a style and then select a pattern size The pattern size is similar to a magnification and controls the size of Ti T the pattern elements A Pattern Size value of 1 sets small pattern elements and a Pattern Size value of 10 sets large pattern elements Patterns can look very different depending on the pattern size 4 Pattern Experiment to see which patterns and sizes you like the best Size Pattern elements are always opaque but any background visible behind the pattern elements maintains its transparency and gradient settings Combine Colors and You can combine colors gradients and Background Patterns patterns to create a variety of complex backgrounds The graphic to the right shows you the basic combinations Gradient Combine Color and You can combine a video background with any colored background with or Transparency without a pattern at any transparency level One important thing to note is that if you are using both a color and a transparency gradient the gradient values Top Bottom and Angle apply to both the color and transparency gradient You can t modify them separately Create a Complex Background This procedure shows you how to create a background with an angled color gradient and a pattern that looks like this l 5 Now set the Pa
149. I Sequencer renders the event to RAM when you go online D Sequencer renders the event to a local hard drive when you go online o e when offline Sequencer attempts to render the event to the frame buffer when the take occurs e when online the event s background does not need to be accessed from disk e red Sequencer rendered the event to RAM e blue RAM was full and Sequencer rendered the event to disk e yellow Sequencer rendered the event to VRAM or XMS memory on the frame buffer e blue Sequencer rendered the event to disk e black Sequencer loads the event s disk based background at take time 02 888 Experiment with Location Options 1 Switch to CG and create a layout with a single character the 6 Click on the Online Toggle button to go online The color of the size of the screen render location icon tells you where the events are rendered 2 Using the Play List copy the event nine times 7 Click on the Cycle checkbox on the Run tab then click on the Run Job button and watch the online output until you have a feel for the speed of the takes Click on the Stop button to stop the job then click on the Online Toggle button to go offline Select all the events and click on the Remote button Follow steps 6 to 8 to render the files to the new location and see the ditference in speed between the location Options In most cases you should notice that Remote is slightly slower than Local RAM 3 Apply a un
150. Inside Laye rione anua 110 Intersecting with selection 04 243 Inverting selection dissarmaninereteton 244 nvisibl selecting assrsssiintgadee 244 IRclavor tos erdi rtere restate tereyer 76 Italic version of FNT font ee eee 85 J ODA enna elena c 195 RIT aa 179 SOPPER 195 TOD TUES aaan 18 230 CIOS TING aA EE R 18 DEletO nioena mra 18 OPENID T an a 18 Packed esanten eni a 19 SAV anuni nan 18 Job folder extensions ccccccseeeseeeeeees 18 K Kerno danan 76 79 Ke eiee N 228 260 Mix through to Key checkbox 104 Key SNOW IO aion aE N 35 in T E E 228 Kerno pE E 28 Knockout to background 97 138 L Label DUTON aroei 203 Latge Crosshal S anaiaren 258 Lasso Tool inete denna aie 242 E a E E E res 204 DAS PAVING civesacsoucavecoseensyudonayoces 204 Layer Control option 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeee 117 LAVeCLISt E E 47 117 Layering graphic objects eee 149 ENE OTEREN E A 46 APAA ar E E T 238 Layers continued Changing using MOUSE ssssesseseeees 147 GHD NIGes ox csestancsancennteceneaicets 34 41 Moving text between eee 117 INUMBETING s usne 47 SWITCHING sses 43 120 147 dic a E A erent 34 41 117 LAV OULAV PC in E 48 CHOOSING ee 49 Craw Era a a 48 54 Overlay Ve Marse 5l Reveala Ae 49 RO ll osietaaiee vocea tthe Rarauatiaien 48 52 So elu iba unna 34 48 SU esi ctueanctocet tenes ute sveatinensesteaue 48 PAy OU T E 44 46 Adding to templates registry
151. Renan seii R 186 RinDi nian 184 SCLEC ENO TEE E 182 EDE a EP E E A ANTA AN 193 Transition events iesiri 180 TAON Taaa 206 Exiting Transformations 247 Expanding groups sessesessesssssesessesses 182 Expanding selection ceseeeseeeeee 244 EXPOLUMNG ancars 36 240 ICO TUES E I ue eaatnnmueerts 36 TPS MICS anA 37 FONTS sorina 8l IMAGES T E E E E 37 Exporting continued TING C EEE EE 36 EVO ad soldencueananecyase8es 36 Selection contents raresorireri 241 Selections sss ssssseeennsssseeeess 231 241 Sequence text MES ucie reps seerdrasteons 37 Subtitle TES csras ai 172 Tere MES sayiucinepe toaenesnidedvarseanenviners 36 Exporting Piles ecnitisrucatansinausnc 230 EXLENSIONS 3 o ete aieomniens 18 Online Tolder Seii 212 Extensions job folders 0 0 eeeeeeeeee 18 Extrude shadow i sacsssananiansarasauan 88 F PACE PEARLE PE EEEE TAE 76 108 Colore 1 Deeper E 94 Distorting shape siieransouseusrmnnacess 100 Formae arae 78 Graphic Objects u iniri 70 Selectine color erinan 94 Texto nnee 70 TERTNES ineneting 136 Transpreni V cteseieoreiverpcestaccns 148 Pace Depli onra eea 107 Face On Top eunana cette cteen cas 106 FeAatherscleCiOl siz deesxaerniomietee 244 Field values Stns jicccasestectyaisasiesvevains 11 i E E EE EAE E 18 CIOSE ERA EE 230 EX polt aeon a ts 230 Filetypes subies unrar 168 e EEES 18 DGC ETE E TA 18 CDS E eae 257 AAA E EA T 230 Background image locations 68 CIOS Onsa eaa 230 Cl
152. Scrapbook Click on the Save Grab to File button on the Frame Grab tab Select a drive and folder for the image and a file type for the image file Name the file and click on OK The image can be saved as a 24 bit bmp file or a 32 bit vii or tga file Most graphics applications can read tga and bmp image files Other Inscriber programs can read vii files To paste the grabbed image directly into another Windows application click on the Save Grab to Clipboard button When you switch to the other application you want to use choose Paste from the application s Edit menu to insert the image To temporarily put the image in the Scrapbook right click on the Scrapbook and select Add from the pop up menu Remember that the Scrapbook is a T Delete temporary file that is deleted when you close CG S Make sure you save any Clear All images that you want to keep permanently pone pneed before closing CG S Bete Rone eiet Info 1 Click on the Frame Grab button Al sal 4 6 Click on the Live Video button again er eee to switch to Frame Grab 2 Click on the Grab button to capture an image 7 Click on the Save Grab to File button select a file location and set image options for the grab 8 Minimize CG S and click on the My Computer a 3 Select the Live Video button to resume the video play icon on your desktop Navigate to the location of j j My Computer 4 Click on the Still Graphic button This Still Gr
153. Select Style 16 from the Formatting palette A rectangle appears in the lower half of the layout Switch to the Size amp wee o ooo y y y O Attributes tab and select Wedge Polygon Wedge from the Graphic proi Type drop down list Tatton ihe z Click on the wedge in the CG Editor and press the keypad ENTER key not the number pad key to create a duplicate of the selected graphic object Click on the new wedge drag it to a new position near the top of the screen and select Polygon from the Graphic Type drop down list Click on one of the white object control points and press SPACEBAR to create another object control point Click on a control point and drag it away from its current position One control point stays in the original position and the control point that you are dragging changes the shape of the object Select Spline Curve from the Graphic Type drop down list p cG 14 Understanding Graphic Shadows and Edges Shadows can make graphic objects appear three dimensional and edges define objects against shadows and backgrounds CG provides a number of shadow and edging options that can be combined to create complex and interesting objects All shadow and edge options are located on the Size amp Attributes tab Shadows Edging 142 CG Shadows add depth to flat 2D graphic objects and provide you with an additional tool for adding visual interest to your layouts Shadows require three values shadow t
154. Shape The physical dimensions of an object such as width length and depth Sharpen Filter In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab An image filter that mildly sharpens the image with a 3x3 convolution filter Contrast with Blur Filter Sheen In CG One of seven available type styles consisting of face edge amp sheen and shadow text elements Each of four edges can display a separate sheen highlight Sheen also refers to a linear highlight you can apply to text elements When using type styles with additional edges such as 10 Edges and Sheen you can also apply a sheen effect to individual edges Available with all type styles except Classic Inscriber Shot Box Palette The palette visible in Sequencer designed to give a keyboard method of displaying images in the Media Catalog Event List or Play List Simple NTSC PAL Legalize In Logo Compose A legalize filter that restricts image colors to those acceptable for broadcast Every pixel is scanned and illegal colors are replaced with the closest NTSC or PAL legal color Single Pixel Brush In Logo Compose A brush that adds color or alpha or edits image information a single pixel at a time Small Caps In CG Lower case letters displayed as reduced size upper case letters Smooth Processing See Sub Pixel Processing SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE Color Bars A video test pattern generally used when calibrating
155. Sheen Options 103 Create a Double Beveled Edge with Transparency 105 Customize Recessed Type Style 0000 107 Customize Embellished Type Style 0 109 Create Text with Ten Edges 00 000 00 00000 111 Customize Sheen Type Style 0000an 113 Customize the Neon Type Style 0 000 115 Position Text LINCS o n nnn anaana aaan 117 Resize and Reposition Text 0 00000 119 View and Modify Markers 0 0 000 121 View and Modify Tab Stops 0000 123 Enter Text on a Text Path 0 0 0 0 008 125 Spell Check a Layout o ononon 127 Import Roll Text o ae 129 Define and Change Textures 0 00000 13 Apply and Tint a Texture 0 0 0 0 0000 08 133 Apply Textures o an 135 AE Ue PESSE E EEEE ET TIE TEST 137 Create Graphic Objects 0 0 0 0002 139 Change Graphic Object Shapes 141 Modify Graphic Object Shadows and Edges 143 Use Advanced Graphic Options 0002 145 Use Bevels n adiae eeeateeu ea gaaaeae encase BY 147 Arrange Graphic Objects in a Stack 00 149 Add a Logo toa Layout a onunu 15 Apply Edges and Shadows to Logos 153 Create a Template 0 000 0c 155 Modify an Existing Template 0 00 157 Link a Template to News Edit Tables 159 Create and Import a News Edit Table
156. Short Cut Key e Cut CTRL X e Copy CTRL C e Paste CTRL V e Select All CTRL A e Select None CTRL D e Select Visible CTRL ALT A e Select Invisible CTRL SHIFT A Invert Selection CTRL SHIET I e Crop CTRL SHIFT C Experiment with Short Cut Keys l Select File lImport Export Import Image and open the ransom _dev ipt file in the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Hold down the CTRL SHIFT and ALT keys and press Z to zoom in Press CTRL SHIFT ALT H to select the Scroll tool and drag the mouse around to pan the image Press CIRL SHIFT ALT to select the Lasso tool and draw a selection around the R Press CRL SHIFT ALT T to select the Scale tool and slightly decrease the size of the R Press CTRL D to apply the transformation Press CTRL SHIFT ALT M to select the Rectangular Selection tool and draw a box around the A Press CIRL T to select the Rotate tool and rotate the A Press CTRL D to apply the transformation 9 12 13 14 Some of the most popular features in Logo Compose also have short cut keys Functionality Short Cut Key Undo CTRL Z Redo CTRL SHIET Z CTRL Y CTRL R Redraw CTRL SHIFT R View Normal CTRL SHIET 0 Hold down the CTRL SHIFT 0 zero to size the view to 100 Press CTRL SHIFT ALT W to select the Wand tool increase the wand tolerance to 35 on the Brush tab and click on the N Press CTRL SHIFT ALT 0 to select the Dodge tool set Opacity to 50 on the Brush ta
157. Subtitle Only file enter the text in a text editor You can put as many lines of text on each page of subtitles as you require Use a blank line to separate the subtitle pages CG starts a new layout whenever it encounters a blank line You can create a layout that contains only the template elements by inserting a blank line a blank line with a space on it and another blank line You can also create a completely blank layout by inserting two blank lines instead of one in your text file You can divide each page of subtitles into individual lines or you can type each page of subtitles as one long line of text If you type each page onto a single line make sure that the layout for your subtitles has Word Wrap turned on Remember to signal each new layout page with a blank line A sample of three subtitle layouts in a subtitle only file with Word Wrap turned off would look like this To be or not to be that is the question Whether tis nobler to suffer the slings and arrows of outrageous fortune or to take arms against a sea of troubles Prepare Timecoded Subtitle Files The layout template you use in CG determines the number of lines per page and the maximum number of characters per line See Understanding Templates on page 154 for details and out timecodes You can import text files that contain both subtitles and timecodes These files are the same as subtitle only files except that each subtitle page is separat
158. Switch to the Brush tab and set the Opacity value to 75 Image to Import 5 Select the Alpha Add tool and paint over opaque areas TA 2 Select the Alpha Linear Gradient tool from the Tool too add transparency Because the opacity is not palette and draw a line across your image to apply a 100 some of the image detail shows through gradient The gradient goes from fully opaque to fully 6 On the Brush tab set the Opacity value back to ay transparent 100 Select the Alpha Memory tool and paint on 3 Select the Alpha Subtract tool and paint over the pa the image Image alpha values is restored to its original value transparent areas This tool subtracts alpha by 7 Select the Alpha Fill tool change the Opacity to 50 and click adding opacity in the image to fill with alpha Logo Compose Understanding Alpha The main feature of Logo Compose is its ability to manipulate and paint with alpha Logo Compose is a full fledged 32 bit image editing program that really understands the alpha channel You can paint edit transform and apply filters to the alpha channel completely independent of the color channel The Logo Compose Image Image Channels Alpha Channel in Logo Compose Alpha Tools 238 Logo Compose In Logo Compose you can only Logo Compose Image Image Channels work on a single image at a time Each image has four channels the red green blue and alpha Alpha channels The alpha tools let you Red work on the alp
159. T CTRL DRAG RIGHT CLICK DOUBLE CLICK SHIFT CTRL DRAG In a multiple selection dialog add the current item to the list In a multiple selection dialog add items between previous item and current item to the line On text line move tab constrained text vertically moves non tab constrained text vertically and horizontally On Formatting palette copy only the color attributes of a style chip In Play List move event instead of copying it On Scrapbook call Scrapbook menu In CG Editor call floating element menu On Formatting palette call a list of style options In any number field return the value the default On text or graphic object move to higher or lower layer Formatting Graphic Objects CTRL F CTRL B SHIFT DRAG CTRL DRAG SHIFT CTRL SHIFT CTRL DOWN arrow UP arrow CTRL SPACEBAR CTRL BACKSPACE Formatting Text CTRL X CTRL C CTRL V ALT V CTRL TAB CTRL MINUS CTRL PLUS CTRL CLICK SHIFT CTRL DELETE CTRL SPACEBAR CTRL BACKSPACE CTRL K GG Bring object to front of overlapping objects Send object to back of overlapping objects Force a 1 1 aspect ratio while resizing Force a 4 3 aspect ratio while resizing Maintain proportions while resizing Move object to new layer hold down keys click and drag on object Select previous graphic object Select next graphic object Add spline polygon control point Remove spline polygon control point Remove text put it in clipboard Copy text to clipboard
160. Use your mouse to select a color within the square The afaa lt Value Fields selected color appears in the Classic As type style Solid Blend cycle box or on the other style color chips The Color Slider shows the color values of the Color Selection Bax Color Picker selected parameter The slider appearance depends on the current color model and the color values Select HSV RGB or HSL as your color model from the color model drop down list Colors can be set using numeric values in the color value fields These values change when you select a different color model See Understanding the HSV Color Model on Value Radio Buttons NTSC and PAL Illegal Colors page 58 and Understanding RGB and HLS Color Models on page 60 for details on color models and the color selection tools The Color Picker tool copies colors from the screen You can click on the Color Picker tool and drag it to any color on the screen When you release the mouse button the color of the pixel under the tip of the Color Picker is selected color under this Some images may contain many different colors of pixels point of the Color Picker making it difficult to select a specific color If you change the becomes the selected color Zoom factor on the View tab to seven or eight you can pick colors more easily In any color model you can define colors that Ciia are not safe for video encoding These unsafe x Ntsc hot colors can be defined and
161. Working with Markers CG offers you a number of ways to organize your layouts and control where text appears on your output monitor What are Markers Markers indicate specific areas or positions on the screen such as the Video Safe Title Area tabs and screen centers Video Safe Title Area Screen Vertical Center Screen Horizontal Center You can select and modify your markers using the options on the View tab Placement When you modify markers you are modifying them globally If you make changes to the markers in your current layout you are also changing the markers in all of your layouts both existing and new View Placement The placement options on the View tab provide Options information about the layout and allow you to position text and graphic objects by entering numeric values for the baseline and left edge The Page field identifies what page of a roll or crawl you are on and gives the total number of pages in the roll or crawl layout The Baseline field lets you move the selected line vertically by changing the location of its baseline The Left Edge field lets you move the selected line horizontally by changing the location of its left edge You can either enter a specific value in the field or you can place your cursor over the field click on the field and drag the cursor up or down to change the t m ki aot T m 120 CG Video Safe Title Area Baseline and Center Markers Screen Gri
162. You can add a logo to your layout by using the Logo tool to draw an object and then clicking on an image from the Logo Map or selecting an object to convert to a logo and then clicking on an image on You can apply edging and shadows to logos in the same way you apply them to text Object Shapes selecting a new style group for the object Logos alpha information in the logo is maintained the Logo Map and graphics See Adding Logos to Layouts on page 150 for details Splines and Polygons Splines and polygons are irregularly shaped objects The basic polygon shape has four control points in addition to grab handles on the corners of the bounding rectangle Click on any control point to move it and change the polygon shape To add another control point click on an existing control point and press SPACEBAR The new control point appears on top of Grab Handle T Control Points the old one and can be dragged to a new position To delete a control point click on it and press BACKSPACE A spline or polygon can contain up to 64 control points Splines also use control points but the lines between pairs of control points are tangents to the curve rather than boundaries of the figure The curve always touches the midpoint of the line between two control points Change Graphic Object Shapes l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the graphic layer
163. Z 720 WERT jase v No video init on taskswitch NTSC C PAL Show filename in Job Strip D __ Disable textfiltering ma Keying Type INTERNAL 7 __ Save uncompressed TGAS Multi Channel Operaliuri u __ Use MRU Job on Launch jy Disable Board Access video feed appears while you Windows Gamma _ Force Disk based Takes work on your layout R DE G DE B EE a __ Silent Video Init Most of the available video transparent patterns are significantly different from any graphic you might use in a layout so you should not have problems identifying your video transparent areas Background Tab The Background tab lets you select the background type and the various options associated with each type Background Color Transparency and Image Background Type Selection Gradient Values Details View T Color amp Texture Styles i Background f Edit Effect Settings l Potem o E n ie L ere Bottomfjo EY r Ignore Alpha me f LA W ange Fj M Size to Fit Image Background Image backgrounds consist of a bitmap image imported from another software Basics package or grabbed in Frame Grab CG can read most common bitmap formats including bmp tga and tif Image backgrounds can contain alpha information so you are not limited to opaque images You can also create complex alpha patterns and gradients for an image background using third party software Col
164. a number of options that modify how the Spell Checker selects misspelled words Click on the Options button to view the list Options that are checked are enabled Some options are enabled by default The graphic to the right shows you the options that are enabled by default You can check options to make them active or uncheck them to make them inactive When you have set up the spell check options that you want to use click on OK The new set of options becomes active immediately You do not need to quit the Spell Checker first Spell Options E 1 Ignore words with numbers e g wind2 2 Ignore capitalized words e g Inscriber 3 Ignore words in all caps e g CPU 40 Ignore words with mized case e g WinNT IW 5 Case sensitive IY E Match case in replacements W 7 Report double words e g had had 6 Allow ad hoc concatenation of words e g for German W 9 Look for two word suggestions e g acar gt a car W 10 Typographical Suggestions m Iv 13 Reset OF Phonetic Suggestions Split contracted words Split hyphenated words Cancel You can click on Reset on the Spell Options dialog to reset the options to their default state Spell Check a Layout l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and type the following text on the layout including the spelling mistakes Thies is a test of the spell cheking system
165. a pop up box To remove a logo from the Logo Map you must undefine it Click and drag the logo you wish to undefine off the Logos Tab and confirm your action Removing unused logos from a layout template reduces load time Add Logos to the Layout Double Byte and Glyph Processed Logos The Logo tab shows 24 bit thumbnails of the logos so alpha areas are not visible Alpha areas only become visible when you insert the logo in a layout You can add logos to the layout as either text or graphic objects Text and graphic logos differ in two basic ways e the type of shadow and edging you can apply to the object the way you can position the object in a layout See Logo Shadow and Edging on page 152 for details If you are using glyph processing or a double byte system logos cannot be inserted as text The methods and tools for sizing and positioning a logo are determined by its object type If you insert a logo as a text object it is added to the current line of text and scaled to fit the current height and width settings The logo can then be modified and positioned as part of the text line Logos that are used as text objects are always part of a line of text and behave like standard text characters To insert a logo as a text object click on the line where you want to add the logo and then click on the logo on the Logo tab You can only add logos as text objects using the Classic type style If you insert a logo as a graph
166. a rC Eor iaa EKE 255 Color correction 00086 228 255 COTEEAS AES 264 ChOP PUNO ection trtecienrsdtenascssstanee 218 CUIVES ost Mern aneiuineeunsnne 255 Edi haii aa 250 Exporting rendered ccaihsvchisareradsaeeses 37 PIPES ETE aasate ag akon 68 220 254 POKE enea olen noatiuiass 218 PRECTOTIMING scciacashecsnasvoonany convene 246 E a EAEE S 228 255 Logo Compose in CG ssssssssssssesse 237 MOVING incoar 246 POSMIONIN Piessens 246 LR io EE ET A S 262 RESIDE 495 wenes seeedeg ae Aeveaeas 262 Retouching enn anina 228 250 ROTATIONS cunea 246 Saving a gta siyveenecarnncuntsay canes 223 SALMO AEAT A E 246 S LETE EEEE E EET 231 SZO aote a 246 SKEW NE aE E 246 Transforming arnee 246 Vector based sviccavsessectonsenasyes 237 262 e E N E EAS 262 VIEW SEmi 226 Image background sssssessessessesssssessse 68 Alpha information ssssssssssssseressesee 68 Filelocatiinsenuisinnanaann 68 Image background continued OVELVICW eeeececcccccesesececceeeeees 62 63 SIZE TOE Otero aceasta 68 IMAGE Doken 68 Image Editing tools ee eeeeeeeseeeeee 228 BLU e te rceervdcusiuateubnceiva 250 Bitlis tecasuaitausce teesese wos eansausocgaass sees 250 COTE ranea 250 Clone Piee a 250 Dodot aiina 250 Luminance Add sseseseeseesseseseseese 250 Luminance Subtract sssesseseseseese 250 OFSET o etoctentimernanons 250 Saturation Add ssssseseesessereseesee 250 Saturation Subtract s cededevesndedvenseee 250 SEAE a S hen aais
167. a tab and set the Softness to 90 When you paint with this brush the workspace to pan the image your get very soft strokes with highly anti aliased edges 4 Switch to the View tab and select 100 from the 9 Select the Hard Edge style from the Brush tab and paint with Zoom drop down list to return to the original view this brush The brush strokes are no longer soft The Hard Edge 5 Select the Alpha Add tool from the Tool palette and ad paint a bit style ignores the Sottness value and creates sharper edges Logo Compose 233 Setting Brush Attributes Brush characteristics help define and accentuate the behavior of all brush based tools You may find that some settings look great for certain tools but need to be modified for others Brushes have six attributes size spacing softness angle aspect and speed size HBE Spacing Eee softness jiso Angle joo Aspect E m reset spees 57 Brush Preview Cursor The Brush Preview cursor can be one of your greatest assets when experimenting with brush characteristics It lets you see the effects of a the current brush settings before you make any changes to your image The Brush Preview cursor is enabled by default To disable this option switch to the View tab and clear the Brush Preview Cursor checkbox Size The Size attribute specifies the overall size of the brush in pixels The size of the brush affects painting speed Spacing The Spacing attri
168. ab constrained to non tab constrained Hold down CTRL and drag the line toward the top left of the layout until the Baseline value is 175 and the Left edge value is 100 Press CTRL TAB to change the text line from non tab constrained to tab constrained Using the keyboard change the Baseline value to 100 The brackets surrounding the text line remain the same Using the keyboard change the Lett edge value to 140 The brackets surrounding the text line change to a rectangular box When you adjust the Left edge value CG automatically changes the line to non tab constrained Non Tab Constrained Tab Constrained CG 117 Moving Text Lines CG provides you with a number of advanced text positioning tools that let you move groups of text lines as a unit use the mouse to move and resize text lines and use the arrow keys to accurately position individual text lines Move Groups of Text Lines Swap Lines Nudge Text Lines 118 CG Text lines are individual objects but you can link some text lines in your layout using Locked Lines Locked Lines groups lines so that you can move several lines at once To enable Locked Lines select Element gt Constrain Locked Lines If Locked Lines is not enabled each line is repositioned separately when you insert a new line delete a line or move a line to a new position If Locked Lines is enabled lines that follow the repositioned line are moved in relation to it The
169. abase ceii aaa 81 of graphic objects sairsscnnsasecreceunaysles 146 OPARCIE 67 SHAG OW a A 88 Size amp Attributes tab 77 90 138 SIZE TOIL EEE AEE E A 68 Size Edge 10 Edges type style 110 SIZING eiaa r nerd esgdur in uninaies 231 CATV AG ena 231 IMAGE E AS E E 231 LOGOS IEO aa AEE 151 OD e erien 246 262 TEXTES miia a 130 137 KEWAT eai aA 246 Slanted Text antecedents 76 Sia Cap Sune a 76 79 Small Crosshairsssscssssssvssssessenseetewasess 258 Smoothing selection seeeeeeeeeees 244 SMPTE color bars dx deesseenturntnneti cere 267 Soft edge buildup sseesecorssdestysviecteciaant 233 SOU SAC ON raadas Aa 88 Soffiiess Valie srein neoninis 89 Softening Selection sssessssssssseessese 244 SOMMESS n ven 52 54 Pros ssvsatbsenansaiaeaqiaavaneniuvpidenrnade 234 TiN TAY OULS Syiaehnsgentoannestnidedvarseeweayenens 55 Solid Blend box cccccceseeeeeeee 65 96 SOURCE PONE Maicitvate Mase eed 252 DEMING ea 292 Spacing between characters 6 79 Spacing Drusi esanian 234 SpecialichargcterS cinkani 82 in News Edit tables 163 164 DC Oe in OAN 52 55 193 Changing during takes 195 Decrement oirinn a 193 Taere meni anseia tiea 193 oT E E TT 234 OE CLAW AEE S 55 OOla 92 Regulating aasgieren 52 55 Spellcheck asnan 126 TiC O E E cep aeandebs cerertantce 126 SPlLMe CURVE snae 140 141 TOXL A TE E 124 Satare Bris inanioenir enoa a 233 Sg are PINES
170. ace are visible However if you make the face semi transparent the edge layer is visible under the face Outline Edges Outline edging is a hard edged line around each character Different edge values change the way your Ourttl IN characters look For example an outline edge value of 1 is often used to define characters against a background O win qd The example to the right uses edge values of one three and nine If you set the edge value to 0 the edge layer disappears gm CG only creates an edge layer for a character when at least one pixel is visible beyond the face of the character omine Glow Edges Glow edging is a softer edge that fades to semi transparent at its outer limits creating a fuzzy look around the characters The example to the right uses edge values of one three and nine O Und ine As with outline edges an edge value of 0 causes the edge layer to disappear You can create interesting effects with glow edges by changing the edge sizes on individual characters GG Embossed Edges 3D Text Edges Embossed edging makes characters appear pushed out from the background To create a successful embossed effect the face color and edge colors must be carefully matched to the background color To create an embossed edge you must select Emboss from the edge type drop down list Now match the face and edge colors with the background You can add a color blend to the edge so that t
171. acity continued Drusius taia ty vols 232 Pilet inn 255 of SCICCHOM cops ssvaeesducdsorstenapeaiesines 240 of transformation eeeeeeeeeees 249 TEE aa 233 Tool Sena R NE NE 233 Open mne Fle Siiner enean 230 Opening job TMCS ssesteetactedasseteniees 18 Options Color aeaii 96 Adjusting Bevel color s sssssssessesee 104 BOVEWNG TER icistvincsieentendatiienrn 104 Organizing Event Lists eeeeeees 180 Other type sles tune netics 86 QUE POMS ieie aaa 192 CHANGING xssertstomans aiaa 179 QUICK KEYS sesten wenidurermrenersiactiaianicss 210 DEMING shimano an aseus 186 193 Timecode Snee a 200 TRIS CCL AV PES innen 197 PPM EGMOR stucyentouttnet puonsatesanoutiateas 206 Outline CASE Saona 90 106 Outlined only ma kiceat aici 144 OU UEP SNEEN E E acces OT 24 TCG Steere saa E E 24 LO VICE O 184 OValierctcten nutten RAN 140 Overlay background sass scsustenienceerinrs nays 62 Overlay TEVedliotis spusecaterernneneruaneas 5l OVETV eW iuproinsn aa 10 OL D E E T 34 OL Frame Gra Deote aanne 218 of Logo COMPOSE wcisnac 226 Of SCQUCH CEN r 176 P Packed TONIS annta 8l Packed ODS unanioienananeun aa 19 TrueType fonts in sssseseessessesseseeses 8l Page Held yannan 120 Page seisce enaa 22 Page based crawls seeseeseeseeeees 55 Painting with alpha sseesessssesesssessese 236 PAD eios as aaa a 95 COMPGIIEE TOT esae o aaa 28 PAL VIGCO nnna 259 263 Illegal color values eseeeeeeeeees 95 PALE UEC nana ce or tustncneenaneo
172. aea 242 SCAU MING 55 seers cas seornnn esucasecansceecaes 242 Selec Hoan a 240 245 AJINE O ssimecncessaiavsnmeinarsarens 243 Mlote E 244 Channel sesteensidaananiin 240 260 Compe reesen enaar aS 244 CONTENTS iiaea E 240 Contraciin anian 244 EX PaNdillG ccc rvatemrnganns 244 Export contents csscsstewasten 240 241 EXPORUMNG sconet 231 240 241 HIG AIE E E 240 Import contents ssesessessesersesesee 240 Mapori eina 231 240 Til Generol ooga i 228 Vinten SOC tim wit hirisanienirena 243 TAY CLUS a 244 Tavis DE esra avetuaseoeeee 244 Selections continued LA VED E E E NE 240 MARITE aratan a ates 242 Marchine aM Sainan 240 Marg Ese ANAR 240 Marquee See also Selections 240 MOVE enan 243 OPON S oenen een 244 Selecta nipun naa 244 STOLTI AT EEA A E E TE 244 S leuna a 243 SMO esis 244 Subtracting from ssessesessesssssessese 243 Transformations sisendid 246 VSD a 244 SEMIELANSPaTency cosseih tenorra 98 Sending objects to back 145 149 Sending objects to front eee 149 SEVEN COs auc veces E 180 RWIS ecean 179 Seguence TERE Mes urnniinanno aso 37 Sequencen anad 175 215 COMCE DUS na seen decvecveae 178 Displaying COlOLS seeseeseeeeees 214 Event List renren an 176 Getting Started cucksaruoceracserseasoess 178 Interface Overview scisussscsvexiuesscroans 176 Meis nanenane aona 179 OVERVIEW niarren a 176 Prelec hce Sn a n 214 Tips and Tricks oreinen 212 SEQUENCER TADS onreine et 177 EVeNCECHOT ne
173. age 96 and Using Transparency on page 98 for details A gradient is a smooth transition from one color to another color You can use any of the color selection methods to select the top and bottom colors for a gradient When you work with gradients remember that the color gradient values also apply to transparency You can combine color and transparency gradients and angles as long as you remember that gradient position and angle values are applied to both color and transparency gradients You can change the amount of the gradient as well as the angle of the gradient See Working with Classic Color Gradients on page 96 for details The Angle value rotates the color gradient by up to 90 degrees negative or positive Gradient angles are defined in one degree increments If you set the Angle value to 90 degrees your gradient becomes horizontal moving from left to right instead of from top to bottom You can select Radial or Linear fill to apply a different type of gradient or more than one gradient to an object Click on the Linear Radial Fill cycle button to cycle between the gradient types fa Top pog ka Top 100 Bottom jo Bottom 0 Angle 20 Angle 20 Linear IE Radial 3 If you select Radial the top color appears in the center of the object and the bottom color appears at the edge of the object with the gradient occurring in a circular pattern If you select Linear the top color appears at t
174. age is Selection therefore more affected by the Alpha Add tool click on the Image as Selection button on the Select tab to call the Select Channel dialog 14 Press CIRL Z to undo the Alpha Add tool and call the Select Channel dialog This time select the blue channel 8 Select the Red Channel radio button and look at the grayscale image in the 15 Press CIRL X to delete all the blue pixels The blue square Selected Channel window The circle appears completely white Its pixels only contain red so it is completely selected The star and egg contain some red so they are partly selected and appear grey Selected channel disappears but the star and egg are still partially visible because they also contain red and green Logo Compose 261 Understanding Video Images When editing any image you need to take many variables into account including the constraints and benefits of the medium you are working in Computers have two general image types vector and bitmap each with their own limitations Video like any other medium has its peculiarities and design challenges Vector Based Images Raster Images Resize Bitmaps Design Challenges 262 Logo Compose In vector based images most draw objects are described mathematically In CG most objects are vector based In many well known vector based programs like Corel Draw Freehand and Illustrator you can tell when an object is vector based by the aliased ed
175. ages of a page based crawl When you switch to the next page CG remembers the position of the first text line on the previous crawl page and positions the first text line of the new page at the same place Any object such as a logo inserted on the first page of a page based crawl will appear on all subsequent pages Use Softness in a Crawl Layout This procedure explains how to use Softness values with crawls but 3 Click on the Settings button on the CG toolbar Set the left the same techniques apply to using Sottness values with rolls border to 25 set the right border to 70 set the left Softness value to 25 set the right Softness value to 75 and set 1 Select the Documentation Template trom the Templates registry in the CG toolbar and select Crawl as the layout type from the the Frames fo 500 Layout Type drop down list 2 Click between the square brackets in the layout and enter the Click on Take to do a take of the crawl and see what effect the different Softness values have on the appearance of your text following line of text on one line 5 Now set the left Softness value to zero and set the right Softness value to zero This line of text shows you that a crawl layout does not 6 Click on Take to do a take of the crawl and see how your text automatically wrap words to the next line looks without any Softness values CG 55 56 Using Clocks A clock layout type lets you add a realtime digital clock to a layo
176. aie 34 35 Flotin annann 35 PORMAtUING aimsire iiis 34 40 Palett pop Ups scscestatesaat onitan 232 Panera a erenkead 232 258 Pars ora layon Eserin 46 Past NE sea a 71 129 183 EVENS reae 182 Graphic oDject Sasano nini 144 Ter stadeuoave ae a 71 Path EXE o I E tennant aks 124 Patere a 67 Back StOund diniin niae 67 Combining with color eee 67 Creating in Logo Compose 229 E S aE E E T E 67 D1 ZC EIERE T EA EE AES 67 PAUSE EEEE 195 Panse Take Seinai ea 195 PC ClOCK ESS 8 aa a 196 197 CONMPUTING 2x stheass ioectinene evden 198 UY DE E EP E T 196 Perspective ne aenennennna i 249 AAIE inn Sieg a 246 Adding to transformations 249 PGM DUON saeia 15 Picking Color siccsnsseeerceniveeznnned 64 PIX s s0 senpivea sinter eaan 263 ASPECT TAO eaea eei 259 263 Rectangular PixelSosssspecsaariusr econ 263 PE maa ctnaa tated ences tetes 263 SUU Ene S 263 PES A wacneee mene s Ronmroscamemcemines 47 Clap NIC AA AEE E OT 47 T etna KiE A 47 Play Dire nae 184 PAY ISU E E E T 12 Ce uaea aA 12 Deseibed arman a 177 Event DUMDer icense iunte 177 Liye UDCGIES eai 203 OVEN Wenona aA 12 Preview OPUOMS wcsoicnssedasenesennsGtins 13 Pitan seep N ds 22 Rendered file name s assisans sivcvee 177 Take OPU Sa 13 Updating templates in 157 Playback speed pvciiinaveuivinidieliebinil ae 195 Playing subtitle files tee eeeeseeeee 172 PlUpe test Pattern acccswtennuceineees 267 POLSON sucinus a 140 141 Pop UPS ressnouneo
177. al Gradient 5 Click and release the mouse button in the Logo Compose tool fades heii to video na the center of the workspace without dragging This fills the image with alpha in circle outwards i ne way aai Apii i me 10 Hold down the ALT key and apply a radial gradient The 6 Click in the image while holding down the ALT key to restore gradient now fades to video toward the middle of the circle oo a 11 Change the Opacity value to vary the amount of transparency 7 Click and drag the Alpha Linear Gradient tool in the image The or opacity of your gradients For example set Opacity to 50 to image maintains its opacity where you start the gradient and fill with 50 alpha Logo Compose 239 Understanding Selections In Logo Compose you can edit an entire image at once or you can specify which areas of the image you wish to work on To work only on a particular area of an image you must first select it Once you have made a selection you can import export modify and move the selection outline or you can modify transform and apply filters to the selection contents Selection Tools There are ten tools you can use to make selections in Logo Compose These are available on the Tool palette or E E C Q from the right click menu Each tool offers a unique way ais a a of making a selection See Using the Selection Tools on page 242 for details Select Tab Once you have made a selection there are many ways to modify it with the
178. al type styles eeeeeeeeee 86 Advanced features seeeeeeeee 124 Aligning to tab stops eeeeeeeees 122 AD PEATANCE nenm niaan 72 Baseline cccccccseeeeeeeee 117 120 121 Basic E E vee S 76 Bevel COlOT Mecunteunsentsceiototeaieralveanes 104 Bevel I tansparencyisiavsscavevetuetenese 104 BOVE IVE naa 104 Body Dep thitiasjrecsssenersvonsentveuenvrace 107 DOKE entan anaia aA 124 CHANGING palh iarsiu 124 Classi pesien 86 Color GLOUD vssscwonssiededusmecwestpatuivensnns 72 Control points vices sees etewiarvesss 124 Creating crawl file sc caaevasavstics 129 Creating roll ile c i iicateasmeslanans 128 Depi ieai 102 Distort yicor gence cannes 100 Draco ino aneto aas 116 Edge S Shee innn nnn 112 Edge Over Tatt ssiusiiaenin atan 108 Edge size 10 Edges type style 110 Ede UDG rites suvpaeeestiadngceaaiaminiee 90 Embellished sareetan 108 Embossededge ossirorsininaiiiiia 91 EMET ot E 46 Text continued F ACOs E E E 108 Face DEP tie enna 107 Format Sample sessessssssesseesssse 40 72 Formatting speitassyiancetane 71 74 78 E E E A 114 Glow edo Ernia 90 Grab Naridleszvsssieviruvemaientendd eis i 124 Mie hiehaa 102 112 Importi nnna 128 Importing for craWl seess 129 Importing for roll l s 128 Knockout to background 97 LAV CLS E E EAN 34 117 Eia EE 117 120 Local FOL MALIN Tsiis tersine 75 Locked INE seian a 118 LOBOS inaa aise rate 152 Manipulating sie iasesnieecsnns 71 116 MATER sty ca
179. all images to disk disregarding the render location set in Sequencer e this option has been permanently disabled e the frame buffer start up screen is not displayed on program launch e image pixels are displayed on your computer screen as a 1 1 ratio instead of video correct 4 3 or 16 9 Overview 29 30 Cache Preferences The settings on the Cache tab allow you to set the amount of RAM available for the database caches which affect system performance Once your system is configured you should not have to change these settings Maximum Size Defaults Cache Statistics Overview The modifiable fields on the Cache tab are the Maximum Size for the Record Cache and the Node Cache Use this field to allot the amount of RAM available to each cache The Record and Node Caches are mirrored caches For every megabyte of space allotted in the Maximum Size fields the caches actually use up two megabytes of system RAM Because of this it may be best to keep your cache sizes as small as possible Increasing cache size uses up more system RAM without appreciably improving system performance of CG The following table provides recommended values based on system RAM Record Cache Node Cache RAM You can reset your caches back to the default sizes with the Default button The defaults are the optimal sizes based on system RAM The non modifiable fields below the Maximum Size fields display the Record and Node Cache statis
180. ance and chrominance values Contrast with Component Video Compositing In CG Manipulates the transparency of an object based on the colors in the textures The selected channel acts as a mask for the alpha channel For example if you composite using red the amount of red in a pixel determines how transparent the pixel becomes Control Point In CG Point on a polygon or spline that changes an object s shape A single spline or polygon can contain up to 64 control points Polygon control points define an object s boundaries while spline control points define tangents to the curve Corner Logo A logo found in a corner of the screen generally for the purposes of corporate identification or program rating Corner logos are also known as video bugs Crawl In CG and Sequencer A layout or transition in which text appears on a single line and moves horizontally from one side of the screen to the other You can add additional lines of text to a crawl but each line behaves independently In Sequencer a crawl is recognized as an effect event See also Layout Type Crop In Logo Compose Cuts off the edges of an image and canvas reducing its size Cycle Checkbox In Sequencer An option that enables event list looping You can only loop an entire event list not part of an event list D Default Template In CG The template initially used for all new layouts most commonly a blank template with standard set
181. and the sync options in the frame buffer configuration software When you have more than one frame buffer installed you can perform a grab from any frame buffer board Use the Program palette to select the board If you want to limit grab capability to one board only edit Inscribe ini and change the FrameGrabOnBoards entry in the Configuration section By default this entry is set to 0 which enables frame grabs from any board If you want to limit grabs to one particular board change this value to 1 2 or 3 to match the board you want to grab from For example to limit grabs to board 2 set FrameGrabOn Boards to 2 Configuration FrameGrabOnBoards 2 By default Frame Grab does not initialize the current board to Live when you switch to the Frame Grab module This means that the output on the channel is not disrupted until you click on the Live button For convenience you can set up your system to automatically initialize the board to Live when you switch to Frame Grab Change the FrameGrabInitLive value in Inscribe ini to 1 instead of the default value of 0 Configuration FrameGrablnitLive 1 Save an Image Save a Grab to a File Save a Grab to the Clipboard Add a Grab to the Scrapbook Save a Frame Grab Once you have grabbed an image in Frame Grab there are four ways to save it Save the grabbed image to a file Copy the grabbed image to the Clipboard for use with other applications Put the grabbed image in the
182. anel In CG A rectangle with bevels on the top and bottom edges Horizontal Risetime Filter In Logo Compose A video cleanup filter that blurs each scan line when adjacent pixels have very different luminances in the horizontal direction This filter reduces the flicker that would be caused by such sharp differences in luminance HSV Color Model A color model that describes colors in terms of hue saturation and value Pure colors hues are measured in degrees from red at 0 degrees through blue to magenta at 359 degrees Decreasing the saturation without changing the value is the same as adding white pigment to a pure color Decreasing the value without changing the saturation is the same as adding black pigment to a pure color Hue A numeric representation of a pure color ina particular color model See also HLS Color Model and HSV Color Model Ignore Alpha In CG An option on the Background tab that strips the alpha information from an imported bitmap image Illuminator Pro A brand of frame buffer Image In CG Images can be used as logos textures and backgrounds In Frame Grab You can grab an image from a video feed In Logo Compose You can edit and add alpha to an image Image Alpha See Alpha Channel Image Attributes A list of characteristics about a source file such as its resolution file size name and keywords Image Capture See Frame Grab Image Date The creation or last modif
183. ansparency value to 45 Switch to the graphic layer click 2 on the Size amp Attributes tab and yee change the Vertical value to 100 vertical 100 and the Horizontal value to 400 Select Rectangle from the Graphic Shape drop down list and click on the View tab Now change the Baseline to 20 and the left edge to 17 n Click between the brackets and type the line Report Heading 7 Select the Classic type style from the Type Style section Select Style 9 from the Formatting palette hold down CTRL and click on the rectangle 8 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab and use the Color Picker to select the background color as the face color of the rectangle Now Horizontal 400 change the Top transparency value to 60 and the Bottom transparency value to 80 9 Switch to the text layer and change the Bottom transparency value to 60 T fy Eottom 0 oj fal Topfeo CG 99 Using Additional Type Style Settings You can apply very specific and complex formatting to your text using the advanced type style options You can distort the width and height of characters Sheen can be applied to both face and edge and often depth Apply bevels using the Color Options drop down list Set Multiple Colors You can apply either multiple colors and individual transparency or textures with and Transparency transparency and variable color tinting to text elements using the Color Picker options or Texture options
184. aphic the Image you ust saved and double click on the button displays the last captured image on AIDA file icon to view it the output monitor Switch back to CG S grab another frame in Frame Grab 5 Right click on the Scrapbook and select Add from the menu and click on the Save Grab to Clipboard button The captured image now appears in the Scrapbook To use the 10 Switch to an image editor and select Paste from the Edit image from any other CG S module right click on the menu Your frame grab is inserted into the image Scrapbook and select Use from the menu Frame Grab 223 224 Frame Grab Logo Compose Logo Compose is a full featured image manipulation application that lets you edit retouch and add alpha to bitmap images and Logo Compose files The sophisticated tools in Logo Compose make it easy to clean up logos and images With a variety of filters you can create effects quickly and easily Logo Compose also makes it easy to create textures for use in CG In this Section Logo Compose Concepts 226 229 Filters and lextures si 22acsusceicwds 254 257 Working with Files 200 230 231 Viewing your Images iicsanatacwiess 258 259 Tools and Brushes 05ccavhcueetesces 232 235 Image Channels sicacsianorrenerpa ori 260 261 Logos and Alpha tout cia tawsereoss eaes 236 239 Working with Video Images 262 267 Selections and Transformations 240 249 Short CUDKEVS crcdeicitaeeata
185. aptured image are known as video cleanup filters Other filters that manipulate modify and refine your image in complex ways include alpha adjustment filters color adjustment filters distortion filters and legalize filters Alpha filters work only on one channel of an image while the others affect the entire image Not all filters are available in all modules First In Point In Sequencer The specified starting frame for a group Flat Edging In CG An edging option for graphic objects Flat edging gives objects flat beveled edges Font In CG A complete set of type of one face or style In CG S Inscriber recommends you use TrueType fonts Font Height See Character Height Font Manager In CG An application that builds and maintains the Inscriber font database You can use the Font Manager to convert TrueType fonts to Inscriber fonts Footprint Removal Field Filters In CG and Frame Grab Video cleanup filters that combine the average field filters and adaptive field filters First the average field filter is applied to the selected field then the adaptive field filter is applied to the other field 280 Glossary Foreground In CG The layers where text and graphics appear as opposed to background where the video source image color or pattern appears See also Face Contrast with Background Color Format Sample In CG A sample of what the current style and color formatting options look like w
186. are ignored Overlapping timecodes are also resolved to non overlapping timecodes Create a Subtitle File Using Formatting Codes 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 24 the slings and arrows of outrageous fortune drop down list on the CG toolbar and select Style 10 from the or to take arms against a sea of troubles Formatting palette 2 Switch to the View tab and change the Baseline value to 385 24 and by opposing end them 6 Save the file as Hamlet txt You are overwriting the old file 3 Select File Registy C6 Layouts and click on Add 7 n CG S select the subtitle template you created and select 4 Change the template number to 150 and the template name to File Import mport Text File Subtitle template then click on Load and then Close Changing 8 Select Hamlet txt and check the Subtitle Format radio button the template number overwrites the a previous Subtitle template 5 Select Programs Accessories Notepad from the Start menu and enter the following text into Notepad Make sure that there Subtitle Format Text Formatted Text Plain Click on OK Each Subtitle page uses a different style is a blank line between each line of text 2 To be or not to be that is the question 32 Whether tis nobler in the mind to suffer CG 174 CG Sequencer Sequencer is an output organizer that manages edits and outputs a series of events In this module yo
187. ate its face color Logo Image Files Logo Shadow and Edging 152 G CG can use most standard types of image files as logos Graphic object Graphic object The Files of Type drop down list on the Open dialog gives tif file Igo file you a comprehensive list of the graphic filetypes you can gt m use You can also use Logo Compose to convert any of these file types to go files The lgo format is an Inscriber format designed specifically for logos Files in lgo format give you more control over the edges and shadows than files in other graphic formats l Text object Text object The graphic to the right shows you differences between tif file Igo file the Inscriber logo format and a standard graphic format tif and how logos are handled differently depending on whether they are used as graphic objects or as text objects When you insert a logo as a graphic object it is still a 32 bit image with its alpha levels maintained As you can see in the graphic above the graphic file type and the way the logo is added to the layout are the two factors that determine how the shadows and edges are applied The following table expands on the information in the above graphic File Type Object Type Shadow Properties Edge Properties Inscriber text object shadow follows edge follows object format object edges edges non Inscriber textobject shadow follows edge follows format bounding box edges bounding box edges Inscr
188. ave a resource fork you can use the Pict Identifier utility to add a resource fork to the PICT file To add a resource fork find the PictIdentifier2 sit file in the CGS Utilities folder Copy this file to a Macintosh and unpack it using Stuffit In CG S select File Export Export Image to export your layout as a PICT Transfer the PICT file to a Macintosh In the Finder drag the PICT file onto the Pict Identifier application program A collection of Word 7 0 macros are included with CG S to let you quickly convert PowerPoint 7 0 presentations and Word files into a text format readable by CG You can also insert Inscriber formatting characters in these files Packed jobs are a way of collecting all of the images fonts and settings for a job The packed job format is intended as a way to archive or transfer entire jobs To save a play list as a packed job select File gt Save As and then select Inscriber Packed File as your Save as type option Saving a play list as a packed job saves all of your logos textures bitmaps fonts and layout settings for each layout in a single large file Packed job files can become quite large and are only useful for archiving purposes and for transfer over a network If you want to export a single layout for transfer to another computer use File Export Export ICG File instead Where possible TrueType fonts are also saved with the packed jobs However all TrueType fonts have an embeddability
189. ayers which let you create complex displays of overlapping text You can see what is on each layer or move to different layers by selecting Element Layer Control Layer List and then clicking on the layer you want to move to You can also switch to the active layer from the View tab s Layer value field and from the Layer List dialog You can move text to another layer using the mouse Hold down CTRL SHIFT and drag the mouse pointer up or down The mouse pointer changes to a double headed arrow with the number of the current text layer on the bottom right side of the cursor Release the mouse button when the changes to the layer you want to move the text line to You can also select Element Layer Control gt Push or Pull Push moves text one layer down from 3 to 2 Pull moves text one layer up from 3 to 4 Position Text Lines l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and type some text on the first line Switch to the View tab and make sure that the Tab Stops checkbox is checked Hold down CTRL and drag the line toward the top of the layout until the Baseline value is 60 and place the cursor at the beginning of the text line Press TAB twice The line should be center aligned to the third tab stop Hold down CTRL and drag the line toward the bottom of the layout until the Baseline value is 275 Hold down CTRL and press TAB to change the text line from t
190. ayouts or Nem Ctrl M File gt Registry gt News Edit Tables ae riled Selecting one of these commands ae Cries displays the main dialog for Save As managing the contents of a registry Delete Each registry is managed separately Registi ee nee although the registry dialog looks Eoi A ae Ea eie the same for each registry See Export gt Using Templates on page 156 for details on managing the Templates registry See Using the News Edit Registry on page 166 for details on managing the News Edit registry When you first begin using CG the Templates registry contains the standard layouts shipped with CG S and the News Edit registry contains the 0 Import Text table Note that if you reinstall CG S in an existing folder your registry settings will not change If you want to use registry settings available with a new release of CG S you must install in a new empty folder You can delete any templates or news edit tables from the registries If you delete the default template from the Templates registry CG creates a new default template that is different from the original template shipped with CG S You can access the templates stored in the Templates registry drop down list on the CG control bar See the information below for an overview of using templates or Understanding Templates on page 154 for details on using templates You can access the News Edit tables stored in the news edit registry
191. b and paint over the N Press CIRL Z to undo the Dodge tool Press CIRL Y to redo it Press CTRL C to copy the N then press CTRL V to paste it Press CIRL SHIFT ALT V to select the Move tool and move the pasted N toward the top of the image Press CTRL SHIFT C to crop to the selected N Logo Compose 269 270 Logo Compose Glossary Bjos 2 ten A Qyoezuyh Qjozza h Qjozzash Qjo d 2D See Two Dimensional Space 3D See Three Dimensional Space 10 Edges In CG One of seven available type styles containing face up to ten edges shadow and depth text elements eps The most common form of a vector based image Objects in vector based images are described mathematically based on various specified points such as the four corner points of a rectangle Ant See Inscriber Fonts ipt An Inscriber image format for files created in Paint ipt files are 32 bit and contain alpha information Igo An Inscriber image format for 1 16 or 32 bit images with alpha tf See TrueType Fonts via An Inscriber animation format Created by FX and Viabuilder exe A Adaptive Field Filters In CG Frame Grab and Logo Compose Video cleanup filters that modify the luminance values for each pixel on even or odd numbered scan lines based on the luminance values for the pixels directly above and below 272 Glossary Alpha Transparency in video images In Logo Compose the alpha channel co
192. ber of pixels added to text edges e type of edge applied to text Size amp Attributes Tab Color amp Texture Tab Identify Text Style and Color Groups Work with Text The options in the previous table are set on the Size amp Attributes tab and the Color amp Texture tab The Size amp Attributes tab is divided into two sections Type Specs and Type Styles Type Specs control the face options and Type Styles lists type styles that contain preset edging and shadow options that you can customize You can cycle between text elements for all type styles using the Color amp Texture tab Click the text element cycle button to move between text elements Click the left mouse button to move forward through the elements and click the right mouse button to move back through the elements The graphic below shows you Embellished s four text elements Text Element Cycle Button Depth E Depth You can also toggle between the Color Picker and Texture options Click on the color texture toggle to switch between the Color Picker and Texture options The flashing cursor marks the text insertion point which can appear between two square brackets or inside a rectangle You can place the insertion point on any line by clicking on the line All text belongs to either a style or a color group You can tell what kind of group a line of text belongs to by looking at the vertical lines that surround the current text line If
193. ber of reporters or locations News Edit is primarily suited for near online situations and offline uses where text is fairly static Inscriber RTX is more suitable for real time data updates If you are in online mode any changes you make are rendered as soon as you make them In both online and offline situations News Edit reduces text entry by letting you predefine text strings and select them from a list rather than repeatedly typing in the same information This way you only have to check your text for accuracy and correct spelling once rather than each time you type in a line News Edit can be a powerful tool once you understand how it functions The first time you use News Edit follow this process e create tables of commonly used text in a text editor and spell check them e create a standard template in CG e import tables into CG e save tables in the News Edit registry e associate imported lists with particular lines in the template e save the template in the Templates registry Once you have created your template and lists and associated the lists with the template using News Edit follows these steps e click on a blank thumbnail on the Play List e select the News Edit template e select text lines on the template and then select list items from the News Edit tab You can create as many templates and lists as you want Any text line can be associated with any template See Using Templates on page 156 for deta
194. between CG S modules You can add any Frame Grab or CG image to the Scrapbook and work with it in Logo Compose or transfer any Logo Compose image to any other module via the Scrapbook See Working with Files on page 230 for details Logo Compose 227 228 Logo Compose Concepts In addition to alpha tools Logo Compose provides image editing tools transformation tools and filters for fast editing of the images you need to get online so you can use Logo Compose for more than just adding alpha to logos You can also use Logo Compose to perform color correction create textures for use in CG and retouch images Clean Up Logos and Add Alpha Retouch Images Make Selections Logo Compose If you use logos frequently cropping and removing image information from around logos or objects may be one of the most important reasons to use Logo Compose This task is often called logo clean up The sophisticated alpha tools in Logo Compose make cleaning up logos easy You can add alpha to small areas of your image or make whole areas of your image transparent These images can then be saved as Inscriber lgo format files and imported into CG as logos Logo Compose uses eight different tools for editing image alpha These tools are the Alpha Add Alpha Subtract Alpha Memory Alpha Fill Alpha Tolerance Fill Alpha Luminance Fill Alpha Linear Gradient Alpha Radial Gradient and the Alpha Memory tools See Working with Alpha Tools
195. bjects on the screen use the Next and Previous arrow buttons on the CG toolbar to move between objects CG cycles through the objects from the top to the bottom of the layout to Front and Send to Back Bring to Front moves the selected object to z the top of the stack Send to Back moves the selected object to the bottom of the stack See Transparency on page 148 for details on layering objects using the stack Two commands on the Element menu position objects in a stack Bring When you create arcs and E wedges they may not appear iia facing the desired direction f To change the side of the arc or wedge that is curved or cut off click on one corner of the object bounding box and drag it across the object to a new position The opposite corner is anchored as a pivot point The graphic to the right shows you what happens when you change the direction of an arc Original Arc New Ac upper lett handle dragged across bottom right handle By dragging the corner of an arc or wedge over itself you are creating a mirror image of the object flipped horizontally or vertically depending on which way you drag the corner You can use the Wedge tool to create lines at any angle To create a line use the Wedge tool to draw a wedge On the Size amp Attributes tab select the Outlined Only checkbox You can then adjust the edge value to change the thickness of the line Use Advanced Graphic Options l Select the Documenta
196. blends the colors in the texture image with the current color for the object element being textured If the face is blue that blue is combined with the colors in the texture image The degree of tinting depends on the color definition you select The tint follows a linear curve measured from a neutral color of 50 gray If you tint a texture using 50 gray the full colors of the texture are visible As the color definition moves away from 50 gray more and more of the selected color is visible The maximum tint value is about 65 Composite a Texture Apply Textures 1 Select the Documentation Template trom the Templates registry 7 Click on the Size radio button drop down list on the CG toolbar and place your cursor between the brackets and type the letter M You can use compositing to manipulate the transparency of the object based on the colors in the texture Compositing is available for Classic type styles only Compositing uses the red green or blue channel in the image to make part of the image transparent The selected channel masks out the alpha channel Select a channel to composite from the Compositing Type drop down list If you composite using red for example the amount of red in a pixel determines how transparent the pixel becomes A 100 red pixel is set to 0 transparent so no video shows through a 0 red pixel is set to100 transparent so the full video signal shows through The Invert checkbox reverses these map
197. brush based These tools act on the image in ways similar to a paint brush using settings from the Brush tab Logo Compose has sixteen default brushes but at any point you can redefine brush shapes and characteristics See Setting Brush Attributes on page 234 for details Wew Brush Select Transform Filter Tool Aipha subtract Size 50 F Spacing 2 Style Hard Edge z Softness 15 0 Tie maer Aspect EHE m Reset EEE iw C co ai m p T m Select a Brush Single Pixel Brush Elliptical Brush Rectangular Brush Brush Style Opacity Tablet Support In the Brush list click on the image of the brush you want to select If the brush is larger than the image Logo Compose displays the size factor The Single Pixel brushes are one pixel square but are anti aliased so they cover an area of at least three pixels The hard edge brush style offers the Q most precise single pixel brush The Elliptical brushes are the most used brushes in Logo Compose Elliptical brushes are good general purpose brushes For a nice soft brush select an Elliptical brush and change the Softness to 100 oe The Rectangular brushes are good for painting large areas They are also good for creating calligraphic effects and diamond patterns To create a good calligraphy brush select a rectangular brush change the Angle to 320 and the Aspect to 0 25 All brush based tools use a brush st
198. bute specifies the spacing Fai between brush marks as a percentage of the g eccccccccccce brush size You can modify this attribute to create s unique strokes Softness The Softness attribute specifies the softness of the brush edges The larger the value the greater the 1 y softness A value of 0 means no softness The Softness value is not used by the hard edge brush N style Aspect The Aspect attribute specifies the width of the brush as a factor of the brush width over brush z height When used in conjunction with the Angle attribute you can design brushes that create calligraphy effects By default the brush Aspect is corrected for the current video aspect ratio Circular stokes look circular and square strokes look square in Logo Compose and on video See Video Aspect Ratio on page 259 for details Angle The Angle attribute specifies the counter clockwise angle of the brush in degrees 0 to 359 N e ae Usually you change this attribute once you have changed the brush Aspect 234 Logo Compose Speed Change a Brush Visually Reset the Brushes The brush Speed attribute affects the speed at which Logo Compose calculates your brush stroke This attribute is dependent on the size of the brush The higher the setting the more calculations Logo Compose performs If you want to paint slowly lower Speed to smooth the stroke You can change the selected brush visually in the Brush window The
199. c characters in ANSI fonts A character usually has the same number in all fonts For example a is ANSI character 097 and is ANSI character 174 Use the Windows Character Map or the CG Character Map to find identification numbers Anti Aliasing Removes or avoids the jagged edges on curved and diagonal lines in text or graphic objects Anti aliasing works by interpolating pixels of an intermediate color along the edges of an object CG characters and various Logo Compose tools use anti aliasing Arc In CG A quarter of a circle or ellipse Two edges are flat and form a 90 angle the third side forms the arc Aspect Ratio The relationship between the width and height of an image determined by the shape of the individual pixels Changing the aspect ratio can distort the image for example it can turn a circle into an oval ATVista A brand of frame buffer Automatic Live Updates A Program Preview palette setting that automatically sends any changes you make directly to the channels enabled for live updates You can set the updates for the Program and Preview channels Average Field Filters In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab Video cleanup filters that compute new data for even or odd numbered scan lines by averaging each scan line with the line above Background In CG A pattern color image or incoming video signal Foreground objects such as text and graphics are placed on top of the bac
200. can add graphic objects to your subtitle template Any graphic objects are treated as size to fit bounding boxes and resized to fit around the text imported on each layout The example below shows you what happens when you import lines of various length on top of a rectangle in the template VOSS or perchancelto dream ayi there sithen b DEVO OX MANC Modiehtolsleep FO MUEL ASSN OCEN MEL CIEMS MEMOS If you want a static graphic object in your background that is not resized create a tga image and import it as a background image See Using Video and Image Backgrounds on page 68 for details A subtitle file is created outside of CG S generally in a text editor Subtitles can include the same format codes that News Edit Tables use See Subtitle File Types on page 168 for details on creating subtitle files for import into CG Before you import a subtitle file make sure you select your subtitle layout template from the template list on the CG toolbar To import a subtitle only or a timecoded subtitle file select File gt Import gt Import Text File Remember to select the Subtitle Format radio button If you do not select the Subtitle Format radio button your files are imported as rolls not as subtitles To import an EBU based subtitle file select File Import Import EBU Subtitle File In the Import Text dialog locate and select the file containing your subtitles and select the Subtitle Format radio button f S
201. can select any model at any time or switch from model to model at any time You may find that certain colors are easier to select with one model over another and switch back and forth depending on the color you want Color Model Basics In all three color models color definitions are the result of three Color Selector Color Slider values When you modify one value aerate the range of possible colors that can Jace lt Color Mode e 180 list be achieved using the other two a e Value Fields values changes so the color display Ts changes Use the Color Selector to Value Radio get close to the color definition you Buttons want and then change the three values numerically until you reach Color Selection Box Color Picker the specific color Hue Saturation and The HSV color definition model often appeals to artists and others who work with Value HSV pigments and describes colors in terms of tint hue shade value and tone saturation This model uses a cone shaped object to 6 define the color space Pure colors Hues 190 are defined with Saturation and Value at 100 Hues are measured in degrees Hue ranging from red at 0 through green and blue to magenta Saturation is measured from the center of the cone 0 to the outside 100 Colors can only be fully saturated when Value is 100 Decreasing the Saturation without changing the Value is like adding white pigment to a pure pigment color and moves the color from
202. ce Glossary 297 298 Glossary i Pt tes D3 i A ound eeceseesee ET etiam g Symbols Dae leS i 18 SCS TICS E E E 237 ACO PICS haa A 36 AIAG TES 3 caendsceuossaieuaasiubeouddeestudutes 18 230 DS ESTE 37 TEO ES erante aenea 152 230 USLY AE E E A E 36 T TONIS cisien haste eee inveuceoieens 80 Numerics Dat E E E 87 110 Displaying siruina 110 1009 videO ereaniennrnensee uuig 68 100 video background eseeeee 69 PGUDIG IMAGES or a 153 EDITIA SES urate itoneereitemncaiuniseevens 153 J2 DIC UMA SES din 152 260 OOOK areir 267 S DIE TIMA OE Serate e a sedeuns 260 A Absolute Corner Position 6 248 Accessing Trim Editor sees 206 ACTIVE chan nele 35 sh aA 227 PACING arosinu 250 Apia eaae EA 236 Depia 101 N R E ENEE 182 LOGOS nsn nn 150 Pers pec VE oana aaa 246 Ter eii N 130 LO LET O E TAE 85 LO selecHo idosa ra 243 Trans S eeen 186 Adding Depth to transformations 249 Additional type styles ssessssseseesessesee 86 Adjusting Bevel Transparency 104 ANONN 68 had ranean wae areaated 146 Graphic Objects issuri 146 Objects 10 01 1d mms rceacnsatgieriencasen 146 FAW SLOP So iste tn ete cove aeteieeet 122 TORU E T E 116 Textures ececcecccceeeeeeees 132 134 136 3a AEE I EE ca darensctecs 238 faa a LEDY DOEN EE T E ua 236 Channel 68 238 260 Channel displayed ssssneneeeeese 238 Chanel Tedlcvssesiatveavnamwatet 238 Cleaning UP aoia 228 3
203. ce to the time code reader Turn on the time code source 1 Run Timecode exe from the CG S folder Select the options that match your system configuration This program updates Inscribe ini with all the values required for time code access Start CG S and click on the Online Toggle button to put CG S in online mode CG S must be in online mode to read time codes Switch to Sequencer Make sure CG S is in online In Point mode Click on the Current Timecode button to start Reese ee 0 00 0 00 al reading the time codes If you do not see time codes see Troubleshooting Tips on page 210 Current Timecode Out Point From the Trigger Type drop down list in the group header select Time Code Set in and out points for the events in your Event List See Set Times Using a Time Code Source below for details The only thing you have to remember about running the Event List with time codes is to reset and run the time code source CG S waits for the time codes before it does anything If you start the job and are unable to run the time code source for any reason press the ESC key on the keyboard to stop the job If the time codes are running click on the Stop button to stop the job l 2 3 Reset the time code source before you attempt to run the Event List Click on the Run Job button Start the time code source Supported Time Code Readers Timecode exe CG S supports the following time code readers
204. cess Tube In CG An effect that presses two identical edges together to form the main body of each text character The resulting effect looks like a tubed bevel edge Only available with the Neon type style Tube Edging In CG An edging option for graphic objects Tube edging gives objects tubular beveled edges Tubed Bevel In CG An edging option with different effects depending on the current type style With the Embellished type style text displays tubular beveled edges using color and transparency settings Two Dimensional Space 2D In CG Workspace that incorporates height and width CG layouts created in 2D can be edited in three dimensions height width and depth in an animation application Type Face See Font Type Styles In CG Formatted text characters consisting of classic type style elements plus additional text elements including depth face depth body depth outline edge glow and tube The Color amp Texture tab adjusts format settings 296 Glossary U V Value The shade of a color Increasing or decreasing the value of a color is like adding or removing black pigment Value must be 100 for a color to be fully saturated When value is 0 the color is completely black See also HSV Color Model and HLS Color Model Vector Based Image See eps Vectorscope A device used to adjust the color vectors when calibrating the frame buffer Vertical Blanking Interval VBI Th
205. characters Any values that you change in this section of the tab are immediately reflected in your layout arial TT E u Browse 7 Height 45 m Leading E wiata 105 Kermingjoe z Rotation o Slant 0 sml Caps 0 Select a Font The Font drop down list includes all fonts available for your layouts See Understanding Fonts on page 80 for details on fonts Font Attributes When you are working with Inscriber fnt fonts the Bold option in the Type a Specs section changes to the High Quality option to let you smooth out rough or jagged edges at large font sizes You can also apply italics or underlining to text using the Italics or Underline button Adjust Font Size You can change text height and width together or separately The Lock w E button is useful if you use the mouse together with the Height and Width fields to resize text If you click the Lock toggle button the height and width are connected and the mouse changes both height and width together proportionately You can click the Lock button again to unlock and adjust width and height independently You can use the mouse to resize text height and width k together by placing the mouse pointer over the upper Resize Text right section of text until the cursor changes to a box Height and Width with arrows pointing at each corner If the cursor changes to a box with arrows pointing to each side you can change only the width pers lt Resize
206. checkbox instead of using the Sequencer settings CG S waits for a manual trigger before taking the layout to video See Understanding Trigger Types on page 196 for details on takes and manual triggers Create Complex Lists Using Reveals l This procedure shows you how to create lists that appear one 5 Click on the first layout in the Play List character at a time and look like text being typed on the screen 6 Switch to text layer 5 by selecting Element Layer Select the default template from the Templates registry and Control Layer List and clicking on Layer 5 Type a line of text switch to the Background tab 7 Click on the second layout in the Play List and select Layer 5 in Select Vertical Mold 2 from the Pattern List You can see the the Layers dialog name of each pattern if you place the mouse over the pattern 8 Press ENTER to create a blank line and then type a line of text icon in the list and wait a second for the Tool Tip to appear Switch to the Effect Settings tab and check the Overlay Reveal Select a bright saturated red as the background color and checkbox and click on Take select Reveal as your layout type trom the Layout Type drop down list on the CG toolbar In the Play List click and drag the thumbnail of the layout down to the next empty slot 10 Switch to Sequencer and go online to run the job and see how the text is displayed on the background cG 5l 52 Changing Roll Settings Ro
207. cie 186 RUD aane 202 Setting DULAtONs wrcdusestaesawenss agen 210 ETON S PCCC en n EE 193 Setting field values sucissgeatirepalcoucens 11 EA e AE E ETOT E T 50 Crawlin autre hechtadunescesvalaruss 54 Effect Settings tab 50 52 54 ROVE al cuasar a N 5l Rollonanseiapuana a 52 S arnie E hve aneadeeananieys 50 Shadow 76 88 101 102 138 247 PINOLE selds idan loreaas aa oeii 89 Basle Ssrapistnctsts EOE 88 Color eh onaren 94 Ceat nia 229 Direction ccccceseeeececcccceeeecees 76 89 Dropia tsn na encase N 88 Shadow continued Graphic ODIJECtS irinenn 70 142 OO CO Sonra a 152 SElECEINS COLGT ia 94 S AAIEN NEIEN NE E S 76 88 SO a susiaceecsaecomarsneie 88 SOMMESS vValue siriani e 89 Text OD EC iShares 70 88 Trans paren esnaera 148 IR E E E ESR 76 88 Ys Depr 101 SHAPE rana ce aiceeeeteens 226 Pinel crchact see enteac autem seeamuohess 263 Sharing Font Database files ccceeeeeeees 18 Sheorain 87 102 112 Edge amp Sheen toggle eeeeeeeee 112 Short CUL KEYS eisien ie 42 O e 42 in Logo Compose seeseeee 227 268 SHOW AIDA cieo eaa 35 Show font faceS cccsessssssssssessesevees 80 SHOW RGB uu eeeescecceseseeesessessesseseeseseess 35 Similar s lection nisione 244 Single Pike lienaten na 292 SINGLE selecionar a rann 243 Simele Pixel Brush jvssycssesors ssantensuss 233 E PAE EER EE E TEENE 226 PES icanon 234 Edo e ienna 90 FONS erior a a a a R 78 Ol CASS EAE A E E 76 of font dat
208. controls affecting the output of an event sequence Each event is always part of a group Sequencer automatically creates a group when you add an event to the Event List What are Events Transition Events Effect Events Event Attributes Sequencer Events are based on an _ Sequencer Transition Event image file and describe how 1 l that image changes over Image OM Transition fi time There are two different types of events in CG S transition events and G or EX Effect Event effect events Transition events combine an image with a transition Effect events add motion effects to images The effects are applied to the image in CG or an animation application such as FX available as a plug in for CG S A transition event is created in Sequencer by adding a transition to an image CG S offers six transition types cut wipe tile louvre dissolve and push See Creating Transition Events on page 188 for details An effect event is an image file that includes a motion effect such as a roll crawl reveal or animation Rolls crawls and reveals are defined in CG and are therefore called CG effects Animations are created in an animation application These effects can be defined in CG S if you have purchased the Xtreme plug in option which enables FX Otherwise you can create animations in other applications and then import them into CG S If you apply a transition to an effect event the motion effect is
209. creen Crawls are not limited to a single line of text and can be placed anywhere on the layout You can have as many lines of text crawling across the screen as you want Crawl layouts do not use dotted lines to indicate page breaks the text simply continues across the layout and scroll bars appear on the CG Editor so you can scroll horizontally to see long lines of text Crawl Layout Grawl layouts let you create lines of text that flow across the screen Reveals Reveals display the text in a layout one line or character at a time on top of a static background Reveals are often used to display bulleted lists or to add text on top of a static image Any text to be revealed must be placed on text layer 5 Any text on layers 1 to 4 and 6 to 10 is treated as part of the background when the image is taken to video To move text up or down RVE Layouts gt the first reveal line Reece EIS gt the first ravea line the sasond reveal line a layer select Layer Control Push or Pull from the Element menu Push moves text to a lower layer Pull moves text to a higher layer See Manipulating Text Lines on page 116 for more RNA EMII S gt the first reveal line ine second ravea line gt the thre reveal line information Layout Description Stil static text and graphic objects on a background Roll scrolls text and graphic objects up or down on a background Crawl scrolls text a
210. cs that do not need to be significantly modified by hardware or software Know Your Colors You should know which colors are problem colors before you begin creating video legal graphics The least problematic main color is blue followed by red and then green Combinations of red and green tend to produce stronger and less legal colors Saturated yellows are probably the most problematic colors to work with One method of guaranteeing that your colors are legal is to work with desaturated colors Know Your Tools Some of the tools in Logo Compose can introduce illegal colors For example if you begin with an image with video legal colors but then paint with any of the Luminance Add Luminance Subtract Dodge or Burn tools or apply a filter that affects the luminance or chrominance values you can potentially introduce illegal colors But you do not have to avoid these tools or filters this knowledge should help you create better graphics by predicting problem areas Ingredients for Colors with high chrominance and Illegal Colors luminance values lean towards illegal especially if they are combinations of red and green Any highly saturated color that ranges from green to yellow or from red to yellow may be a problem Colors with high chrominance and low luminance also lean towards illegal so dark saturated colors can be problems as well Again do not be afraid of using these colors just use good judgement when using them For examp
211. ct the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and type the following lines Line one Line two Line three Line four 2 Right click on the Formatting palette above style group 10 and select Freeform Style from the right click menu Update line to style 10 Update all style 170 lines Freeform Style 3 Click on Line one switch to the Color amp Texture tab and change the face color of the text 4 Click on Line two and change the edge color of the text 5 Click on Line three switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and change the font of the text 6 Click on Line four and change the width of the text 7 Click on any one of the lines and drag the Format Sample to style group 10 8 Right click on style group 10 and select Freeform Style from the right click menu to disable this option All lines tagged with style group 10 are updated to the new formatting G 75 76 Understanding Text Objects CG gives you complete control over the appearance of your text You can change single characters entire lines or entire layouts depending on what options you select and how you decide to format your text Default Text Formats CG Setting Font Height Width Slant Leading Kerning Small Caps Rotation Bold High Quality Underline Italic Shadow Size Shadow Type Shadow Softness Direction Edging Size Edging Type l Each Classic text character c
212. cteristics such as group name group number and trigger type used to define a group Group Button In Sequencer A button on the Run tab that when selected lets you use the keyboard to preview or take an entire group by its group name Group Header In Sequencer The header visible in the Event List containing all the information for a group Group Total Duration In Sequencer The total duration of all events in a group GUI Graphical User Interface See Interface H HDTV High Definition Television One of several video standards that determines the resolution and aspect ratio of images The HDTV aspect ratio is 16 9 282 Glossary HLS Color Model A color model that describes colors in terms of hue lightness and saturation Hue values range from 0 to 359 degrees arranged in spectrum order from red through blue to magenta Saturation determines the brightness of the color with a maximum value of 100 Lightness describes how close the color falls to pure black or white White has a lightness value of 100 and black has a lightness value of 0 Horizontal Center Marker In CG A guideline that marks the horizontal center of your CG layout It is not included in image files rendered to disk Horizontal Flip Filter In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab An image filter that flips the image left to right In Logo Compose the horizontal flip filter is accessed through the Transform tab Horizontal P
213. ctor in the selection block left or right Move the Slider up or down to change the Value setting Selected Horizontal Adjust Change Colors with the HSV Model 1 Type the words Changing colors and click on the FACE color chip on the Color amp Texture tab 2 Click on the Color Models drop down list and select the HSV color model from the list Now sv gt change the H value to 359 the S value to 98 DEJ the V value to 97 and click on the Edge color 8 98 chip WF g 3 Click on the Color Picker and drag to the FACE color chip Release the mouse button The edge color changes to match the face color Now change the S value to 92 and change the V value to 49 4 Click on the Color Selector and drag it toward the upper left corner of the Color Selection Box As you move the Color Selector the Color Picker Box shows you the new color When H is selected moving the Color Selector changes the S and V values for the color Release the mouse button Your new color selection is immediately applied to the selected text line Drag the Color Slider down until the color in the Color Picker Box is a shade of blue When H is selected moving the a Slider changes the H value for the color fey CG 59 60 Understanding RGB and HLS Color Models Red Green and Blue RGB Use the RGB Model Hue Lightness and Saturation HLS GG The RGB color definition method defines all colors by the amount of Red Green
214. cy it may help you to think of each element as a separate layer The shadow is on the bottom the edge is in the middle and the face is on top When the face is opaque the edge is visible only around the outside of the face However when the face is transparent you can see that the edge is actually a solid layer underneath the face The image below shows you what happens as you change the transparency of each element You can see that when the face is 80 transparent the edge is visible underneath it Face 0 Face 80 Face 80 Face 80 Edge 0 Edge 0 Edge 80 Edge 80 Shadow 0 Shadow 0 Shadow 0 Shadow 80 Remember that each layout has a total of ten text and graphic layers a background layer and a video layer When you make text and graphic objects transparent you are only allowing the layers underneath to show through not cutting through to video See Color Options on page 96 for more information on cutting to video You can create semi transparent elements with different transparency values at the top and bottom of the text element or graphic object The transparency Lock button sets the top and bottom transparencies to the same value If you adjust one value the other value is changed to Transparency Lock 5 Tefo Top Transparency Value Bottom 0 lt Bottom Transparency Value Top 75 lt S Top Gradient Position Bottom 25 lt gt Bottom Gradient Position Angle 0 lt Gradient Angle mear 0
215. cy features give you the ability to create a transparency gradient However the transparency gradient values also apply to color gradients If you use transparency and color gradients together be aware that the gradient settings apply to both types of gradients Image Backgrounds Alpha Information in Image Backgrounds Video Backgrounds GG You can design any background you want for your layouts using Logo Compose You can use Frame Grab to capture images from your video feed and use those images as backgrounds See Frame Grab An Overview on page 218 for more information Any graphic as long as it is saved in a compatible format can be used as an image background The Image section of the Background tab contains all of the tools you need to use image backgrounds effectively Clicking on the Image Box automatically opens the Open dialog where you can navigate to the Image image you want to use as your background Box image A thumbnail of the selected image appears in the Image box Ignore Alpha When you select a background image CG creates eee a reference to the image file If you move your image files around CG may not be able to find the file again If CG cannot find an image file on the path originally used it looks in the Samples folder included with the CG S program files Storing your image files in this folder makes them easier to find If you check the Size to Fit checkbox the image is stretched
216. d value The Layer field changes the layer that the text cursor is on Changing the layer number on the View tab does not move any selected text to another layer it only changes the layer that new text is placed on Check the Video Safe Title Area checkbox to display the green rectangle that marks the frame buffer area where text is legible on a typical television screen The green rectangle serves to remind you that any text appearing outside the Video Safe Title Area may not always be visible on all televisions The right edge of the rectangle also determines the point at which Word Wrap moves words down to the next text line You can change the boundary values for the Video Safe Title Area by clicking on Edit beside the Video Safe Title Area checkbox In the Edit Safe Title Area dialog select the boundary to change and drag the Slider to a new value The CG Editor is updated as you drag the Slider Safe title values are defined as a percentage of the total frame buffer area The Text Baseline checkbox displays the baseline PQQ ee of the selected line Selecting the Screen Vert Sereen Horz Center Center checkbox displays a thin line marking the _ _ Text Baseline vertical center of the screen Selecting the Screen Horz Center checkbox displays a thin line marking the horizontal center of the CG Editor Checking in the Screen Grid checkbox displays a grid of thin dashed lines in the CG Editor Each square of the grid is 16 scan lines
217. d press one of the arrow keys to nudge the line Each time you press an arrow key the line moves one pixel in the specified direction Hold down ALT CTRL and press an arrow key to move selected objects 10 pixels in the specified direction Hold down ALT SHIFT and press the up or down arrow key to move selected objects up or down a line height Use the Mouse to Move and Resize Text Action change text width and height change text width rotate line move text to new layer move line to new position ae ae ae The mouse pointer can be used to resize rotate and move lines of text When you perform any of these actions the cursor changes shape Method e click on the top of the bounding bracket and drag the mouse pointer to a new size e click on the middle of the bounding bracket and drag the mouse pointer to a new width e click on the bottom of the bounding bracket hold down CTRL and drag the line to a new angle e hold down SHIFT CTRL click on the text and drag the mouse up or down to change the layer e Click the Move tool located on the Formatting Palette e hold down CTRL and drag the mouse to a new position tab constrained lines can only move vertically non tab constrained move anywhere Text width and height remain proportional as you size them unless you click on the Lock button on the Size amp Attributes tab The Lock button lets you adjust the height and width together See Adjust F
218. d CTRL keys You can use the Play List to select events while working in other modules but you can only select one event at a time from the Play List Dividing an Event List into groups makes the scrolling display more manageable for a large sequence of events Once you have divided your sequence into groups you can collapse the view so that all you see in the Event List are the group headers and all you see in the Play List are the first events in each group Sequencer automatically creates a new group if you add more than 999 events to a group You can collapse and expand the group views in both the Event List and the Play List The graphic below shows a collapsed and an expanded group view in the Event List Collapse Expand Arrows Num Label Effect 00000 Opening Credits Timed 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 07 00 00 03 07 01000 CG During the Talk Show Manual 0W7 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01001 Guest 1 s Lover 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01002 Guest 2 s Lover 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 To collapse and expand the view for individual groups click on the Collapse Expand Arrow on the group header you wish to collapse or expand To collapse all group j y views click on the Collapse Sequence Display button on the Sequencer toolbar Click on the Expand Sequence Display button to expand all group views Collapse Sequence Display Expand Sequence Display You can create a group by selecting the first e
219. d _ pno transparency of your text On Face adjust the values in the Distort X and Distort Y fields to manipulate the shape ofeach Distort jo character For details on distorting text shape see Distort Text on page 100 Text elements can each contain up to four colors and four transparency values Use the Color Picker options to set color chips and transparency values You can also apply a texture to the face elements using Texture options on the Color amp Texture tab See Defining Additional Textures on page 132 for details on type style textures See Understanding Text Color on page 94 for details on setting text color and texture See Transparency on page 98 for details on setting transparency The Color Options drop down list available for the face element contains four color display options to create complex text Color color Ramp Ramp Bevel Full Alpha and Eliminate See Color Options on peior Fame page 101 for details on each item and Using Additional Beveled Full Alpha Text on page 104 for details on creating bevels SUN You can apply sheen highlights on up to four edges with individual sizes and angles on Edge amp Sheen On Edge the size of the combined edges is adjusted using the Edge Size field The settings of the four color chips do not correspond to the color of each edge individually On Face the four color chips set the color and transparency of the two inner edges
220. d in Logo Compose at this aspect ratio using another application that does not use variable aspect ratio views any circular brush strokes or objects appear elliptical See Understanding Video Color on page 264 for details Logo Compose 259 Understanding Channels in Logo Compose Channels add an extra dimension to Logo Compose They are used for a variety of tasks and the concepts of Logo Compose channels are explained in this section What are Channels Visualize Channels How Does Logo Compose Use Channels The Select Channel Dialog 260 Logo Compose Images are made up of a series of channels red green blue and sometimes alpha Each channel is an 8 bit image that represents a different part of the full image For example the red channel contains all the red pixels in the image When you add the three 8 bit RGB channels you get a 24 bit full color image Most image editing applications work with 24 bit images In Logo Compose you add a fourth channel alpha The alpha channel contains all the transparent pixels When you add alpha to the RGB channels you are adding 8 bits so you get a 32 bit image Since channels are 8 bit they can be represented by grayscale images For example if you open a 32 bit image in Logo Compose and select the Alpha radio button on the View tab to view the image alpha channel it appears as a grayscale Black represents full transparency while white represents full opacity Anything betwe
221. d tab When you hold down CTRL and click on either a text or graphic object CG automatically selects the object and switches to the Color amp Texture tab If you have text and graphic objects on several layers using this method of selecting objects only works for the text and graphic objects on the current layer For example if you are working with objects on layer 3 objects on other layers cannot be selected using this method You can change text lines from tab constrained to non tab constrained using CTRL TAB Select the text line and press CTRL TAB To change the line back press CTRL TAB again See Manipulating Text Lines on page 116 for details on tab and non tab constrained lines 44 CG Concepts In order to use CG effectively you need to understand these three concepts registries templates and style and color groups Understand Registries Understand Templates GG Registries are libraries of commonly used layouts or text CG has two registries the Templates registry and the News Edit registry The Templates registry contains all of the standard layout templates available to you in CG The News Edit registry contains all of the News Edit tables lists of names places and other information that are available to you in CG There are two aspects to using registries managing the registries themselves and using the contents of the registries Registries can be managed using Fil FileRegistry CG L
222. d to both color and transparency gradients You can change the amount of the pure color used in the gradient as well as the angle of the gradient by changing the gradient values on the Color amp Texture tab The percentage top and bottom values determine where the pure color stops and the gradient begins The graphic below illustrates how the balance between pure color and gradient shifts when you change the Top and Bottom values If you enable the transparency Lock or gradient Lock button both the w E Top and Bottom values are set to the same percentage with the gradient occurring on only 1 of the layout bp MY To oor 2 4 OHGS g fotrom 40 gt Jor 2 Bottom 0 m angle M _IGradient Pi ae s Bottom Color The Angle value rotates the color gradient by up to 90 degrees negative or positive Gradient angles are defined in one degree increments If you set the Angle value to 90 degrees your gradient becomes horizontal moving from left to right instead of from top to bottom 45 degrees Angle 45 degrees The Solid Blend cycle box shows you the current colors Solid colors show one color in the box with the word SOLID appearing in the box Color gradient backgrounds have one color at the top and one at the bottom with the word TOP or BOTTOM appearing in the box Knockout to Background Classic Character or Line Fill Radial or Linear Fill Click on the box to cycle through solid and grad
223. d to send the event to the Preview Channel or the ENTER key on the number pad to take the event Time Code Field Run Tab Checkboxes Use the Run Tab If you prefer to access the events by name click on the Label button to activate the Label field You can then select the event you want to display by entering its name Sequencer selects the event as soon as it can be uniquely identified by what you type Use the MINUS key on the number pad to send the selected event to the Preview Channel Use the ENTER key on the number pad or the Take button on the Run tab to take the event The Time Code field on the Run tab displays the current time code if your system is configured to use an external time code reader If the current group in the Event List is configured for a PC Clock trigger the Time Code field displays the current time from the PC clock Otherwise CG S simulates a time code that displays how long the Run tab has been active The value in this field is important only if you are relying on an external time code or the PC clock to run events Cycle Checkbox Enabling the Cycle option forces Sequencer to continuously replay the job from the beginning each time it reaches the end until you stop the job If this option is not enabled Sequencer runs through the Event List only once when you run the job If you are using the PC Clock trigger type Cycle runs the job every 24 hours Live Update Checkbox Enabling the Live Update option ca
224. depth elements using Texture options on the Color amp Texture tab See Defining Additional Textures on page 132 for details on type style textures See Understanding Text Color on page 94 for details on setting text color and texture See Transparency on page 98 for details on setting transparency The Color Options drop down list available for many of the text color amp E elements contains four color display options to create complex egio tamp text Color Ramp Bevel Full Alpha and Eliminate See Color Bevel Options on page 101 for details on each item and Using incl Additional Beveled Text on page 104 for details on creating bevels You apply color transparency and sheen to each of the ten available edges by selecting a color chip for each edge and then setting a color with the Color Picker a transparency value with the Trans field and setting sheen offset and angle for each edge You can apply additional settings to the ten edges together edge size depth depth angle and sheen color and size ie 4 Color Chip gt i ui mi LU Aphajo The Edge Size determines the size of each edge Depth adds an extruded edge to the combined face and edge The depth value determines depth size and the angle value determines where the depth is displayed See Setting Depth Shadow and Sheen on page 102 for details on setting depth When selected the Visible layer checkbox draw
225. displays the event for the set number of frames It then clears the display to video for the duration of the wait time See Understanding Event Duration on page 192 for details on cut transitions and duration Sequencer provides handy quick keys for setting in and out points These quick keys are especially useful when setting many in and out points consecutively CTRL Q Sets in points CTRL W sets out points Sequencer lets you offset all the events in a Time Code group You can use this feature anytime the time code source is globally affected For example if your signal passes through a lot of equipment to get to the time code reader you may see a slight delay between the system output and the time code input To offset the time code select Edit Set Timecode Offset and enter the time to offset the signal in the TimeCode Offset dialog By default the offset is positive To reverse the offset click on the Forward Reverse cycle button until it says Reverse The Ittest exe program provided with CG S lets you use the Inscriber ini settings to verify whether CG S should be seeing the time codes If you do not see time code input in Ittest exe check your hardware and MCI setup If the test programs supplied with your hardware work but you do not see input in Ittest exe or CG S there may be a problem with the MCI control strings in Inscribe ini Re check the strings with the documentation supplied by your hardware manufacturer If
226. down i The mouse pointer changes to a double headed arrow with the number of the current text layer on the bottom right side of the cursor Release the mouse button when the number changes to the layer you want to move the text line to 4 lick on the handle the small black square in the middle of the bottom edge of the bounding box and drag the handle up The light source for the top rectangle is inverted until the bounding box forms a rectangle above the current 5 Experiment with the Round and Tube edge types and the other et et should have two rectangles on your screen that directions that you can drag the handles in Remember that the 00k like this light source only changes if you drag a handle across and past the opposite edge of the bounding box CG Transparency Gradients and Layering Transparency and gradients behave the same for text and graphic objects Graphic objects have an additional feature the Stack that determines how graphic objects are ordered on a layer Each layer has its own stack Transparency and Gradients Gradients Change Gradient Values Change Gradient Angles Radial or Linear Fill Transparency 148 CG The Color amp Texture tab lets you create transparent and semi transparent graphic objects as well as objects with gradients All of the transparency and gradient options available for text work the same way for graphic objects See Working with Classic Color Gradients on p
227. ds Entering text is the starting point for most of your work in CG When you first open a layout you see square brackets with a cursor flashing between them or a white rectangle with a cursor flashing inside it The brackets indicate the selected text line and the cursor shows you where the text that you type will be inserted If you don t see the brackets and cursor you can select the Text Cursor tool A from the Formatting palette and click on the CG Editor to show the text insertion point To enter text click on the CG Editor and start typing By default CG wraps the text to the next line when you run out of space However if you want to move text back to a previous line select the text you want to re flow and then select Element Re Wrap Selection If you delete text from one line text from subsequent lines is not reformatted to fill the available space unless you re wrap the selection See Understanding Text Objects on page 76 for details Use the Move tool on the Formatting palette to move tab constrained text up h or down and non tab constrained text anywhere in the CG Editor Click anywhere in the text line to enter text When you press the Graphic Plane button on the CG Toolbar to switch to the graphic layer the Move tool is selected by default Click and drag an object to another location You can also hold CTRL and drag to move text in the CG Editor Layers allow you to overlap text and graphic objects Each layout cons
228. e CG automatically associates the table with the text line If you click on a different line and then select another News Edit table CG associates that line and table When you switch back to the first text line the News Edit table you associated with the text line appears on the News Edit tab Create and Import a News Edit Table l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the News Edit tab Click on the text entry box above the table list and type Toronto Canada in the text entry box Click on Insert Item or press INSERT 8 Click on the text entry box and type London England in the text entry box Click on Insert Item and select File Registry News Edit Tables 2 2a Now select Short si Title Templates x Import Text 0 1 new Table 2 Short City list Update Repeat Step 2 for each of ow tee eras City List and click Vienna Austria Toronta Canada on Update Chicago USA cic 9 Click on Yes to Paris France fa Paris France replace the table Tokyo Japan py Tokyo Japan with the current table and click on Close Your screen should j fq Amsterdam Netherlands Amsterdam Netherlands look like the following ae coast Amsterdam Netherlands ile Registry Ne Me ws Edit Tables Click Saa Chicago USA on an existing News Save Cules London Englangd Edit Table and click pav
229. e Soft shadows look like offset shadows except that they have a fuzzy Ofi edge instead of a hard edge Drop and extrude shadows are identical unless you use yiruce a color blend Extrude shadows apply color blends ru Ss from the top of the shadow to the bottom vertically Drop shadows apply color blends from the surface of the character to the back of the shadow horizontally Soi The example to the right shows you the differences between the shadow types All of the shadows are drawn with a TOP color value of 20 gray and a BOTTOM color value of 100 black The shadow size determines gt amp F the offset of the shadow in 2 5 lO pixels For drop and extrude shadows the shadow size l 5 determines how far the 2 5 l shadow extends from the I face For offset or soft shadows the shadow size determines how far below the character the shadow appears The graphic above shows you some common shadow sizes The top line uses drop shadows and the bottom line uses offset shadows Shadow Direction Shadow Softness The shadow direction is set by selecting a shadow angle from the radio buttons CG provides eight shadow angles in 45 increments The sample block in the center of the buttons shows you the effect of the current shadow direction The example below shows you the eight available shadow angles using an offset shadow Cer r amp r rE Hic Eo OW C ome Q ot ats Soft s
230. e 5 Hold down the SHIFT key to constrain the selection proportions scalexp ipt file from the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Note click on a transformation handle and drag outward to enlarge any text in a Logo Compose file is a bitmap the text Release the SHIFT key to view the results Notice how Press ENTER on your number pad to take the image to video Notice how crisp the text is Select the Rectangular Selection tool and makea F selection around the text the text gets a bit fuzzy as you enlarge it 6 Enlarge the text so much that the words no longer fit in the Logo Compose workspace 7 Press CTRL D to exit and apply the transformation Select the Scale tool and click in the Logo Compose 8 Press ENTER on your number pad to take the image The text iH workspace to activate the transformation handles now looks very fuzzy on your output monitor This experiment is meant to show you the effects of overscaling bitmaps To maintain a crisp image you shouldn t scale a bitmap beyond 120 Logo Compose Understanding Video Color When you are working with graphics it is sometimes difficult to tell which colors in your image may be illegal The result of illegal colors is not as severe as it used to be encoder technology is much better today and many newer encoders automatically replace problem colors with similar colors Avoiding illegal colors is now mainly a design consideration but you should still try to create graphi
231. e Advanced Text Formatting Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 5 On the Size amp Attributes tab change the Kerning value to drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is 25 and change the Leading value to 40 between the brackets in the CG Editor 7 Click on the first line and select Element Apply Leading Type the sentence This is a test MAGEE 7 Click on the Lock button on the Size amp Attributes Ole Click on Browse on the Size amp tab Attributes tab and select a new font and click on OK 8 Change the Height to 80 The a In the CG Editor press ENTER to move S text height increased t the width Aik CECE to a new line and type the sentence This is still a test did not change hnis jis still fa test AUS is stilla test CG 19 80 Understanding Fonts CG can use two different types of fonts TrueType fonts installed for Windows and Inscriber fonts TrueType and Inscriber fonts differ in some important ways If you have been using Inscriber fonts you may continue to use them but CG S currently ships with a selection of TrueType fonts making the original Inscriber fonts unnecessary Fonts A font is a complete set of type in a particular face The face is the design the shape and line weight of the font Some fonts contain standard alphanumeric characters while other fonts contain only special symbols Display Font Faces Yo
232. e Code 3 From the Event List select the first event Event List that you want in the new group Select the arrow E Jon the Coll Disa group header to collapse or ollapse sequence Display 4 Select Edit Insert Group Header expand a single group Select Click on the group header the Collapse Sequence Display Select the group header and Expand Sequence Display Expand Sequence Display buttons on the Sequencer 01000 Group W 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 toolbar to collapse and expa nd all groups 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ee eT TT 8 To delete the new group select the group header then select Edit Delete Group Header Only the group header is deleted the group events remain intact 01001 Reporter 01002 Name 01003 Name 1 lowe mfo S1 wo ouvre Sequencer 181 182 Managing and Editing the Event List You can edit a group in two ways Insert Group Header and Delete Group Header You can edit an event in four ways Log Event Cut Event Copy Event and Paste Event These four editing functions are available in any CG S module from the Playlist menu Select Groups and Events Manage a Large Event List View Groups Create and Delete Groups Add Events Sequencer You can select single or multiple groups or events from the Event List and select groups and events at the same time To make multiple selections use the SHIFT an
233. e Current Frame field to select different frames in your clip changes to reflect the number of frames between the Mark In 11 Enter 9 in the Current Frame field and click on the Out button and Mark Out Points but the value in the Clip Duration field This resets frame 9 as the Mark Out Point 12 Click on OK to apply your trim edits and exit the Editor Sequencer 207 208 Setting Up Channels and Channel Ripples You can configure CG S to run on one two or three output channels In an online environment you usually have at least one Program Channel and one Preview Channel This setup allows you to preview events before going live giving you one final chance to catch any mistakes in the images and text See Using the Program Preview Palette on page 14 for details on using program and preview channels Setup for Multiple Channels Select a Channel Sequencer Program Channel In order to run CG S with multiple channels you must have more than one frame buffer installed on your computer Once you have installed additional frame buffers navigate to the CGS41 Utilities EES folder on your computer and run Board Digi Multiple exe to configure CG S for Location C scas41 additional channels As the setup program runs you will be asked where oOo x oe CG S is saved on your computer how many frame buffers you have installed and whether you want your system configured for Program Preview Chan
234. e OK button TimeCode Offset x Timecode Offset 00 02 35 22 Forward OK Cancel Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Insert Group Header Delete Group Header Set ln Time Ctrl Q Set Out Time Ctrl V Set Timecode Offset Select All Ctrl A 1 2 Channel Ripple 2 1 Channel Ripple 1 2 3 Channel Ripple 3 2 1 Channel Ripple Sequencer 211 Sequencer Tips and Tricks There are a number of tricks you can use in CG S to increase your productivity You can specify where you want your online files to be stored you can renumber the rendered filenames in the Play List you can use overlays to add elegance to your online images and you can import animations created externally into CG S and take them to video Online Folder Extension Renumber All Rendered Filenames Rename Rendered Filenames Import Animations 212 Sequencer The rendered files for a job also known as online files are always stored in a separate folder All folders containing online files for CG S have the OnlineFiles extension For example the online folder for a job file named RocknStuff ins is called RocknStuff OnlineFiles The file extension makes it easier to locate and identify online folders This is important for two reasons First you should always know where your files are located Second if you are running low on hard disk or storage space you can easily search your drives for online folders you no longer need a
235. e acs ater 250 Image files for logoS eeeeeeeeseeeeee 152 Import Word utility eee eeeeeeees 19 Imported image background 63 Ipornoea na 36 240 E TICS EEI ER 36 AMMANN S e i 20 Channels cean aa 260 CN Dra a nteceeneeeneeioe nas 20 Crawl tek Resbernnen n 128 FINES EEE A 230 Image as Transformation 246 MHOC ERRE 36 Layo UiS au 36 Logo Compose images in CG 237 News Edit tables sssseeeeseeseseseesee 36 News Edit text files 162 164 ROME AE 128 Selections Si ocdcrviavccao saves 231 260 Subtle Mleses sutuseceame wes 169 170 Te eS 36 128 170 Using cipboardessisreieiusoiscauea 129 Vector based files eeeeeeseeeeeees 237 Word tl ianen 19 pousa Gusieceta he eisstlectutseerces 192 Chan Gin AEEA E A ET 179 Quick Keys anaana 210 EIn NE ET 186 193 Tine ode cee sars se cticcomsanecgnasvaens 200 Trigger pesii ade 197 IPE CILOE aiaa Ri 206 Increment Speed meuni 193 Disen be Miia 8l laseri be i ana 18 Edge VALUCS ooioneninnoia n aann 90 Inscribe ini continued Shadow values soiirci 88 nscriber filters aurassesenunmncrvenanion 254 Inscriber font database essen 81 Inscriber format fonts eseeeeeeeeee 77 Inscriber preferences sesssesseseeseees 28 Loser o ar A ions 151 CG objects above s ssessessessessessesese 144 CG objects DELOW sessessessesssssesess 144 LOGOS oiera i 151 Insertion point seessesssesseseesesese 46 116
236. e an animation in any multimedia or 3D package and send it to video through CG S This means you can add many different looks to your video output You can create cartoons or real 3D animations complete with lighting effects and alpha There are four steps to using an external animation in CG S create the animation export the individual animation frames create a via file using Inscriber Via Builder and import the via file into CG S The animation you create is entirely up to you it can be as simple or complex as you want it to be When exporting make sure the file format you export to is supported by Via Builder Sequential tga files are the recommended file format Depending on the Log Online Activity software package you use to create the animation you can export the frames as full 32 bit files complete with alpha CG S recognizes and uses any alpha in your tga output files To create a via file use the ViaBuilder program that comes with CG S For details on using ViaBuilder consult the ViaBuilder online help Once you have the file start CG S and switch to Sequencer Select File Import Animation to import the newly created via file Once you import your animation CG S treats it as a regular event in the Event List You can move delete copy cut paste and run the animation online There is one limitation to this process you cannot change the duration of the animation in CG S If you want to slow the animation down or sp
237. e frame buffer is 0 the right edge of the frame buffer is 100 You can change the values in the border fields so that the borders appear to overlap but CG automatically corrects the 70 100 percentages so that they are at least one percent apart with no overlap The white line in the above graphic also shows you the area of the layout that is displayed when the left and top borders are set to 10 and the right and bottom borders are set to 90 To see these boundaries make sure that the Show Markers checkbox is checked on the Effect Settings tab By default the borders for a still image are set to 0 and 100 which allows the entire screen display to be taken to video The Reset to Defaults button changes all the border values back to this default setting Double clicking within any of the border value fields resets that border to its default value Remember that anything that appears outside the boxed area is not displayed If you have a video signal playing under your image this will be displayed in the area outside your image borders If you want the area outside the borders to be transparent where you are able to see video you may need to insert a blank layout before your cropped layout Offline Takes Reveal Settings You can click on Take on the Still Image Settings tab to take the current layout to video while you are offline When CG does a take this way your layout is sent to the program channel using a cut t
238. e group k Text and Graphic E Toos C GC OC amp OOO OOD 1OOD FACE coce D 60 EraserDust aag PAL Text Object Formatting Palette Graphic Object Formatting Palette 2 Drag to the style or color chip you want to copy attributes to Result formatting colors and textures copied press CTRL to copy only colors and textures colors and textures copied press CTRL to copy formatting of current line as well formatting color and textures copied CG 42 Speeding Up Your Work Short cut keys let you use features and commands without having to select them from a menu NP refers to keys on the number pad Working Within amp Across Layouts CTRL N CTRL L CTRL 0 CTRL E CTRL SHIFT R NP ENTER CTRL END ALT arrow ALT CTRL arrow ALT SHIFT arrow Create a new Play List CTRL D Redraw screen Create a new layout CTRL Z Undo the last action Open an existing Play List CTRL A Redo the last action Opens layout type list CTRL R Opens registry layout template list Opens layout registry dialog CTRL S Save the current file Take event CTRL HOME Jump to first line in layout Jump to last line in layout Nudge text or graphic object one scanline or pixel in any direction Move text or graphic object ten scanlines or pixels in any direction Move text or graphic object up or down one object height Combining Mouse amp Key Strokes CTRL CLICK CTRL SHIF
239. e layouts and titles in CG and output them in a sequence e create layouts in CG and output them in a sequence e create layouts in CG add animation in FX and output them in a sequence use Frame Grab to grab images and output them in a sequence use Frame Grab to grab images to use as backgrounds for layouts and then output the layouts in a sequence e use Logo Compose to transform bitmap images into logos that contain alpha information FX is only enabled if you have purchased the Xtreme plug in option for CG S Set Field Values CG S is separated into five main modules The following table describes the functionality and features in each module Module Function and Features CG e creates layouts for stills rolls crawls reveals and animations for display to video e full featured character generator offers extensive typographic and color controls for design flexibility producing fully anti aliased and broadcast quality text characters Sequencer manages and controls all online activity including takes transitions trigger information and board assignment information e allows you to output your work directly to video Frame Grab captures a single frame or field from an incoming video signal and saves it as a still image e offers tools for modifying frame grabs including cropping ragged edges and adding filters and saves frame grabs in alternate file formats FX e animates text and graphics created in CG in vi
240. e new position is measured from the top left corner of the workspace Flip Horizontally The Horiz Flip button flips your image horizontally along the vertical axis The and Vertically Vert Flip button flips your image vertically around the horizontal axis Add Depth The horizontal and vertical depth fields allow you to add depth or perspective to your transformations Depth Horiz skews transformations left to right so they recede into the background Depth Vert skews transformations top to bottom so Honzontal y Vertical they recede upward or downward depth added Initial depth added transformation Transformation You can change the opacity of your transformations with the Opacity field on the Opacity Transform tab This allows you to superimpose transformations as ghost images or have more alpha showing through certain areas of your image Use the Transform Tab l Select File mport Export lmport Image and select CGbox bmp trom the CG 41 Paint Examples folder Select the Wand tool and click on the box to select if Switch to the Transform tab and make sure Relative 2D Transform is selected from the Type drop down list The Move Horiz and Vert values on the Transform tab are both 0 00 Move the transformation around using the Move tool and note how the coordinates change Type 140 in the Move Horiz field and 70 in the Move Vert field Select Relative Corner Offsets from the Type drop down list The coordinates i
241. e period of time when the video signal is at the blank level causing the electron beam not to appear when it sweeps back from the bottom to the top of the screen A VBI occurs almost instantly Vertical Center Marker In CG A guideline that marks the vertical center of your layout It is not included in image files that are rendered to disk Vertical Flip Filter In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab An image filter that flips the image top to bottom In Logo Compose The vertical flip filter is accessed from the Transform tab Vertical Panel In CG A rectangle with bevels on the left and right edges via Format See via Viabuilder exe A program provided with CG S that creates a series of vias from other image files Used when importing animations from other applications Video Aspect Ratio The relationship between the width and height of an image when it is sent to video The aspect ratio is different for computers and video monitors so a correction is made when images are taken to video The video aspect ratio is set in the Inscribe ini file and controlled by three values the actual aspect ratio the horizontal resolution and the vertical resolution The aspect ratio for NTSC and PAL is 4 3 the aspect ratio for HDTV is 16 9 Video Bug See Corner Logo Video Cleanup Filters In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab Inscriber filters that smooth fielded images captured from video into non interlaced images by
242. e same effect as using the PLUS key on the number pad Runs the Event List beginning with the selected event Playback continues to the end of the job Takes an event without loading the next event into the Preview Channel This has the same effect as using the Take button on the CG S toolbar Takes an event and loads the next event into the Preview Channel This has the same effect as using the Take button on the Run tab Provides a preview of your event Your event thumbnail is displayed on the Preview palette 7 Click on the Take button on the toolbar to take the E event previously loaded into the preview channel 8 From the CG S toolbar click on the Play Direct button to go online and run the entire Event List 9 Click on the Take Down button on the Run tab to take the selected event and load the next event into the Preview Channel 10 Select an event midway through the Event Bun dob List then click on the Run Job button on cuca Take CLE the Run tab to run the job starting from the selected event Sequencer 186 Using the Event Editor Tab The Event Editor tab allows you to edit your event list both on and offline This includes changing trigger types and transition details setting in and out points and changing the render location Transition Duration ce Event Name Event Editor Transition Type Event Number Transition Size Wait Time Render BD local Disk location Frames 45 size 2
243. e trigger type Trigger Type Action Manual or GPI Check the Status bar at the top of the Run tab for Waiting for space bar Status Waiting for space bar When it appears press the SPACEBAR or close the GPI trigger to display the first event and load the next one Timed The first event appears immediately Each event in the Event List appears after the event duration and wait time of the previous event have elapsed Time Code The first event appears at the first in point and the rest of the or PC Clock events appear at the appropriate trigger points In Point w h 5 5 50 0017 30 00 00 01 30 10 00 15 59 50 0011 6 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 16 00 00 00 17 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 Q 02000 Time Slot 5 PC Clock 02001 T C 02002 Afternoon Movie 02003 Special Report 1 Jo2008 Musician _ cut__ _ kev rro_ s1__ wasooo_ If your Event List has multiple groups with different trigger types the action will change to match the group trigger type 17 05 00 00 1 7 30 00 00 00 25 00 00 When you click on the Number button Sequencer activates the mee eons Number field enabling you to reference the events by their event number By default these numbers appear in the bottom _ E right corner of the event thumbnails in the Play List as well as in the first column of the Event List Type an event number into the Number field to select an event then press the MINUS key on the number pa
244. e until the next in point is divided into two sections duration and wait Duration runs from the in point to the out point and the subtitle is visible Wait runs from the out point to the next in point and the subtitle is not visible See the procedure Set Up and Run Events for Subtitling on page 193 for details on modifying your subtitles using Sequencer Create a TimeCoded Subtitle File This procedure assumes that you have completed the previous procedure Adding Editing and Updating a News Edit Table on page 167 and saved the Hamlet txt file Select template 150 Subtitle Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and select File lmport mport Text File 2 Select Hamlet txt and check the Subtitle Format radio button Click on OK 3 Switch to Sequencer and click on the first event and set the out point to 00 00 05 00 Now click on the second event and set the out point to 00 00 10 00 4 Click on the third event and set the out point to 00 00 15 00 click on the fourth event and set the out point to 00 00 20 00 and click on the fifth event and set the out point to 00 00 25 00 Select File Export Export Subtitle Text File Save the file as Hamlet Out tt Select Programs Accessories gt Notepad trom the Start menu and open Hamlet Out txt Change a line of the text and save the file In CG S select File Import mport Text File and select the Subtitle Fo
245. ect tab Since you are not fully selecting I each pixel the selected areas of your image appear in gray instead of white Click on the Select Fully button on the Select Fully Select tab All selected pixels are now selected at 100 The gray areas of the selection channel thumbnail turn white Feather Enter 15 in the Feather field and click on the Feather button to apply the feather The selection outline now appears in gray showing that edge pixels are not fully selected Use the selection tools to make a selection around the junebug Switch to the Filter tab and select the Color Balance filter Move the color sliders toward the extremes and apply the filter The filter is most visible in the center of the selection where pixels were more fully selected Logo Compose 241 242 Using the Selection Tools The selection tools in Logo Compose offer you a variety of ways of making selections You can make a simple selection with only one tool or you can refine and create complex selections by using a variety of tools and options Selection Tools Logo Compose has ten selection tools all located on the Tool palette Each selection tool creates a differently shaped selection The tools are described below Wand si Luminance Wand PF Brush Selection psg Rectangular aa Selection os Elliptical Selection S Scan Line Selection Column Selection pa LS C Linear Lasso e Y L
246. ect the realworld tga file in the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Select the Eye Dropper tool from the Background tab and drag it around the image As you drag the Eye Dropper look at the colors being selected Notice that the saturation values for the colors are fairly low This shows what the real world looks like when viewed by a video camera Device gamuts describe the available colors that can be displayed on a particular device The RGB color gamut describes the available colors in video and on the computer Orange and yellow colors are in limited supply in the RGB gamut which makes it difficult to select variations of yellow and orange Mark and Legalize Illegal Colors v A o NS Select File lImport Export Import Image and select dragontly ipt from the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Select the Saturation Add tool from the Tool palette Switch to the Brush tab and set the Opacity to 70 Select the last brush on the first row of the Brush list Paint the center of the image adding saturation to the dragontly s body Right click on the Scrapbook and select Add Switch to CG right click on the Scrapbook and select Use Background Switch to the Color tab select the Color Picker and drag over the image particularly over yellow areas When you drag the Color Picker over illegal colors the illegal color box appears on the Color tab This means that you have introduced illegal colors with a tool that does not pai
247. ed by its in You can divide each page of subtitles into individual lines or you can type each page of subtitles onto a single line with the in and out timecodes at the end of the line The timecodes indicate the end of the page CG starts a new layout after each out timecode Timecodes use the format lt hours minutes seconds frames gt The opening and closing angle brackets are required The timecodes represent the actual times that the subtitles appear in the video When you import the timecoded subtitle file the timecodes are converted into the following components time in duration wait and time out See Understanding Event Duration on page 192 for details A sample of three subtitle layouts in a timecoded subtitle file with Word Wrap turned off would look like this To be or not to be that is the question lt 00 37 27 02 gt lt 00 37 30 14 gt Whether tis nobler to suffer the slings and arrows lt 00 37 43 01 gt lt 00 37 46 22 gt of outrageous fortune or to take arms against a sea of troubles lt 00 37 50 22 gt lt 00 37 53 09 gt Create a Subtitle File l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and select Style 10 from the Formatting palette Switch to the View tab and change the Baseline value to 385 Select op File Registy gt G New Cie Layouts and clickon Se ms Ad d a A Change the template Registry t CG Layouts number t
248. ed lines 43 116 Brackets cot anianeiwiieaanionneuetaiuns 116 Tables NEWS Edit nniioscneniciims 160 Tabl t SUP POM esisiini 233 PADS orcawsnatons tease en 34 DB CUS Meine E N 234 Filter EE A EE 254 Take AE E S 184 EVEUULS oA E 184 Take Dowien aai 184 TAKES EEO O 185 Duration eneon 189 192 PAUSHAG Sonel a 195 Ouk takes n S 15 RESUMI eaa 195 Using the Play List z scssepesasmanticn 13 Tasks in Logo Compose seeseeeee 228 Templates aiiin 44 45 154 157 Adding layouts to registry 154 Backing up registry eseeeeeeees 156 Chantie c2 aptivatessnuroaieeagtcancat 156 Checking spelling scscsncccsexasvasswes 126 CLAWS naan 128 Cretino x Ginn ctacnia canteen 155 Templates continued Creatine subtitle srein aain 170 Defatlt layou francisi 156 Designing for News Edit 04 158 TAVOULS ourna mens 154 Modifying existing ceeeeeeeee 156 News Edit example cesseeseeeees 159 OVEIVIEW aipee ae 154 ROMS rhenana ea 128 SAVING a i 45 Selec IE seee ini ea E 154 Subtitletemplates eninin 169 Textures Merest 136 Understanding ssessesssseseessessesseseeses 44 Updating job templates 157 Templates registry vvcmssanseanviessousets 44 Adding layouts ccs cvtscemevasianicoevineets 154 BACKING Upenn tini urn aias 156 News Edit templates eee 158 OV ELVICW aoa catieresuncvereietberans 156 UL OSU PANET ego e a 267 T a N 76 129 LOE AGES an n 110 Addition
249. eed it up you need to go back into the application where you created the original animation and adjust the timing there When you have adjusted the timing to your satisfaction you need to export the frames and create a new file to import into CG S To record the content of your event sequences export the Event List as a text file From the File menu select Export Export Sequence Text File Name and save your file in the Save As dialog The contents of the Event List text file include the date the source file and all the information found on the event line To monitor and log your online activity add the following entry on Inscribe ini Preferences section LogFiles TRUE Change the Online Directory 1 Create a Play List 7 Click on the Browse button on the Sequencer tab to select a 2 Save the Play List in your C6 S folder as Test ins new folder M the m files PE EE 10 Navigate to the root ot your current drive and click in the folder 3 Click on the Sequencer button to switch to Sequencer AEAN p Salock ine Output Directory dialog 4 fe N i Online Toggle button to set C6 S to 1 F 11 Select New Folder from the menu and change the name of Sau the folder to your name 5 Minimize C6 S to view your desktop 12 Click on the new folder and click on the OK button to set the 6 Double click on the My Computer icon and a folder navigate to the CG S folder Notice the TEST OnlineFiles folder This folder contains by Computer the online
250. eing added to the map If the current Scrapbook item can t be used as a texture the option Use Texture doesn t appear in the right click menu Texture images from the Scrapbook are saved as part of the layout file since they may not exist anywhere else on disk Layout files saved Add Delete Clear All Copy To Clipboard Paste From Clipboard Info with texture images are much larger than layout files saved without texture images You can reduce the size of these layout files by saving the image to disk instead of using it from the Scrapbook Detine and Change Textures l Draw a rectangle in the layout and click on the Color amp Texture tab Click on the Texture box and select the first blank slot on the Texture dialog Click on Detine Select a graphic file to use as a texture If you don t have your own graphic files you can find some basic textures on the CG S CD ROM in the Materials folder Click on Open Click on the second blank slot on the Texture dialog and click on Define Using the SHIFT CTRL Keys select several graphic files to use as textures Click on Open Select a filled slot and click on Undetine The filled spot Enable i Tile Tint C Size instantly becomes empty Use Background Use Texture Use Logo Select the texture map you wish to display in your layout Click on OK The selected texture appears in the texture box Click on the Enable checkbox next to the Te
251. ely Text Line Basics Tab Constrained vs Non Tab Constrained Lines Move Lines with the Mouse 116 CG Text lines are the basic building blocks of CG Each text line can be positioned individually using either the mouse or the options on the View tab The Element menu and the View tab contain all of the commands for positioning text Text lines can be linked using the Locked Lines command but using Locked Lines effectively requires some experimentation See Move Groups of Text Lines on page 118 for details Even though text lines are linked by style and formatting groups these groups only affect the appearance of the text not the positioning of linked lines Text in a box and text on a spline are special instances of text Both move differently from other text lines See Using Advanced Text Features on page 124 for details All lines are either tab constrained or non tab constrained Tab constrained means that a line is aligned horizontally with a tab stop but can be moved vertically anywhere on the layout The number of tabs at the beginning of the text line determines which tab stop it is aligned to The text line can be left right or center aligned with the tab stop In the example to the right the cursor inside each set of brackets marks the initial insertion point for the text line and where the text line is aligned to the tab stop You can have up to ten tab stops in each layout Non tab cons
252. ements with transparency display the background layer Monochrome Filter In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab A color adjustment filter that performs a luminance conversion Images are converted to 8 bit grayscale See also Grayscale Motion Blur Filter In Logo Compose A distortion filter that blurs an image along a straight line to simulate motion Multiple Board System A system with more than one frame buffer Neon In CG One of seven available type styles consisting of tube and glow text elements that together create a neon effect News Edit Registry In CG A database that stores lists of frequently accessed text for use in online environments such as sports scores or news casts It lets you quickly change the layout text without affecting the formatting of a line and without having to check the spelling of text each time you enter it Noise Filter See Dither Filter Non Keyed Cuts Cut transitions without a key or alpha channel Non Tab Constrained Line In CG A line of text that is free to move horizontally and vertically Contrast with Tab Constrained Line NTSC National Television Standards Committee One of several standards developed for television broadcast transmission and reception An NTSC TV image has 525 horizontal scan lines per frame Each half frame screen scan takes approximately 1 60 of a second and a complete frame is scanned every 1 30 of a second 30 frames per second Typ
253. en these two extremes is represented by a shade of gray Logo Compose also creates a selection channel when you make a selection Switch to the Select tab and draw a selection The thumbnail sketch on the Select tab is a grayscale image representing the current selection channel White represents fully selected areas black represents fully unselected areas and shades of gray represent areas that are partially selected Channels are usually used as a mask on the image If you select only the red channel you are masking out the green blue and alpha channels so that only the red channel is available for editing Similarly the selection channel acts as a mask on the unselected pixels so that only the selected pixels are available Logo Compose uses the Select Channel dialog when you need to select channel options Call the Select Channel dialog from the Image As Selection button on the Select tab whenever you want to select a specific Select Channel Eq Thumbnails bid Image Selected Channel channel This dialog is called 7 whenever you import a selection ae Scale C Luminance All Channels scale 71 00 The Image thumbnail shows a sketch Fas RAS er PEE of the source file The Selected Red Channel ie Green Channel IV Size To Fit Channel thumbnail shows a sketch of the current channel as determined Blue Channel Alpha Channel Offset by the Source radio buttons Sea
254. encer and Logo Compose e in Frame Grab the Use option is not functional Use Texture e in CG copies the selected item to the Texture map Menu Option Use Texture Use Layout Use Logo Delete Clear All Copy to Clipboard Paste From Clipboard Info Function e in CG copies the selected item to the Texture map e replaces the current layout with the selected item e in CG copies the selected item to the Logo map e removes the selected item from the Scrapbook e removes all items from the Scrapbook e copies the selected item to the Windows clipboard e adds the item on the Windows clipboard to the Scrapbook opens a dialog that indicates how many items are stored in the Scrapbook and how much disk space the Scrapbook file is using these menu options are only available when a background texture layout or logo is the selected Scrapbook item Transter Images Between Modules l Switch to Logo Compose Select Import Export Import Image from the File menu navigate to an image location and select an image Right click on the Scrapbook and select Add from the menu Your image now appears in the Scrapbook window Switch to CG Right click on the Scrapbook and select Use Logo from the menu When you switch to the Logos tab your image appears in the Logo map Right click on the Scrapbook again and select Use Background Your image now becomes the background for the current Play List event
255. enema 94 SIZE i setantaus 76 90 142 143 Size 10 Edges type style 4 110 TEXT OD CS einsi enine 70 90 91 Transparent 148 TUe nara 142 Ine E 76 90 Using Background eee eeeeeeees 144 Edges SINE CII es ern Sr 112 Edg Over Face sessist 86 105 108 Edibe NU aA O 71227 ICG aan EE area 71 M rame GAD anei 218 Edit menu continued in Logo COMPOSE ses ievarvensetveesstesent ZL WV SCQUENCERS scccucsesiassedsceostentoliur 179 ECU e EE 182 ENCIS arreen ia E 182 GOUDE a AE 182 Mie ona 250 251 News Edit tables asirieni 166 TRIP OMS eenaa enana 206 Editora e Mapes 34 E E E I E AE 34 Logo COMPOSE ssssssssssssssssessesseseeses 226 FEET EVO ME AAS 180 194 AMMAN ON Sonori an 194 CG eect i a anaana 194 CYAW E E E T aout 194 REVEAIS earranan AAS 194 ROMS rica teraieanenis caveats 194 StOp pins Takes sys weiinvovey sepasaveanones 195 Effect Settings tab 50 52 54 56 Eee Si iE teen anus 86 ROAS al NE E E E 87 10 Edges Visible layer 0 110 Calligraphy gt cseisernnscanaveerensiennnl 234 CHLOING enamn aaa 255 Creating in Logo Compose 229 DUGLOME asrep Re needs 255 Edge Bevel NCG isnin orent 109 Edge Over Face irino 86 Embellished iiien 86 Face On 1 OD iste acecchvevets neat 106 GHOST nt a i conceit 108 Inside LAV Elona tomar an 110 INGO EA ETA 87 RE CESSEC sactessnesn taii 87 SDE Maaa 87 Au ilar ac errno reenter tenner rere 109 Elemente diee 35 Constrain options
256. ent selection Select Fully e selects all pixels in the current selection at 100 Selection Fields The selection fields are described below To use the fields enter a specific value in the appropriate field and click on the corresponding button to apply the change The expand contract feather and border values are measured in pixels Description e enlarges the selection outward 244 Logo Compose 2 Contract Feather Border Grow Similar Smooth Import a Selection to Create an Effect Select File mport Export mport Image and select the canada_map tit file from the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Select File Import Export lmport Selection and select the worldmap Igo file from the GS41 Paint Examples folder The Select Channel dialog appears Select the Grayscale RGB Channels radio button Enter a scale factor of 1 3 for the Scale X and the Scale Y fields Enter an offset of 60 in the From Top field and 40 in the From Side field Click on OK Switch to the Select tab and click on the Invert button Switch to the Filter tab and set the Opacity to 75 and double OoOo Selection Channel Source Description shrinks the selection inward e feathers or softens the selection by selecting pixels at lesser levels e creates a border around the selection centered on the edge of the selection e swells the selection based on the tolerance value e extends the selection based on the p
257. es 171 TAIN pisctesceursa e cco secvssasent 133 COLO are oslatente ney 133 134 TextUt scicivcccavteaseeveceeveckeocees 133 134 Transparency wccsisieansaavadvnns 133 134 TITS TEX CULES nnen 134 Tips and Tricks in Sequencet 212 Titles See also Layouts eseeee 158 OOM PAE eras cansaneimaraueres esi 227 LO OIDALS areara 34 CG E SA E EA AN 34 43 Logo Compose Tool palette 227 232 TO eeaeee E 232 Alp hacan a eT 236 Alp eA monn aa 236 257 Alpha Pileci rer e nereneerierr 236 Alpha Linear Gradient 236 Alpha Luminance Fill 236 Alpha MEMO cosactonisonsauonte anne 236 Alpha Radial Gradient 04 236 Alpha Subac tskan 236 Alpha Tolerance Fill suctearsesseinvass 236 Aspect raosna 239 Brush Select Otisisssesestesewencevsesvscseds 242 Brush Dased oscccsscaiessssoecenteanteonss 232 IS OT a e EAE EE 264 ClOMC e SR EES 251 GOlOT enua 264 COLE PICK er aaea 64 COlOF SElCCLOI diddan 64 Color Sidene 64 Column Selection tools Column 242 Dodo tae 264 Elliptical Sele chon ates avatuaveiees 242 Formatting paletieis sccssssocenweanuern 40 Pree lOr ro 246 Graphic tools israel 40 138 Tools continued in Logo COMPOSE sairin 227 Das eaa er Dr 242 Linear Lasso ccccccscccccscsseeseesesseees 242 Logo COMPOSE sssssssesssssessessessesese 232 Luminance Add veicccstsesccisvessewnen 264 Luminance Subtract 250 264 Luminance Wand cccceceeeeee 242 MOVE maa
258. es ptt on Add Reaistry CG Layouts Change the name of m News Edit Tables the table to Short City List Click on Load to load the table and click on Close Select Short City List from the News Edit Tables drop down list on the News Edit tab The entries in the table are now arranged in alphabetical order Paris France Tokyo Japan Toronto Canada WATsYolate be AWAUE CG Formatting News Edit Tables News Edit tables can be prepared in any text editor as long as the editor does not insert special formatting codes or control characters in the file If you don t know whether or not your editor inserts formatting codes or control characters use Windows Notepad to check the file before you try and import it into the News Edit registry Each entry in the table should be on a separate line in the text editor Create the file in your text editor and save it as text Assign Styles and Colors Add Mid Line Style Changes Add Logos 162 CG The characters number let you pre assign global style or color groups to lines of text Start the line with number where number is the actual number of the style or color group you want to use You must insert Style and Color format codes at the beginning of the line before other format codes such as tabs or logos Be careful when you mix style and color groups Color groups do not include any formatting information so lines assigned to color groups also use information fro
259. es tab and change the Vertical Size 2 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and change the Height to to 10 and the Horizontal Size to 600 56 and the Width to 88 9 Select 3 Switch to the View tab and change the Baseline to 377 and the File gt Registry G New a Left Edge to 0 Layouts and click on sve 4 Click on the second text line in front of the word Location and Bete press the TAB key four times to add four tabs Now click on Style 10 Change the Template eee dorran 11 on the Formatting Palette number to 75 and the Ewo gt g 5 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and change the Height to oe ick p a 31 and the Width to 84 as ate Uik on UR 7 6 Switch to the View tab and change the Baseline to 420 and the 1 Click on a blank thumbnail in the Play List and select template Lett Edge to 0 75 Test Template from the Templates registry CG 157 Understanding News Edit News Edit lets you quickly update layout text with commonly used names places or other text You can update text without having to type it in each time so you don t have to worry about formatting or spelling News Edit Basics Set Up and Use News Edit Design News Edit Templates 158 CG News Edit can be used in an online environment to update changing information like scores or call in show information It can also be used in an offline environment to speed up the creation of titles with repeating information like lower thirds for a num
260. es value at 0 Sequencer does not allow for gaps between events The in point for one event is automatically adjusted to one frame after the out point for the previous event For cut transitions only the Frames value can be used to remove an image from display without immediately triggering the next event Enter the number of frames you want to display the image for in the Frames field and the amount of time you want between events in the Wait field When the image duration is up CG S clears to video for the duration of the wait time before triggering the next event This is useful for subtitling jobs where you only want the subtitles onscreen for a set amount of time with a wait time between subtitles With Time Code or PC Clock triggers CG S begins and ends each take when the time code input reaches the in and out points respectively Sequencer loads the next event in the Event List into the Preview Channel during the display time The display may fall behind the time code input if the next image is not loaded before the out point is reached Sequencer then displays the next image as soon as it is loaded Images aren t skipped to catch up they are just displayed for a shorter period of time until the image display sequence catches up to the time code input Sequencer always preserves in point values it only changes out point values You cannot create overlapping intervals for events If you try to enter an incorrect value Sequencer does no
261. eseeeeee 83 Logos It asterism 153 CPIM SCT neau eR 196 CONF GUIINIG ere Ea 198 EV EE E AEE E EN 196 Grab aiid 6 ncetsvecaseeoeteveres 124 141 GLAD AMA SES arrei 218 Ceci eae eee ene ne EPR RIE 66 96 ADEE nas a 67 96 99 148 Back StOUnd ieira aeaaea ae 66 Chan ine dusane 66 97 148 Changing Color sse bdcdvevsanmenttesanvivedsnes 96 Character mi sistuntcassaentediinavuents 97 E AEE AE S 96 148 Color background ssssssssessssssssesesses 63 Combining color and pattern 67 CrO ennaa ines 66 TOPIZOD TA buin k 66 EEE A T AEE ON ET 97 linear LIL nania 97 148 EE G EE REN NT 66 Gradient continued Radiatia e 97 148 RED CALS aaron aen 148 Repeats Wi tills aean 97 Top and Bottom Values eee 66 Trans paren ys ahem uu camuaiaes 99 148 Transparent background 63 See also Lock Gradient angle sxcciresetecssensesiesoneess 66 96 CHANGING ainan adea 66 Rotae aena 66 Gradient LoCkeionssonisirerienaia 96 Graphic background sssesseseesessssesseee 68 Graphic files for logos eeeeeeeeeseeees 152 Gr phic la yetsin 34 41 138 SWIERE 0 eretan teika 141 143 Graphic objects ssssssssessesseseese 138 149 Aligning to grid ssssessessessessssssssse 146 Aligning with markers sses 146 IAP Peal ance eiscaaenenientamareacaes 72 le E E E E qian 70 E A asa S 147 CHANGING zeeen nean 141 Changing bevel direction 147 Color CLOUD ectexsscossteeanunieiuiaee 139 Control POMS
262. esse 246 Transformations oana 248 Floating palettes iss tansiestninvecnracnars 35 FNT files IPE CLOLY cccrpsescescarmncansanen 85 PING TON ireren an 77 80 RET OWING nnan 81 Folder extensions cccccccssseeeeeesseees 212 Folders FIETS cea n a 254 Folders job extensions ssssssseesesessese 18 Font Database aasa a 84 Font Database file Sharing 18 Font Database See Font Manager Fonelas R 80 Font Manas 60 sieas 84 85 Adding bold version sessessesssssseseee 85 Adding TOMES siriiseriissrsariririnets 84 Adding italic version sssssessessessesee 85 Batch processing fonts seeee 84 D plicate names esecsreciescuansaveccsecure 84 Modifying fonts sssssessessesessessessesses 85 RASC an a 85 Shared IFT database eee 18 Font names displaying essere 80 ESEI EASA EE AAR 76 80 85 Cll A E E E E 80 Database urana r 8l Displaying aces vssssvesssnesneducewnayeueans 80 Displaying NamMes ssseseeesessessesee 80 Double Dyte 83 ENE ea NE AA 77 Glyph processed cusscesussecssuconignctens 83 Inscriber format teeters 80 IR CHIN iaa 79 Leadine idena Aa 78 Paketini ooun iae 81 REMOVING aeu E 81 DIZE cree tran annette 78 Trie Type orses aigan 76 80 Foreground See Face sssessessessessssseees 76 Format Sample 0 34 40 72 74 Formatinp reisiin 34 70 Graphic objects sssesseseessssssssssessese 74 Focal TOP Terion ecaro i 75 TODOS aie a 152 Op OS a a
263. esseeseen 19 Distort text shape sesssesssssssseee 100 Video aspect TAtiOneacseescrsniececeevacers 259 Word Wrap sssssesseessssssssssssrrrreees 46 123 Double beveled edge 105 Video background 68 DIS ADHAG asinsi 49 PARE DEET enie a BASICS a atu sstsshecscaatascencaias 62 Enabling ssssssssssssrssssssesrsresssessrenens 49 Eee Oley hacen rrrartats eee QUEIVIEW saline ionic adie 62 R WIAPPING ssssseceessereceesneseceesseses 123 Embellished 0 86 108 109 Video buffers calibration esc sse 266 WUE CA WAS O 54 Ghost seseeeseeeeceeeceecceeceeeceeeceeeeenentee 108 Video Cleantin FillebSiseecseencasetenec 254 atana OO 53 a ae eg OO ideo diher oe cel erbincnntincnta 28 Work floW sesssstsessesnsenenannnsensn 10 Multiple colors s s s SAna 100 ES A ERE AEE the ate 46 62 WORKSPACE eiten n eiat 34 Multiple transparencies 0 100 Widso Safe Tinea eee 120 121 RAE TEREA AAT AISEA S 34 NeUtserdaaar a eines 87 114 Video Transparent Background 62 in Logo COMPOSE isis vecacduiedtedecestes 226 Recessedaiini nutsin 87 106 Video Transparent Pattern 99 SEGUEM a 176 OON eae ee ere ne Sete PEE teste satiate 28 Wrap text sss sessessstessseessteees terse tesniecen 46 SCC fl erneiere 87 102 112 E a E E A E Sia topnsinowadserenaince 258 Tubed usana a 109 A a aT 258 y TYPCtace sesseesseerssessssssessssssssssssssssen 80 IN COLOR ioiii Rhee erieeneeiesdeees 258 NV CLOW rua EE N 264 RG Doras a
264. euaseasesecans 124 141 DEENS uannronatnaiuna ae 124 Coordinates in Logo Compose 226 Coordinates of Logo Compose cursor 226 COPYING aiye iiianoe 144 183 A RE T 182 Graphic objects anena 144 SE POUS ena 4 Toenn a 71 Copying Color groups sessessesssssessee 4 Corrected video aspect ratiO 259 Correction color filters sees 255 CAW aenea 48 194 DPC ARANCE soneron 48 Back Ground ccss yccoarouarisvenamaannnnns 69 Creating template for eee 128 Creating text Tiles c33 scstctaariectaenaeons 129 LIM PORTING ten oeiee 128 Number of text lines 0 00 cee eeeeeeeee 48 Page based arunan 55 SJE S a PAESE E E 55 193 Word Wrap riesia anos 54 Crawl direction uni jaicsurcanessecoiehen ant 55 E E E AAE A E E errr re er 55 Roeien aan 55 Crawl SCLUNGS inscne 54 CHANGING eeir uci mimetics 54 SOMMCGS E eae E eats 54 D EAEE EEEE AE 55 Crea ea Ea 35 188 Crawl tert iE giiia 129 FIT OCLS LE E R 229 Embossed C486 s uavsiunsusimentacndas 91 Even GOTOV psc e E ean 179 Evento rops ecann noana 182 Eyent LISS ronson a ureo 178 Gradient backgrounds eee 66 Graphic object copies ssessesese 144 Layou rennu 45 MaS Koda 260 MI aenea aa A 260 EE A E EE 229 ROEE E une 128 Selec HONS i Eaa 242 Shad ONS 229 Subtitle templatesiancewauneen 170 Tert DOLES dechenivcbadestonsavcasededaemeshs 124 Texron a Pall onnan 124 TEXtUreS 2 2ivesaseccencsiwietenstnoces 229 256 Transition Events s cascies weecieees 18
265. f red The red you see is the chrominance of the ball and the shades of red are the different luminance values Luminance Fill In Logo Compose A painting tool that fills a layer or selection based on color values in the image You can specify in the Tolerance field how close color values need to be in order to be filled in Glossary M Manual Trigger Type In Sequencer A group trigger type used when you need to trigger events manually See also Trigger Type Marching Ants See Marquee and Selection Mark In and Mark Out Points In Sequencer The points set in the Trim Editor to mark the first and last frames of a clip to be played in a sequence See also Trim Editor Mark NTSC PAL Illegal Colors In Logo Compose Legalize filters that identify areas of your image that have illegal colors These allow you to see what sections of an image need to be legalized Marquee In Logo Compose The dotted line that denotes a selection boundary Mid Take In Sequencer Specifies any point between the in and out points for an event take Minimum Total Duration In Sequencer A specific event s duration For example if a crawl is 60 frames long CG S waits until the crawl has played at least 60 frames before taking the next event Mix Through to Key Checkbox In CG An option that mixes transparency through to the video signal instead of to the existing background When Mix Through to Key is disabled text el
266. field to select that kavei eanads event then click on the Run Job button to run the job starting trom the selected event 9 Click on the Live Playlist checkbox to disable live Play List updates and run the job The Play List items are no longer highlighted as they are output to video Sequencer 203 204 Render Location and Rendered Images The render location describes where the final events are rendered when you go online You have three choices local disk local RAM or remote CG S renders the events out as bitmaps so the frame buffer can display them online Rendered Images Risks and Benefits of Remote Rendering Display Latency Sequencer You control whether the images are rendered to disk or RAM before Sequencer runs Pre rendered images are displayed much faster than images that must be read from a remote network drive but every rendered image requires 2Kb to 1 5Mb of local disk drive space or RAM If image retrieval time is not critical you may prefer to leave the files on the remote disk until they are needed You can set the location for each image in the Event List The location options are found on the Event Editor tab Option Render Location Local RAM The image is rendered to a file on the frame buffer or in local RAM When the local RAM is full the image is rendered to a Ex file saved on the local hard drive Local Disk The image is rendered to a file on the local hard drive Image display latency de
267. fining Additional Textures on page 132 for details See Understanding Text Color on page 94 for details on setting text color and texture See Transparency on page 98 for details on setting transparency The Color Options drop down list available for many of the text elements contains four color display options to create complex color Ramp text Color Ramp Bevel Full Alpha and Eliminate See Color g9 Pame Options on page 101 for details on each item and Using Full Alpha Additional Beveled Text on page 104 for details on creating Eliminate bevels Outline edge outlines the combined face edge face depth and body depth elements with extra pixels drawing a hard line around all text without cutting between characters On Outline Edge you can set outline edge options The outline edge can contain up to four colors and transparency values See Defining Additional Textures on page 132 for details on type style textures The graphic below shows you how the outline edge outlines the combined text elements Duilimed Edge Face Depth and Body Face depth adds a hard extruded edge Depth to the face element Body depth adds a hard extruded edge to the face edge and face depth elements combined The graphic to the right shows you the difference between face depth and body depth The depth field on Face Depth determines depth size Angle Face Depth lt Body Depth AA
268. following example shows what happens when you add a blank line When Locked Lines is on all the text lines after the new line move down to make room for the new line When Locked Lines is off the line after the new line moves down but the line already in that position does not move creating an overlap o be or not to be To be ornotto be To be ornotto be that is the question Whether tis nobler that is the question l Whether tistnobler Whether tis nobler Original Locked Lines Locked Lines Text On off The following example shows what happens when you move a line If Locked Lines is on all of the lines following the moved line also move in relation to it If Locked Lines is off only the line being moved is shifted To be or notto be Wo be ornrnotto be lo be ornnotto be thatis the question that is the question Minathor iain Whethitatis the question Whether ts nobler Wihether tis nobler Original Locked Lines Locked Lines Text On Off You can reverse the order of two lines of text without altering text attributes Using the Move tool click on the first line and copy it CTRL C or Edit gt Copy You can then click on the second line and press CTRL backslash You can use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move lines one pixel at a time in any direction Moving tab constrained text changes it to non tab constrained To nudge a line one pixel at a time select the line hold down the ALT key an
269. from the News Edit tab See Understanding News Edit on page 158 for details on using News Edit Templates are important in CG because every layout is based on a template Most layouts are based on the 0 Default Template Some users never need to use any other template but other users may need to design many different templates to handle their needs Create a New Layout Style and Color Groups Templates let you create and save standard layouts These layouts can be used over and over again and are ideal for those situations where you have a basic layout with one or two elements that change often Once you have created a standard layout you can save it as a template The next time you need to use the layout select the template from the Templates registry make any necessary changes and save the modified layout Templates include anything you put in a layout from a simple lower third definition to a complex layout full of logos and other graphic objects You can define logos colors graphic styles and text styles in a template so that any layout created from a specific template always uses the same settings See Understanding Templates on page 154 for details In CG you can create new layouts based on the selected template by clicking on the next blank thumbnail in the Play List or by pressing CTRL L Style and color groups are important in CG because every text element or graphic object must belong to either a style
270. ften the image vertically Horizontal Flip Flips the image left to right Vertical Flip Flips the image top to bottom Blur Filter Mildly blurs the image with a 3x3 convolution filter Sharpen Filter Mildly sharpens the image with a 3x3 convolution filter Video Legalize Checks the image for color values that will result in out of range values after an encoding process Illegal colors are corrected to legal colors with an algorithm that attempts to maintain luminance values Monochrome Performs a luminance conversion converting images to 8 bit grayscale Dither Removes contouring in imported graphics with a generalized noise filter Footprint Removal Field 1 Applies the average field filter to the field 1 followed by an adaptive field filter to field 2 Footprint Removal Field 2 Applies the average field filter to the field 2 followed by an adaptive field filter to field 1 Use Filters 2 Click on the Frame Grab button to ia SOMMK switch to Frame Grab Click on the Grab button to capture an image Click on the Filter button to open the Filter and Fiter Cleanup Options dialog mea Select the filters you want to apply to your grab by clicking on the appropriate checkboxes and click on OK Click on the Filter checkbox to apply the selected filters The selected filters are applied to the grab as soon as you select the Filter checkbox Experiment with the filters to
271. g the News Edit Registry News Edit lets you create add modify and delete lines in News Edit tables Search functions let you find table entries quickly You can also import formatted text created in a text editor Use the News Edit Tab Edit and Update a News Edit Table Add News Edit Text Lines to a Layout 166 CG The News Edit tab lets you use News Edit tables which you can select from the table drop down list The contents of the table are displayed in a scrollable table list You can also enter text in the text entry box on the News Edit tab and add the text to the current layout or to the current News Edit table View size amp Attributes Color amp Texture Styles Logos Background Mews Edit Effect Settings 0 Import Text Y Inzert Item Append All Delete tem Redraw Mame List The four buttons on the News Edit tab let you edit the current table and add the table to the current layout Append All adds the entire contents of the current table to the layout Redraw is the same as the Edit Redraw command and redraws the current layout You can edit the contents of a table using the Insert Item and Delete Item buttons If you want to add a new item to a table type the new item in the text entry box on the News Edit tab and click on Insert Item or press INSERT The new item is added to the current table If you want to change an item in a table click on the item The text appears i
272. ges CG differs from these packages because the text and graphic object edges are always anti aliased Text in CG Text in Other Vector Based Applications In raster images also known as bitmaps objects are described by pixels These pixels are arranged in a grid or raster Since a bitmap is defined by the number of pixels it contains increasing its size can distort the image Programs like Logo Compose PaintShop Pro Painter and Photoshop manipulate raster images Unlike these applications Logo Compose is designed specifically for the video and broadcast industry Generally you should not size an image or part of an image much beyond 120 in any application that manipulates bitmap images including Logo Compose CG FX Frame Grab and other paint programs In CG logos textures and backgrounds are bitmap images text graphic objects and all other objects are vector based In Logo Compose FX and Frame Grab all objects are bitmaps including text Every design medium has its particular challenges In print graphics you need to understand CMYK color space color separations and the difference between image size and image resolution In web graphics you have to be concerned with Pixel Shape Aspect Ratios Video Legal Colors Scale an Image l file size and web colors In video graphics you do not have to worry about image resolution or file size Image resolution is the size of the image and file size is limited
273. gnments are Pree left aligned Each tab stop can only be positioned center aligned between the tab stops on either side of it right aligned They cannot cross over each other For example tab stop 3 must always be to the right of tab stop 2 and to the left of tab stop 4 Tab stop 3 can never be positioned further left than tab stop 2 or further right than tab stop 4 night aligned Align Text to Tabs The Element menu aligns text to specific tab jermen positions Center Vertically centers the text so aa a that the vertical midpoint of each line is atthe Constrain gt center of the screen Centering text vertically Align All EE E doesn t change the leading between lines Apply Leading Left Tab Layer Control gt Center Tab NewsEdit Names gt Right Tab Spell Check gt 122 G Word Wrap Re Wrap Selected Text Left Tab aligns all text lines with tab stop 1 Center Tab aligns all text lines with tab stop 3 Right Tab aligns all text lines with tab stop 5 Word wrap lets you control whether or not text wraps down to the next line when you reach the right edge of the Video Safe Title Area If Word Wrap is on any words that do not fit inside the Video Safe Title Area on the current line are moved to the next line Word Wrap is a text entry feature not an editing feature If you delete a word from a line subsequent lines are not automatically reformatted to remove the extra space However if you delete
274. go in the Now click on Style 10 on the Formatting palette text line 2 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and change the Height 7 Press ENTER to create a copy of the rectangle and move the value to 95 second rectangle so that it is underneath the second logo in the 3 Switch to the Logo tab and click on Logo 15 Now click on the text line text line and press SPACEBAR 8 Switch to the Logo tab and click on the second rectangle 4 lick on Logo 16 and switch to the graphic layer Click on Logo 15 click on the second rectangle and click on Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and select Rectangle from Logo 16 Notice the differences in shadows and edging the Graphic Type drop down list between the logos inserted as graphic objects and logos inserted as text CG 153 Understanding Templates Every layout in CG is based on a template Templates let you define standard layouts for projects They contain anything you put in a layout from lower third definitions to complex full screen layouts using logos and other graphic objects Templates Adding Templates to the Registry 154 CG Every layout in CG is based on a template When you click on an empty event thumbnail in the Play List CG uses the current template to create a new layout Default layout Learning Inseriber CG Supreme Intra Registry Samples Default Style amp Colour Chips LowerThirds 1 LowerTHirds 2 LowerThirds 3 Lower Thirds 4 Lowe
275. gram Preview palette expands to display a maximum of three frame buffer boards To display multiple boards click on the Arrow button beside the Preview button Use the Arrow button at the top of the palette See Setting Up Channels and Channel Ripples on page 208 for details on setting up multiple frame buffer systems The Program The Program Channel is the video channel used to broadcast or send a Play List to Channel tape In multiple frame buffer systems you can have multiple Program Channels The Preview Channel The Preview Channel is the video channel used to preview video before you output it to the Program Channel Even in multiple frame buffer systems you can have only one Preview Channel In a single frame buffer system where you don t have a physical Preview Channel you can still view the contents of the Preview Channel on the Preview palette or on the Run tab s Preview Output window Overview Quick Takes and A quick take or preview is a take or preview done while CG S is offline You can Previews perform quick takes and quick previews by dragging the event thumbnail from the Play List to the Program Preview palette To perform a quick take drag an event thumbnail to the Program Channel To perform a quick preview drag an event thumbnail to the Preview Channel Automatic Live You can enable automatic live updates by selecting the PGM and PRV buttons on the Updates Program Preview palette When you enable live updates CG
276. group headers Paste Event from the Event List but you can t paste them To copy an event click on the event and select Playlist Copy Event Alternatively you can drag and drop events within the Play List See Using the Play List on page 12 for details Copying an event copies all event information not contained in the group header You can copy events in any CG S module To paste events select the event you want your pasted event to follow and choose Playlist Paste Event You can paste events in any CG S module To select event or group attributes click on the specific attribute in the Event List This automatically selects the attribute in the Event Editor tab For example to edit the Wait time for an event select Wait from the event line enter the new value on the Event Editor tab and press TAB on the keyboard You can also select attributes directly from the Event Editor tab Single Click W 00 00 00 00 00 0 rA a F r sa w Fo b wo Wait la le Enter Wait Value Edit the Event List 1 Create a Play List with ten events and switch to Sequencer 5 Select event 03001 and click on the Log Event zl 2 Use the SHIFT and CTRL keys to select events 00004 00006 Down button on the Sequencer toolbar to add an 00007 and 00009 Select Edit Insert Group Header You event below event 03001 should now have five groups 6 Click on the new event and select Playlist Cut Event 3 Click
277. groups include the width and height of the characters but graphic style groups do not include the width and height of the object Change Style and Color Groups Freeform Style and Freeform Color Graphic style groups include the shape of the graphic object When you create a graphic object you select a style or color group and then a graphic tool from the palette The object that you create uses all of the attributes of the style or color group except shape size and position However if you select an object and then select a style group the object takes on all of the style group attributes including shape If you want to change the shape of an object click on the Graphic button and select a different shape from the Graphic Shape drop down list on the Size amp Attributes tab To change the options for a style or color group click on a line of text or a graphic object Make whatever changes to the style you want using the Color amp Texture and Size amp Attributes tabs Remember that changes made with the Size amp Attributes tab do not affect color groups Any objects in the layout that share the style or color group of the selected line are updated to reflect the changes you make The style or color chip on the Formatting palette and the style chip on the Styles tab are also updated Freeform Style and Freeform Color let you modify a line of text or a graphic object without affecting any other text formatted with the same s
278. h of your crawl doesn t change You are simply adjusting how many frames your total crawl is divided into which affects the speed of playback To decrease the speed of your crawl you can increase the value of the Frames field or decrease the value of the Speed field To increase the speed of your crawl decrease the value of the Frames field or increase the value of the Speed field The maximum value of the Speed field is 99 9 The maximum value of the Frames field depends on the length of your crawl The Frames field maintains the set number of frames for the crawl even if you modify the file length If you add or subtract lines from your crawl CG automatically adjusts the number in the Speed field so that the apparent speed of your crawl doesn t change when you take it to video If you click on the Take button you can test the speed of your crawl Press the PLUS key on the number pad to increase test speed and the MINUS key on the number pad to decrease test speed The Page based crawls checkbox allows you to create crawls with equally spaced pages that use the same tab stops formatting and graphics on each page To create a page based crawl check the Page Based Crawls checkbox on the Effect Settings tab Position the first text line for your crawl and enter your text To switch to the next page press CTRL ENTER until the next page appears You can use the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN buttons to move on the text layer between the p
279. ha areas This pattern is only a marker it is not saved as part of the rendered images a The checkboxes in the Custom Settings area of the General tab allow you to customize your system to meet your specific needs To enable an option click in the checkbox so that a checkmark appears To disable an option click in the checkbox again to clear it The options are described in the table below Checkbox Outcome when selected No Video Init on e prevents frame buffer initialization each time you Task Switch switch back to CG S from another application Show Filename in Job Strip Disable Text Filtering Save Uncompressed TGAs Use MRU Job on Launch BMPs Default to 32 Bpp Force Disk based Takes Silent video init 1 1 display aspect ratio e displays rendered filename in Play List instead of event number e disables automatic blur and pixel rise time filters applied to text characters e enable this option only when working with very small type in Inscriber fonts ift e exports TGAs from CG S without compressing e enable this option if you are using an older application that cannot read compressed TGAs e opens the most recently used Play List upon program launch e this option has been permanently disabled e saves bmps as 32 bit files e this option is for future compatibility most applications cannot read 32 bit bmps so you shouldn t ever need to enable this option e force CG S to render
280. ha channel There 6 are no color tools to work on the fe color channels but some of the Color Adjustment filters and other Logo Compose options do allow you to work on a single color channel The color channel defines the color portion of the image while the alpha channel defines the visible portion of the image You can edit the channels individually and view the alpha channel separately from the color channel See Understanding Channels in Logo Compose on page 260 for details on manipulating individual channels and Viewing Your Image on page 258 for details on viewing the alpha channel al Ol RGB Channels Alpha Channel Image All Channels In Logo Compose the alpha channel is represented by a grayscale image White represents the areas that are fully opaque and black represents the areas that are fully transparent In Logo Compose the alpha channel is actually made up of two channels the real alpha channel and the displayed alpha channel Alpha Channel The alpha tools work on the displayed alpha channel while all other tools work on the real alpha channel The displayed alpha channel is unique to Logo Compose and acts like a mask on the real alpha channel which is the original alpha channel of the image This real alpha channel is affected by all of Og the other paint tools You need to understand this because the alpha tools remember the previous values by looking at the real Real Disp alpha channel The Alpha
281. hadows require an additional value softness to determine how fuzzy or T c S C oe ete ent p e t oe T et Q O C C m i c i Q o diffuse the edge of the shadow will be A softness value near zero gives a hard edged shadow similar to an offset shadow A softness value closer to the maximum value gives a diffuse indistinct shadow Softness values range from 0 to 29 pixels The example below shows you the ranges of softness that you can use with a soft shadow Sor Soft Soft Sof Softness 0 Softness 9 Softness 18 Softness 29 Create Text Shadows l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and type the words Shadow Example Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab In the Edging field change the edge size to 1 and change the shadow size to 8 Select Drop from the Shadow Type drop down pa 7 list In the Editing field change the shadow type Erer to Offset the shadow type to Extrude and change Exess the shadow type to Soft In the Softness field change the softness value to 20 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab and click on the shadow color chip in the bottom left corner Click on the Solid Blend cycle box to cycle to TOP Use the color selection tools to select red for the top color Now change the Shadow Type to Drop and change the Shadow Type to Extrude The shape of the shadow does not change when you sw
282. hange the size to 4 but leave the direction at the default wall box close diagonal down left diagonal left close diagonal left open horizontal close horizontal open vertical close vertical open vertical gate diagonal box close 11 diagonal down right right diagonal right close diagonal right open cross close cross open diagonal cross close diagonal cross open box open horizontal gate diagonal box open e i E OS bes BI a N AY E Click on the second event in the Event List and select the Louvre transition and the up right direction from the Event Editor tab Set the size to 4 Click on the third event in the Event List and select the Push transition and the left direction Click on the fourth event in the Event List and select the Dissolve transition m Click on the Online Toggle button to go online y7 Click on the first event and then click on the Run Job button on the Run tab to run the series of events Note how the different transitions affect the way each image appears on screen Sequencer 191 192 Understanding Event Duration Transition and effect event duration are measured and set in frames Set the total take duration using the Frames and Wait fields on the Event Editor tab You can also set the duration from the Speed dialog by clicking on the Frames button next to the Frames field Event Duration Wait Time Total Take Duration Cut Transitions and Duration Gaps
283. hanges Click on the next thumbnail in the Play List to work on a new CG layout See Using the Play List on page 12 for details The Scrapbook lets you transfer layouts images and formats between layouts Play Lists and other CG S modules See Using the Scrapbook on page 16 for details The right click menu contains all of the menu items in the Element menu and can be accessed in the CG Editor Use this menu to position objects on layers and to change some of the text constrain and align options To display the right click menu position the mouse pointer anywhere on the CG Editor and press the right mouse button All of the palettes in CG including the Attributes tabs the Play List and the Formatting palette can be converted to floating palettes by dragging them anywhere on the screen CG S resets all floating palettes to their default positions whenever you exit the program CG S comes with a number of utility programs stored in the Utilities folder on the CG S CD ROM See the readme file or the Utilities folder for details View the CG Workspace The Zoom Alpha and RGB options on the View tab let you change which aspects of a CG image are displayed in the workspace 1 Switch to the View tab and click on the up and down arrows beside the Zoom field to select a zoom level from one to eight The higher the value that you select the larger the zoom factor zoom po a it Show RGBIFIIN C Show Alpha kev T
284. hanges from the layout you are replacing to the new layout If you do not select this option choosing a new template replaces the current layout without any warning Use Custom IME lets you edit double byte text directly in the CG workspace You must have the appropriate version of the operating system in order to use double byte text If Use Custom IME is not checked you can only use the standard IME that comes with your operating system On some systems direct entry of text into CG may be slower than using the system IME Default Sample String sets the default text string displayed on the Formatting palette the Styles tab and the Font Browser Language You can click on the Dictionaries Language Dictionaries button to select other languages for the Spell Checker You can have more than one active language at a time The Lexicon Selection dialog lets you select languages or user lexicons The languages are identified by name and the user lexicons are identified by filename When you have selected all of the languages and lexicons that you want to Lexicon Selection Dialog Fa Languages English US a English UK Brazilian Portuguese Danish Dutch Finnish French German User Lexicons C cgs41 Spell BrazilianPortuguese User Lex C cas41 Spell D anish User Lex L cgs41 spell Dutch User lex C cas41 Spell Finnish User Lex C cgs41 Spell French User Lex C cqs41 Spell German User Lex at b
285. hare a style or color group also share a texture All of the texture options are set on the Color amp Texture tab Apply Textures Textures on Logos Textures and Templates Align Textures 136 CG In order for CG to apply a texture to a text element or graphic object the Enable checkbox must be checked Enabling and disabling a texture lets you quickly add and remove textures from a commonly used object without losing the texture definitions If your textures are not appearing check to make sure that Enable is on All of the elements of text and graphic objects face edge and shadow can have textures applied to them To apply a texture select the object and the element to apply the texture to click on the texture box and select a texture from the Texture Map dialog An image thumbnail of the texture appears on the texture box You can apply textures to the edges and shadows of all logos Monochrome logos allow you to apply textures to the face Monochrome logos are the logos saved with the Mono option elected in Logo Compose See Logos on page 141 for details If you insert a monochrome logo as a text object it is formatted using the face settings for the current text line If you insert a monochrome logo as a graphic object you can format it as a separate graphic object The example below shows you three monochrome logo objects inserted as graphic objects Each logo has a different texture on its face 7 NIV
286. he entire picture or current selection use ALT click to set the clone source the Clone Fill tool fills the selection with a copy of the entire image sized to fit The CTRL and SHIFT modifier keys and the Tile and Align checkboxes work the same way for the Clone Fill tool as for the Clone tool For example say you select an eye and set the selection as the source point using ALT SHIFT click When you click in the image with the Clone Fill tool the image is filled with a sized to fit copy of the eye If the Tile option on the Brush tab is enabled the Clone Fill tool tiles the eye throughout the image Clone an Image Select File lImport Export lImport Image and select the junebug bmp image from the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Select the Clone tool from the Tool palette hold down fi the ALT key and click on the bug s head to set it as i the clone source Begin cloning in the top right corner of the image Stop cloning switch to the Brush tab and select a larger brush Return to the top right corner of the image and hold down the CTRL key to continue cloning where you lett off Select a new location in the image and clone some more If you do not hold down the CTRL key as you begin cloning the Clone tool returns to the originally defined source point Paint over the source point bug s head release the mouse button then paint somewhere else in the image The cloned image now reflects the new source data
287. he top of the edging is slightly lighter than the background and the bottom of the edging is slightly darker than the background Embossed edges look best if you use a small edge value The examples below use edge value of one and two Outline Ouiline You can use the Bevel Out and Bevel In edge options to provide your text with a three dimensional look Your text is still two dimensional but appears to a viewer as if it is 3D See Using Classic Beveled Text on page 92 for details sev tax Create an Embossed Edge 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 5 Click on the Solid Blend cycle box until TOP drop down list on the CG toolbar and type the text Embossed appears Edge 6 Change to the HLS color model and increase the 2 Change the Edging value on the Size amp Attributes tab to 3 and lightness L value by 8 select Emboss trom the Edge Type drop down list Change the Shadow value on the Size lt Arihures antaO 7 Click on the Solid Blend cycle box until BOTTOM 3 Switch to the Background tab and use the color selection tools g to choose a solid color for the background appears Decrease the lightness L value by 8 Your text should now look like this 4 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab and click on the FACE color chip and drag it to the Edge color chip cG 91 92 Using Classic Beveled Text Beveled text provides standard two dimensional characters with a three dimens
288. he top of the object and the bottom color appears at the bottom of the object Changing the number beside the Linear Radial Fill cycle button changes the number of times the gradient is repeated in an object El ES mk T a a mb nh ES fea D D Each text and graphic element can have its own transparency value When working with transparency it may help you to think of each element as a separate layer The shadow is on the bottom the edge is in the middle and the face is on top When the face is opaque the edge is visible only around the outside of the face However when the face is transparent you can see that the edge is really a solid layer underneath the face Layer Objects on a Graphic Layer When you create graphic objects in a layout they are layered from the back to the front The first graphic object you create is the object at the back or on the bottom The last graphic object you create is the object at the front or on top CG keeps track of the graphic object order using a stack which is just a list of the graphic objects in the order you created them Initial Stack Moditied Stack r Cay You can change the order of the graphic objects by using the Send to za Back and Bring to Front buttons on the CG toolbar Since you can only move objects to the top or bottom of the stack reordering your objects requires a small amount of planning beforehand Figure out what order you want your objects in
289. he video transparent fill pattern is also enlarged when you zoom in on a layout 2 Use the standard Windows scroll bars to view sections of the workspace that are no longer visible 3 Click on Show RGB Fill to display the anti aliased fill signal for the current layout Transparent areas display a transparency pattern 4 lick on Show Alpha Key to display the key signal for the current layout Video areas are displayed as black non alpha areas are displayed as white and semi transparent areas are displayed as gray Changing the zoom factor or selecting either RGB or Alpha doesn t affect video output The output is always determined by the keying setting and your video hardware CG 35 Importing and Exporting CG lets you import layouts text files News Edit tables Subtitle EBU files ICG files and animations You can also export layouts IPS files images sequence text files subtitle text files ICG files and Subtitle EBU files See the following topic for details on importing animations All of the import and export options are found in either File Import or File Export Import and Export Layouts Import and Export ICG Files Import Text Files Import News Edit Tables 36 CG You usually export a layout when you want to transfer it to another computer running CG S Inscriber tries to maintain compatibility between versions of software but because of feature and platform changes compatibility cannot
290. hed 10 Edges Sheen and L E te Neon Each of these type styles are located on the Size amp Attributes tab The graphic to the right shows you the seven available type styles Each type style includes face edge and shadow options Many of the type styles include additional element settings such as depth face depth body depth outside edge tube and glow Mix through to key Embellished displays the face on top of the edge depth and shadow elements The edge is added to the face element Depth is added to the face and edge combined creating a 3 D effect Using Embellished you can draw face edge and depth invisible while still drawing the element s shadow See Changing Embellished and Edge Over Face Settings on page 108 for details ENIS ei Ej E NOSIS ISO Edge Over Face displays the character face underneath the edge element which decreases the size of the face Depth is added to the edge ge eT of the face and edge combined creating a 3 D effect See Changing Embellished and Edge Over Face Settings on page 108 for details ace 10 Edges Neon Recessed Sheen 10 Edges uses up to 10 edges to outline the face You can set each different colors and transparency values for each edge For details see Changing 10 Edges Settings on page 110 Neon creates a neon sign effect by displaying a tube and a glow You can specify the glow intensity offset angle and softness For details see
291. hen applied to a text or graphic object The format sample is located on the formatting palette Formatting Palette In CG The floating palette that contains the text and graphic tools the format sample color groups and style groups Frame Buffer A hardware card that stores frame information and then outputs it to video Inscriber products interact with the frame buffer to add information to the video frame stored on the frame buffer to create complex effects Frame Grab CG S module that captures individual frames from a video feed The image can be filtered in Frame Grab and then used as a background for layouts or cleaned up further in Logo Compose using a variety of tools and filters Full Alpha In CG A color option that draws text elements with 100 transparency The text element casts a shadow while its face is invisible Available with all type styles except Classic Inscriber FX Inscriber application that takes two dimensional CG text and graphics and creates three dimensional animations G Gamut The available colors that can be displayed on a particular device video output or computer monitor The RGB color gamut describes the colors available in video and on the computer Orange and yellow colors are in limited supply in the RGB gamut making it difficult to select variations of yellow and orange Gaussian Blur In Logo Compose A distortion filter that softens an image by applying a weighted
292. hic object or a logo on top of a text object make sure the text is on the layer below the graphic object Switch between planes by clicking on the Text or Graphic Plane buttons on the CG toolbar Graphic planes have an additional feature called a stack The stack lets you overlap L _ Cide Front graphic elements on the same layer See Square Middle Transparency Gradients and Layering Graphics Plane A Rectangle Back on page 148 for details on using the stack the word to select the entire word and press the DELETE key to i Default layout m i E y List and select Lower 1000 no styles defined delete the word Location j 1007 Design mode Thirds 0 from the 1002 Intro Registr Samples 5 Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar Click on the Text Plane button on the CG Toolbar You should see the word Name on the layout surrounded by 177 5 white brackets and a flashing cursor in front of the N Type the name of a city and country and click the E Graphic Plane button on the CG Toolbar You should see the thin red rectangle surrounded by a bounding box with six small black squares called handles Click on the rectangle and drag it up slightly so that it is vertically centered behind your name Your lower third should Use the DELETE key to delete the word Name Now type your look like this own name on the blank line Joe Smith Paris France CG 47 48 Choos
293. hirds 2 _Perarre _ dialog by selecting 6 LowerThirds 3 a a tle 1 gt F LowerThirds 4 File Registry CG g LowerThirds 5 Layouts Some of the 3 LowerThirds 6 ree functionality of the ee 11 LowerThirds amp Templates registry 12 LowerThirds 9 T such as loading a 13 LowerThirds 10 aes 14 LowerThirds 11 Mowie Title template can also be 15 LowerThirds 12 Special Report accessed from the CG toolbar The Templates registry dialog lets you add new templates to the registry update templates already in the registry rename templates already in the registry delete templates from the registry load a template into the CG Editor The Default Layout The default layout template is always Template 0 You can update the default Template template overwriting previous layout information See Modifying Templates below for details on updating the default template Backing up the If you want to update the default template you should make a backup copy of Templates Registry Inscribe reg which is located in the CG S folder Backing up Inscribe reg backs up the templates and the News Edit registry Modifying Templates You can make changes to any template and save the changes in the Templates registry so that subsequent layouts use the changed version Make your changes to the layout select File gt Registry gt CG Layouts and then click on Update Make sure that the template you want to modify is the selected tem
294. horizontal dimension of the e When you release the mouse button CG redraws the object to the new box size The corner or midpoint opposite to the one you grabbed remains anchored If you click and drag on any other part of the line you move the graphic instead of the resizing It Two modifier keys affect the aspect ratio Press SHIFT while you resize the object to force it to a 1 1 square aspect ratio Press CTRL to force the aspect ratio to 4 3 Press SHIFT CTRL to maintain the current aspect ratio If you want precise sizing use the Vertical and Horizontal Dimension fields on the Size amp Attributes tab to set the size Object height is measured in scan lines width is measured in pixels To move a graphic object within the layout click inside the graphic object and drag it to a new spot in the layout You can move graphic objects anywhere on the screen The status bar shows you the coordinates of the bottom left corner of the object and the size of the object For precise positioning switch to the View tab and enter the Baseline and Left Edge coordinates The baseline is measured in scan lines from the top of the frame buffer The left edge is measured in pixels from the left side of the frame buffer You can use these techniques to position graphic objects in relation to text and markers displayed on the screen Using markers you can place graphic objects in relation to tab stops text baselines and horizontal and vertical screen
295. i a 258 SIG S EA EE A A 121 GOUD kanian r 179 181 Evenen ann 179 Heade ti ccevusctornsninucauemmorncana 181 Selecting attributs iinis 182 GPON DS aar a NE 181 ADUE oaea a 181 Collapsing norconia iiai 182 CLERA teninin aA 182 Delet enra aaan 182 Edinin ioneina i 182 EXPAN naaa 182 Headisu eranen 181 SM Event Listessa an 180 Renan naarn a 186 Slech NE onen ice 182 JaAn DE E ERTE EN 196 Groups Of text lines s scssesccecdsveiescesceee 118 MO DEn vod wnisn anes 118 H Handles See also Grab handles 141 Hard ed eger iici 233 HDTV sesia 259 263 HIGIONE OPER apane 76 High Quality font processing 76 Highlights text eninin 102 112 HLS color model essa catecstsdedeivcrencnenteass 60 Horizontal FUP cscs canta te 248 Horizontal panel tictsccwatestanssen 140 Horizontal resolution ssssessessessesseesee 28 Horizontal screen centering 120 121 Horizontal texture alignment 132 Horz Screen centering aie iaveseedeotvvns 121 Hot COMGES one A nents 95 HQ font processing sssesssssessessesssssee 85 HSV color modelsucrsvsisiiseneeei 58 ILS AET E besa eeaseatessescnceticd 58 60 l pn ring Alpha sus Gosswscavesdveisuewsayesnns 68 Illegal color values 4 95 263 264 Illustrator fles irene 237 IMAC E N E Y 260 EE ATE E T E E T 260 Adding to texture map eeeee 130 HEI AD ctsint cotta casasten ts etoutauttuoseiees 262 CIDIN E a e a 218 Cleaning Up rrna 228 Color Dal
296. ia file Use a Clip as an Event Modify Clips and Animations Referenced Clip and Animation Details You can add a clip to the Play List in CG or Sequencer Like animations you cannot change the basic clip in any way using standard CG S tools In CG or Sequencer click on an empty slot in the Play List select File Import Import Clip and then select your clip file The first frame of your clip is displayed in the Play List All clips have a avi extension You can modify playback of imported clips and animations in two ways Using Sequencer you can loop a clip or animation or you can trim a clip or animation If you want to make any other changes to your clip or animation such as slowing down or speeding up play back or changing its duration in other ways you need to go back into the application where you created the original animation or clip and adjust the timing there and re import the updated version When you import a clip or animation into CG S it is always a referenced file You cannot render it to local RAM or a local disk When you are running a job with a referenced clip or animation in it Sequencer plays the clip or animation as it comes to it in the Play List When you import a clip or animation into CG or Sequencer the first frame of the clip or animation is generally used as the thumbnail that appears in the Play List However you can choose a different thumbnail if you use Via Builder to create your via fi
297. iber graphic shadow follows edge follows format object object edges bounding box edges non Inscriber graphic shadow follows edge follows format object bounding box edges bounding box edges If you apply a shadow to a graphic object it follows the outline of the object even if it is not rectangular If you apply an edge it follows the edge of the bounding box not the outline of the object If you insert a logo as a text object and apply a shadow it follows the outline of the object even if it is not rectangular If you apply an edge it also follows the outline of the object Do not apply both an edge and a significant shadow to a logo inserted as a graphic object because the shadow follows the object edge not the bounding box edge Monochrome and Color Logos Also do not overlap one logo s shadow over another logo with an edge as unpredictable results may occur If you are using a double byte or glyph processed language do not insert your logos as text characters Instead insert them as graphic objects Monochrome and color logos differ in one important area you can change the face color and texture of a monochrome logo but you cannot change the face color and texture of a color logo Monochrome logos are 1 bit image files and color logos are 16 or 32 bit files Changing the color of a monochrome logo is the same as changing the color of any other text or graphic object On the Color amp Texture tab click on the appropria
298. ic object it is added to the layout as a separate graphic object and can be positioned independently of any other object To insert a logo as a graphic object click on the Logo tool draw a rectangle and then click on the logo on the Logo tab Logos in double byte and glyph processed languages should always be inserted as graphic objects although you can insert a logo as a text object Add a Logo to a Layout 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 5 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab and click on the FACE color drop down list on the CG toolbar and click on the layout chip 2 Switch to the View tab and change the Baseline to 400 6 Click on the Solid Blend cycle box until the word TOP appears 3 Switch to the Logo Tab and select the world map logo from the bottom left corner of the Logo and change the top face color to pale blue 7 Click on the Solid Blend Box until the word BOTTOM Map appears and change the bottom face color to medium blue 4 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab Now change 8 Click on the Edge color the height to 300 the Edge value to 4 the edge type to Glow chip and change the and change the Shadow value to 0 edge color to dark blue cG 151 Modifying Logos Depending on what format your graphic file is in and how you add it to your layout you can enhance your logo by using the shadows and edges available in CG If your logo is a monochrome logo you can also manipul
299. ically this standard has been adopted in countries where the power line frequency is 60 Hz to allow a simple relationship to the scan rate Number Button In Sequencer A button on the Run tab that when selected lets you use the keyboard to preview or take an event by its number 0 Offline Events are not pre rendered Any takes you do require on the fly rendering in order to be output Offline Take A take made while CG S is offline Offset Shadow In CG An effect where CG text and graphic objects have a shadow that appears at a specified distance below the objects as if the characters are suspended above a solid surface Contrast with Soft Shadow Online All events are pre rendered and ready for immediate output as soon as you run a sequence or do a take Online Manager A CG S application that renders all events before going online Online Monitor The video output monitor Glossary 287 Online Output Directory The folder or folders where all rendered events for the current sequence are stored Online Take A take made while CG S is online Online Toggle Button Switches between offline and online modes Opacity In CG and Logo Compose The degree to which background information cannot be seen through a graphic object text or image An object with 0 opacity is transparent an object with 100 opacity is completely opaque you cannot see through it Contrast with Transparency Out Point
300. ication date of a source file Image File Format The particular storage format for image information CG S can import images stored in most common bitmap formats Image Filters Filters that operate on the alpha and color channels of an image See also Filters Image Resolution The size and color depth of the source file Image Size The actual size of an image Your image size can be larger or smaller than your canvas size If your image size is larger than your canvas size some of the image is clipped If your image size is smaller than your canvas size an empty area appears around the image Image Thumbnail A small rendered bitmap representing a layout event or other full size image A thumbnail is used to give a good representation of what a source file looks like without producing a high quality image Thumbnails are used for preview purposes and image selection Image Type See Image File Format In Between See Frame In Point In Sequencer The point specifying when Sequencer takes an event Inscriber Filters See Filters Inscriber Fonts In CG Fonts created for online display before the widespread use of TrueType fonts Inscriber fonts are created using Inscriber Font Manager and are only accessible in CG See also TrueType fonts Glossary 283 284 Interface The commands and graphical display formats provided by a computer program that allow you to communicate with and use the p
301. ick menu You can also use the drop down menu on the Event Editor tab to switch triggers See Understanding Trigger Types on page 196 for details 02001 Producer fome i o2002 crew pun fm 178 Sequencer Set Timing Group Events Run the Event Sequence Timing methods change depending on the trigger type assigned to a group of events Manual and GPI triggers rely on external manual input to trigger events For time dependent triggers the group timing fields display group in out points and group duration These fields are not editable you can only edit timing information for individual events To edit trigger and timing information select the group header and right click on the trigger type Select one of the time dependent triggers from the menu either Timed Time Code or PC Clock Next select the first event in the group and click on the in point The in point field on the Event Editor tab is also selected Change the in point on the Event Editor tab time is measured in hours minutes seconds frames and press the TAB key to set the in point The out point is automatically set to the in point plus the event duration When you take the sequence the second event starts when the first event ends The time dependent triggers run sequences according to the set in and out points Sequencer does not allow for gaps between events To create a new group select an event in the Event List From the Edit menu select Inser
302. ick on the Send to ap Back button on the CG toolbar Now click on the bottom small rectangle and send it to the back then click on the rectangle just above the bottom rectangle and send it to the back Click on the next rectangle and send it to the back and click on the top small rectangle and send it to the back Finally click on the long rectangle and send it to the back Your layout should look like the graphic to the right CG 149 Adding Logos to Layouts Logos are images containing alpha information that can be used as either text or graphic objects Logos are used to import images into CG that are not backgrounds such as corporate and product logos Understand Logos Add Logos to the Logo Map Remove Logos from the Logo Map 150 CG Logos are images created in Logo Compose or a third party graphics package not in CG itself These images are saved in a compatible format and imported into the CG Logo Map Once an image is imported into the Logo Map you can use it in your layout The Logo Map is unique to each layout Logos let you use complex images with detailed alpha information in your layouts If the CG graphic tools are not sufficient to allow you to create a complex graphic layout you can always use Logo Compose to create a graphic and import it into Logos are most commonly used for station identification images corporate logos or product logos To use logos in a layout you have to add them to
303. ient options tie Solid Blend Box You can select full black which replaces the current sre Full Black color with black 0 0 0 and resets video transparency au Full Video values to 0 Full black only affects the current element fire k Char Line Fil You can select full video which sets the video transparency values to 100 for the currently selected object element and cuts through any underlying text or graphic objects to the background Remember that you need to set options for the face edge and shadow separately You select Character or Line from the drop down list to apply Ala oem the gradient to each character or across an entire line Vy i d a J Character applies the entire gradient to each character In the case of a gradient each character goes from one color to the oe other Line applies the fill to the line as a unit The line goes l N e from one color to the other with each character displaying only a portion of the gradient You can select Radial or Linear fill to Top ioo apply a different type of gradient or kel on 100 ka Top pog l i i Bottom a i Bottom jo multiple gradients to an object z ange angle ar If you select Radial the top color linear B 4 ia 3 A appears in the center of the object and the bottom color appears at the edge of the object with the gradient occurring in a circular pattern If you select Linear the top color appears at the top of the object and
304. if the Mix Through to Key checkbox is not selected Create a Double The Edge Over Face type style draws Beveled Edge two beveled edges when you select Bevel from the Color Options drop down list Each beveled edge contains two colors and transparency values that can be set individually You can set up to four colors and transparency values on the Color amp Texture tab The top two color chips set the inner beveled edge and the bottom two color chips set the outer beveled edge Create a Double Beveled Edge with Transparency 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 6 Set the bottom two color chips to the following values drop down list on the CG toolbar Type the words Bevel chip 3 H 137 L 88 S 74 Trans 23 2 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab Use the Move tool IS chip 4 H 137 L 35 S 35 Trans 0 to center the line of text and set height to 231 and di width to 112 Select the Edge Over Face type style Set the angle to 47 Notice how the bevel colors change 3 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab On Face set the face to all 8 Switch to the Background tab Set the background to gold and black apply the Bricks background pattern 4 Cycle to Edge Set the Edge Size to 80 From the Color Options 7 Your text should look like the graphic below drop down list select Bevel L l 5 Set the top two color chips to the following values chip 1 H 228 L 82 S89 Trons 85
305. ification A scanning device or scanner resolves the image into elements of color light and shade Glossary 291 Scrubber See Preview Toolbar Seamless Texture In Logo Compose A small texture image that can be tiled endlessly without a visible edge Some seamless textures may have features that make the repetition obvious but no image edge is ever visible Selection In Logo Compose The area of an image that you wish to work on The selected area is surrounded by a dotted line Logo Compose offers numerous Selection tools that allow you to select areas of the image Selection Channel In Logo Compose The Selection channel is only available when you have made a selection in Logo Compose using the Selection tools and shows you an 8 bit image of the selection Selection Contents In Logo Compose An export option that exports the contents of the current selection channel as a bitmap image Sequencer CG S module that manages event output and online control Sequencer Workspace The Sequencer window See also Event List Shade See Luminance 292 Glossary Shadow In CG For graphic objects and the Classic Inscriber type style shadow is the type and style of a text character or graphic object shadow There are four types of shadows drop extrude offset and soft For all other type styles shadow is the text element that creates a soft shadow You can adjust offset angle and softness
306. ign Checkbox destination is set Enabling the Align option prevents a new destination point from being set allowing you to stop and resume painting while creating a seamless clone If the Align option is not enabled pressing the CTRL key as you begin painting with the Clone tool has the same effect For example if you are cloning an eye but realize your brush is too big you can stop painting and resize your brush Then as you begin to paint with the Clone tool again hold down CTRL to continue the clone where you left off 252 Logo Compose Tile Checkbox Clone Fill Tool If Align is checked holding down CTRL temporarily disables the Align option This lets you set a new destination point for your clone without having to clear the Align checkbox The Tile checkbox forces Logo Compose to tile the clone source information throughout your image For example if you have selected an eye and set it as your clone source cloning with the Tile option enabled clones the eye over and over again as you drag the Pe oe Clone tool throughout your image If you are using an entire image as your clone source Logo Compose tiles the image whenever the source point reaches the image edge For example if you have an active selection and you The Clone Fill tool lets you copy sections of an image with the click of a mouse When you set the clone source the Clone Fill tool copies the entire image or selection and pastes the source onto t
307. ile in online mode In offline mode Play Direct runs the Online Manager and takes the entire event list in sequence Play List An image palette that displays each thumbnail in the current job file The Play List is visible in all CG S modules Pluge Test Part of the SMPTE video test pattern generally used when calibrating your output monitor and your frame buffer Polygon In CG An irregularly shaped object with four or more sides The shape is determined by a set of control points each of which defines a boundary of the object Posterize Filter In Logo Compose A color adjustment filter that reduces the number of colors in an image You specify the number of tonal levels brightness values for an image and the filter maps pixels to the level that most closely matches the original value Predefined Images In Sequencer Images that you can display by clicking one of the programmable Shot Box buttons Often used for emergency or test situations where you need quick access to images Preserve Luminance In Logo Compose An option with the color balance filter that when selected automatically compensates for changes in luminance caused by increasing or decreasing color values Pressure Sensitivity See Graphics Tablet Preview Board A frame buffer dedicated to the Preview channel Preview Button In Sequencer A button on the Run tab that loads the current event into the Preview channel Preview Channel
308. ils on setting up templates When you design templates for use with News Edit remember that the main goal of a News Edit template is rapid updating Static information should be separated from changing information so that you don t accidentally change the static information If possible you should place text lines that need to be changed often on text layer 1 and text that remains static on text layers 2 to 5 Text layer 1 is the default text layer and placing changing text on text layer 1 eliminates the need to repeatedly change text layers Text layer one also prevents you from inadvertently making changes to text that you want to remain static A second design aspect to remember is the maximum and minimum amounts of text that you may have on a changing text line You should test extreme values when you design your layout so that you don t run into problems with very long or short lines For example a layout might have to handle names from Ng to Van De Vondervoot or scores from 2 to 117 News Edit Template Here is a sample News Edit template along with the News Edit tables associated Example with the template CG Editor Fale View Size amp Attributes Color amp Texture Styles Logos Background News Edit Effect Settings Name Christina Van Der Sluis 2 Name List BR Append all A James Smith A Redraw Jamey Rosenberg Location line NEMIS linked to Name line City Lis
309. ing a Layout Type The layout type determines how your work displays on video You can choose one of four different layout types depending on what you need to do The layout types are still roll crawl and reveal A fifth layout type animation lets you turn a CG layout into an animation in the FX module You need the Xtreme option available from Inscriber to run FX The animation layout type is not discussed here Stills Rolls and Crawls GG Still layouts are static screen images that contain text and graphic objects on top of a background Some common types of still layouts are lower thirds corner logos and full screen layouts The Templates registry contains templates for many of these types of layouts The graphic to the right shows you three of the default lower third layouts See Understanding Templates on page 154 for details on the Templates registry Rolls scroll text and graphic objects up or down on B a static background Generally rolls are used for ROLL LAYOUT credits or other instances where you want text and A EENE KAN graphic objects to scroll vertically over either a i Tis BEEN video feed or a solid color background Roll layouts use a dotted white line to indicate page breaks These lines don t affect the way the roll is displayed they simply divide the file visually to make it easier to work with Crawls display a running line of text such as an announcement or warning across the s
310. ing and manipulating graphic objects You can only select one graphic object at a time Methods e click anywhere on the object e hold down CTRL and press X e hold down CTRL and press C e hold down CTRL and press V Now enter 230 in the Width field enter 12 in the Slant field and enter 20 in the Kerning field Your line of text should look like this FAAVIS TIS 2 lesti Enter 80 in the Small Caps field Your text should look like this AAAIS IS ATE SV Enter 10 in the Rotation field Your text should look like this THY V4 FS Tas cG 71 72 Using Style and Color Groups Style and color groups located in the Formatting palette control the appearance of your text and graphic objects Style and Color Groups Format Sample Apply Style and Color Groups Text vs Graphic Groups CG All text and graphic objects must belong to either a style group or a color group Style groups save all formatting options for an object including options set on the Color amp Texture tab and on the Size amp Attributes tab font height width shadow size edge type etc Color groups only save options set on the Color amp Texture tab See Understanding Text Color on 60 Erase FACE Format rust J 7 6 page 94 for details The Formatting palette lets you access el the 8 color groups and 8 of the 24 style Text Object Graphic Object groups All 24 style groups can also be Formatting Pa
311. ing box to form a square SHIFT drag in order to create reasonable circles To activate vertical text processing select Element Layer Control Vertical Text Processing You can switch between normal text processing and vertical text processing by pressing ALT V Vertical text processing can only be used with still and roll layout types On a still lines automatically wrap from the bottom to the top of the layout On a roll you must press ENTER to move to the top of the next column of text Vertical text processing is used mainly for double byte languages such as Chinese Japanese and Korean but it can be used with any language and any font It allows you to enter characters from top to bottom right to left on a layout V e j t C a ar X lt KO Car You can check text spelling at any point by selecting Element Spell Check and then Word Layer or Job Word checks spelling of the selected word Layer checks spelling of the selected layer and Job checks all layers on all layouts in the Play List See Using the Spell Checker on page 126 for details Enter Text on a Text Path l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar Q and click on the Text Path tool on the Formatting palette Draw a large box on the layout and type the words Text on a curving path Click on the grab handle in the middle of the bottom line of the bounding rectangle and drag it
312. ing entries to Remote 172 Subtitle only file 168 Timecode format sssssessessesseseeses 169 Timecoded sseennssseeeenssses 168 171 DATING VANES sciinta 171 TROUDLESHOOTI Gs a c sncus etomanouses 1 2 Ver ON annaa 172 SUDANE aaa a 200 Subtracting from selections 243 SUppOrt tabletce 233 SALT OTTE T ANE E 43 layer Senia abn eenseratenn tease ake 43 TO CG ETE A EEE E 34 to Frame Graben 218 to Logo Compose ssssssssssseese 226 229 tO SEQUCNICEY saccades RE 176 T AR o E A E A 34 Back Srouind anora 63 Character Generator enserir 38 Color amp Texture 61 94 130 137 Effect Settings wavasauns 50 52 54 56 Gera Ea A 99 Tab continued 150805 A E EAN 150 News EdiReindarnpan eaaa 166 OPUONS erra 34 OVENI W onnu nieun 34 Selecion E 244 Size amp Attributes 77 90 138 SILOS shasta E EE 41 72 139 Tanson ionene e 246 VIEW senin 116 117 120 146 258 Tab SlOD S a a ra 122 123 Aligning text With Guneysstecravect 116 Alom eotea 122 Center Danners r 122 CHANING anaue tonia 122 Mil a lay t seesi isrener 116 in News Edit tables 163 164 Dei ADe nir dives auicaecuuanice 122 MLO CMY IG eienen R 123 Pos M ON acione a 122 RoN CalDacsantecpsteadondiesounaunstenaytenets 122 WLC WLIO AO E T 123 Tabbed paces vavuieatnvaenw avian 34 INC PREE 34 in Logo COMPOSE seeeeeseeeseeeees 227 Tit SC QUCN CET over dushesuscauceatenves 183 204 Tab constrain
313. ing your monitor the images will not appear correctly in video For example if your gamma is not corrected oranges may appear red or yellows may appear orange Calibrating your computer monitor involves several steps You want to set the white point correct the gamma and adjust the brightness and contrast If your monitor allows it set the white point using software or hardware to match the output monitor 6500K You can correct the gamma in CG S or using third party gamma correction software To correct your gamma in CG S import the gamma bmp file located in the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Select File Preferences Adjust the R G and B fields on the General tab until the small color bars virtually disappear You may not be able to get the gray bar to disappear totally You can set the brightness and contrast while viewing the smpte bmp file Import the smpte bmp file from the CGS41 Paint Examples folder The smpt bmp file contains an RGB version of the SMPTE color bar with a Pluge test pattern This image should not be used to calibrate an output monitor since the values on the bottom row can not reproduce negative voltages The Pluge test pattern is what you want to look at the area at the bottom right of the image Adjust the brightness and contrast until the dark gray bars disappear When calibrating the output and computer monitors remember that environmental variables such as office lighting and glare from windows affect how
314. inserts a blank logo object e click on a logo from the logo tab to select a specific logo for the object Rectangle e inserts a rectangle Horizontal Panel e inserts a horizontal panel e horizontal panels have edges only on the top and bottom Vertical Panel e inserts a vertical panel e vertical panels have edges only on the sides Clipped Corner Rectangle inserts a clipped corner rectangle e corners of this type of rectangle are angled at 45 Rounded Rectangle e inserts a rounded rectangle top amp bottom edges are flat edges on side are rounded Round Corner Rectangle inserts a rectangle with rounded corners e adjusting the edge number changes the edge curvature of the rounded corners _ Arc e inserts an arc e arcs have edges only on the arc side and do not have shadows Polygon e inserts a 4 sided polygon Spline Curve e inserts a spline curve e must add extra control points to create more edges and change the shape E Sia l ol oO oO 0 G p 140 CG Change Graphic You can select a new shape for a graphic object from the Size amp Attributes tab s Graphic type drop down list or from the Attributes Graphic menu Styles also have graphic shapes associated with them so you can select a new shape by Logos are special graphic shapes that let you replace the face color of an object with a bitmap image You can scale and position logos anywhere in the layout Any CG keeps track of your logos on the Logo tab
315. ional look Beveling a Classic type style text edge involves shading it so that it appears three dimensional This is not true 3D just the appearance of 3D In CG you can choose to bevel text edges in or out depending on the look you want to achieve Bevel Out vs Bevel Beveling your text edges out means adding pixels of color to the edge of the text In and working out from the text edge As you add more pixels to the edge your text characters get larger Beveling your text edges in means adding pixels of color to the edge of the text and working in from the text edge As you add more pixels to the edge your text characters remain the same size but the face area decreases The graphic below shows you a text character with a flat bevel In the first one the edge size is set to 12 and the edge is beveled out In the second one the edge size is set to 12 and the edge is beveled in The third character explains how the edge is added to the face In the third character the bevel in character is placed on top of the bevel out character The entire area of the bevel in character is the same size as the face area of the bevel out character AAF Bevel Lighting Beveled text is shaded using a light source that is directly opposite the selected Direction shadow direction You can change the light source by clicking on a different shadow direction on the Color amp Texture tab Bevel Types You can select one of five bevel types Each bevel type
316. ique color to the character in each separate event 4 Click on the Sequencer button to switch to Sequencer g 9 5 Select all the events in the Event List and click on the E 10 Local RAM button on the Event Editor tab Sequencer attempts to render all events to local RAM once you go online Sequencer 205 Trim Editor The Trim Editor allows you to crop your video clips by setting Mark In and Mark Out po00 05 00100 00 0915 00 00 04 Points at specific frames Sequencer only runs the portion of the clip that falls Cl gK between these Trim points To trim a video clip in Sequencer add the file to the Event List right click on an event in or out point and click on Edit This action opens the Trim Points Editor Trimming a clip does not erase any part of the file If you trim a clip too short you can always lengthen it by resetting the Mark In Mark Out Points Trim a Clip Trim a clip in the Trim Editor by selecting the frames you want to set as the Mark In Mark Out Points To set the frame for the Mark In Point enter the frame number in the Current Frame field on the Trim Editor then click on the In button To set the frame for the Mark Out Point enter the frame number in the Current Frame field and click on the Out button When you trim a clip you are only changing the way CG S sees the clip the actual clip file remains unchanged so you can always go back and lengthen the clip later If you trim a clip in Sequencer you have t
317. ird tab stop which is centered in the layout If the text line doesn t look centered within the video safe area click on the Tab Stops Edit button on the View tab and adjust the placement of the third tab stop Type this text on the first line of the layout W Video Safe Title Area 23abcdetghmmmnoparstuvwxyz 8 9 The text should all fit on the first line and be centered in the layout If the text is too large to fit on a single line reduce the height of the text on the Size amp Attributes tab Using this as a guide you can see that each line should be a maximum of 26 characters long Delete the text you just typed in and select Ral Roll as your layout type from the CG toolbar In your word processor enter the numbers one to twenty each number on a separate line one two etc not 1 2 and save the file as Numbers txt In CG click on the first line in the layout and select File Import mport Text Select Numbers txt from the Open dialog to import the txt file CG 129 Defining Classic Textures Textures are image files applied to the surfaces of text and graphic objects Textures can replace colors defined for objects or they can be blended with colors for a subtle effect CG keeps track of the textures used in each layout in the Texture Map dialog You can use any bitmap image as a texture CG is shipped with sample texture images on the CD ROM Images that are suitable as textures are also a
318. ists of ten CG layers a background layer and a video layer Work with Planes Modity a Layout Click on the first blank 0 Deakin 4 Click just in front of the word Location and drag to the end of l thumbnail in the Play The CG layers contain all of the text graphic and logo elements in your layout The background layer contains oia all of the components making up your background iain including still images colors patterns and video 9 l lt G Layers transparent areas The video layer contains the live video feed that your CG layout is placed on top of and is represented in CG S by the video background transparency pattern The more detailed graphic of the various CG layouts on the right shows you the order of layers in any CG layout Each CG layer Feed overlaps the one behind it allowing you to lt Background create complex layouts by overlapping text and graphic elements on different layers Layer 5 Element Layer Control Layer List displays the Layers dialog which can be left open as you work on layouts You can use the Redraw button on the Layers dialog to redraw the layout if you have made many editing changes Each CG layer is divided into two planes a text plane and a graphics plane Text and graphic E L A Text Plane objects always appear on separate planes with i EN 6raphics Plane the text plane on top of the graphic plane on the C Layer same layer If you want to place a grap
319. it ESC e applies and exits the transformation None e applies and exits the transformation button is located on the Select tab Select a new tool e applies and exits the transformation Experiment with Transformations and Create a Shadow l Select File Import Export Import Image and import the 7 Use the selection tools to select the rest of the letters and the ransom ipt file in the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Move Rotate Scale and Freeform tools to arrange the rest of Make a selection around the letter R with the Rectangular the letters to suit your tastes Selection tool 8 Use the Rectangular Selection tool to draw a box around all the Select the Rotate tool from the Tool palette and rotate 5 letters the letter R counter clock wise 9 Press CTRL C or select Edit Copy to copy the selection Press CTRL D to deselect the letter and apply the 10 Switch to the Filter tab and select the Level Curves filter Adjust transformation the curve so that the letters turn completely black This will be Make a selection around the letter N the shadow Select the Scale tool from the Tool palette scale the i 11 Press ctRL D to deselect the letters then press CTRL V to letter N down and apply the transformation paste the copy of the original letters 12 Use the Move tool to position the letters over the shadow BaN SO Logo Compose Document Final Logo Compose Image Logo Compose 24 7 248 Using the Transfor
320. itch between drop and extrude shadow types but the placement of the top and bottom colors changes Drop Shadow Extrude Shadow gt A CG 89 90 Understanding Classic Edges Edges define or blur text against shadows and backgrounds and provide you with an additional tool for adding visual interest to your layouts CG provides a number of Classic type style edge options that you can combine with Classic type style shadows to create complex and interesting characters All edge options are located on the Size amp Attributes tab Edge Basics Edges require two values edge type and edge size fc All of the edge values can be set in the Attributes section PZ of the Size amp Attributes tab Bevel Out m You can also change the edge size by selecting a value Fiat from the Attributes Edging drop down list If you E understand ini files you can change the values on the ti color Options drop down list by editing the TextEdging line in _ Inscribe ini CG provides three edge types outline glow and emboss All three edge types appear to surround the edges of characters with extra pixels of color The value in the Edging field represents the number of pixels that extend beyond the edge of the text face The text edge is not however just a line around the text characters The edge is actually a solid layer underneath the face of the character If the face layer is 100 opaque only the edge pixels beyond the f
321. ith the Relative Corner Offsets and Absolute Corner Position frames of Corners reference you can skew the transformation corners in unique ways with the Top Left Bottom Left Top Right and Bottom Right fields on the Transform tab You end up with the same result whether you use the Relative Corner Offsets or Absolute Corner Position frame of reference the difference is in the way the origins are set Absolute Corner Offsets uses the top left corner of the Logo Compose workspace as the origin When you move a transformation to a specific location its final coordinates are always the same no matter what the initial position is Since each corner occupies a different position each corner has different video coordinates Relative Corner Offsets uses the four origins at each initial corner position for the transformation When you move a LED ead 1997 transformation the final coordinates are based on 06 2 17 99 77 99 Absolute Corner Position Relative Corner Offsets Logo Compose each corner s initial position If you move your transformation without skewing it each corner has the same final coordinates since each corner has moved an equal distance from its initial location When you adjust a corner with the fields on the Transform tab only the selected corner of your transformation is moved With Relative Corner Offsets the new corner position is measured from its initial position With Absolute Corner Position th
322. its and stop bits Open the Ports Control Panel in the Control Panels folder on the Start menu and make sure that the settings match e Is the port physically connected to its controller Are the connections tight Is the ribbon cracked Are all nine pins present and tight These cables are frequently loose or broken Is the COM port properly installed If you have a copy run Msd exe Microsoft Diagnostics program This program allows you to view current port configurations verify if a port is present and working properly or install a new port with the correct settings Edit and Offset In and Out Points Using Time Codes Click on the Online Toggle button to go online CG S a must be in online mode to read time codes Run your time code source to edit predefined out points Select the first event to edit Hold down CTRL and press W to edit the out point of the selected event Sequencer automatically switches to the next event and updates the in point to match the new value You can continue to edit out points using the quick keys Stop your time code source Select an event to edit manually Enter a new in point value for the selected event in the Event Editor tab Sequencer automatically updates the out point for the previous event to match the new value 8 Select Edit Set Timecode Offset to seai 9 set a global time code offset value Enter the time code offset in the Timecode Offset field and click on th
323. ive Play List updates on and off Live Update Checkbox In Sequencer A Run tab option that turns live Event List updates on and off Live Video See Video Signal Live Video Button In Frame Grab Switches to the online monitor to view the video signal Locked Lines In CG A setting that groups lines of CG text together If you reposition a line all subsequent lines are repositioned in relation to the first line Glossary 285 286 Log Event In Sequencer Options from the Play List menu that add an event to a sequence or Play List Log Event Up adds an event above the selected event and Log Event Down adds an event below the selected event Logo In CG A bitmap image displayed as a graphic or inserted in a text line If you use a 16 or 32 bit image as a logo CG S can maintain the alpha information creating a transparent non rectangular logo In Logo Compose A bitmap image that includes alpha information If you use a 16 or 32 bit image as a logo CG S can maintain the alpha information creating a transparent non rectangular logo Logo Cleanup See Cleanup Lower Third In CG A layout template that places text and graphic objects in the bottom third of the screen only Luminance The shade or value of a color Luminance works in conjunction with chrominance which is pure color For example when you look at a red ball your eyes do not see it as having many colors but as having many shades o
324. ixel values of its neighbors e selects regions similar to the current selection based on the tolerance value e includes or excludes pixels in the selection based on whether or not the majority of nearby pixels are selected click on the Color Adjustment Monochrome filter in the Filters list This applies the Monochrome filter at 75 opacity Switch to the Select tab and click on the Invert button again Enter 6 in the Feather field and click on the Feather button This feathers the original selection by 6 pixels Repeat steps 2 and 3 but select the Subtract From Selection radio button before clicking on OK Only the feathered edge pixels remain selected Switch to the Filter tab and select the Color Balance filter Move the top slider all the way to the left and the bottom slider all the way to the right to give the selection a blue glow Final Image Logo Compose 245 Using the Transformation Tools The Transform tab and the Transformation tools on the Tool palette control all the transformation options allowing you to move scale rotate and otherwise le 5 A modify your selections You can also use these tools to add shadows p Selections and Transformations Transform Tab vs Transformation Tools Transformation Tools Import Images as Transformations Transformation Modifiers 246 Logo Compose Selections define the areas to be transformed If you havent made a selection the entire image is
325. k extension with ins and open the backup file in CG S When you save a job it is saved with a ins extension Try to use descriptive filenames for your jobs so you know what they are when you look at the file names When you close a job CG S gives you the option of deleting the online rendered files from your hard drive The rendered files as well as the folder containing the rendered files are deleted The File Delete command lets you delete an entire Play List the online folder and all rendered files for the Play List If you choose to delete an entire job remember that you cannot undo this action All of the rendered files for a job are saved in a folder with an OnlineFiles extension This extension makes it easier for you to identify job folders CG saves all the rendered files for a job in a single folder By default this folder is a new subfolder in the same folder as the job file The folder for the rendered files matches the name of the job file For example if you create Sail ins the folder for the rendered files is Sail OnlineFiles You can change the Online Output Directory location in the Preferences dialog See Sequencer Preferences Online Folder Extension on page 212 for details You can share your Inscriber font database among a number of users By default CG uses Inscribe ift in the startup folder as its font database If you edit Inscribe ini and change the IFTName entry in the IFT Preferences section CG
326. kground In Logo Compose Images created in Logo Compose to be used in CG behind other text and graphic objects Background Color In CG Color used as a secondary color for gradients You can also use the background color as a secondary color choice when applying color to an element If you hold down the ALT key the background color is applied instead of the foreground color Contrast with Face Color Baseline In CG The invisible line on which text characters 9d lt gt rest Characters like a or c rest on this line characters like g and y descend below this line Bevel In CG With the Classic Inscriber type style a bevel is a shaded edge on text or rectangular objects created using lighting effects to provide a three dimensional feel Beveled edges have different style options for text and rectangular objects With additional type styles a bevel is a color option you can apply to individual text elements that displays a two color gradient plus transparency Glossary 273 Bitmap An image file format that describes the position and color value of each of its pixels These pixels are arranged in a grid or raster Since a bitmap is defined by the number of pixels it contains increasing its size can distort the image Bitmaps are also known as raster images Logo Compose The channel that stores all of the blue information in an image Blur Filter In CG Logo Compose and Fra
327. kgrounds selected color When the desired color is displayed in the Color Picker box release the mouse button You always select the background color Pattern using the options on the Background tab The current background color appears in the Solid Blend cycle box which is circled in the graphic to the right The Solid Blend cycle box shows you the current background color s without any MIDE Color File fi tC Over other options If your background consists of only one color the word SOLID appears in the box If your background consists of a two color gradient the word TOP or BOTTOM appears in the box The SOLID TOP or BOTTOM appearing in the box tells you which color you are affecting when you change background colors You can cycle through the three options by clicking on the Solid Blend cycle box until the option you want appears Create a Simple Color Background l Switch to the Background tab and select Color as your background type Select HLS as your color model from the Color TL Model list Then s H 250 E set the Hue H value to 250 T set the Lightness L value to 35 HER set the Saturation S value to 38 Click on the next empty slot in the Play List and click on the H button Click on the Color Selector and drag it around the Color Selection box to set the L value to 36 and the S value to 80 and use the Color Slider to set the H value to 348 You can use the arrow b
328. l Trigger Type 6 S GPI Trigger Type The Frames value determines how long Sequencer takes to play an event the Wait value determines how long Sequencer leaves the image on screen before running the next event in the job If there is no Wait interval Sequencer displays the next event as soon as the current event has finished playing 6 S Video Output Sequencer uses the Wait time to load the next event into the Preview Channel If the Wait interval is very short Sequencer may not be able to load the next image in time In this case Sequencer waits until the image is loaded before play continues it does not try to catch up by reducing the Wait interval for the following images See Creating Transition Events on page 188 for details The Time Code and PC Clock Types With Time Code or PC Clock timing the Wait value is automatically calculated as the difference between the previous out point and next in point This gives you quick feedback on Source Video with Time Codes oS Reader eo mO gt Time Code Trigger Type Time Code 6 S Video Output display times without having to manually subtract the in point value from the out point value See Configuring for Time Code Use on page 200 for details Sequencer maintains the in points If you type in a new Wait value Sequencer changes the out point to match the new duration it does not change the in point If you set an out point that overlaps with the
329. le See the Via Builder online help for details on selecting a different frame as the thumbnail Even though you can add text and graphic objects to the layout containing an imported clip or animation none of these objects appear when you take the clip or animation to video CG Signores any additional information and simply plays the clip or animation Import an Animation in CG 2 Create a short animation in an external animation application Give the animation an easily recognizable name and remember what folder you save it in Switch to CG and click on the next blank thumbnail in the Play List Select File lImport lmport Animation and select your via file CG imports the animation into the Play List The first frame of the animation appears as the thumbnail Click on the next blank thumbnail in the Play List and create a layout with the line Layout Number Three centered on the layout 6 Switch to Sequencer and select the animation event On the Event Editor tab increase the number of trames for the event Notice that you can only increase the number of frames incrementally by the length of the animation If your animation is 30 frames you can only set the trame value to multiples of 30 such as 60 90 or 120 Each increase in the number of frames loops the animation once Click on the Play Direct button on the CG S toolbar fo go online and run the job Overview 21 22 Printing the Play
330. le if you are working with an image that has detailed areas with light greens yellows or reds make sure the details are not just created with changes in color details in these areas must be created by a difference in luminance as well A difference in luminance implies contrast Following this guideline is a good idea no matter what colors you are working with Saturation and Video To understand which colors look good in video you need to experiment with saturation Colors that look quite different on your computer monitor may appear very similar if not the same on video You should try using more than just different saturation values Compelling images often have a good range of saturation luminance and chrominance 264 Logo Compose Saturation in the Real World RGB Color Gamut and Gamma Open the saturation ipt file in the CGS41 Paint Examples folder and take the image to video Notice how the difference in saturation is more noticeable on your computer monitor than on your output monitor In this example you can see that you often don t need to use highly saturated colors for video images Switch to CG and open one of the grabs from this footage as a background image On the Background tab click on the background image In the real world colors are much less saturated than they seem As an experiment some footage was shot with a camcorder of everyday objects that seem to have saturated colors sample and sel
331. le edern eaan rn 76 KENO une 76 Deadiin eaiaegeeetes 76 ROLO Aa i 76 SNACOW acasa oa 76 DIAN T che didn E EE 76 Widi enop reeeer terre creer erence 76 DPEXU CUUSOP unna an 46 Textelements tarcsa 102 114 Body Depthinciviewakcueieocicamn 107 Oa EEA ET E 102 COC carene a 108 Edge Se Deed eea 112 1e E E E E 108 FACE Dep e 107 GLOW iors uceim na ae 114 Outline doene lasiin 106 SNOW aea GA 102 TUDE enaena oa 114 TERT ICS ienna 128 129 160 EXPOLUNG paren 36 mporn n nE 36 Text insertion POLL sestistacesscteasys 46 116 AE T E A 4 Text Line See Text Teo EI aaa 70 79 BasICs E N E E N 70 COPY 1NG ernn 71 Cui enei 71 FO CC E E 70 90 Leadharain 78 Linking to News Edit tables 161 Manip ul atineiacsicsctesspeeaivaucuueass 116 OVE EW oraina 46 Pasi naa A 71 Text objects continued ROCAUIIND annn a utenterenieies 79 SAC OW onner E 70 88 TOOLS A E E E EE 40 Formatting See Text attributes TEREPE S rE ES 47 Text Risetime Filter gonen 38 Text SHAGOW jsiwesuspertinervseaudodapeneweatteiiors 88 Text to Tabs option seseccsverreoneiacs 116 TERTRE eror amas 130 137 Adding multiple textures 130 Adding to texture Map scsssesseessaes 130 Aligning esssseeeseessesssese 132 134 136 rao E EE AR 256 257 Alpha channel compositing 135 AD DIVING sca seshursesenniepoudiaees 135 137 Chane me aaiae a a 131 Chame lictoenann n 260 COMPOSITING rare Tae Ea 135 Creatine sanae 229 Defining on texture map
332. lette Formatting Palette found on the Styles tab Color groups are numbered from 1 to 8 Style groups are numbered from 9 to 32 Whenever you make a change to an object any other objects in the layout that share the same style or color group are updated Objects that share a color group but not a style group can have different options selected on the Size amp Attributes tab The format sample provides basic information about the style or color group settings for the selected object You can tell what group an object belongs to by looking at gt xaces the format sample on the Formatting palette The number Enae E in the lower right corner of the sample area is the style or Coza z color group number If the Freeform option is on for the ae group the word FREE appears after the number at the bottom of the sample The format sample also tells you the height and font of text objects and the size of graphic object Any new object is created using the current style or color group You can change the style or color group by clicking on the object and then clicking on a style or color group on the Formatting palette or on a style on the Styles tab CG actually has two sets of style and color groups one for text objects and one for graphic objects The two groups are numbered the same way from 1 to 32 but you can change text style and color groups without affecting graphic object style and color groups and vice versa Text style
333. list and select Element Constrain Word Wrap If Word Wrap is already checked don t select it again Enter this line of text but do not press ENTER This line of text shows you that a roll layout automatically wraps text to the next line as you reach the end of the current line Roll layouts also scroll down as you continue typing Select Crawl as the layout type from the Layout Type drop down list You can scroll sideways but you cannot scroll down to see the rest of the text that you entered Select Roll from the Layout Type drop down list You can scroll up and down but you cannot scroll sideways to see the rest of the text that you entered CG 53 Changing Crawl Settings Crawl layout settings control some of the aspects that determine how your layouts are displayed online such as speed and direction You can change Crawl settings by clicking on the Effect Settings tab Crawl Settings Softness Crawls and Word Wrap 54 CG Use the Effect Settings tab to set the left and right borders for a crawl Any crawl that you take to video appears only within the area defined by the Left and Right border field percentages Border settings may differ depending on your frame buffer View Size amp Attributes Color amp Texture styles Logos Background Mews Edit Effect Settings f Frames i20 L Left E x C Speed Po sim Ar 2 cal P z Right 100 5 IL seconds a softness 0 Show Markers
334. ll layout settings control some of the aspects that determine how your layouts are displayed online such as speed and direction You can change Roll settings by clicking on the Effect Settings tab Roll Settings Softness Frame Values and Roll Speed GG Use the Effect Settings tab to set the top and bottom borders for a roll Any roll that you take to video appears only within the area defined by the top and bottom border percentages Border settings may differ depending on your frame buffer Note that you can t use the Zoom option on the View tab to zoom in on a roll layout the way you can on a still layout View Size amp Attributes Color amp Texture Styles Logos Background Mews Edit Effect Settings roles C Frames 268 Seconds gt oy x 0 Speed E x Frames 25 Bottom 100 Smooth Sub Pixell Processing softness 0 Show Markers Reset to Defaults Take The value in the Softness field blurs the text entry or exit border Each Softness value is equal to the number of scan lines used to create the softness area at the layout border Not all frame buffers support softness 7 The graphic below shows you the softness area identified by a box filled with diagonal lines The size of the box changes as you adjust the number of Softness scan lines If you leave the Softness value at zero the border is identified by a thin white line The Softness value has a maximum value of 100 scan lines
335. looks in another location for the font database Set the value to a font database anywhere on your network For example IFTName z fonts Inscribe ift tells CG to look for the font database in z fonts If all users on your network point to the same shared database the fonts available to each user are exactly the same However on a slow network you may find typing speed slows down too much to make sharing a font database useful Decide on a File Format Export Macintosh Format Files Word Import Utility Packed Jobs When you export an image from CG S you can select a number of different graphic file types including vii bmp and tga Files exported as vii files are often smaller but these files can only be read by Inscriber products If you are exporting an image to be used in another package you may want to use another graphic file format The alternate recommended graphic format is tga because tga files are cross platform and 32 bit which preserves the alpha information If you need to use images created in CG S on a Macintosh system you can use several export options to convert the files to Macintosh compatible formats If you save the file in a 32 bit tga format and transfer it to a Macintosh drive most programs can read the file without any further modification You can also export PICT files that can be transferred to a Macintosh and opened in other applications Since some applications require that PICT files h
336. lpha to clean up edges on the logos All of the alpha tools have two special characteristics they only manipulate the alpha channel and they remember what the alpha values were before you manipulated the image alpha The eight alpha tools and their functions are listed in the table below Tool Nome Description aj Alpha Add paints with alpha adds transparency ay Alpha Subtract e removes alpha adds opacity 3 Alpha Memory e restores alpha levels to their original ee values Alpha Fill fills the image or selection with alpha Alpha Luminance e fills all pixels adjacent to the selected Oy Fill pixel with alpha based on luminance values of the image the Tolerance value specifies the range of luminance values for pixels to be filled in Alpha Tolerance Fill fills all pixels adjacent to the selected pixel with alpha based on tolerance hue values of the image the Tolerance value specifies the range of hues for pixels to be filled in Restore Alpha Vector Based Logos Scale and Resize Logos Use Logo Compose Images in CG Tool Nme Description Alpha Linear e performs a linear gradient on the alpha Lid Gradient channel image appears to fade to video A Alpha Radial performs a radial gradient on the alpha D Gradient channel image appears to fade to video These tools are brush based they use brush attributes such as style shape and size set on the Brush tab See Setting
337. lt S inear Radial Fill Gradient Gradient Lock match it A value of 100 is video transparent a value of 0 is opaque Any value between these two limits is semi transparent The number of transparency levels available depends on your frame buffer The top and bottom transparency values change the transparency of the element You can use different percentages to make only part of an element transparent If you use different transparency values for the top and bottom the top and bottom edges of the object or text element are the transparency value that you set and the center of the element is a gradient that moves between the top and bottom values You can adjust where the gradient starts and the angle of the gradient using the Gradient options Identify Transparency Classic Transparency Gradients Use Transparency l When you are working on a computer screen with no video feed it can be difficult to identify the semi transparent areas defined on the Color amp Texture tab When you make an object semi transparent CG blends the object color with the color of the object below it This color change can be subtle with small transparency changes To help identify transparent areas try changing the Video Transparent Pattern setting on the General tab in the Preferences dialog See Video Background Basics on page 62 for details on changing the Video Transparent Pattern setting Sometimes using a checkerboard pattern o
338. lues can also be applied to the glow by adjusting the Trans field The example below shows you different softness values Sor Son Son Soi Softness 0 Softness 9 Softness 18 Softness 29 Customize the Neon Type Style 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is between the brackets in the CG Editor 2 Type the word Neon Use the Move tool to center in the line of text and increase the text size 3 Select the Neon type style on the Size amp Attributes tab oP C Classic Inseriber f 10 Edges Edge over Face Sheen C Embellished f Meon i Recessed Mix through to key Switch to the Color amp Texture tab Cycle to Tube Set each of the Face color chips to different shades of blue and purple Next set edge size to 15 Cycle to Glow Set the glow color chip a bright yellow Set soft to 31 and neon to 11 The yellow appears to radiate trom behind the tube Set offset to 14 The yellow glow shifts to the right Increasing the offset value moves the shadow away from the text element Experiment with the angle of the shadow by adjusting the angle value Cc 115 Manipulating Text Lines CG uses a number of ways to move lines and keep them positioned correctly Once you understand how text lines move in relation to each other and how to position single text lines or groups of text lines you can manipulate text lines more effectiv
339. m Tab The Transform Tab provides options for more precise control over your transformations You can adjust View Brush Select Transform Filter Type relative 2D transform Depth Horiz 0 00 Wert 0 00 L Move 41 Scale Flip Horiz Flip Wert 1 Rotate da Skew baie a ae oo wew po a Horiz jpm Horiz 1000c Hor iz joon a ji a select ee Wert 0 00 Wert 100 0C Wert 0 00 Angle 0 00 E relative or aDSOlUute transformations Transformation Type You can modify your transformations based on three frames of reference relative 2D transform relative corner offsets and absolute corner position You can select your frame of reference from the Type drop down list on the Transform tab The main difference between the frames of reference is in the way Logo Compose measures the movement through the workspace Relative 2D This frame of reference finds the centre point of Transform your transformation and sets its initial position as the origin with video coordinates 0 0 Any changes to the position of your transformation are measured in relation to this point This frame of reference moves scales skews and rotates your selections in the same way as the Transform tools Note that when you use the Skew Scale or Rotate fields on the Transform tab the centre point of your transformation does not change Only the Move fields change the position of the centre point Relative or Absolute W
340. m the Graphic Type drop down list and select Flat as your edge type 3 Press ENTER to create a copy of the rectangle Drag it above the original rectangle CG creates bevels using an imaginary light source positioned at the top left corner of the object To change the position of the light source click on one corner of the object bounding box and drag it across the object to a new position The opposite corner is anchored as a pivot point The object below shows you what happens when you change the light source If you draw the rectangle with light source A in the object and drag the top left corner down and to the right so that it becomes the bottom right corner of the rectangle you end up creating a rectangle with light source B You can move the light source to either of the two remaining corners by dragging a corner of the rectangle across itself in the appropriate direction The face color of an object A with a beveled edge is darker 1 F than the selected face color 7 because of the use of a light source If you are trying to p match up the face color of a F beveled object you may RY have to experiment with the oe color values once you have applied the bevel to get an accurate match Original Cer let handle dragged New Light Source across bottom right handle Light Source To move graphic objects or groups of objects to another layer using the Ly mouse hold down CTRL SHIFT and drag the mouse pointer up or
341. m the last style group that you used which can lead to unexpected results use 2 at symbols to change text color or style 9use 2 at symbols io Sto change text a color or style use 2 at symbols Mame List COCOR oR SHYLE The characters let you apply local midline changes to the text style or color After beginning a line with the style or color format code and number begin your midline style or color change with a space plus A number where number is the actual number of the style or color group you want to use maeOchange 8 25styles 1 Soften Mame List change The characters number let you insert a logo as a text object in a line You can place number anywhere on the line where number is the actual number on the logo tab of the logo you want to insert If the position on the Logo tab is empty CG inserts a blank space on the text line Logos inserted this way use the formatting of the current line You should include a comment in the table to identify the logo to add a logo use 2 number characters to add a logor uze 2 number characters T ECCERI Oasa al EZAR OGE Add Comments The characters let you insert comments at the end of a text line Any text on the line following the is ignored Add Tabs Underscore characters _ are used to insert tabs in text lines See Formatting Tabs in News Edit Tables on page 164 for details on including tab format
342. makes it easy to transfer fonts to and from different computers The font database also lets you ensure that all of your computers and layouts are using the same fonts See Using the Font Manager on page 84 for details Inscriber recommends that you use TrueType fonts in CG TrueType fonts ttf are added to Windows in the Fonts control panel These fonts are displayed in the Fonts List in CG as well as in the Fonts List for any other application T Font Database Sizes and Limits Packed Fonts Inscriber fonts fnt are added to the Inscriber font database Inscribe ift ap using the Font Manager and are only accessible in CG See Using the Font F Manager on page 84 for details on adding fonts to the database You can convert TrueType fonts to Inscriber fonts and then add them to the Inscriber font database You only have to convert TrueType fonts to ift fonts if you are creating a common font database for multiple users You can remove a TrueType font by deleting it from Windows using the Fonts control panel You can remove an Inscriber font from the font database by using the Font Manager If a layout contains a font that has been deleted CG substitutes the first font in the Fonts List Using the font database usually prevents fonts from being accidentally deleted and ensures that all of your computers and Inscriber products are using the same font set All the fonts in the Inscriber font database are stored i
343. markers See Working with Markers on page 120 for details Graphic objects can be nudged one pixel at a time in any direction To move an object by one pixel select the object hold down the ALT key and press an arrow key to move the object Each time you press an arrow key the object moves one pixel in the indicated direction Hold down ALT CTRL and press an arrow key to move selected objects 10 pixels in the indicated direction Hold down ALT SHIFT and press the up or down arrow key to move selected objects up or down the height of the selected object CG has a 4x4 pixel grid 16 scan lines by 16 scan lines that you can use to position graphic objects You can display or hide the grid by clicking on the Screen Grid checkbox on the View tab You can position objects using the grid in two ways To force all objects to align to the grid snap to grid select Element Constrain Align All To force the one or more selected object s to align to the grid select the objects you wish to align then select Element Constrain Align to Grid The most accurate positioning can be done by adjusting the baseline and left edge coordinates on the View Tab Change the Bevel Direction Drag Graphic Objects to Other Layers Use Bevels 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the graphic layer 2 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab select Rectangle fro
344. me Grab A distortion filter that mildly blurs the frame grab or texture it is applied to with a 3x3 convolution filter Body Depth In CG A text element that adds a hard extruded edge to the existing combined face edge and face depth elements Only available with the Recessed type style Bounding Box In CG and Logo Compose A rectangle that encloses the maximum dimensions or extent of a graphic object Brightness amp Contrast Filter In Logo Compose A color adjustment filter that adjusts the brightness and contrast of all pixel values in the image at once including highlights shadows and midtones Brush Based Tools In Logo Compose Tools that let you use brush attributes to perform non painting tasks such as cloning or alpha memory All of the settings from the Brush tab are used by brush based tools Brush Styles In Logo Compose Brush tab settings that control the appearance of Logo Compose tool strokes The Hard Edge style applies the tool as if it were a pencil The Soft Edge style applies the tool as if it were a brush The Soft Edge Buildup style applies the tool as if it were an airbrush 274 Glossary Burn Tool In Logo Compose An image editing tool used to darken an image by moving pixel color values towards their minimum Contrast with Dodge Tool C Cache A specialized area of memory that improves a computer s performance by storing frequently accessed information Calibra
345. me buffer takes the fourth e eii RR re event and so on Select All Ctrl A 1 2 Channel Ripple 2 1 Channel Ripple 1 2 3 Channel Ripple 3 2 1 Channel Ripple Applying Channel Sequencer includes options to automatically apply multiple board ripples within Ripples an Event List This feature is particularly useful if you have set up a ripple effect and then need to edit the event sequence Add all the events you want to the Event List select the items you want to ripple then choose a ripple effect from the Edit menu 1 2 Channel Ripple 2 1 Channel Ripple 1 2 3 Channel Ripple or 3 2 1 Channel Ripple Sequencer reassigns the board assignments for the selected items so that they match the sequence you select 00000 Group 00001 fabkhazia lgo 00002 afghanis Igo 00003 albania Igo cut 00004 falgeria igo cu KEY Set Ripples for Multiple Boards Create a Play List with at least five events Click on the Sequencer button on the CG S toolbar to switch to the Sequencer module Select all the events in the Event List Select Edit 1 2 Channel Ripple fora s two board setup or Edit 1 2 3 cay Oe Channel Ripple for a three board setup ae A Insert Group Header Notice how the icons representing Delete Group Header event output channels are staggered in ce time mw 0 ripple pattern Set Timecode Offset Select All Ctrl A For two board setup select events 3 2chamsirinsi 1 Channel Ripple 4 and 5 in your Event List
346. ments to your table Any changes you make to a table are automatically saved in the Registry CG reads the imported News Edit table file as an ASCII file and correctly interprets national language characters A few characters also have formatting functions Import the text file into CG by File seleciing 7 Hew Ctrl h File Import Import News re f Open Chrl O Edit Table and opening the text PRE are file you created CG imports EN the text file into the 0 Import Toe Text table and opens the x i Eggi Templates registry dialog ae Y E You can save the table in the Export Import Text File News Edit registry by clicking Gey Import News Edit Table onan existing News Edit Table gat pesien Import EBU Subtitle File then clicking on Add Or you a igan WE Bs cden can return to CG by clickingon pant Aieka Close If you save the table it Preferences nn appears under the name you assign to it when you return to CG Assign Tables with Layout Text Lines If you return to CG without saving the table the table appears in 0 Import NewsEdit Table The 0 Import Text table stores any file that you import into News Edit The next file you import overwrites any file already in the table The 0 Import Text table is always left unsorted Any other tables are sorted alphabetically You can link each text line in a layout to a specific table by selecting a line in the layout and then selecting a News Edit tabl
347. mp Texture tab are similar to the Background tab and many of the options work in the same way Be careful not to get confused between the two tabs and change the color of a background when you really want to change the color of an object or text or vice versa If you do change something unintentionally you can always use CTRL Z to undo a mistake color gradient and transparency settings are different for each element Colors for face edge and shadow are all set separately The FACE SUE Click on the appropriate color chip or toggle to set the object element you are changing FACE is the face color EDGE is the SHOW edge color and SHDW is the shadow color See Understanding i char Objects on page 70 for details on object elements Classic type style color chips show you the color gradient and angle currently selected for each element Other type style color chips show you set color When you select colors you only affect one of the elements face edge or shadow You can apply solid or blended colors to any element If you create a blend for one element that you like you can copy it to the other elements by clicking on the color chip containing the settings you want to copy and dragging it to another color chip The Color Selection box displays all the Palor Selector colander colors you can define given the current Color Slider parameter the Value radio eae lt oa Model pce Ist button selected
348. n This reduces flicker caused by sharp changes in luminance between pixels in the vertical direction Registry Motion Template See Motion Template Registry 290 Glossary Registry News Edit See News Edit Registry Registry Templates See Template Registry Remove Flicker Filter In Logo Compose A video cleanup filter that smooths the image in the vertical direction to remove flicker caused by sharp changes in color in the vertical direction Render Converts information regarding objects or effects to a graphical bitmap form that can be displayed to video Object information includes shape color bevels and transparencies Effect information includes keys transitions movement and layering When you render an event a temporary file is written to the hard drive and then sent to the frame buffer when you do a take This process happens on the fly in offline mode In online mode all events are pre rendered for immediate output when you do a take Render Location In Sequencer The location where the final events are rendered when you go online Render locations include RAM on board memory not on all frame buffers local hard drive or remote locations Rendered File Names In Sequencer The file name of an event after it has been rendered To take events to video CG S needs to render the events to separate files You can edit the names of these rendered files at any time Rendered Images See Rendered File
349. n Inscribe ift This file can become quite large since each font added to the database increases its size by 350K to 425K Your database can contain an unlimited number of fonts Note that a font database with thousands of fonts might slow down the speed at which your text lines are displayed Most font databases contain over 150 fonts and databases with a few hundred fonts don t slow down the text line speed Startup time however may be slightly increased if your font database is large TrueType fonts have an embeddability setting from their manufacturer that determines whether or not the font can legally be saved in packed jobs See Packed Jobs on page 19 for details If the font has installable or editable embedding it can be saved in packed jobs and worked with on another computer even if that computer does not have the font installed on it If the font has print amp preview embedding or restricted licence embedding it cannot be saved in packed jobs If a font cannot be saved CG displays a message telling you which fonts have not been saved However if the font is already installed on the computer you are moving the packed job to you can still access the font and edit your layout cG 8l 82 Using Character Mapping ASCII is a standard character set for fonts It is used by most common font types including TrueType fonts ASCII allows 256 characters to be defined in each font set CG lets you enter characters using ASCII
350. n n eae 232 Position OF CUSO honn i eeina 226 310 Index Position of tab stops sssseesesesseseseese 122 Position DOn anaa 116 Graphic objects cicirine 146 LOGOS E E E 151 OD ecl Saarna 246 NE E AAA A 116 117 Predefined formats s ssessessesesssees 158 PRETCVEN CES vexncdcuteviviruceanaadasecencdes 38 214 CG rita cr uaren a 38 Frame GraDianelasnaye 222 Misedbereano a 28 EADE E EE 214 Pressure SUpport essssessessessrsereseese 233 PREVIEW oestro S 14 Play List CENT EE E 13 Program Preview palette 06 14 Miek Take enna 15 Preview chantiel scssasatesranssevuieesaptdeais 14 LIVE UPC ALCS oracs rescore n e 15 Online SCL Ps aiiin 208 Preview CULSOF ccceeeee 226 234 258 PRINEPIEVIEW asiaa 22 POTD sarurak 22 23 Changing printing speed 0 23 Pace Setene e 22 ACTAE CA EE 22 Pro Blin COLO Sessanta 264 Program chanel cscsiscestssariasesauneian 14 Live UPC ates scsscranams2iectouatuartartai atte 15 Online setU peeun n 208 QUICK takene a naa 15 Selene ne na 186 Program Preview palette sosesc 14 Frame DUNMeIS cas iacisetsaconssasceeenays eens 15 TWO UDCAICS sesceigansseessscerentetencees 15 POM DUO tl yic css iajvevteteaitetaucoanncees 15 Preview chantielac citeinivesavenan 14 Program Channel cats toils iueadedectucten 14 PRV DUO ist srscsacunrersatratsesycncean 15 SUA ioe a anes 177 PRV D UTTOTE siino 15 Pull OBS Eurona nans 49 Push OD E teei a nee 49 PUSH TransitioN eirca 190
351. n one computer you must either erase the Software from the first hard drive before you install it onto a second hard drive or else license an additional copy of the Software for each additional computer on which you want to use it 3 02 Right to Copy You may make one 1 copy of the Software for backup and archival purposes provided that the original and the copy are kept in your possession and that your installation and use of the Software does not exceed that allowed in Section 3 01 and provided you reproduce our copyright notice on the copy 3 03 Right to Transfer You shall not assign transfer sublicense rent lend or lease the Software or your rights under this Agreement without our prior written approval 4 Prohibited Uses You may not without written permission from us a use copy modify merge or transfer copies of the Software or documentation except as provided in this Agreement b use any backup or archival copy of the Software or allow someone else to use such copy for any purpose other than to replace the original copy in the event it is destroyed or becomes defective or c disassemble decompile or unlock reverse translate or in any manner decode the Software or the dongle security device for any reason 5 Limited Warranty We make the following limited warranties from the date you acquired the Software from us or our authorized dealer a Media For a period of twenty 20 days the distribution media and docume
352. n speed of 3 5 and see a jerky transition try a speed of 3 0 or 4 0 for a smoother display Increment and The Increment and Decrement Speed options increase or decrease event or Decrement Speed transition speed a single frame at a time by adjusting wait time To increase event or transition speed select Edit gt Decrement Speed to remove a frame from the wait time To decrease event or transition speed select Edit Increment Speed Set Up and Run Events for Subtitling 1 Create at least four separate layouts containing text to use as by clicking away from the field subtitles 6 Click on the Remote button to set the render location to 2 Click on the Sequencer button to switch to Sequencer Remote The remote location renders the events in real time p k and saves hard drive space This location is useful when you Eaa have many subtitles since it does not fill your hard drive with online files 3 Select the entire Event List using the SHIFT key 7 Click on the first event in the Event List to tell Sequencer where 4 Type 60 in the Frames field on the Event I cto a a ugh Bi Frames e0 to start the series of events the subtitles 8 Click on the Online Toggle button to switch to online zz 5 Enter 30 in the Wait field on the Event Editor E o mode tab This creates a pause between subtitles Select the first event and click on the Run Bun Job Set the wait value by pressing the TAB key or Job button on the Run tab
353. n the text entry box Change the text and click on Insert Item or press INSERT The new item is added to the current table but the original text of the item is also left in the table You can get rid of the original text item by selecting it and clicking on Delete Item Changes made using these options are permanent They are automatically saved in the News Edit registry The next time you load CG S the News Edit tables contain your changes To use News Edit to update a layout click on the line in the layout that you want to change and then select the text from the News Edit table list to replace the current layout text line You can either double click on the text line in the News Edit table list or click on the text line and press ENTER CG replaces the current text line with the selected text from the News Edit table You can also type text into the text entry box and press ENTER to replace the current text line with the text you entered This text can then be added to the News Edit table using Insert Item or you can click on another item in the table list to erase it Search for Table News Edit offers smart text searching in your tables so that you can locate items as Entries quickly as possible To search a table click on the text entry box and start typing With every keystroke News Edit checks the list for the first item that matches the letters you have entered When you have typed in enough text to uniquely identify the item you
354. n the X and Y tields are the same for each corner because each corner is offset from its initial position by the same amount Double click in the X and Y fields for the Top Left corner to reset them to their original values This corner moves back to its original position Select Absolute Corner Position from the Type drop down list of the Transtorm tab The corner coordinates are now measured from the top left corner of the Logo Compose workspace Change the X and Y values for the Top Right corner to move it Click on the Flip Vert button to flip the Flip vert object upside down Switch back to the Relative 2D Transform frame of reference and type 100 in the Vert Depth field to change the perspective Enter 50 in the Opacity field to increase the transparency of the transformation o 003 13 Click on the Reset button to reset the eset transformation to its initial position Logo Compose 249 Editing an Image In addition to simply adding alpha Logo Compose offers several tools that you can use to edit and retouch your images With the image editing tools you can remove unwanted objects or artifacts copy and offset areas and adjust the luminance Image Editing Tools Logo Compose has eleven image editing tools described below Tools marked with a are brush based That is they use the attributes set on the Brush tab ay Oy k A 250 Logo Compose Clone Clone Fill Luminance Add L
355. n to deselect the selection GS41 Paint Examples folder This tile is a seamless pattern o Switch to the Brush tab enter 100 in the Opacity field and Switch to the Select tab and click on the None button to exit the make sure the tile and Align checkboxes are checked transformation 10 Click in the Logo Compose workspace to fill the image Select the Wand tool from the Tool palette and select 4 the area around the texture Click on the Invert button to invert the selection Select the Clone Fill tool from the Tool palette Py Logo Compose 257 258 Viewing Your Image Logo Compose has a variety of viewing options located on the View tab These options as well as the Zoom and Scroll tools alter the actual view so you can view all of your image at various magnifications All views are corrected for the current video aspect ratio View Brush Select Transform Filter Zoom 100 ka View Options View ie RGE Alpha View Options Grid I Brush Preview Cursor Small Crosshair Large Crosshair Video Safe Title Area Grid Options Line Color Black Line Type Dotted Line Spacing 50 View Preferences Zoom Scroll View Radio Buttons View Checkboxes Grid Options Cursor Options Logo Compose Logo Compose offers several zoom levels at intervals from 12 5 to 3200 Either select the desired zoom level from the Zoom drop down list on the View tab or use
356. n your rights to use the Software will expire upon expiration of the copyright to the Software 9 Miscellaneous Provisions This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Province of Ontario and not by the 1980 United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods as amended This is the entire agreement between us relating to the contents of this package and supersedes any prior purchase order communications advertising or representations concerning the contents of this package No change or modification of this Agreement will be valid unless it is in writing and is signed by us 10 Quebec Transactions If you reside in the Province of Quebec Canada you agree to the following The parties hereto have expressly required that the present Agreement and its Exhibits be drawn up in the English language Les parties aux presentes ont expressement exige que la presente convention et ses Annexes soient redigees en langue anglaise If you have any questions about this Agreement write to us at Inscriber Technology Corporation 26 Peppler Street Waterloo Ontario Canada N2J 3C4 or call us at 519 570 9111 Table of Contents Overview Module cc ceccceeeees Inscriber CG S An Overview 0000 10 Using Me PN iS errr serrit diites 12 Using the Program Preview Palette 0 14 Using the Scrapbook 0 0 0 0 008 16 Working with Files 2 e
357. ncluding it in the selection Press CTRL X to cut away this area Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have cut away most of the area around the guitar On the View tab select 500 from the Zoom drop down list Select the Wand tool set the tolerance to 15 onthe Select tab and select the pixels around the guitar Use the SHIFT key to add to the existing selection When you get to the bottom the guitar you will have to decrease the wand tolerance to 5 to avoid selecting guitar pixels Subtract from Single Selection Add to Selection Intersect Selection Move Selection Description creates a new selection every time you draw a selection adds a selection to the current selection you can also use the SHIFT key with the Single Selection button selected to add selections subtracts new selections from the current selection same as using the ALT key with the Single Selection button selected intersects any new selections with the current selection same as using the SHIFT and ALT keys with the Single Selection button selected moves the current selection Press CTRL X to cut away the selected areas Switch to the Alpha Add tool select the smallest brush and paint over any stray pixels around the guitar You can use the Alpha Memory brush to correct any mistakes Select the Wand tool set the tolerance to 0 and click in the area outside of the guitar to select it Enter a value of 3 in the Feather field
358. ncluding returns at the end of each line If you want the text positioned at a tab enter the correct number of tabs at the start of the line CG rolls can support up to 50 pages of text CG uses standard ASCII keyboard mapping so you can use accented characters and special copyright and other symbols in standard ASCII fonts If you use other display fonts you won t see your special characters until you change the font of those characters in CG to match the original creation font Once your text has been entered save it as a txt file If your word processor gives you a choice save the text with line breaks CG can import ANSI ASCII or DOSText formats Import a Roll When you import a text file CG discards all text formatting except for line breaks Text File and applies the style or color group of the current line to all imported text Text is inserted at the current cursor location You can import your text file by selecting File Import Import Text and then selecting the filename that you saved the text file under 128 CG Prepare a Crawl Text File Import a Crawl Text File Import Using the Clipboard CG ignores all line breaks created in a word processor and imports text on a single line Enter the text you want to use for the crawl If you want the text positioned at a tab enter the correct number of tabs at the start of the line CG crawls can support more than one line of crawl text but you should create each line as
359. nd delete them By default the online folder is in the same folder as the job file If you want to put all your rendered files in one location such as a network drive or a very fast SCSI drive change the Online Output Directory on the Sequencer tab in the Preferences dialog See Setting Sequencer Preferences on page 214 for details When you edit an event sequence using the Play List CG S does not automatically renumber the rendered filenames For example if you move event 1 vii to before event 5 vii your event rendered filenames are ordered as follows 2 vii 3 vii 4 vii vii and 5 vii To renumber this event sequence select Playlist Renumber All Render File Names CG S renames the events so that the numbers are consecutive that is 1 vii 2 vil 3 vil 4 vii and 5 vii This option is strictly a matter of personal preference Renumbering your rendered filenames does not affect or improve system performance However renumbering the rendered filenames deletes all online files and if you are online it takes you offline You may find situations where you want to share specific rendered files with other Inscriber users or where you need to reuse specific files Renaming the rendered file is an easy way to distinguish a file from dozens or hundreds of other numbered files To open the Change Render Name dialog select Playlist Change Render File Name or press CTRL J You can import animations created externally You can creat
360. nd graphic objects side to side on a background Reveal displays text one character or line at a time on a static background Clock real time digital clock on a still background Choose a Layout Type l Click on the Layout Type drop down list on the CG fem toolbar to view layout types If you select Roll make sure that Word Wrap is on so that text lines wrap to the next line if there isn t enough space for a word at the end of a line If you select Crawl make sure that Word Wrap is off so that lines of text do not wrap to the following line but continue horizontally across the layout By default Word Wrap is turned off whenever you select a crawl layout If you select Reveal make sure that all of the text you want revealed is on layer 5 Any text not on layer 5 is treated as part of the background and appears with the background Click on the Settings button to change the settings for z a layout type Select Roll from the list of layout types and select Element Constrain Word Wrap so that text lines wrap to the next line if there isn t enough space at the end of the line Type a few lines of text fo see how Word Wrap works Click on a blank spot in the Play List and select Crawl trom the layout type drop down list By default Word Wrap is off whenever you select a crawl layout Type a few lines of text The text does not wrap Click on a blank spot in the Play List and select Reveal from the layout type d
361. nd increase the text size Select the 10 Edges type style on the Size amp Attributes tab Switch to the Color amp Texture tab Cycle to Face Together set all the color chips a bright yellow by clicking the middle color chip selector then setting an element color Cycle to Edge Set size to 51 Assign unique edge colors for each of the ten edges Edges 6 and 7 also have a transparency value of 29 by default Reduce transparency to 0 for all edges oP Make edges 3 and 7 invisible by first selecting the edge color chip and then clearing the Visible Layer checkbox to deselect it The edge next to the invisible edge fills in the missing element Set depth to 60 and angle to 134 The tenth edge now includes an additional depth element of the same color Cycle to Shadow Set the shadow color chip to dark grey Set offset to 24 and sott to 29 The shadow cast is quite separate from the depth Color Chip Alpha 0 cG Iii Changing Sheen Settings The Sheen type style lets you apply sheen highlights on up to four edges Two inner edges are located on top of the face and two outer edges are located on the edge You can adjust the size angle and color of each edge s sheen Face Color and Texture Options Edge amp Sheen Toggle 112 CG Outer Edge and Sheen Innermost Edge and Sheen Outermost Edge and Sheen Inner Edge and Sheen CG lets you customize the shape color texture an
362. nd not calibrating your frame buffer You can try to match colors by eye between the output monitor and the computer monitor by setting your computer monitor to display similar colors to the output monitor This method is not recommended since you are creating images that only look right if output using the current frame buffer The Output Monitor The Computer Monitor Computer Monitor Gamma Computer Monitor Brightness and Contrast Environmental Variables Of the three devices you need to calibrate the output monitor is the only one that does not affect the image itself or the image output However you still want to calibrate the output monitor since you use it to gauge what your image colors really look like in video The quality of the image you see on your output monitor is much better than what you would see on the average television To calibrate your output monitor you need to set the white point set the black and white levels and adjust the chroma and hue settings The color temperature should be set to 6500K warm Set the contrast and brightness levels according to the Pluge test pattern Adjust the chroma and hue according to the SMPTE color bars See your output monitor documentation or the SMPTE ECR 1 1978 document for more information Since Logo Compose is a WYSIWYG what you see is what you get paint package you want to make sure your computer monitor is calibrated properly If you create images without calibrat
363. nd so on Tab Stops Edit 6 Click on the Tab Stops checkbox to hide the tab stop positions 0 100 Loo CG 123 Using Advanced Text Features Advanced text features let you add more complexity to your layouts You can create text boxes that are separate from the rest of your text text that follows a curving spline path or text that appears vertically When you are finished with a layout or a job you can also spell check it to make sure that no errors have crept into your layout Work with Text Boxes Place Text on a Path 124 G You can create a separate text box on any graphic layer that contains a string of text that is constrained to the dimensions of the box When you change the size of the box the text is automatically reflowed to fit into the new dimensions To create a text box select the Text Box tool from the Formatting palette draw a box in your layout and enter text inside it The graphic below shows you the same text in two different sized boxes In the second box the text has been automatically reflowed to fit the new dimensions of the text box Text in a text box always appears below any text lines on the same layer The text box is actually located on the graphic layer even though it is a text object To edit an exiting text box make sure that you are on the graphic layer and then click on the text box g Text in a text NE Standard Text Selriekeicc o 4 x autoimMatucall Te
364. ndary in the top smear and very slowly across the color boundary in the bottom smear The darker color was carried much further into the light color in the slower smear For a good smoky looking Smear brush set Opacity near 50 and increase Softness Experiment with the Image Editing Tools 1 Select File lImport Export lImport Image and select an 9 Select the Saturation Add tool from the Tool palette aa image and drag it around the image to increase the color dt 2 Select the Smear tool from the Tool palette and drag saturation over the image using both fast and slow strokes Retouching Tips Image colors are carried further when you use slower Now that you have seen what the image editing tools can do you strokes can use the ones mentioned here along with the clone tools to 3 Select the Offset tool and drag the image Edge remove unwanted artifacts from your images pixels are wrapped so that if you drag the image up Ty Use a small brush and small strokes and monitor your brush attributes A soft edge and high Softness value will give you a smoother look The Brush Preview cursor is very helpful in letting you evaluate the outcome of each brush stroke before applying it the top portion of the image appears at the bottom of your screen Align the image so that the corners are at the center of the image 4 Switch to the Blur tool and blur out the edge seams py oo isethei adolta lecti F If you want to retouch a very s
365. ne Smear or Blur tools e export the image import the image as a texture in CG e select the Tile radio button for text and graphic objects that use the texture If you are using the texture as a CG background make sure the Size to Fit checkbox is deselected Alpha Textures Alpha textures are usually larger than seamless textures because the texture is applied to the entire image Instead of texturizing the color channel as in most textures in an alpha texture the alpha channel is texturized Alpha textures may be more difficult to understand than seamless textures but they are simpler to create importan image or start with a new canvas and use the Alpha tools to remove all image alpha import a texture or image file as a selection e paint with the Alpha Fill tool Your imported texture or image is applied to the canvas as an alpha texture e to better see the effect of your texture press ENTER on your number pad to send the alpha texture to video e export the image for use in CG You can use this texture in CG as a background logo or texture Fill with a Seamless Pattern l Select Edit Create New Image to create a blank canvas filled 7 Hold down the SHIFT and ALT keys and click inside the selection with alpha This will make a copy of the selection to use as the clone Select File Import Export Import Image as Transformation SOUS and import the seamless bmp file in the 8 Click on the None butto
366. nels or for Multiple Channels The program will then open a Status dialog asking you to confirm this information before configuring CG S the way you want it In Sequencer click on the Program 1 2 or 3 button h 2 3 Program on the Event Editor tab to specify which channel Event will be output to Channel 1 you want events sent to video on The 1 2 or 3 ae icon in the event line tells Event will be enn you which channel each Simultaneously output eR ks EE event is being output to to Channels cn Coo EB co00 0000 You can send different wo BA oo events to different channels or send all the Event will be output to Channel 2 events in a job to the same channel You can also send events to more than one channel at a time If you select more than one channel for an event the event will be output to all selected channels simultaneously Options In other modules select the output channel from the Program Preview palette See Using the Program Preview Palette on page 14 for details What is Channel Channel ripple allows you to send an Event List to a Edi Ripple multiple frame buffer system cycling through each Cut irix frame buffer as the events are sent to video For sc aul example in a three frame buffer system the first frame Re buffer takes the first event the second frame buffer Dele Group Header takes the second event the third frame buffer takes the ie Cri Q third event the first fra
367. nen NNE 246 ORe nc saree iaateecnh 256 ODIY EE 233 Palette eaaa aaa 232 Rectangular Selection 242 Rota a aa 246 Saturation Add cosssesansneeesdegeneosied en 250 Saturation Subtract ccceceeeeee 250 Salle essay a arussac oases tecestinatseosnen 246 Scan Line Selections siicssscisisseeces 242 SOCOM eae ae 232 258 Selection MOVE ccccccseeseesesseees 242 STEW ienga 246 Transformation cccccceeseeseeseees 246 Using color selection eee 64 Videa A 259 Wandeassin a 242 VA E a EEEE AEE TE 232 Top Gradient Value ceeeessceereeees 66 Top Transparency Value 69 Total Take Duration cccceeseeeeees 192 Touching up images 228 250 251 Transform tab cas cossecectsssecssouswssnieeacees 246 Transformation cccceeseesssssseeeeees 248 Absolute Corners ccccccccssccseeeeee 248 Flipping horizontally 248 Flipping vertically sssneemievecssavense 248 Frame of reference cccceeeeeeees 248 TP OPMIAG esiustesse 246 REVEL D nennen aa 248 Transformation Opacity eee 249 Transformation tools ccceeeeeeeseees 246 Freeform ccccccscssssscsceeccseeseeseeseees 246 WhO VS sacconsct acs wea nunen 246 OAL EC enni 246 SAIC AENT E E 246 SKEW etengune 246 Transformation type sssesssssesseseesesses 248 Transformations sesessssessssssssssssese 229 DG pies voctalacaneunievsassrbl cae ctines 246 GIT Osa ducttaledyes oi E 247 ESMO onnar S 247 Transformati
368. nesans 268 269 Using the Image Editing Tools 250 253 Logo Compose Interface Overview Logo Compose is a full featured bitmap based image manipulation application It lets you add alpha to images as well as create edit and retouch bitmap images and Logo Compose files These images can be used as logos backgrounds and textures in CG You can import files from other applications in many supported file formats including 32 bit formats containing alpha You can use images from the Scrapbook in Logo Compose Any image layout or frame from CG or Frame Grab can be edited as a bitmap in Logo Compose Inscriber CG Xtreme 4 0 1 18 UNTITLED INS g Eile Edit Select View Job Tools Help la x D ta taa OG QO Tool Palette ODO 90O Logo Compose Workspace Scrapbook Program Preview J Attributes Tabs Palette y Select Rectangle Expand lad aa i Sewn oe 1 Soe F Image As Selection _Border T Select Fully Status Bar 154 x 423 p 134 Zoom 100 0 Alpha Subtract tool There are no modifiers for the Alpha Subtract tool ES Say Switch to Logo To switch to the Logo Compose module Compose from other CG S modules click on the Logo Compose button on the CG S toolbar Logo Compose The Logo Compose workspace is the size of the image you are working on You Workspace cannot work outside the image boundary Use the al
369. next in point the next in point is pushed back to match the set out point Create an Event List for a Talk Show 1 Create several events for a talk show environment three for the opening credits three to introduce each of the guests during the show and three for the end credits 2 Use the Play List to re order the events in the order they will appear on the show then switch to Sequencer 3 Insert a group header for the events occurring during the show Make sure this group also includes the first end credit Create another group for the two remaining end credits You should now have three groups 4 Select the first group header Change the group name to Opening Credits on the Event Editor tab Leave the trigger set to the default Timed type 6 S Video Output 5 Select the group header for the last group Change the group s name to Final Credits and leave the trigger set at the default 6 Click on the group header for the events that appear during the show Change the trigger type to Manual for this group and change the name to Talk Show Guests 7 Use the Frames and Wait time fields on the Event Editor tab to change the event duration tor each event in the Event List 8 Switch to online mode and run the job When CG S reaches the Talk Show Guests group it will wait for you to press SPACEBAR before running each event Once you trigger the first end credit event the last event in
370. ngle according to the following values Rectangle Baseline 36 Left edge 50 Rectangle 2 Baseline 143 Left edge 50 Rectangle3 Baseline 250 Left edge 50 Rectangle 4 Baseline 157 Left edge 229 Rectangle5 Baseline 157 Left edge 379 Rectangle 6 Baseline 157 Left edge 529 Result texture is anchored at top left corner of frame buffer e see a different part of the texture when object moved over display e texture is anchored on the frame buffer at the top of the display but offset to left side of object e texture view changes if object moved vertically texture view stays the same if object moved horizontally e texture is anchored to frame buffer at left side starting at top of object e texture view stays the same if object is moved vertically texture view changes if object is moved horizontally e texture is anchored at top left corner of object see same texture view no matter where object is moved on display 6 Arrange the rectangles in the T shape shown in the graphic below Now set the Alignment for the first rectangle to Object set the Alignment for the second rectangle to Object Lett and set the Alignment for the third rectangle to Object Top 7 Set the Alignment for the fourth fifth i and sixth J rectangles i to Screen Vy the rectangles on the screen to see how the Alignment option affects how the texture view changes Notice how the texture design in each rectangle depending on the anchor
371. ngle in the Layout bmp file Recent Files Export Subtitle EBU File He ae Save Exit Export Version 3 x INS File e file as Layout bmp CG 38 Setting CG Preferences You can use the Preferences dialog in CG S to change some of the Character Generator and Font Manager options Select File Preferences to open the Preferences dialog and then click on either the Character Generator or the Font Manager tab Character Generator Tab GG The Character Generator tab lets you change the rendering and default settings for text and Inscriber Preferences x General Sequencer Cache Character Generator graphic object generation Concurrent Display to PGM Y Wordwrap Concurrent Display to PGM Concurrent Display to PRY Locked Lines toggles the size and movement Le Drag Grid Text Risetime Filter display on and off If you select a a hi CG di h a De Use Custom IME this option isplays the entire text line when you drag the object Se eee ae y 8 J la aa AaegzZz boundaries If you do not select e Lanquage Dictionaries this option you see only the ek awe abd bounding box outline when you move or scale a text element or graphic object Selecting this option adds significantly to the processor demands CG makes Concurrent Display to PRV enables a preview of the frame buffer monitor If you select this option CG renders the current layout to the frame buffer when you are not performing other tasks Thi
372. nswda 218 in Logo COMPOSE sssssssssssesessessesees 221 ME SCQUCNCE escena eau ad 179 Mix through to Key checkbox 104 mix to alpha channel 104 mix to background eee 104 Mode eroien edo rounieass 184 OMNE saae iT 184 ODI S aiaee 184 Modifiers in Logo Compose 226 Modi yne aneor aia 235 ELIS P A E R T 235 Graphic objects ssssssesssessseesessesses 139 Markers inion a 121 News Edit tables ees eeeeeeeeeeees 160 VAD SlOPS edate 123 Templates ac seers catevetenntectes nites 156 Monitor calibration eee 266 Monochrome 10g0 eseeseeeeeeeees 153 WICK LEUTE a er 136 Monochrome image filters 255 Motion simulating s sseseeseeseseeseseee 229 MOUs Seaain e 145 Chanoine AfCupnannietainanis 145 Changing Color groupS seeseeeee 1 Changing Style groupS eeseeeee 79 Changing Wedge direction 145 Creating graphic objects 138 Manipulating text with 119 Moving text With eee eeeeeeeeeees 119 Resizing graphics in CG ee 146 RESIZING texire eene 119 Mouse POET sedanina Gio atoiscsceey 119 Cursor shapes esien ai 119 Layer indicator ninian 117 MOVE tTO laane 246 MOVING uesia Read 149 GTAP MICS sacieho nt tenn 246 Objects stack vesierrcatentomencs 149 Selec o arsen aa 243 Moving graphic objects 00 0 eee 146 Moving objects down eeeeeeeeeees 149 Moving objects Up ce seeseeeeeeeeeeees 149 MOVING TEX feccis
373. nt with color Switch back to Logo Compose and switch to the Filter tab Select the Mark NTSC Illegal Colors or Mark PAL Illegal Colors filter In the Mark Color window in the Mark Illegal Colors dialog select a bright shade of red When you apply the filter areas with illegal colors appear in red The Mark Illegal Colors filter identifies more illegal colors than the CG Color Picker Select Edit Undo to undo the filter then select the Complex NTSC Legalize or Complex PAL Legalize set the upper and lower bounds and click OK Reapply the Mark Illegal Colors filter Hardly any of the image appears in red meaning that almost all of the illegal colors in the image have been legalized Logo Compose 265 266 Understanding the Calibration Process In order to create stunning video legal images easily you should calibrate the three components you need to create view and output your images The three components are frame buffer output monitor and computer monitor Providing complete step by step instructions for the calibration process is beyond the scope of this manual but this topic introduces the concepts and the general steps involved in setting up your system for creating the most usable Logo Compose images The illustration below shows the parts of a complete Logo Compose system Frame Buffer Output Monitor Computer Monitor The Need for Calibration Order of Calibration The Frame Buffer Logo Comp
374. ntains all of the details on the video transparency of the image See also Transparency Alpha Adjustment Filters In Logo Compose Inscriber filters that allow you to manipulate the video transparency of your images Alpha Background Pattern See Video Transparent Pattern Alpha Channel In Logo Compose The channel that defines the visible and transparent areas of images used in CG S Logo Compose allows you to modify the image alpha channel Alpha Memory Tool In Logo Compose A tool that allows you to restore all or a portion of the original alpha channel of an image This is possible because the original alpha channel is not destroyed when you modify alpha information in Logo Compose Alpha Texture In Logo Compose A type of texture applied to the alpha channel instead of to the image Alpha Tools In Logo Compose Tools used to add alpha to an image Tools include Alpha Add and Subtract Alpha Fill and Alpha Gradient Animation In CG and Sequencer A type of CG layout or effect event Layouts are imported into an animation application to move the text and graphic objects around in virtual 3D space then output in Sequencer See also Layout Type ANSI A standard arrangement of alphanumeric characters within a font All ANSI fonts identify characters with three digit numbers ranging from 000 to 255 ANSI Identification Numbers Three digit numbers ranging from 000 to 255 used to identify specifi
375. ntation in this package will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use If the distribution media or documentation fail to conform to this warranty you may as your sole and exclusive remedy obtain a replacement free of charge if you return the defective disk or documentation to us with a dated proof of purchase b Interlock Security Device Provided you are in compliance with this Agreement we will replace a damaged or defective interlock security device dongle no matter what the cause of the damage In order to receive a replacement device you must return the damaged device to Inscriber Technology Corporation 26 Peppler Street Waterloo Ontario Canada N2J 3C4 c WARRANTY DISCLAIMER EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS AND WE DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE WE EXCLUDE AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS NOT STATED HEREIN INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so the above exclusion may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other legal rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction 6 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL WE BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT IN
376. nued Using LOGOS anrea vos 236 Workspaceismneranariaian ai 34 CG EMCS cnr 194 CG S Qutpilanunana esis 24 CHANGIN O cacvshertusiugutseuteeuesenngucs 145 ATC CIPS CHOU ia e EENS 145 Bevel dit CHO noenten 147 DIUS ccann an eE 235 CANVAS SIZE naeia 231 Color STAC IE MU coscrsyarsvensecavesssaventin 96 Color CLOUDS aicen 73 COLOTS iit Avnet 59 Existing templates eeeeeeeee 156 Gradient backgrounds eee 66 Gradients enisinia 97 maes Eaa 231 News Edit tables sncdacasuiesnutanans 160 Printing speed arin Vorsadenrseudedees odors 23 SUVIE STOUDS cece ei 73 74 BEN Pal a AAE A 124 Wedge direcho tediosa asai 145 Changing Color groupS seeseeseeeeees 74 Chiginiiel EE AE ETA N 260 CHIVES ar 227 Alp hieu aui 228 238 260 DIG ee eaaa 260 Displayed alpha sicasiccustaviesesevenceas 238 Generic dialog eessesseseessssesessee 260 GUCCI E E E E E 260 IDONEO 260 B Taea a O 228 260 OUISEU E E EE 260 OU ON Sarena renner 260 Realalpha ensar anaE 238 Red riore A 260 DEALS AE E PETAEN 260 Select dialog scoscese 260 Selection sona a 240 260 Terie ni 260 Thumbnail ssacidnanssnnsonen 260 Tool pale ienes aecteht et eetiala 227 Channel Tippecanoe 208 209 CHANT ES sas o EE 238 Multiple cerek nee ee earner 208 Sele EIN aiaa Ea 208 Sne Upana e 208 TETE e EE T 76 TOC E E A E AE E 90 Formatii Poesiaren a 76 Character continued ROLAUIING AE E S 79 SPACING gyane eae S 79 Character Tiaoa N 97 Character Generator tab
377. o 100 and increase the Spacing to 20 and paint a bit Now increase Spacing to 35 and paint some more The stroke becomes less and less solid Click and drag in the Brush window to make the brush smaller Hold down the SHIFT key and click and drag in the Brush window to change the brush angle Click on the Square Brush button to convert the brush al to a square brush and paint some more Enter 0 125 in the Aspect field and paint a bit The stroke is almost completely broken Double click in the Spacing field to reset this value to the default You now have a good calligraphy brush Experiment with the other tools and attributes to get a feel for the way brushes work in Logo Compose Logo Compose 235 236 Working with Alpha Tools and Logos Removing background information from around logos or objects is one of the primary reasons for using Logo Compose This task is often referred to as logo clean up Effective and efficient logo clean up calls for proficiency with both the alpha tools and the selection tools See Understanding Selections on page 240 for details on making selections Why Add Alpha Alpha Tools Logo Compose When an image or area of an image is transparent video shows through It is often necessary to add alpha so that the video signal shows through in certain areas For example if you are cleaning up team logos for the basketball games aired on your station you want to be able to paint with a
378. o 150 and lat News Edit Tables the template nameto Subtitle template then click on Load and then Close Select Programs Accessories Notepad from the WindowsNT Start menu Enter the following text into Notepad Make sure that there is a blank line between each line of text To be or not to be that is the question Whether tis nobler in the mind to suffer the slings and arrows of outrageous fortune or to take arms against a sea of troubles and by opposing end them Save the file as Hamlet txt In CG S select the subtitle template you created and select File Import mport Text File Select Hamlet txt and select the Subtitle Format radio button f Subtitle Format Text Formatted Text Plain Click on OK CG 169 Importing Subtitle Files Subtitle files should be imported into layouts designed specifically for use with subtitles Create a Subtitle Template Import Subtitle Files 170 CG CG uses a fresh copy of the current template for each subtitle page when you import subtitles into a Play List You probably need to create a template for your project See Understanding Templates on page 154 for details on creating templates You also need to add your template to the Templates registry When you import text the text is placed on the bottom line of the layout If the text fills more than one line the first line is bumped up a line and the bottom two lines are filled You
379. o re trim the clip each time you add it to an Event List Speed Bar Timeline Clip Duration Trim Duration Trim Points Editor a ae ee eer 5 cip Ka fe Trim 605 L d aio mjm e seamless Loop G Cycle Trim Clip cmrrent Frame ba in out Shuttle Jog Mark In Field Mark Out Field Seamless Loop ant Frame Field Cycle Checkbox ark In Fie The following list describes the items and functions found on the Trim Editor Speed Bar Controls video playback speed during preview Begins playback automatically when you move the slider to the left or right Clips play forward when you move the slider to the right and backward when you move it to the left Timeline Gives you a visual representation of your clip Timeline length represents entire clip length Shows the segment of the clip between Mark In Mark Out Points in blue Clip Duration Displays the total frames of the video clip Trim Duration Displays the number of frames between the Mark In Mark Out Points 206 Sequencer Trim a Video Clip Cycle Checkbox Select Cycle Clip to play your clip on a continuous loop during preview Seamless Loop Loops the preview of the trimmed clip Current Frame Field Displays the number of the frame currently displayed on your video monitor Use the Up Down arrows beside the field to change the current frame displayed on your monitor Mark In Field Displays the frame number of the Mark In Point Mark Out Field
380. o the grab and a variety of methods to save the image as a bitmap file Frame Grab is not available on all supported frame buffers Switch to Frame Grab Attributes Grab an Image Filters Switch from Still to Live Video Crop an Image Frame Grab To switch to Frame Grab from other CG S modules z D click on the Frame Grab button located on the CG S AJ Ea Ki toolbar If you prefer you can select the module from the Tools menu which is available in all CG S modules Frame Grab is a fairly simple module to use and understand All the Frame Grab tools and options are located on the one tab and on the Frame Grab Edit menu Grab Output Save Grab to File C Filter sensed save Grab to Clipboard Live Video Save Grab to Store Still Graphic Crop jo gt Ee a a co mM mk Lu When you see the input image you want to save click on the Grab button to capture the full frame The image will freeze on your video monitor and Frame Grab will copy the image to the Frame Grab window A frame is composed of two interlaced fields separated by 1 50th or 1 60th of a second Essentially the input signal contains the even numbered scan lines followed by the odd numbered scan lines If any object in the image moves during that fraction of a second you will see flicker in the display of a frame grab using both frames Frame Grab allows you to use various filters to correct for flicker There are also o
381. ob to nce y tup y y 8 YOur Options video The following table describes the various ways of doing a take or running a p VIS 8 y 8 8 job in Sequencer Sequencer Option Play Direct p3 button h Take button Take Take button Take Take Down button Run Run Job ob z button ENTER key Number pad PLUS key Number pad MINUS key Number pad Take Images 1 Create a Play List in CG then switch to Sequencer 2 Select the first event and press the ENTER key on the number pad to take the event 3 Scroll down the Play List and select another event 4 Click on the MINUS key to load the selected image into the Preview Channel 5 Press the PLUS key on the number pad to take the selected event and load the next event into the Preview Channel 6 Click on the CLR button on the Program Preview palette to clear the frame buffer Description Runs the entire job from the beginning If CG S is offline it automatically goes online to render the events before output CG S stays online once it has run through the event sequence Takes an event without loading the next event into the Preview Channel This has the same effect as pressing the ENTER key on the number pad Takes the selected event and loads the next event into the Preview Channel This has the same effect as using the PLUS key on the number pad Takes the selected event and loads the next event into the Preview Channel This has th
382. ogo Compose Description moves the current selection selects areas of similar color the Wand Tolerance field on the Select tab specifies how similar colors have to be to for inclusion in the selection selects areas of similar luminance the Wand Tolerance field on the Select tab specifies how similar the values have to be for inclusion in the selection selects areas using the current brush attributes you actually paint a selection with this tool selects a rectangular area selects an elliptical area selects an entire scan line selects a column one pixel wide lets you draw a freehand selection lets you select an area as a free form polygon ou draw a series of connected lines then double click or hold down the CTRL key and click to close the selection Creation Options When making a selection you can specify whether you want to make a single selection add to an existing selection subtract from an existing selection or intersect a new selection with an existing selection You can also specify that you only want to move the current selection These options are available in the Selection Tools section of the Select tab Button Selection Clean Up a Logo Select File lImport Export lImport Image and import the guitar bmp file in the CGS41 Paint Examples folder T Select the Lasso tool from the Tool palette and select the area around the guitar getting as close to the guitar as possible without i
383. oint both channels contain the same information In step B cut the cake in half using the Alpha Add tool to paint the lower part of the cake The real alpha channel is unaffected In step C select the top right quarter of the cake using the Rectangular Selection tool and press CTRL X Both channels are affected by the cut command In step D restore the cake image using the Alpha Memory brush You can only restore three quarters of the cake since the CTRL X command affected the real alpha channel At this point both channels contain the same information there is nothing for the alpha tools to remember For the rest of this chapter the term alpha channel refers to the displayed alpha channel Working with Alpha Gradient Tools Select File Import Export mport Image and select an image to import fades to alpha where you end the gradient This direction is reflected in the cursor the top is white and the bottom is black Black reflects where transparency is added 2 Select File Preferences and change the Video Transparent Pattern to a checkerboard pattern 8 Hold down the ALT Key and click and drag in the Logo Compose 3 Switch to the Brush tab and select the Alpha Linear 7 ast UN i o a H Gradient tool from the Tool drop down list closely at the cursor tne gradient colors are also reversed 4 Set Opacity to 100 Select the Alpha Radial Gradient tool and experiment Mey with different gradients The Alpha Radi
384. ok the image is held there but is not saved The Scrapbook is a temporary holding space only The Scrapbook is emptied when you exit CG S Add Items Select a Scrapbook Image Scrapbook Menu 16 Overview There are two ways to add an image to the Scrapbook select an item and drag it to the Scrapbook select an item right click on the Scrapbook and select Add from the menu The Scrapbook always identifies the form of the current item layout background logo image etc E ECMION I minna mE Per TME T T sanna Background Style Chip Use the scroll bar to view items in the Scrapbook When you first launch CG S the Scrapbook is empty and the Inscriber logo appears in the Scrapbook window Every Add time you add an item to the Scrapbook the Use Background last item added appears in the window until ne eb round i se Loga you scroll left or right The item that appears Delete in the window is the selected item 7 ort aes Scroll Through Copy To Clipboard Scrapbook Paste From Clipboard 4 Info Right click on the Scrapbook to see a menu of options The options listed on the menu change depending on the origin of the selected item and the module you are currently working in Menu Option Function Add e copies the selected item and places it in the Scrapbook Use e uses the selected item option appears if there is only one possible use for the selected item as in Sequ
385. oks for the GpiPort entry in the Trigger section of the Inscribe ini file for GPI information You may have to create the section at the end of the file Trigger GpiPort COM1 If you hook the GPI trigger into another port change COM1 to COM2 COM3 or COMA When you add this item to Inscribe ini make sure Trigger is enclosed by square brackets and do not put any spaces in the GpiPort COM1 entry Use the PC Clock to Trigger Events To set up a group for the PC Clock trigger type you need to define in and out points for each event on the Event Editor tab The in points that you set are the actual times that you want your events to run at when you run the job each event is triggered when the in point matches up with the time on your 24 hour computer clock When you set an in point CG S automatically calculates the out point You can change the duration and wait interval between events with the Frames and Wait fields on the Event Editor tab If you want a job to repeat every 24 hours select the Cycle Iv Cycle checkbox on the Run tab Once you run the job CG S will run T Live Update the job at the same time every day Live Playlist Use a GPI Trigger to Trigger Events To complete this procedure you must have a GPI trigger 4 Select GPI Trigger trom the Trigger drop down list 1 Create a series of events in CG for a news cast weather 7 segment sh pata A 2 Create a new group for the new events if they are part of a Timed bigge
386. olor model can be described as a double ended cone Hue values range from 0 to 359 and are arranged in spectrum order from red through green and blue to magenta Saturation determines the intensity or brightness of the color with a maximum saturation value of 100 Grays fall along the Lightness axis ranging from black with a Lightness value of 0 to white with a Lightness value of 100 All grays have a Saturation value of 0 For maximum Saturation Lightness must be set to 50 If Lightness is set to its maximum or minimum Hue and Saturation are irrelevant Use the HLS Model If you select Hue the Color Slider shows you the range of hue parameters for the current Lightness and Saturation parameters You can move the Slider up and down to change the Hue or you can change the Lightness and When you select the H L or S radio button the Color Slider shows you the result of choosing all the possible values of that parameter given the current settings for the other two parameters The other two parameters are displayed in the selection block showing you all the possible colors that can be defined given the current selection in the Color Slider Blue 240 Lightness Saturation by moving the selector in the Color 3 Selector Box Move the Color Selector Box up Black and down to shift the color closer to white or to black or move the selector left or right to make the hue more or less intense Selected Horizontal Adjust
387. ompose Inscriber filters that alter image color by mapping new ranges of pixel values over existing ranges Color Balance Filter In Logo Compose A color adjustment filter that adjusts the color range of an image s shadows midtones and highlights one at a time Color Blend See Gradient Color Chip In CG A small colored square on the Color amp Texture tab that identifies a selected color Color Correction In Logo Compose A means of adjusting the color of an image Paint has several color correction filters that let you perform complex adjustments to the color of an image 276 Glossary Color Emboss In Logo Compose A distortion filter that makes an image appear embossed by adding highlights and shadows based on the edges in the images while retaining color information Contrast with Emboss Color Gamut See Gamut Color Group In CG A set of color and texture formatting information located on the Formatting palette for text and graphic objects Text and graphic objects do not share color groups Color group options can be changed using the Color amp Texture tab Contrast with Style Group Color Model A mathematical representation of the full set of colors available for NTSC or PAL encoding such as the RGB HSV or HLS color models While the colors the models represent remain the same that is yellow remains yellow the method they use to represent those colors may differ See also RGB Col
388. on the Color amp Texture tab See Understanding Text Color on page 94 and Defining Additional Textures on page 132 for details on applying color and textures to text Use color chips and color chip selectors to apply Color Chip color to text Simply click on a color chip then Selectors select a color and set a Transparency value ee Color Chips a ero T Chip 5 Alpha 0 Alternatively press CTRL and click on multiple color chips to select them as a group You can also drag a color chip to another color chip to copy its color and transparency settings or right click on a color chip to copy and paste color and transparency settings You can review how your text will look using the Preview color chip To apply multiple colors and transparency values to several color chips at the same time click on a Selector for color chip combinations To select all four color chips click on the middle Selector To select the left two color chips click the left selector All color chip selectors work in the same way Distort Text CG provides two ways to change the shape of individual pistort lt a characters in addition to setting a Font Type On Face you can zs set Distort X and Distort Y Distort values warp text along the X PistortY jo or Y axis The following graphics show you the effects of different distort values X 100 X D X U X 100 90D Sb 5 D D Y 100 Y 50 Y 50 Y 100 X amp Y 100 X amp Y
389. on the Solid Blend cycle box to cycle to TOP 7 Set the bottom transparency value to 50 The top and use the color selection tools to select yellow for transparency value also changes to 50 the top color 8 Click on the Image box and select the file 1030 063 tif from Click on the Solid Blend cycle box to cycle to the CGS 41 Samples folder The Size to Fit checkbox is BOTTOM and use the color selection tools to select purple for the bottom color automatically checked 9 Clear the Size to Fit checkbox The image reverts to its original In the Angle field set the gradient angle to 45 set the Top dimensions and is tiled gradient value to 80 and set the Top transparency value to 10 Click on the Video button below the Solid Blend cycle box Now 80 the Image box is cleared and the top and bottom transparency Check the transparency Lock button The top and bottom values are reset to 100 transparency values don t change CG 69 70 Understanding Objects CG uses two types of objects text objects and graphic objects to create layouts Text and graphic objects are found on separate planes but share many of the same characteristics and features Types of Objects Face Edge Shadow CG Text objects are the alphanumeric symbols you use to convey information Text objects consist of characters entered from the keyboard and are modified by color or style groups which control all of the formatting opti
390. on transition trigger information and board assignment information The Event List contains all of the layouts required for a job Events are defined and sequenced in the Sequencer module When you run the Event List events can be triggered automatically with timecodes or duration codes or triggered manually with the keyboard or a GPI trigger Event groups and individual events can be triggered randomly or in sequence The Event List contains the layouts from the CG module and the sequencing and event definitions from the Sequencer module Online N Run Job EEEN 11 EEE LEE EEN EE EL ES S 1 TEEN a Overview 25 26 Working on a Network Many users have multiple CG S systems connected in a network CG S includes a variety of options to make this an easy task including the ability to share common registry and font databases the ability to limit the font display to database fonts and the ability to render files to a specific location ltems Not Shared Sharing a Registry Overview Network File Server You cannot share the interlock device and the hardware used by CG S across a network Each local system running CG S must have an interlock device and the proper driver installed You can only output graphics on the frame buffers installed in the system you are running on You cannot access a frame buffer on another computer on the network The CG S registry database saves the layout
391. one tool around the source point moves to match your cursor movement However each time you release the mouse button and click again the Clone tool returns to the originally defined source point This means you can make several copies of the source point at different locations throughout the image You don t have to clone on the same image the source point was set from You can close the current image and import a new one or work on a blank canvas Logo Compose remembers the image data from the previously defined source point Use the SHIFT Key The SHIFT key changes how the clone source is set depending on whether or not there is an active selection in the image If you press ALT SHIFT click to set the source point when there is no selection Logo Compose copies the entire image and uses the copy as the clone source This allows you to paint over the source point without losing the original clone source When there is an active selection and you press ALT SHIFT click instead of ALT click to define the source point Logo Compose takes a copy of the selection contents and uses that as the source image For example if you have a picture of a face and a selection around one eye pressing SHIFT ALT click sets just the selected eye as the clone source As you paint only the eye is cloned Remember to deselect the selected area before you begin cloning Use the CTRL Key The CTRL key and Align checkbox on the Brush tab change how the clone and Al
392. ons applied to text objects Graphic Object gt Text Object gt Graphic objects consist of shapes created in CG such as rectangles or circles Graphic objects also include logos which contain alpha information Graphic objects are modified by color or style groups Text and graphic objects do not share style and color groups Each type of object has its own set of style and color groups Both text and graphic objects have a face The face is the actual shape of the text or graphic object such as the letter A or a rectangle The face is the top element of an object Face The edge for both text and graphic objects is the middle element of the object It is a solid layer of color or pattern that extends beyond the face by a specific number of pixels Edge The edge under the face is usually hidden unless you adjust the face transparency values See Understanding Classic Edges on page 90 for more information on setting text edge effects The shadow for both text and graphic objects is the bottom element of the object It is a solid layer of color or pattern that is offset from the face by a specific number of pixels and created using the shadow option you select The shadow under the face and edge is usually hidden unless you adjust the face and edge Shadow gt transparency values See Understanding Classic Shadow on page 88 for more information on setting text shad
393. ons continued PUPPIE retusa n iy wees 246 OD JIS nenna einen 246 DELECHONG esnan 246 SOPP S cipanas 247 Toolsi 246 Transformi tab eacssccaesssorsccveviceeacs 246 ia O EE A 190 CUE EE EE EE 190 Direcho i aaneren 190 DISSOW aE 190 LOUVE Ganaa a 190 PUSH rirun ni 190 all E E E S 190 WIPE seo en a a 190 Transition Events sessessessssseesssessese 180 CYC AUIIIS o eT 188 Prans ONS ANN 188 PAGING aeiaai 186 Direciono anen a 188 DUON Aietan 189 T A DN e EA E TE 188 SIZE A E EA 189 Ee e E E A TT 193 Tanp ae anan 98 1009 VIG CO cossimneseacsruoumerousavanebsies 68 Adjusting DOV Els sercri cocina eccsarvete 104 PINGS cts A 99 148 Back StOunid sis senieencsaneaimagiss 68 69 Bevel Lek biscicmnendseiniotenerntviness 104 Bottom Vall zrno 69 Combining with color sssssssseseese 67 Gradient ccccssessseecceeeeees 99 148 Graphic objectis 148 MUP E aS eE a 100 Settine Valles iai 98 ECM A AE EE A A 98 Tinting TEXTILES asco pincscrte teens 133 Top Valiero ieee 69 Video Transparent Pattern 99 Transparency gradient sssessessessessee 99 as background sssessessessessessssssseeses 63 Transparency Lock vista smssiteessoucesianes 98 Transparency Values See Lock Transparency of transformation 249 Transparency See also Alpha 228 Transparent background eee 69 THIS CEE LVDES aiscansu secamissura Ea 196 Chanain aonne 179 186 COMMOUEIN g oiiire 198 Trigger
394. onsists of three areas face edge and shadow The face defines the character shape size and general appearance The edge defines the character outline The shadow defines the type and style of the character shadow Other type styles contain additional elements outline edge face depth body depth tube and glow See Understanding Type Styles on page 86 for details When you open the CG Editor your text uses the settings of the default template and the Classic type style The chart below explains the text settings in the default template and applicable ranges Explanation font used for the selected character or line 0 to 999 e character height measured in scan lines 35 to 335 character width as a percentage of the standard width for the character height 127 to 127 angle of the text 44 to 44 e number of scan lines between lines of text 99 to 99 space between individual of characters as a percentage of normal 0 spacing to 100 percentage of normal capital letter height 180 to 180 rotation angle of the line of text TrueType font variation or High Quality smooths out rough or jagged edges for Inscriber fnt fonts TrueType font variation TrueType font variation 0 to 127 e depth or offset of the shadow in pixels 0 to 29 0 e type of shadow softness needs pixel info e how hard or diffuse the edge of the text shadow e direction of shadow to 127 e num
395. ont Size on page 78 for details Resize and Reposition Text 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and type some text on the first text line 2 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and move the cursor over the bracket on the right side of the text The cursor changes to a white rectangle with left and right arrows 3 Click and drag to the right to adjust the width of the text line Look at the Width value on the Size amp Attributes tab to see the new setting 4 Position the cursor over the top corner of the bracket on the right side of the text The cursor changes to a white square with arrows pointing to the four corners Click and drag up to adjust the height of the text line If the text size Lock is on both the height col cy and width are adjusted If the Lock is off only the height is adjusted Place the cursor over the text line and hold down CTRL Now click and drag the text line to move it up or down Press CTRL TAB to change the line from tab constrained to non tab constrained Place the cursor over the text line and hold down CTRL and click and drag the text line to move it anywhere on the layout Press CTRL TAB to change the line back to tab constrained Now move the cursor over the bottom corner of the bracket to the right of the text The cursor changes to an arrow with an arc on the stem Click and drag to rotate the text cG 119
396. ops incrementing the clock and lets you continue to edit layouts and perform other functions in CG S Countups and countdowns work differently than other clock types when you do a take The countup or countdown starts at the start time that you enter on the Effect Settings tab and runs to the end time that you enter Once the end time has passed CG automatically stops displaying the clock on your program channel and lets you continue to edit layouts and perform other functions in CG S Inscriber recommends that you use mono spaced numbers such as Times New Roman for your clock displays Set clock attributes using the Size amp Attributes tab Please note that local formatting and vertical text processing is not available for clocks Inscriber recommends that you use mono spaced numbers such as Courier for your clock displays If you wish to use fonts other than Courier you can position your clock display using a Count Up clock from the type drop down list You should select the Display Leading Zeros option for accurate positioning When your clock is positioned properly online change the clock type to either 12 hour or 24 hour Local formatting and vertical text processing is not available for clocks Add a Clock to a Layout 1 Select the Documentation Template trom the Templates registry and click on the Rectangle tool then check the AM and PM and draw a rectangle on the layout checkboxes and select a style 2 Switch to the Style
397. or Background Color backgrounds consist of combinations of colors gradients patterns and Basics transparencies A gradient is a smooth transition from one color to another color A pattern is a standard design such as lines or boxes that is placed on top of a color background Transparency is a measure of how much you can see through the background to the image underneath Because color backgrounds are created on top of image and video backgrounds you can create complex backgrounds by combining the three background types and then making use of the pattern gradient and transparency options Change the Video Transparent Pattern 1 Switch to the Background tab Video should 4 Change the background top already be selected as your background type 5 transparency value to 0 The 2 Select File Preferences to display the video m ae is Inscriber Preferences dialog and switch to the covered by a color at the top oF the Ws r p Top 100 g Sanaralitah ou BH visible at the bottom PATE 3 From the video transparent pattern list select File IFL A TE a new video transparent pattern and click on F ower 5 Change the video transparency HTA OK Your monitor display is immediately pattern again to see how different updated to the new video background pattern patterns appear at different levels 2 of transparency S Video Trans parent Pattern etting 6 Repeat the above steps until you find a video transparency
398. or Model HLS Color Model and HSV Color Model Color Picker In CG An eye dropper tool that copies colors from anywhere on the screen Color Ramp In CG A color option you can apply to individual text elements that displays color transparency and sheen gradients Available with all type styles except Classic Inscriber Color Selection Box In CG A box located on the Color amp Texture and Background tabs that displays all the colors you can define given the current color slider value Color Selector In CG A set of cross hairs located in the Color Selection Box that you can use to pick a specific color from the Color Selection Box Color Slider In CG A bar located beside the Color Selection Box that shows the color values of the selected color model component Complex NTSC PAL Legalize In Logo Compose A legalize filter that legalizes the colors of images that contain gradient effects Every pixel is scanned and illegal colors are replaced with the closest NTSC or PAL legal color along the gradient transition See also Legalize Filters Contrast with Simple NTSC PAL Legalize Component Video Video comprised of multiple signals It is usually taken to mean that there are separate signals for chrominance and luminance RGB is also a component signal with separate signals for red green and blue pixel values Contrast with Composite Video Composite Video Video comprised of a single signal for lumin
399. or advanced formatting Items to Drag Format Sample to CG Editor Format Sample to Style or Color Group Style or Color Group to Format Sample Style or Color Group to CG Editor Local Formatting Result e changes the formatting of all of the lines tagged with the style or color group to match the Format Sample without updating the style or color group e changes the style or color group formatting to match whatever is in the format sample and applies the new formatting to all lines tagged with the style or color group e when Freeform Style is checked changes the formatting of the selected line back to the formatting of the style or color group e reapplies the formatting of the current style or color group to all lines tagged with the style or color group and discards any other formatting Local formatting lets you change the formatting of a few letters or words on a line without affecting the style or color groups To apply local formatting select the text characters and then make any changes to the color texture size or attributes options After you have applied local formatting look at the format sample on the cc e palette The number in the bottom corner has a in front of it indicating that local modifications have been made to the current text object The format sample also changes to show local formatting such as color size gradients and so on Use Advanced Text Formatting 1 Sele
400. or color group Text and graphic objects do not share style and color groups Each type of object has its own set of 24 style groups and 8 color groups Objects that share a color group share color and texture definitions but no other formatting Objects that share a style group share color texture shape shadow and edge formatting Text elements not graphic objects that share settings for a style group also share text width and height Create a Layout trom a Template Click on the first blank thumbnail in 3 Press CTRL Lto create a new layout using the current the Play List to create a new layout Select a template from the Templates registry drop down list in the CG toolbar All text and objects contained in the template are displayed Select another template trom the Templates registry drop down list All of the elements of the first layout are overwritten with information from the new template template 4 Select a different template trom the Templates registry drop down list to overwrite the current layout with new template information 5 You can switch between layouts without affecting them by clicking on the first thumbnail in the Play List 6 Save the Play List contents by selecting File Save 7 Select File New to close the current Play List and open a blank Play List 8 Open the saved Play List by clicking Open on the main toolbar and selecting the filename you saved the Play Lis
401. or compressed so that it fits the current dimensions of your layout If you do not check the Size to Fit checkbox the image is imported at its original size and filed to fill the entire layout You can also apply filters to images See Using the Image Filters on page 220 for details Many software packages let you create an alpha channel for your images CG can read this information and apply it to the background letting you control the transparency of your background image If you check the Ignore Alpha checkbox CG discards this alpha information and doesnt allow any transparency in your background image Image backgrounds take all their transparency alpha information from the image file The transparency settings on the Background tab are ignored CG provides you with an easy way to set your background to video Click on the Video button just below the Solid Blend cycle box to reset the video transparency to 100 The color definitions are not changed so you can always switch back to a color background You can click on Video at any time to reset the video transparency values to 100 If you loaded a background image clicking on full video resets the Image box Transparency Roll Crawl and Reveal Backgrounds Transparency lets you mix color and Transparengy Lock video backgrounds You can create a semi transparent color background or a Top 9 lt Top Transparency Value a transparency gradient so that one
402. or digital disk and then discarded When used this way CG S usually has one or two items in the Play List that may be saved for their formatting information but usually one off items are created quickly sent to video or to tape and then discarded sey Nee 0N EIN CG S can be used as a traditional character generator that creates layouts for export Layouts can be exported to bitmap files for display with other desktop studio software or with Inscriber VideoCarte When used this way the Play List contains all of the layouts required for a single project Each new project is stored in a separate Play List These layouts can be created ona machine that is not equipped with a frame buffer and then exported for playback to a machine with a frame buffer Sequencing transitions and other effects are controlled by the desktop studio software Randomly displaying selections from a collection of several dozen stills like those needed for a series of lower third supers is handled in the Run tab You can select specific layouts to send to video by entering an event number in the Run tab and clicking on Take on the Run tab to send the selected event to the program channel You can also use the optional Shotbox hardware for this type of output ea s i N Online OOE Sere Nee ON FEE Sate s Take a AIR Sequenced The Sequencer module manages and controls all online activity including takes Presentati
403. ormation for the image Individual channels are represented by monochrome images Channel Ripple In Sequencer An option that allows you to send an Event List to a multiple frame buffer system cycling through each frame buffer as the events are sent to video For example in a three frame buffer system the first frame buffer takes the first event the second frame buffer takes the second event the third frame buffer takes the third event the first frame buffer takes the fourth event and so on Character In CG An alphanumeric symbol that is part of a font set and appears on the screen Character Generator See CG Character Height In CG The distance from the lowest possible point for a descending character i e j or g to the highest possible point for an ascending character 1 e M or h in a font set Character Width In CG The width of a CG character measured as a percentage of normal width The default width 100 is based on the current font height Chroma The purity or intensity of a color See also Chrominance Chroma Antialiasing Filter In Logo Compose A video cleanup filter that smooths image features that cause flickering bands of false color due to color signal encoding in NTSC during broadcast Chrominance Amount of pure color Chrominance works in conjunction with luminance which is the shade or value of the color For example when you look at a red ball your e
404. ose The main goal of calibration is simple you want the images you create in Logo Compose to look the same in video as they do on your computer monitor To achieve this goal you need to be working on a calibrated system A secondary goal is to be able to use your images on different systems without a huge variation in the output The key to the secondary goal is a set of frame buffers that are calibrated identically In a one system setup the secondary goal may not be as important In this situation you may be able to get away with not calibrating your frame buffer if you create images that look fine on your output monitor However this method is not recommended The order in which you calibrate your devices is important Unless otherwise stated you should calibrate your system in the following order frame buffer output monitor and computer monitor The frame buffer is the most important of the three devices to be calibrated since it actually outputs your images If the frame buffer is not properly calibrated your images may experience shifts in color Calibrating your own frame buffer is not recommended unless you know what you are doing and have access to the proper equipment When calibrating a frame buffer you generally output a test signal and use a waveform and vectorscope to adjust the video levels and colors If you are a one system shop or are only outputting images from the Logo Compose system you may be able to work arou
405. osing JOs nesnuyuonnna 18 Deleting ob Samedi 18 EX pOr inn a 36 230 Pormal nern naat 19 Hias tratarea uera 237 IMpPOrtine enra iae 36 230 i Lopo COMPOSE sararieun 230 OPES man aepo 18 230 Opening Jobs asise 18 Packed job format sssseessessssseseese 19 SAVING AET E 18 230 SAVIE JODS cerina tesian 18 Files continued Vector based ccccsssssssseeseecees 237 Working With cc wsinsesanmat 18 230 F lite AP E EETA E E 97 EEE KE E EEAS 97 a a I A E EE 97 Esha cr AEE EES 97 148 Rad alena aeoaea 97 148 SHOWING sai heutecichestanstsarapratertsunkesinns 35 Pill Pater cesses acta eieviteasevacsteaeaats 62 PUT CAD aaa 254 EE E E AAE EA AEN 218 220 254 Jaee A E R 255 Alpha Adjustment civcnsencnarive 254 ADPIVING vveoluvineanted 241 254 255 Background image eeseeeeeeeee 68 BESi CHESS srasiaysiancsyecteneutevncnnanse 255 Channels RE E TS 260 Color Adjustment sssessessessessese 254 Color balance eeseeeeeseeesserereeesss 255 Color correction eesssssssssseressees 255 CONEIS EO 255 CUES aaa uate 255 DISTORU oaan aaa 254 Pilier ti Deena E 254 PO CESS enoa ES 254 RE e E E T 229 Misere R 254 Decale neen N 254 Monochrome sssesssesessereseessssssssses 255 Opa nanen 255 PHOTOS MOD aene S 255 PIRI e e EDN 255 Risetinie 1 CG isare 38 idisse aE 255 plat COC specimina aian 142 Flicker in Frame Grab cccceeeeeees 218 PUPPIE pensais nanea 249 Transform option ssssssessesssse
406. ot find images This method is not efficient because images are duplicated across the network but is sometimes the only way to open layouts when a system has been disconnected from the network Overview 27 28 Inscriber Preferences You can customize your system in a variety of ways with the settings on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Settings are saved in Inscribe ini so that they are maintained from one session to another Horizontal and Vertical Resolution NTSC or PAL Keying Type Multi Channel Operation Disable Board Access Windows Gamma Video Dither Overview The Horz and Vert fields set the width and height of rendered images Make sure that these values matches your frame buffer resolution Horizontal resolution is measured in pixels and vertical resolution is measured in scan lines If you are working offline you can set the resolution to any value up to 1024x1024 The NTSC and PAL radio buttons allow you to configure CG S for the video standard you are using If you create layouts in CG S using one standard and output them on a system configured for the other they may not look right You can choose the keying type for your system setup when you first install CG S but you can also change the setting at any time on the General tab If you are using an external keyer check your hardware manual or ask your dealer for the proper configuration There are four available keying options Keying Type
407. ot the selection or image contents Import and Export Selection Contents To export the selection contents select File Import Export Export Selection Contents When you export the selection contents Logo Compose crops the image to the selection and alphas out all unselected pixels Make sure you save the image as a lgo format to maintain the alpha channel If you do not the area around the selection is black instead of alpha when you import the selection To import the selection contents select File Import Export Import Image as Transformation If you select File Import Export Import Selection you will import only the selection outline Experiment with Opacity and Level of Selection 1 Select File Import Export mport Image and import the junebug bmp image from the CGS41 Paint Examples folder 2 Select the Lasso tool from the Tool palette and make a selection 3 Switch to the Select tab Note that the Selection Channel thumbnail is pure black and white showing that all selected pixels are either 100 selected or 100 unselected 4 Click in the Hide Selection checkbox The selection marquee is hidden but the selection remains active 5 Select the Alpha Add tool and paint on the image a Alpha is added only to the selected areas i 6 Select the Brush Selection tool from the Tool palette F and change the opacity on the Brush tab to 50 7 Paint a selection Look at the Selection Channel thumbnail on the Sel
408. ou want to change the trigger type for certain events in your job you must create a new group for each time the trigger type changes The default trigger type for each new group is Timed but you can change the default in the Preferences dialog See Setting Sequencer Preferences on page 214 for details Group Attributes All groups have a name number and trigger type These are all automatically generated by Sequencer when you create a group but you can change the group name and trigger type e The group number describes the position of a group within the Event List e The group name describes the group contents You can change the name on the Event Editor tab The trigger type specifies what trigger is used for all events in the group The default is Timed but you can change the trigger type on the Event Editor tab Group Number Trigger Type Group Out Point Effect 00000 Opening Credits Timed W 00 00 05 00 00 00 17115 00 00 12 15 00001 Talk Sho MName CG Effect Fr120 1 wis 00 0 05 00 00 00 09 15 00 00 05 00002 Show Topic CG Effect Fre 1 w30 00 09 09 15 00 00 10 23 00 00 01 08 Group Name Group In Point Total Group Duration Create a Group and Change the Trigger Type 1 Create a Play List 6 Select the group trigger type Trigger Manual 2 Click on the Sequencer button to switch to Sequencer from the Trigger drop down list eae on the Event Editor tab PRSTENCA GPI Trigger dd a Tim
409. ow Softness on page 89 for details Transparency values can be applied to a shadow by adjusting the Trans field Sheen refers to a band of color that cuts through the face edge or depth like a focused highlight N n T A a x Sheen Effect E E Set the Sheen Color using the Color Picker on the Color amp Texture tab Size offset and angle determine the look of the sheen Offset determines the sheen s position on the text The graphic below shows you different sheen offset values B B DBB Offset 50 Ofset 25 Offset 0 Offset 25 Offset 50 Angle sets how vertical or horizontal the highlight is The graphic below shows you different sheen angle values in 45 degree increments Angle 90 Angle 45 Angle 0 Angle 45 Angle 90 All sheen settings except angle become unavailable when you apply the Bevel color option to a text element by selecting Bevel from the Color Option drop down list When beveling an element angle adjusts the gradient ratio of the beveled text element Apply Depth Shadow and Sheen Options l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry Cycle to Depth Set the face depth color chips to yellow Set the drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is depth value to 19 and angle to 72 between the brackets in the CG Editor Cycle to Shadow Set the shadow color chip to gray Set the Type some text Select the Recessed type style on the Size
410. ow effects Select Delete Copy and Paste Text Action select a Line select a Word select part of a line A number of methods are available from the Edit menu for selecting and manipulating text You can only perform these actions on a single line of text Methods e click anywhere within the line e double click on the word e click and drag the cursor over the text e place the cursor next to the text hold down the SHIFT key and use the right and left arrow keys cut or delete selected text copy selected text paste text Select Delete Copy and Paste Graphic Objects Action select an object cut or delete selected object copy selected object paste object Format Text Depending on which font appears first in your Fonts List your text 5 may be a different font than the font used in this procedure 2 3 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is between the brackets in the CG Editor Type the sentence This is a test RABESE Click on the Height field on the Size amp Attributes tab and type 30 to change the value Click on the Width field and drag the mouse up until the value reaches 230 You now have two ways to enter values in numeric fields 6 e hold down CTRL and press X e hold down CTRL and press C e hold down CTRL and press v A number of methods are also available from the Edit menu for select
411. pe of the entire object Shadows contain one color and one transparency value The graphic below shows you the difference between depth and shadow Depth and Depth Shadow Shadow AAA CG 101 Setting Depth Shadow and Sheen Depth shadow and sheen options can make your text look three dimensional using color transparency and texture Sheen highlights can also make text shiny Many type styles let you set depth shadow and sheen options on the Color amp Texture tab Depth Shadow Sheen 102 CG Depth adds an extruded edge to the combined face and edge On Depth depth determines depth size and angle determines where the depth is displayed The graphic below shows you different depth angle values O O O O O Angle 135 Angle 45 Angle 0 Angle 45 Angle 135 Shadows are soft offset highlights of the side of an object opposite an imaginary light source they follow the shape of the entire object On Shadow you can set the distance of the shadow from the text using offset You can also specify the where the shadow is displayed using angle The graphic below shows you different shadow angle values O OOO Angle 135 Angle 45 Angle 0 Angle 45 Angle 135 Soft determines how fuzzy or diffuse the edge of the shadow will be A softness value near zero gives a hard edged shadow similar to an offset shadow A higher softness value gives a diffuse indistinct shadow See Shad
412. pecific portion of an image you can E E A E E T make a selection around it Any tools you use will not be applied 6 Select the Dodge tool set the brush opacity to 50 beyond the selection boundary and drag to lighten the selection k 7 Click and hold over the Dodge tool on the Tool palette until the pop up menu appears and select the Burn tool 8 Drag the Burn tool over the image to darken it C Logo Compose 251 Using the Clone Tools The Clone and Clone Fill tools let you paint an exact duplicate of an image or parts of an j S image into the current image As a brush based tool the Clone tool paints with the ys Ry settings on the Brush tab The Clone Fill tool lets you fill entire sections with image data a with a single click Defining a Source Before you can begin cloning you need to define a source Point point The source point is the location Logo Compose copies from when you start painting with the Clone or Clone Fill tools With the Clone tool selected position the cursor over the part of the image you want to use as the source hold down the ALT key and click the left mouse button The cursor shape changes to show you that the source point is being set When you begin painting the source point is identified by a set of crosshairs Once you have defined a source point you can begin painting anywhere in the current image Wherever you click in the image the Clone tool copies the source point If you drag the Cl
413. pends on local drive access speed and oe image size Remote Location The image is rendered when it is needed by Sequencer It is then rendered directly onto the frame buffer if possible amp Image display latency depends on network or CD ROM access time and image size Remote Location rendering means that the image is not rendered until you try to setup or run it If logos textures background images or fonts are not available at that point the rendering process may fail or give unexpected results Rolls crawls and animations cannot be rendered remotely The advantage of operating in this manner is that you do not need extra hard drive space to hold rendered images during a run The display latency for images read from disk or from a remote location is composed of three factors the time to read the image file from disk the time to decompress it and the time to transfer it to the frame buffer card This varies greatly from system to system and from time to time based on network activity levels Images stored in compressed format actually load faster than uncompressed images because the decompression time is shorter than the time required to send the extra data across the network The primary delay in displaying images from RAM is the time required to send the raw data to the frame buffer card Location Symbols The following table contains all the symbols used to identify the event location in the Event List Symbol Description C
414. pha tools to manipulate image alpha the selection tools to select the parts of the image to work on the transformation tools to transform a selected area or the image editing tools to edit the image Logo Compose also offers a variety of filters Brush Preview Cursor When you move your mouse into the Logo Compose workspace the cursor switches to the Brush Preview cursor This cursor lets you see the effects of the current brush settings before you make any changes to your image The cursor shows several brush attributes including Size Angle and Shape See Setting Brush Attributes on page 234 for details Status Bar The Logo Compose status bar displays the image size cursor coordinates zoom level and any modifiers for the current tool You can view this information on various tabs but the status bar provides a summary in one easy location r20 y 466 x 209 106 Zoom 100 0 Alpha Subtract tool There are no modifiers for the Alpha Subtract taol 226 Logo Compose Tool Palette Attributes Tabs Menus and the Right Click Menu Modifiers Short Cut Keys and Cursors Scrapbook The Logo Compose Tool palette contains all of the tools e available in Logo Compose The palette is visually divided into S4 groups of similar tools the general tools selection tools le e transformation tools alpha tools and image editing tools Many tools share one Tool palette button These additional tools E s are located on
415. pings With this type of compositing remember that white is created from 100 in all three channels and black is created from 0 in all three channels The example below shows you the results of the various types of compositing on a texture If you have both Composite and Tint Texture checked the compositing operation is completed first and the result is tinted By default CG cuts alpha from 16 and 32 bit texture images To make alpha areas transparent to the background choose Composite Alpha from the Compositing list Composite Red Composite Green Composite None S W BA Composite Alpha Inverted Composite Blue Composite Alpha Using the color selection tools change the face color to W Enable Tile Tint amp Size 2 On the Size amp Attributes tab change the font style to Bold and white change the Height to 265 3 Onthe View tab change the Baseline to 250 and on the Color amp Texture tab click on the texture box 4 lick ona blank slot and then click on Define Find the file Abstrwav jpg on the 6 S CD ROM 5 Click on Open and OK 6 Click on the Enable checkbox A quick way of selecting white as your color is to use the Color Picker to select white from one of the fields on the tab Click on the Tint checkbox cG 135 Using Classic Textures Textures are considered part of the color definition for an object and are saved as part of color or style groups so that items that s
416. plate Otherwise you could update the wrong template 156 GG Update Layouts Based on the Same Template When you modify a template in the registry the changes are not applied to layouts that you have already created with it They only apply to new layouts based on the template Sometimes you may finish an entire Play List based on a single template and then discover that a minor color change or font resizing is required Because you based each layout on the same template you can make the change once and then apply the same change to every layout in the Play List based on that template Make the change to one of the layouts and then select Edit Update Job Templates You can select which Background elements of the template need to be Update Job Templates T Test Styles amp Colors T Draw Styles amp Colors updated rather than updating I Tab Stops everything If you select Approve All Changes CG asks you to confirm the F Approve All Changes Cancel change before updating each layout When you update a Play List this way remember that only layouts based on the same template as the current layout are changed Modify an Existing Template 1 Select Lower Thirds 8 from the Templates registry drop down 7 Switch to the graphic layer and change the Baseline to 383 list on the CG toolbar and click on the first text line in front of and the Left Edge to 55 the word Name 8 Switch to the Size amp Attribut
417. plying a simple emboss filter to the image you can add interest see the image on the bottom Other filters provide additional functionality for Logo Compose For example the Video Cleanup filters allow you to correct frame grabs without cluttering the user interface while the Color Adjustment filters allow you to correct image color The 33 filters that come with Logo Compose are broken into five groups described below See Filters Explained in the CG S online help for full descriptions and demonstrations of each filter Filter Type Function Alpha Adjustment operates solely on the alpha channel Color Adjustment operates solely on the color channel to adjust contrast or color levels Distortion e distorts the image in a variety of ways to create special effects Legalize e identifies and corrects illegal colors for display to video Video Cleanup e removes interlaced fields and corrects for flicker and luminance changes in images grabbed from video When you first switch to the Filter tab the filters list is collapsed and only the filter types are listed To expand the view to individual filters click on the symbol next to each filter type View Brush Select Transform Filter pe Recent inscriber Hf Alpha Adjustment of Color Adjustment if Brightness amp Contrast gt Select Opacity 100 gt w pe ao e m t ao w Recent Filters Lis
418. pop up menus that appear when you click and hold the mouse over a tool button See Working with Tools on page 232 for details a The Attributes tabs provide easy access to all of Logo Compose s options The View tab contains view zoom and preference options The Select tab contains all the selection tool options The Transform tab contains all the options for the transformation tools The Brush tab contains the options for all the alpha and image editing tools The Filter tab contains all filter options View Brush Select Transform Filter Aspect 1 1110 Ejem Reset Speed 75 Tool Alpha Subtract Size 50 lt o Spacing 2 E Style Hard Edge g pacing x E 3 Softness 15 0 m4 opacity 100 a D Paci Angle oo a a T There are three menus unique to Logo Compose the Edit Select and View menus The File gt Import Export menu items are also specific to Logo Compose Logo Compose opens the right click menu when you right click anywhere in the workspace This menu adds another way of accessing the tools on the Tool palette There are many modifiers short cut keys and cursors for Logo Compose Key shortcuts are listed next to the menu items in the Logo Compose menu bar Tool modifiers for the current tool are listed on the status bar See Using Short Cut Keys on page 268 for a list of short cut keys in Logo Compose The Scrapbook lets you transport images
419. position 8 Reposition CG 137 Creating Graphic Objects You can create a variety of basic graphic shapes to use as graphic objects in your layouts These graphic objects are primarily intended to enhance text based layouts but you can use these graphic shapes to create complex layouts entirely in CG You can also create complex background images in external software and load them as a background image or use logos to add complex images to layouts Graphic Object Basics Create Graphic Objects 138 GG Graphic objects appear on separate graphic layers in your layouts See CG Concepts on page 44 and Layers on page 117 for details on layers To switch to a graphic layer click on a graphic object on the Formatting palette or on the Graphic button on the CG Toolbar You can switch between the active text and graphic layers by holding down CTRL when you click on an object in the layout Each graphic object consists of three areas face edge and shadow The face defines the graphic object shape size and general appearance The edge defines the style of outline The shadow defines the type and style of the graphic object shadow Creating graphic objects in CG is a two step process although you can use style and color groups in combination with the graphic tools on the Formatting palette to create graphic objects in one step See Use Style and Color Groups to Control Graphic Objects on the next page fo
420. pped image too much Cropping Advantages Cropping Disadvantages Eliminates the ragged edges seenon Scaling images back to full size may some frame grabs degrade image quality Only saves the relevant area of the Cropped areas are permanently lost image Produces smaller images by eliminating unneeded image areas b an Image Click on the Frame Grab button to casae awe 6 Switch to Sequencer and select Use from the Scrapbook s switch to Frame Grab aa right click menu The grab is added to the Event List and an Watch the video play on your screen and click image thumbnail appears in the Play List on the Grab button to capture an image The zi Rep image is displayed in the Frame Grab window Note that the Set transition and duration information for the image then video stops playing on screen after you perform a grab switch back to Frame Grab Click on the Live Video button to resume ENEE 8 Select the Live Video button to resume the video play the video play SEA Click on the Grab button to capture a new image Select the Grab button to capture another image 10 Click on the Save Grab to File button Choose a file type a Right click on the Scrapbook a location and a name for the grab Click on the Save button to palette and select Add trom the Use save the image and close the dialog Note that when you save pop up menu Thisimageisnow aa a grab to file it is saved as a 24 bit image This means that the temporaril
421. put files meridian ins Play List for Meridian saved in CGS41 folder yacht ins Play List for Yacht saved in CGS41 folder weather ins Play List for Weather saved in CGS41 folder CGS41_files meridian onlinefiles folder to hold rendered images for Meridian Play List 1 vii 2 vii 3 vii 4 vii images from Meridian Play List CGS41_files yacht onlinefiles folder to hold rendered images for Yacht Play List l vii 2 vii 3 Vii images from Yacht Play List 4 vii 5 vil 6 vil 7 vii CGS41_files weather onlinefiles folder to hold rendered images for Weather Play List lvii 2 vii 3 vil images from Weather Play List Avil 5 vil Overview 31 Inscribe ini CG S checks Inscribe ini for information about your video hardware and system configuration This file is located in your main CG S folder Each entry in the INI file belongs in a specific section if you move it CG S will not be able to find the entry and may behave in unexpected ways Editing Inscribe ini In most cases you do not have to edit this file Some of the values are set by the installation program others can be changed in the Preferences dialog If you need to edit the file directly make a copy of the file so that you can always revert to your last working configuration There are several typographic conventions in all INI files Section labels are enclosed in square brackets CG S uses section labels
422. r a bright color to represent video transparency makes it easier to detect the blended areas These patterns do not show up in rendered images or when you do a take They only appear on your computer screen as markers The Gradient options affect both color Top Gradient Value 75 Bottom Gradient Value 25 and transparency gradients The gradient Lock button sets the top and bottom gradients to the same value The gradient values indicate how much of the top or bottom of the element uses a pure color and how much of the element is blended By default the 45 degrees Angle 45 degrees gradient values are set to 0 for top and bottom If you select a top value of 75 and a bottom value of 25 the top and bottom 25 of the element are a pure color and the middle 50 is blended The gradient angle rotates a color or transparency gradient by up to 90 degrees negative or positive Gradients are defined in 1 degree increments You can combine color and transparency gradients and angles The only restriction is that gradient position and angle values are applied to both color and transparency gradients Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 5 Switch to the text layer and click on the Size amp Attributes tab drop down list on the CG toolbar and click on the Background tab Set your color model to HLS and change the color values to H 357 L 27 S 100 Now set the Top transparency value to 75 and the Bottom tr
423. r blur it with the Gaussian Blur filter 2 Clean up frame grabs with the many Video Cleanup filters 2 Open the Brightness amp Contrast filter and adjust these values 3 Open the Color Balance filter and adjust the color sliders until you get the desired shade in the preview window Logo Compose 256 Creating Textures You can create two types of textures in Logo Compose seamless and alpha These textures can be used as backgrounds in CG or in Logo Compose or as textures for text and graphic objects in CG See Defining Classic Textures on page 130 for details on using the textures in CG Seamless Textures Logo Compose Seamless textures are good for all text objects graphic objects and backgrounds in CG These textures are small areas that are tiled when used in CG to create a repeating but seamless pattern Since every texture you use in CG is loaded into memory using seamless textures cuts down on the amount of memory required A good rule for the maximum size of your seamless textures is one half video resolution NTSC 360x243 max Follow these steps to create a seamless texture in Logo Compose For a specific example see the procedure at the bottom of the next page e importan image e use the filters and Image Editing tools to create a pattern e select an area of interest and crop the image e use the Offset tool to offset the edge pixels to the center of the image remove the seam using the Clo
424. r details The first step in creating a graphic object is to use one of the graphic tools to create an object in the CG Editor F Shadow Edge To create a graphic object click on a graphic tool from the Formatting palette See Formatting Graphic Objects on page 140 for details on the available tools In the CG Editor click and drag to create the object A rectangle appears in the CG Editor When you release the mouse button the graphic object is created within the area defined by the box using the default values of the current style or color group Lh ANM You always have to click on a tool before you can draw a graphic object you cant draw multiple objects without selecting a tool each time mo ON WE The second step in creating a graphic object is Gaara a ea eee modifying the shape color size and other details of the object using the options on the Size amp Attributes tab You can cut the face of a graphic object through to the background by selecting Use Background instead of Face Normal in the face section of the Size amp Attributes tab i Normal f Use Background i a bat enh aor et alia a a i TS Modify Graphic Objects Use Style and Color Groups to Control Graphic Objects After creating a graphic object you can modify it by changing the options on the Size amp Attributes tab The Size amp Attributes tab controls the shape of the graphic object its size and position and
425. r in a large batch Open the Font Manager by selecting Tools Font Manager The Font Manager appears in its own dialog When you add a font to the database the Font Manager shows you each character as it is rendered Then the font is added to the database and appears in the IFT Fonts List On most systems it takes only seconds to render a font and add it to the database By default the Font Manager looks for fnt files in the same folder as the CG S program files If you have font files saved in another folder or on a CD select File FNT Files Directory from the Font Manager dialog to change the folder In the Fonts List ift fonts appear first sorted alphabetically TrueType fonts also sorted alphabetically follow the ift fonts If you try to add a new font to the database and the font name duplicates a font already in the database the Font Manager asks you to provide a new name You can either type a new name for the font or click on Cancel to stop adding the font to the database If you are adding a number of fonts as a batch and want to skip just the font with a duplicate name click on Skip instead of Cancel Font names are limited to 35 characters You may want to add a number of fonts at once instead of just one Select all of the fonts to be added from the System Fonts List and then click on the Add to IFT button You only have to convert TrueType fonts to ift fonts if you are creating a common font database for
426. r model is set to HLS 9 Click on the Shadow color chip and click on the Change the color values to H 234 L 56 S 84 Solid Blend cycle box until SOLID appears Now Joi Click on the Solid Blend cycle box until TOP appears change the color values to H 234 L 36 change the L value to 87 and change the Top S 84 gradient value to 90 and the Bottom gradient value to 10 CG 95 96 Working with Classic Color Gradients Color gradients let you add variety and interest to Classic type style text and graphic objects You can use features in CG to create multiple gradients as well as cut through objects to the layout background Gradients Change Gradient Values Change Gradient Angles Color Options GG A gradient is a smooth transition from one color to another color You can use any of the color selection methods to select the top and bottom colors for a gradient For Classic type style text the Solid Blend cycle box controls whether an object element is a solid color or a gradient and always shows you the currently selected color or colors By clicking on the Solid Blend cycle box you can cycle through the SOLID TOP and BOTTOM options TOP and BOTTOM let you set the two gradient colors When you work with gradients remember that the color gradient values also apply to transparency You can combine color and transparency gradients and angles as long as you remember that gradient position and angle values are applie
427. r sequence SE FA 3 Click on the new group header 5 Click on the Online Toggle button to set CG S to online mode In Point l 6 Click on the Preview button to cue up the first GPI trigger event 7 Press the forward trigger button on the GPI trigger when you F 00 00 05 00 00 00 17 15 00 00 12 15 are ready to perform the first take 8 Repeat step 7 for each item in the group Sequencer Configuring for Time Code Use Using time codes with CG S allows you to automate event sequences It also allows you unequaled titling precision for subtitling editing and post production jobs Time codes can be used for any job including creating pre recorded news items TV commercials subtitles and layouts for automated information channels There are five steps involved in using time codes successfully with CG S Set Up a Time Code Reader Set Up a Time Code Source Configure CG S Set In and Out Points Run the Job 200 Sequencer oh ee S Set up the time code reader Set up the time code source Configure CG S to read time codes Set in and out points using the time code source Run the job Attach your time code reader to a serial COM port on the CG S computer If necessary use the dip switches on the time code box to configure it for your system time code type LTC or VITC baud rate frame rate and so on Check the time code reader documentation for these values Connect your time code sour
428. rThirds 5 Lower Thirds 6 LowerThirds 7 LowerThirds 6 LowerThirds 9 Lower Thirds 10 LowerThirds 11 Movie Title LowerThirds 12 3pecial Report Templates contain all of the information and objects in a layout including logos backgrounds News Edit lists and style and color groups Templates are a good way to provide continuity across a project If you define all the logos colors graphic styles and text styles you need for a project in advance and save them as a template you can ensure that all the layouts created with the template use exactly the same colors and formats nem po oo SNe oh me To select a template click on a template name from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar CG loads the template which you can then modify You can also select File gt Registry gt CG Layouts select the name of the template from the list and click on Load An image thumbnail appears for each entry when you move through the listing of layout templates If you have created a layout and then select a template from the registry CG erases your layout and displays the layout of the template Always remember to click on an empty event thumbnail in the Play List before you select a template from the registry To add your own templates to the Templates registry create a layout and make sure that all of the text style and color groups graphic style and color groups and logos are set up correctly This layout becomes a
429. ransition If you want to see the effect of a border change on a layout with a different type of transition you need to switch to Sequencer to select a transition and view the layout You can set the speed and type of reveal on the Effect Settings tab Reveal speed is measured in characters or lines per second A speed value of zero defaults to the fastest possible display Any other value represents the number of characters or lines displayed each second Use the By Character or By Line radio buttons to either reveal text one character at a time or reveal text one line at a time Speed char sec 0 4 By Character Overlay Reveal f By Line Manual Trigger Reveal Options Take The Overlay Reveal checkbox preserves the program channel contents from the previous event Instead of displaying the background for the reveal and then the text on top of the background Overlay Reveal maintains the previous background while displaying the contents of the current layout When you are creating layouts for reveals remember that all of the text lines that have already appeared must be carried over to subsequent reveal layouts Often it is easier to create reveal layouts by designing the final layout and then erasing lines to create previous layouts The Manual Trigger checkbox overrides any timing information set in Sequencer You can use this option to do a take directly from the Effects Settings tab If you enable the Manual Trigger
430. rce material has changed or you have a static delay you can use the Timecode Offset option in Sequencer The offset is applied from the selected layout to the end of the Play List To play back your subtitle Play List go online and either start the timecode source and run the job or use the manual trigger option to perform your takes CG lets you export subtitles and timecodes to a text file You can edit the file and import it back into CG The export feature is also useful when creating multiple versions of a video each in a different language To subtitle a video in different languages import a subtitle file containing subtitles in the original language into CG Set up timecodes for each layout and make sure they are correct by running the Play List in Sequencer You must export the subtitles to a text file The exported file is in timecoded subtitle format Translate the text but do not modify the timecodes in the exported file Import the resulting file into CG as a timecoded subtitle file The timecoded subtitle file that you export can be given to a translator who can translate the subtitles into a different language and insert the translations into the file using any ASCII text editor You can use this technique to replace the text of a translation without having to redo the timecodes for each transition If translation significantly changes the length of your file you will need to alter your timecodes and offset values Tips and
431. red on the layout using the Character Map The BACKSPACE button lets you delete the character to the left of the cursor to correct any mistakes you may make while entering characters You can enter any number of characters by clicking on them and correct any number of mistakes Your system must be properly set up to use double byte fonts such as Japanese Korean and Chinese Your language specific version of Windows NT must support double byte languages and the language toggle must be set to multiple languages You must also have double byte fonts installed the Far East option and you must enable multiple language support in the Inscribe ini file For glyph processed fonts see the Arabic or Hebrew help file in the CG S41 folder You can use any system input method editor IME to enter text characters in double byte fonts or you can turn on the Use Custom IME preference on the Character Generation tab of the Preferences dialog See Setting CG Preferences on page 38 for details Use Character Maps and Keycodes l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 4 Click on OK when you finish If you click on Cancel all the drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is characters you entered are erased between the brackets in the CG Editor 5 Press ENTER to start a new text line and make sure the NumLock Select Edit gt Character Map and move the Character Map key is turned on Now hold down the
432. rent Timecode button on the ES yellow This enables you to view the time codes in CG S 6 Click on the in point button on the Event Editor tab to set the in point for the first event a 14 8 Click on the next event 9 Click on the out point button on the Event Editor to set the out point for the event 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 for the remaining events in the list 11 Rewind or reset your time code source to prepare for playback 12 Switch to the Run tab 13 gt Click on the first event in the Event List 0 00 00 00 Click on Run Job to run the event sequence Run Job Sequencer 201 202 Using the Run Tab The Run tab is only available when you are in online mode It is a useful tool for controlling the take details of your Event List The following topics outline some of the more advanced features on the Run tab Run Ae a ro T Previewy Status Waiting for space bar Time Code 00 00 16 14 _Run Job Preview stop Elapsed Time 16 35 41 16 Take Take E es M Live Update Time Left 00 24 14 19 IV Live Playlist Free RAM 15704 Label Group Run a Sequence Select Events by Number and Label Sequencer To run an entire Event List switch to online mode select the first image in the Event List and click on the Run Job button on the Run tab Sequencer loads the first event into the Preview Channel What happens next depends on th
433. restecasanereanincepsssienes 120 Modi V INS ainiin 74 MOVING reads as 116 119 Moving groups of lines seess 118 Moving to another layer 49 117 Moving with keyboard 117 118 Moving with mouse 116 119 LE a A EE EE T 114 Non tab constrained eee 116 Nudge esiga msia 118 Oa eara A 124 ALE E Eo AAAA ET 124 Outline Ede siini aes 90 106 Path control points ssseesssseseseese 124 Positioning sensurere 116 117 Reces sedino eitr AEE 106 RESI71NG 4 4 nan eamanneeie 78 Resizing with Mouse seeeeee 119 RE WEAP PING ssc alosssteatibertom uaa cane 123 Rotating with mouse eeeee 119 SCKEEI CENIT S roerei se lGuey 121 Sele CLIC iea 71 ScleCline colo arpensa 94 SACO W erra E 102 Shadow direction ssssssessessessesssssees 89 Shadow SIZE civiele 88 SCCM aan 102 112 Soft shadow value sessesssssseseseseess 89 Special characte Sinees scout 82 Spline control points sssssesesese 124 SEVIE SOUP acs house tienen 72 314 Index Text continued TADS P aien AE 122 123 Tab constrained a dssstesdounodsenieivanes 116 Trans PATCH CY onnen 98 Vertical processine vias wesssicascavvesons 125 WOLG W FAD eoria 123 W Tap pine casssiasoiarsaas magenta 46 Tex ALE DUES St cesavesctnsavsanaspueneatvens 76 150 lege eee epee R ENN E error trae 76 Pelotan a 76 Edine E 76 FON kaensonun aae 76 Foreground See Face essere 76 Hegh iornionan ea a 76 TIO E E E E 76 Mal
434. ributes There are two Sequencer tabs the Event Editor tab and the Run tab The Event Editor tab lets you edit your event list both on and offline This includes changing trigger types and transitions setting in and out points and changing the render location The Run tab is important for sending your Sequencer events to video and monitoring the details of the take You can only access the Run tab when you are in online mode Event Editor Run 02001 f Onilley MeNoan Waterloo Local RAM i Local Disk Frames feo Size ja 3 Wait 150 Remote AA 00 00 17 20 a 00 00 24 20 0000 07 00 T 2 Program Se Et 0000000 l Trigger Timeo 8 E Logo The Play List is a palette that contains thumbnails of the events in the Event List If the event is a roll or crawl the thumbnail shows the first page or frame of the event The Play List displays either the event number or the rendered filename for every event in the list By default CG S displays the event number You can display the rendered filename by checking the Show Filename in Job Strip box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog See Using the Play List on page 12 for details Event Number Rendered File Name The Program Preview palette displays a ree a gram thumbnail of the contents of each Program and Preview Channel If you have a multiple board system you can stretch the palette to see all of yo
435. rmat radio button f Subtitle Format Text Formatted Text Plain The timecodes in Sequencer are unchanged but the text is different CG 171 Playing Subtitle Files Versioning and Troubleshooting Before you play back a series of subtitles you need to make some changes to the Sequencer settings If you are doing versioning you need additional information on exporting modifying and reimporting subtitle files This section also includes some troubleshooting tips Set Subtitle Entries to Remote Play Back Imported Subtitles Versioning 172 G After you have imported your subtitle file into CG you should switch to Sequencer and set the render location of all of your entries to Remote Remote renders the layouts directly to memory at run time instead of writing them to disk when you go online and saves you time However if you have sections with complex formatting or that need extremely fast display time you should set these entries to Local Disk The render location options are located on the Event Editor tab in Sequencer To change event options select your events and then click on one of the options Event Editor Ruri cut focone Bighars vii HB toca nam local DISK kev Frames jo Size 1 A wati A remote 00 00 00 00 4 ioon 4 0000 00 00 fr 2 Program 2 o 00 00 00 i Trigger Timed z a Logo If you need to adjust the timing of your subtitle file because your sou
436. rmat which cannot be re imported Sequence text files contain all of the information from the Event List including the time of each event the name of each file the type of transition etc These files are generally used as log files for reporting purposes You can import and export subtitle files in both text and EBU N19 format See Import Subtitle Files on page 170 for details on importing and exporting subtitle files Import and Export Layouts Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 5 Select File Export Export ICG File and save the file as drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the graphic Layout icg layer 6 Click on an empty slot on the Play List and select Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and select Rectangle from File gt mport mport Layout the Graphic Type drop down list 7 Select Layout sly and click on the rectangle and change the Select n Vertical value to 300 U a 8 Click on an empty slot on the Play List and select Se Sae Ows File Import lImport ICG File as Layout sly be 9 a ies on click on the rectangle and change the s ertical value to 300 Select a EESE File Export m a 10 Switch to the Background tab and click on the Image box on Export Image Pint Pevew cpt the Background fab Print z 7 and select ees AEE pda 11 Select Layout bmp as your background image and click on OK Bitmap as your 3 Export OG Fie You cannot select the recta
437. rogram Inscriber uses a graphical user interface GUI to provide a picture oriented way of interacting with the program Interlaced Fields A system of video scanning where an image is split into odd and even numbered lines which are transmitted as two separate fields slightly offset in time All video signals contain interlaced fields and any image captured from video flickers because of the time offset See also Field and Video Cleanup Filters Interpolate Field Filters In CG Logo Compose and Frame Grab Video cleanup filters that compute new data for even or odd numbered scan lines based on the scan lines directly above and below Invert Color Filter In Logo Compose A color adjustment filter that inverts the value of each component HSV RGB or HLS of the colors in your images The new values are equal to the full scale value of each component minus the original value Invert Key Filter In Logo Compose An alpha adjustment filter that reverses the opaque and transparent areas of your image For example if an area is 80 opaque and 20 transparent it becomes 20 opaque 80 transparent Ittest exe A program provided with CG S that allows you to use the Inscribe ini settings to verify whether CG S should be seeing the time codes Glossary Job The entire ins file including all transition and effect events trigger and timing information The current job is always displayed in the Play List or job
438. rol over your work If you painstakingly create a selection you know you are going to need later you can use the File Import Export menu options to export the selection and import it again when you need it See the tables above for Import Export menu option descriptions or Understanding Selections on page 240 for details Use Logo Compose Files in Other Modules You can import Logo Compose files into other CG S modules You do not have to save your files as bitmaps to use them in CG or FX since when you import Logo Compose files into other modules they are automatically imported as bitmaps You can also use the Scrapbook to move Logo Compose images to other CG S modules This lets you use your images without saving them as separate files as the images are saved in your ins file instead However this method uses a lot more memory Change Image and You can change the image or canvas size by selecting oer te Cawer Ges Canvas Size Edit Image and Canvas Size Resizing the image scales current Size the image while resizing the canvas crops or adds canvas 2 space without scaling the image Sizing Options To resize an image enter the new image size in pixels wiath 720 Height 466 in the Width and Height fields and click on the Sizing Image toggle button To resize the canvas enter the new canvas size in pixels in the Width and Height fields Select one of the nine positioning buttons to select where the image is Re
439. roli 53 Ol SHAG OW cveieners wearadwcceseesstleadocss 76 89 Disabling Word Wrap sseesceeeeeees 49 Displayed alpha channel 0 238 Display icipated 80 Colors in SEQUeNICele lt sxctectzanctctees 214 Pont TICES ear E 80 FORENAME ainia 80 EEEE a A E T 204 Dissolve Transition sssesssssssereseese 190 DiSsOl eSaieGsiewuseantcetoniastens 188 190 Distortion Filters scsi wisvesesceaude 254 Dither scam cmpnumnnr eet 28 Dodge tool crionna 264 DOS 1eXMiitecnsosersah acs 128 129 Double beveled edge ee eeeeeeeeee 105 Donble byte tonte kiriata 83 ETLER 1 EE ERE EATE 153 Dras Grdo neninn a Nnn 38 Dras ing ssrin a 116 FEXCOD CECS erara 116 Drop Shad OW ssines saves eanerantentetoneuniones 88 Duotone simulating 229 255 Diralolkssdespr ern 189 Cutting transitions sesseseessssssssssee 192 Pake nunaa a 192 Setting from Speed eeeeeeeseee 193 Trimming clips sassiscsicctenacesteastantane 206 E EBU subtitle format 168 173 OSG EEEE E 76 138 142 A E E EE ard ENET 90 Color MID ae n EA 94 DOUDE astinira nlm A 105 Edge amp Sheeni OSPIE cicccventssvavevaes 112 Edge Over Facecaanunarancccnneis 105 EMDOSSEG hoiii aaea 9 Patua err crrnrrn erate 142 GON cenena sceateruecilen caidas 90 Graphic objects sssssessessse 70 142 Knockout to background 144 Aane E A E EE 142 OM IO ROSen e 152 Outinen 90 Outined onyen 144 Round seana 142 Selectine COLT s
440. ronn 263 DEAK E vas E A covsuad mueneauoaces 47 Bringing objects to front 145 Moving objects in seeseeseeeeeees 149 Sending objects to back 145 Stacking graphic objects eseee 149 Stanis Dafis auen 226 SUL AV OUL A E AT 48 SONES aeaa einen nn anand 50 SASEN S eies ka e aa 50 Still settings Changing eee 50 SOPP NE unne e eRe eter 247 TODS A E T O 195 Take aeranta a 195 Transtormaions ararasan 247 Storm warning craWl sssessessessesseesee 48 Sp A REE 233 Prasina ainn 232 233 Style STOUD rn Raa Todd APPIN unana etinsss 72 Assigning to News Edit tables 162 CTATOUAG aain 73 74 Style group continued COP VII Sait cau slowness U 4 Formatting palettes imssiwsaneeins 4 Freeform Sty l siscatssinsaiveenenas 45 73 74 Graphic objects 00 seeeeeeeeeees 72 139 TOS 08 E E EET 153 Ove ON nT ENA 45 Rightehek mentretant 74 IE a E E E E es estatas 41 72 StVIESTOUPS e eiiiai tah 34 70 Sty lesita Dei tinenaaceate ss 41 72 139 SUDUTIES earan nied 168 173 ASCI TCR E T 173 Blank layouts ssssessessessesssssessesesses 171 Converting languages ssssesese 172 Creating blank layouts 168 Creating templates iss susisseenceneee 170 EPU TO makaa 168 173 EXPONE seniii en 37 168 172 PUG Dy pesei 168 Formatting codes sicpssadurssnteutoneioses 173 Graphics in templates incase 170 Mpo sunnan ann 37 168 Importing text files 169 170 Playing essare 172 Playing imported irssi 172 Sett
441. rop down list Now switch to Layer 4 Type a line of text and press the ENTER key on the number pad Your text is not revealed Move your text to Layer 5 and press the ENTER Key on the number pad CG 49 50 Changing Still and Reveal Settings Still and Reveal layout settings control some of the aspects that determine how your layouts are displayed online such as speed and borders The settings differ depending on your layout type You can change settings by clicking on the Effect Settings tab The settings options for the selected layout type are displayed on the tab Still Settings Border Values CG Use the Border fields on the Effect Settings tab to clip the image to a smaller area of the frame buffer Any layout that you take to video appears only within the area defined by the border percentages You can also use the Take button on this tab to take the current layout to video View Size amp Attributes Color amp Texture Styles Logos Background Mews Edit Effect Settings Left Border 0 Right Border 100 Top Border 0 Bottom Border 100 E Show Markers Reset to Defaults Take Some frame buffers do not use border settings This section is not relevant to these types of frame buffers The graphic to the right shows vee i 0 you how the frame buffer borders i C aA are measured The top of the 0 frame buffer is 0 the bottom of 10 the frame buffer is 100 the left edge of th
442. rounds The video Background feed is always on the bottom and the color layer is always on the top with the image layer in between Layout backgrounds usually start out video transparent but you can use images or color backgrounds to block the video signal To set a CG background select Color to insert a color background such as a gradient File to insert a file or Over to insert an overlay located on the left hand side of the Background tab Overlay backgrounds are an option that can be added to any background type An overlay preserves the background of the previous layout in the Play List The CG layers of the current layout are displayed on top of the previous background and the background of the current layout is ignored In CG backgrounds usually begin with a video transparent background Video transparent means that your text and graphic objects appear on top of the incoming video signal when you do a take of your layout Video transparent areas are marked by a fill Ne ON NIEDA pattern In the example to the right all of the areas filled with the grey checkered pattern are transparent when the layout is taken to video If you don t like the default fill pattern you can select a different fill pattern from the General tab on the File Preferences dialog This pattern is not included in the final rendered image it simply shows you where your live General Sequencer Cache character Generator M HOR
443. rtual 3D space e includes filters and settings to change the way text or objects look over time FX is only enabled if you have purchased the Xtreme plug in option for CG S Logo e transforms any bitmap image into an Inscriber format logo Compose e offers logo editing tools that can create color or monochrome logos and can save logos as 32 bit images that contain alpha information CG S offers several ways to set field values in all modules You can use the standard Windows methods of clicking on the Up Down arrows next to the fields or type a value directly into the field Click in the field and drag the mouse up and down to quickly change the value You can also use this additional option click on the field and drag up or down to increase or decrease the value f a Walt 10 l Click on the up and down arrows To reset a field value to the default double click on to change the value one unit at a time the field Overview 11 12 Using the Play List The Play List palette contains image thumbnails of all the events in a job The Play List provides a quick interface for editing your event sequences allowing you to quickly add move copy and replace events in your current job You can also take images to video directly from the Play List The Play List palette is integrated with every CG S module CG Sequencer Frame Grab and Logo Compose You can perform all of the tasks listed here in any of the CG S modules
444. s 76 85 Mei AEG aretes r aea rE 154 157 Color Transparency and Gradients 72 99 NewS Edib ac sieve rcuanncy antnaneore ENNES 158 167 MOSAICS coon stg Hunts ric ohaterd tas ae seeds yeaa ters 130 137 SUDUICS raaa aere 168 173 CG Interface Overview CG is a full featured character generator that lets you create layouts for stills rolls crawls and reveals for display to video It offers extensive typographic and color controls for design flexibility producing text characters that are always fully anti aliased and of broadcast quality There are seven main CG components the CG Editor the Attributes tabs the Formatting palette the CG toolbar the Play List the Scrapbook and the right click menu Switch to CG CG Editor CG Toolbar Attributes Tabs Formatting Palette 34 CG To switch to the CG module click on the CG button located on the CG S toolbar Layouts are created in the CG Editor Text and graphic tools let you enter lines of text and create graphic objects to use as background for your text The CG Editor shows you what your layouts look like as you work You can use several different techniques to speed up your work in the CG Editor See Speeding Up Your Work on page 42 for details The options on the CG toolbar let you select templates and layout types change layout settings switch between text and graphic layers and move both the text insertion point and lines of text 13 Lo
445. s and displays the selected edge Clear the Visible layer checkbox to remove the selected edge W Visible layer The Inside Edge checkbox places the innermost edge on top of the face increasing the size of the first visible edge and decreasing the face size Click the Inside Edge checkbox to transform the first visible edge into an Inside Edge Clear the Inside Depth Shadow and Sheen Options Edge checkbox to reverse the effect The graphic below shows you the effect of applying the Inside Edge set depth options Inside Edge Not Applied Inside Edge Applied Depth adds an extruded edge to the combined face and edge Using Edge you can Shadows are soft offset highlights of the side of an object opposite an imaginary light source they follow the shape of the entire object On Shadow you can set shadow options You can also set sheen highlight effects to the text face to each of the ten visible edges individually or to all ten edges together To set individual sheen values adjust sheen color and size and then adjust sheen offset and angle values for each of the ten edges See Setting Depth Shadow and Sheen on page 102 for details Create Text with Ten Edges l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is between the brackets in the CG Editor Type the following 10 Ed Use the Move tool to center the line of text a
446. s is a threaded process so you may not always see instant updates to the output Selecting this option adds significantly to the processor demands CG makes The Text Risetime Filter lets you apply a gaussian blur filter to compensate for abrupt luminance changes in your layouts The values affect the size of the blended area The filtering is scaled to appropriate values depending on the character size You can adjust the default values to increase or decrease the blur All values are normalized so 5 40 5 is the same as 1 8 1 The first and last values are averaged so that 20 50 30 is the same as 25 50 25 Word Wrap toggles the initial word wrap setting When this option is selected all layouts have Word Wrap turned on by default You can reset this setting using Element Constrain Word Wrap Locked Lines toggles the default Locked Lines setting When this option is selected all layouts have Locked Lines turned on by default You can override this setting using Element Constrain Locked Lines Drag Grid toggles the default grid alignment setting for graphic objects When this option is selected all layouts have Drag Grid turned on by default and all layout elements snap to the grid See Use the Grid on page 146 for details Warn Layout Changes toggles a warning message when you choose a new template If you select this option CG reminds you that choosing a new template deletes the current layout and lets you copy text c
447. s made slowing down do a take allowing for quick event editing editing Edit Events Online You can perform most event editing functions online with a few limitations When you make editing changes in online mode events are re rendered right away to reflect the changes This can slow down editing speed considerably If you change the render location while online Sequencer won t automatically update the rendered file You must go offline and then back online to force Sequencer to re render the image in the proper location Similarly when you add an event to the Event List while you are online Sequencer treats the event as a remote event an event that is not saved on your local disk space or RAM but in a remote location such as a network drive The remote event is not rendered until you try to setup or run it If you want to render the new event to RAM or to disk you must go offline and then back online Going online the second time is faster than moving online initially because events that are already rendered do not have to be re rendered See Render Location and Rendered Images on page 204 for details To take the entire sequence from the beginning select the Play Direct button If CG S is offline it automatically goes online renders the images to file and plays back the events CG S stays in online mode once it has finished the take Sequencer Take Once you have set up your Event List there are several ways of sending your j
448. s tab and select style group 19 for AM and PM to appear in 3 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab change the Edging size to 11 and change the vertical size to 100 and the Horizontal size 6 Check the AM PM checkbox from the drop down lists Switch to the Styles tab and select style group 14 JJ to 375 4 Switch to the View tab and change the Baseline to 15 and the 8 Switch to the View tab and change the Baseline to 45 and the Left edge to 20 Lett edge to 100 5 Switch to the Effect Settings tab and select Clock from the 9 Press the ENTER key on the number pad to take the clock to Layout Type drop down list video Press ESC to stop the take CG 58 Understanding the HSV Color Model In CG you can use one of three color models HSV RGB or HLS to select colors You do not have to fully understand the color models in order to select colors With a bit of practice you can find a color using any of the color definition systems The three color models used in CG provide different approaches to defining colors The RGB model describes colors in terms of the intensity of the red green and blue components in the video signal The HSV model describes colors in artist s terms of tint shade and tone The HLS model describes colors in terms of hue lightness or brightness and saturation All of these models are equally valid and they all describe the full set of colors available for NTSC or PAL encoding You
449. s to video represented here by the transparency checkerboard pattern When you uncheck the Mix Through to Key checkbox transparency cuts to any existing background The right graphic below shows you how the transparency cuts to the background pattern not to video AA The Mix Through to Key checkbox affects any element with transparency When beveling text elements you can adjust the proportion of the two colors and transparency values When you apply a bevel to an element by selecting Bevel from the Color Options drop down list angle adjusts the how much of one color and transparency is used in relation to the other color and transparency All other sheen highlight options are unavailable The higher the angle value the more the inside bevel color and transparency is used to create the bevel effect The lower the angle value the more the outside bevel color is used The graphic below shows you how the color and transparency ratio changes as you adjust angle Offset 25 Offset 0 Offset 25 Bevel and You can apply transparency values for each bevel Transparency color by setting the Trans field See Transparency on page 69 for details on applying transparency values The graphic to the right shows you the effect of beveling with one color and one transparency value Text elements with transparency display the alpha channel video signal if the Mix Through to Key checkbox is selected and display the existing background
450. see aarne 141 COD VIN AA E EE 144 Crean ronnan a onna 138 Creating COPIES ci saarsineertineigearevacess 144 CUE ais ca esas ve tannins secumnwuann 144 Dragging to other layers 0 147 Edp ennta iinn 70 142 TE A EEA E E T 70 Foreground See Face sssssessssses 70 Format Samples ciissesccscaveesentuaass 40 72 FOTMIAUING serctareacinbtemaveusiis 74 140 Grab hanidleswscesccisivedechinmestarcn 141 Grade ATS sirere aa 148 Knockout to background 97 138 144 LAV t eT E EAE 148 149 Eeto rob ECO ai tunmnvasncemntannn 141 ETEO E I E E E 150 Modifying ss ssseseesssesee 74 138 139 Nude NE eostin ET 146 Outlined only edge s ssssesseesesesse 144 OVEIMEW suse itatiintatemrmutianmsesan 46 PAS CHIC ranr 144 POSITIONING S saseciceccsoscnnscaasaasainnix 146 RESINE an a 146 SClECUING sisson selena wa anel 144 306 Index Graphic objects continued Scleclin COlOT aanne 94 SIAC OW goreti n 70 142 StACKIIG AE S 47 149 SOE TOUP nuaa 139 LOOS erara E 40 TANS PAabeN Cy vsicsaivsinsstsesasracens 98 148 TRY DES eraen 140 Graphie PANGS vers ccs tarine 47 Graphic 1001S sccnslnuntestaaies aes 138 Gp NCS eee 138 Precfor Min sonaa 246 MOVING rannme dena 246 ROUNE ssisuinetacssiieedaitoubinlsante anes 246 SCALING sic code cneveroxtnnvacsecameageenune 246 SKEWING sscuner cevashachseaeunyiupenautcrenes 246 Tablet support sdin 233 Transforming disisian aiia 246 Green channels aenor 260 Ea P E E E E accor 146 OPUONG oiao
451. see the kind of effects you can achieve with them The Flip and Monochrome filters usually provide the most noticeable effects Click on Grab to capture a new image When the Filter checkbox is selected the filters are automatically applied to the new grab Fe Frame Grab 221 222 Setting Up Frame Grab and Saving Files Set Up Multiple Board Systems Initialize Board Frame Grab As long as your frame buffer is configured correctly CG S automatically does all the setup required for a frame grab as soon as you switch to the Frame Grab module All you have to do is start the input feed Frame Grab requires an encoder on the frame buffer board It does not work on the VMAXX 10 board On other systems frame grabs are saved as 16 or 32 bit image files but transparency is lost When you switch to Frame Grab CG S sets your frame buffer to video passthrough so that you can see the incoming signal on your video monitor If you have trouble check the following items Problem Possible Solutions No Input Signal Check the cable connections and the setup options in your frame buffer configuration software Some frame buffers fail to switch to video passthrough if you select the wrong input type in the configuration software Scrambled Signal Check that the horizontal and vertical frame buffer resolutions match the input signal resolution Check these values on the General Preferences tab No Sync Check your sync input source
452. select a new trigger for the group Sequencer 187 188 Creating Transition Events Transition events are created in Sequencer by adding a transition to an image When you add an event to the Play List Sequencer automatically assigns the default Cut transition You can change the transition type and other event characteristics on the Event Editor tab Support for various transitions depends on your frame buffer hardware Event Editor MM Local RAM Local DISK EDE a e E Remote 1 Program Guest 2 s Mother 4 Trigger What are A transition changes the way an image moves onto the screen CG S offers six Transitions different types of transitions cut wipe tile louvre dissolve and push Cuts display the entire image instantly Wipes gradually reveal the new image in a specific pattern Tiles reveal the new image one square at a time Louvres divide the image into strips and wipe on all strips at the same time Dissolves fade from one image to the next Pushes move the new image on and the old image off in a specific direction See Selecting a Transition Type and Direction on page 190 for details Not all frame buffers support all transitions Transition Transitions add to the visual presentation of the image online A complete Parameters transition definition has four components type direction size and duration Not all transitions use all the components so any extra information is ignored
453. set the H value to 90 the L value to 62 and the S value to 18 to 0 4 Select Offset trom the shadow style drop down list and change 8 Click on the FACE color chip Set the H value to 90 the L value the shadow direction so that the graphic object looks like this BLASS LALAELALPLAILPLOLEOLELPOLLELELELELELELELEALAEAL AS z y E or to 0 and the S value to 0 When the edge color is at a light or dark color extreme the bevel is extremely faint and the edge looks like a Normal edge instead of a beveled edge CG 143 Manipulating Graphic Objects Once you have created a graphic object you can use advanced CG options to change its size shape and position You can use the Use Background radio button and the Outlined Only checkbox options on the Size amp Attributes tab to create complex combinations of graphic objects and video Use Background Option Outlined Only Option Select Cut Copy and Paste Graphic Objects Create Copies of Graphic Objects 144 CG A Background is a graphic object selection The Use Background radio button cuts through any underlying graphic objects to the layout background If you have a video background the video is Normal Background Outlined Only visible in the face area of the graphic object If you have a color or image background the color or image is visible in the face area of the graphic object You can access the Normal and Use Background options on the Attributes gt
454. setting from their manufacturer that determines whether or not the font can legally be saved in the packed job file If the font has installable or editable embedding it can be saved in the packed job file and worked with on another computer If the font has print amp preview embedding or restricted licence embedding it cannot be saved in the packed job file If a font cannot be saved CG S displays an error message telling you which fonts have not been saved If the font is already installed on the computer you are moving the packed job to you can still access the font and edit your layout Overview 19 20 Importing Referenced Clips and Animations You can import clips and animations directly into the Play List in Sequencer and CG Imported clips and animations can be trimmed in CG S but they cannot be changed in any other way Use an Animation as an Event Create Animations using VIA Builder Overview You can add an File animation to the Hew Ctrl Play List but you a Oper Chrl 0 cannot modify the aes Chie animation in any Semen way using standard lille CG Registry Click on an empty Import Import Layout slot in the Play List Export gt Import Text File select File Import News Edit Table Page Setup tre Import Import Import EBL Subtitle File Print Preview Animation and sek Import ICG File then select your TALA Import Animation animation file The Preferences Import Clip
455. size Image located on the new canvas For example the Top Left button aligns the top left corner of the image with the E MO top left corner of the canvas Experiment with Import Export Options l Select File lImport Image and select the junebug bmp file in the CGS41 Paint Examples folder Select File gt Import Export Import Selection and import the bug_selection bmp file from the CGs41 Paint Examples folder Click on OK in the Select Channel dialog The selection marquee appears in the Logo Compose workspace Switch to the Brush tab and set the Opacity to 50 Select the Alpha Fill tool trom the Tool palette and Py click in the selection to fill it Select File mport Export Import Image as Transformation and select the bug_contents Igo file from the Examples folder Use the Move Rotate Scale and Freeform tools to position and size the transformation Press CTRL D deselect and apply the transformation Select File gt Import Export Export Image to save the image under a new name Select Edit lmage and Canvas Size and reduce the canvas size The image is cropped to fit the new canvas Select File Import Export lmage Sized to Fit and select junebug bmp The image now fits the smaller canvas Logo Compose 231 Working with Tools Logo Compose uses five types of tools general transformation selection alpha and image editing tools Most of the alpha and image editing tools are brush
456. soceoscues 246 248 using Scrapbook vives tases nateanensinans 227 WICW a Disen 258 Work piti esonora iae 226 LOBOS an wusateaunmemeatente 136 RESIZING aana a 236 SCALING E A 236 Umem CG eingi a 236 LOGOS TAD crac ena A 150 LOOPING dinae a 194 Ammalon SAn N 194 R N I E E A 203 Louvre Transition ccccccsesesseeeeees 190 LOUVIES is eae hiaence eens 188 190 Lowercase letters cccseeesessssseseeeees 79 Liman iena nn 264 Abrupt changes in ssessssseseesessessese 38 Luminance Add tool cccceeeseeeeeees 264 Luminance Subtract tool 250 264 Luminance Wand tool cccceeeeeeeees 242 M Macintosh compatibility eee 19 Macintosh files Exporting 19 Manual tristet ausirian 51 196 MiP annain ee 82 Chara eb ssanstscertccoeetnccnirciecentecctces 82 LOS E E E 150 TEE o savaeaeeas 130 Mapp Per 82 CHaraGlers ra 82 OSS TEE E ET A E EE 150 Terre E EE 134 Matke bS aa a 120 Modi ert a RA 121 OWELVICW aiccstdcicnasstinteunasavaneetaocen 120 YC SON ENA OANA T 121 Margee sensin 228 240 see also Selections cccseeeeeeeees 240 Masking images sssssssesssessesseseesesses 228 MASKS wisstistcsSensduswuntiotestereinenacs 228 260 Match Constrain Transparency 98 Match Gradient Values See Lock Match Transparency Values See Lock Matei V alies air 99 Mattei 228 260 Memory alpha sisasisrnsies 237 238 MeS EE 71 NCG siiin a sieatsqateee 71 i Frame GraDurisirnssisiiak
457. ssessssssssse 205 Bevel T E ye 66 69 96 98 Gradient ccceeeeseecccceeeeeeees 66 96 Trans pateh ocana aa 69 98 LOCKE eS anesson aa 118 Logging online activity 213 ES E AERE E EE 140 150 153 Toloraia tna 152 IGD IMI ES iia 153 Te Dit LIM AD E E E 153 32b IMa eSom 152 Adding to layouts sessessessessssseesee 151 as graphic object ssssseessesssssssesses 151 AS LEK EE tener 151 Cleans Ups caancaricanseerensenaek 228 Colotes er 153 COlOT oron ia aaeeea 153 EQ 1 AET E A E ueeiet 152 PIE Pennonen aonana 152 Formatting srine ies 152 in double byte fonts csivevsansnvernones 153 in glyph processed fonts 153 in layont saiia as 150 It NEWS Editorii 162 Logo Compose in CG ee eeeeeeee 237 MaD ene eer N 150 Monochrome scanningen 153 Overview ieaiasrectoie 46 141 150 SACO WS iien ae 152 SE Grou niea i 153 Vector based ocpunsahirastescenetennvantauns 237 Logo Cleanup a an aa 236 Logo COMPOSE icsse 225 269 AL IDULES LADS isesi 22 CONCEPIRE 228 Git Oia Misiineiriucdhsenaustnalieliabindins 226 Pile4Or Mat crststeosiatetamrutienciaen 230 Filter iDnes 254 mages il CG oiiaaie 237 MCI US nna 227 Modil erSrscoo niea ivan anaeessiesent 226 308 Index Logo Compose continued OVENI EW aai 226 SELECELAD c vosonscnsncdeestoncuidadenedsn tein 244 SHO eUi key aranin 227 268 SIS DaT arrra aa 226 TASKS A A EE AAAA 228 Tool palete cicis D214 252 GGG ae vasstenceetiod 232 Transform ta welecesai
458. standards ASCII Keycodes Access ASCII Characters The Character Map GG ASCII keycodes are a standard method for identifying characters within ASCII fonts Each character is identified with a three digit number from 000 to 255 Each character usually has the same number in every font which means that the ASCII code for the letter a is probably the same in each font When you switch fonts in any application the characters from the original font are replaced by the characters with the same ASCII keycodes in the new font You may want to use characters not available from the keyboard but present in the ASCII character set such as uppercase and lowercase accented letters extra punctuation marks mathematical symbols or copyright and other symbols CG provides three ways for you to access ASCII characters The CG Character Map inserts single ASCII characters ASCII keycodes insert ASCII characters using the ALT key and the number pad The Windows Character Map inserts long strings of ASCII characters Method How to Use CG e select Edit gt Character Map and click on a character to insert it Character in the current text line Map ASCII e hold down the ALT key use the number pad to type 0 plus the Keycodes three digit ASCII keycode for the character and release the ALT key to insert the character in the current text line Windows select the Windows Character Map from the Start menu Character Accessories folder Map
459. t Apply Filters Filter Opacity Undo a Filter The Filters list contains two main headings Inscriber and Recent While all of the filters are listed under Inscriber Recent contains a list of the last ten filters used This gives you quick access to your most frequently used filters without having to navigate through the Inscriber list The first step in applying a filter is to select it from the Filters list You can either double click on the filter name or click on the Select button to apply the filter Some filters bring up a dialog with options for you to select others do not If a filter dialog is launched Logo Compose provides a thumbnail preview of the filtered image Before applying a filter you can set the opacity you want the filter to be applied at in the Opacity field on the Filter tab This lets you create more subtle effects than applying a filter at 100 opacity For example if you want to desaturate an image set Opacity to 10 and apply a monochrome filter If you don t like the effect of a filter after you ve applied it you can always undo it The Undo command is especially important when you are work with the Mark NTSC Illegal Colors and Mark PAL Illegal Colors filters These filters identify illegal areas of your image by changing them to a specified color Since you probably don t want to keep the new color once you ve identified illegal areas of your image you will want to use the Edit Undo command or CTRL Z shor
460. t They can be created in CG or in any text editor Table Basics Import News Edit Tables into CG 160 CG To use News Edit you need to create and import a News Edit table into the News Edit registry News Edit tables are text files containing lists of commonly used text lines that you can prepare in a text editor and import into CG You can use as many different News Edit tables as you want but each one must be prepared and imported separately A common use for News Edit tables would be modifying layouts for a call in show where you me need to change the city name for each caller You can prepare a city name table in advance with 9Chicago I1l f Ga9Washington DC likely city names If you need a name from another agyancouver BC city it can be typed into the layout directly and then added to the city name table or discarded when it has been used News Edit tables can be created in any text editor Each entry in the table should be on a separate line in the text editor Entries can consist of names Mike Smith places Halifax Nova Scotia or other text Weather Advisory You can use any available alphanumeric character although there are a few special formatting character combinations that you should note See Formatting News Edit Tables on page 162 for details on special formatting character combinations The formatting combinations let you insert logos and tabs apply style and color groups or add com
461. t Editor tab and press the TAB key on the main keyboard to set the value You can also set the value by clicking away from the field 3 Click on the Online Toggle button to put Sequencer in online mode then switch to the Run tab Press the Take button to do a take of the roll Press the ESC key on the keyboard to exit the roll Click on the Run Job button to run the Run Job sequence from the beginning Press the SPACEBAR on the keyboard to pause the roll Press the SPACEBAR again to resume the roll Press the ESC key on the keyboard to exit the roll This time Sequencer waits until the out point for the roll is reached then runs the crawl When you are running a job the ESC key affects only the current event To stop the entire job you need to press the ESC key twice in quick succession stop Run the job again this time clicking on the Stop button to stop the job CG S finishes playing the current event before stopping playback Sequencer 195 196 Understanding Trigger Types Trigger types control how you run events online and are set on a group by group basis not by event Change the trigger type from the Trigger Type drop down list on the Event Editor tab or right click on the current trigger type on the group header in the Event List Multiple Trigger Types The Manual and GPI Trigger Types The Timed Type Sequencer Since trigger types are set on a group basis you have to create multiple
462. t Group Header A new group header is inserted above the selected event Notice the changes in the Event List after you add the new group header The event numbers on the Event List are updated to i Group Number display which group each event belongs to first two digits and its position within that group last two 01002 digts 01002 The default trigger type Timed is automatically assigned to each new group Event Number The group in point displays the start time for the first event in the group The group out point displays the end time for the last event in the group The Group Total Duration displays the time it takes for all the events in the group to run Time is measured in hours minutes seconds frames Once you have set all the options for your Event List switch to online mode ia by clicking on the Online Toggle button on the CG S toolbar Switching to online mode automatically renders all the events in your Event List so you can quickly output your job to video To take only the selected event click on the Take button on the Run te caine f Aun Job tab To run the entire Event List click on the first event in the list a then click on the Run Job button on the Run tab To stop the job click on the Stop button on the Run tab Sequencer 179 180 Groups and Events There are two primary Sequencer elements events and groups Events are the image files that you send to video while groups apply
463. t allow you to update the changes Set In and Out Points To set in and out points type the target times in the In Point and Out Point fields on the Event Editor tab You can also set the in and out points from the time code signal Start the signal and turn on the display When the time code value reaches the target time click on the Set In Point or Set Out Point button to insert the time code See Configuring for Time Code Use on page 200 for details on time codes Frames 200 Size fi Swat fo O0 00 04 20 a foo 00 11 10 a 00 00 06 20 lt Total Event In Point Duration Set In Point peg om Timed if Out Point Current Time Code Start Reading Set Out Point Speed Speed designates the number of scan lines an event or transition moves between fields A single frame is divided into two fields One field contains even numbered scan lines and the other field contains the odd numbered scan lines The two fields are alternately displayed on your video monitor in an interlaced display There are two places to change transition speed In CG use the Roll or Crawl Settings dialog In Sequencer click on the Frames button on the Event Editor tab to open the Set Duration from Speed dialog Not all hardware supports smooth rolls or crawls at every speed Larger values may result in jumpy effects You can set Speed values in decimal units but some effects work better with an integer speed For example if you set a transitio
464. t and Unselected Text items refer to selected and unselected objects in the Event List The Selected Postage Border and Unselected Postage Border list items refer to the selected and unselected events in the Play List Use the Text color swatches to select the colors for the Event List text Use the Background color swatches to select the colors for all the backgrounds You can reset any or all of the colors to the CG S default colors by clicking on the Reset or Reset All button When selected the Default to Group Headers checkbox tells Sequencer to insert a group header for every new event or group of events added to the Event List If this option is not selected all the events are added to a single default group Groups help organize long event sequences into chunks that can be easily displayed They are also used for Event Lists that use multiple trigger types See Understanding Trigger Types on page 196 for details Non Keyed Cuts Group Trigger Type The Default to Non Keyed Cuts checkbox determines the keying types for cut transitions Some frame buffers cannot do a full screen 32 bit cut in PAL due to technical limitations If you select this option cuts are set to a 24 bit take by default If this option is not selected cuts default to 32 bit cut for the center 512 scan lines followed by a wipe for the rest of the scan lines This setting can be changed for any transition in the Event List See Selecting a Transition
465. t below the active event T By default CG S makes a copy of any event you select and pastes the copy in the new Play List slot the original event stays in its initial Play List position To move an event from one spot to another hold down CTRL when you click and drag the event The event is deleted from its old position once it is inserted in the new slot If you prefer menu controls use Cut Event Copy Event and Paste Event from the Playlist menu to edit the Play List sequence You should note that the cut copy and paste shortcut keys CTRL X CTRL C CTRL V do not work when moving events in the Play List Open Job Files from Other Inscriber Products Takes and Previews CG S can open job files from any version of CG S Inscriber CG or VMP Studio It opens the ins file that stores image layouts and attempts to render the finished events when you go online CG S looks in the original file location for images backgrounds textures and logos If it does not find the external files in the original location CG S looks in the Samples folder under the current folder If the external files are not in either location CG S replaces them with gray bars If fonts are missing CG S uses the first font in your font list There are two ways to do takes from the Play List double click on an event thumbnail or drag an event thumbnail to the Program Preview palette See Using the Program Preview Palette on page 14 for details
466. t table linked to Location View Size amp Attributes Color amp Texture Styles Logos Background News Edit Effecf Settings Bangladesh India Name List table 1 City List london England Link a Template to News Edit Tables 1 Select Lower Thirds 3 from the Templates registry drop down 6 Click on the Name line on the layout and select Landmark from list on the CG toolbar and switch to the News Edit tab the News Edit table drop down list 2 Click on the text entry box above the table list and type Paris 7 Click on the Location line on the layout and select One City France in the text entry box Click on Insert Item from the News Edit table drop down list 3 Select File Registry News iwe 8 Select File Registry CG Layouts and click on Add Change Edit Tables and click on Add een CD the template name to News Edit Test and click on OK and Save Ctrl S 4 Change the name ofthetableto sxe Close One City and click on Close Bes al 9 Click on the next blank slot in the Play List The new layout is 5 Repeat Steps 3 to 9 to createa 1 based on the template you just created second table called Landmark 10 Click on the Name line and then on the Location line The table containing the text Eiffel Tower displayed on the News Edit tab changes as you switch between lines CG 159 Creating News Edit Tables News Edit tables contain lists of commonly used names places or other tex
467. t tabs in text lines Text lines start at the first tab stop in your layout Cascading text lines begin with the first line starting at the first tab stop Because tab jumps are cumulative the next line begins at the next tab stop Subsequent lines each appear one tab stop over from the last line A single underscore formatting character starts text lines on the next available tab stop To create cascading text lines simply add one underscore formatting character to the beginning of each line tabbed line The first line of text should begin at the first tab stop so do not include an underscore character The second line of text should begin one tab over from the first line so include an underscore character Subsequent lines of text with one underscore character start at the next cascading tabs txt Notepad File Edit Search Help tab one _tab two _tab three _tab four tab one tab two tab three tab four available tab stop The result is cascaded text Cascaded text creates an interesting online effect but soon your text runs off the right hand side of the screen To reset text to the first tab stop enter a space before the underscore character of every affected line of text Unlike cascading text where you rely on a single underscore character to move each new line of text to the next tab stop use spaces to indicate a tab reset and use one underscore character for each tab stop jump you want to make For
468. t the red channel RGBA channels trom the CGS41 Paint Examples folder 10 Select the Alpha Add tool from the Tool palette and ay 2 Right click on the Scrapbook and select Add to add the image paint over the image Only the red pixels are edited to the Scrapbook 11 Press CTRL Z to undo the Alpha Add tool and click on the 3 Switch to CG and select Use Background from the Scrapbook Image as Selection button to call the Select Channel dialog right click menu again 4 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab and select the RGB color 12 Select the Alpha Channel radio button model from the Color Model drop down list and look at the grayscale image again 5 Select the Color Picker drag it around the image The alpha channel To out Black and note the RGB values for the different shapes eae ea the Image a The circle is pure red 255 0 0 the square is pure represents al ae a wie blue 0 0 255 the triangle is pure green 0 255 0 and the represents comp opacity and grey star and egg shapes are a combination of red green and blue pe partia Pee n 6 Press ENTER on your number pad to do a take of the image On 19 Click on OK to close the dialog and paint with the Alpha Add your output monitor you can see that some of the shapes are tool again Since transparency has been masked out only transparent opaque pixels are selected in the image and available for editing The more opaque pixels are more selected and are 7 Switch back to Logo Compose and im
469. t under CG 46 Working with Layouts A layout consists of all of the components of an output screen In CG you combine various elements to create layouts These layouts are then output to video Layout Components Enter Text Move Text and Objects with the Move Tool Work with Layers GG Layouts consist of three aspects text objects graphic objects and backgrounds bi Li Background Image ere A a es Text objects are made up of text lines Each text lineis ZAVIJE treated as a separate object although you can group lines of text See Understanding Text Objects on page 76 for details on text objects 7 Graphic objects are made up of various graphic Sane shapes such as rectangles and circles Each graphic Graphic Ob object is treated as a separate object and graphic objects can t be grouped See Creating Graphic Objects on page 138 for details ject Logo Logos are a special class of objects and can be used as either text or graphic objects Logos are imported images that contain alpha information See Logos on page 141 for details on understanding and using logos in a layout Backgrounds can consist of live video backgrounds colored backgrounds patterned backgrounds and background images The default background is video transparent but you can block the video signal with other types of backgrounds See Understanding Backgrounds on page 62 for details on backgroun
470. ta ie aitndiian bed iaes 18 Importing Referenced Clips and Animations 20 Printing the Play LIS a 2 naana 22 CG Mod le scisceicircnisencteiiret esiin G Interface Overview ooann 34 Importing and Exporting o oo onone 36 Setting CG Preterences 0 00 0c ce eee 38 Using the Formatting Palette 0 0002 40 Speeding Up Your Work 0 a anaana 42 CO CONE eere a a a ete ee 44 Working with Layouts 0 000000 46 Choosing a Layout Type 0 0 0000 48 Changing Still and Reveal Settings 0 50 Changing Roll Settings 0 00 0004 52 Changing Crawl Settings 00 0004 54 ICING COCKS E EE EE 56 Understanding the HSV Color Model 000 58 Understanding RGB and HLS Color Models 60 Understanding Backgrounds 0 62 Using Color Backgrounds 0 0 0000 64 Using Complex Color Backgrounds 66 Using Video and Image Backgrounds 68 Understanding Objects 0 0 0000 0 Using Style and Color Groups 0 0000 12 Formatting Text and Graphics 00000 4 Understanding Text Objects 0 0000 6 Setting Text Attributes o n nuanua 8 Understanding Fonts 0 0 000 80 Using Character Mapping 0 0000 82 Using the Font Manager 0 0000 84 Understanding Type Styles
471. tcut to undo the filter before you make any further changes to your image Use Filters to Correct Color and Create Effects 1 Select File Import Export gt lmport Image select a color Simulate a chrome effect image then switch to the Filter tab Correct image color 1 Open the Level Curves filter and add several extra anchor points to the curve at regular intervals by clicking on the curve 1 Apply the Color Balance filter click on the Midtones radio 2 Drag the anchor points away from the curve in a wave or zig button and adjust the color sliders until you have the desired zag pattern and apply the filter You may have to add and effect Leave the Preserve Luminance box checked if you want subtract anchor points and make the waves bigger or smaller Logo Compose to automatically compensate for changes in until the desired effect is achieved luminance as a result of changing image colors 2 Repeat the Color Balance filter for the highlights and shadows Create other effects if desired 1 Experiment with the remaining filters to see what sort of effects ou can create The distortion filters offer some of the most 3 Ifyou did not leave the Preserve Luminance option on you can A effects Use the Color Emboss or Emboss filters to use the Brightness amp Contrast filter to fine tune these values make an image look raised bring an image into better focus Simulate a duotone 1 Apply the Monochrome filter with the Sharpen filter o
472. te color chip to determine which object element you are changing Then use the color selection tools to select a color for the object element You can also apply a texture or a tinted texture to monochrome logo shadow and edges Even though you can t change the face color of color logos you can still change the edge and shadow colors CG ignores whatever color is on the Face but uses the colors on the edge and shadow color chips You can also use style and color groups to mono logo format your logos Monochrome logos with foreground use the style or color group information lt et to black to format the face edge and shadow o the logo Color logos use the style or color group information to format only color logo fe Rwy S the edge and shadow of the logo with foreground SRS eae dR set to black The example to the right shows you the difference between a monochrome and a color logo The monochrome logo on the left uses the color group face color while the color logo on the right keeps its face image You can create a color logo from a monochrome logo and vice versa using Logo Compose See the Logo Compose section beginning on page 226 for details Apply Edges and Shadows to Logos 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 6 Now change the Vertical and Horizontal values to 100 and drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the text layer move the rectangle so that it is underneath the first lo
473. teccmcrnesnresaen 116 118 Group OF lines ancia 118 to another layer a uasenamaienied 49 Witi keyboard sccrsuniventvesavneredoasends 118 witi moUs esias en 116 Multiple boards sssessseessesesesressesee 222 Multiple channels eee 14 208 COMMUTING goie shaudieniass 208 SCLECEINO E T E EA 208 SPee 208 Multiple HOSers monouso 196 Multiple User Saa 26 N INGO ice tecouccateiaaecieenceanseeden seavent 87 114 Network Shared items cee eeeeeeee 26 News Edit asstniuinemseseriia ann 158 167 Assigning Color groups s es 162 Assigning Style groups 162 COMMENTS e cnsamonsrnanaan ges 163 Control Characters drains segonievooses 162 Creatine Gales acicancserstansacsecsmaa este 165 Designing templates eee 158 Displaying tablesis sssvssavacctesatensss 166 Importing tables 162 164 TOS OS sis E 162 OE oiei aS 158 OHNE E E E EA 158 OVERVIEW arsana 158 Searching tables csccsisaiuessnesneaseine 167 Table Sianna 160 Template example ceceno 159 News Edit registry seeeeeees 44 166 News Edit Deunant 166 News Edit fabl esini Annee 160 Adding text to layouts eee 166 Assigning Color groups 162 Assigning Style groupS eee 162 CHANGIN n 166 COMMENSiilsicimiamnenneey 163 Control characters in west vceidacvansans 162 Crean naarn a 160 DiS PIAVINIS tctecvtareectreneeinevtncnmatee 166 Edi ea aa 166 ipori n son 36 163 165 Linking to text objects 0 0 eee 161 LOSOS ioien pact ueronsd
474. th at a wider variety of speeds You can select the roll direction by clicking on the Roll Up or Roll Down radio buttons but some frame buffers may only support Roll Up especially with slow speeds eal Roll Up displays the first line of the text at the bottom of the screen and rolls it up to the top of the screen followed by all of the other lines in the roll layout Roll Down displays the last A line of the text at the top of the screen and rolls it down to the bottom of the screen followed by all of the lines preceding it in the roll layout Turning Word Wrap on for rolls makes it easier to enter text since Word Wrap automatically wraps text to the next line when you reach the right border of the layout You can make sure Word Wrap is on by navigating to the Element Constrain menu A checkmark beside the Word Wrap option indicates that it is activated Enter Text in a Roll or Crawl Layout Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and select Crawl as the layout type from the Layout Type drop down list Click between the square brackets in the layout and select Style 1 from the Styles tab Enter this line of text on one line This line of text shows you that a craw layout does not automatically wrap words to the next line Crawl Now press ENTER to move to the next blank line Select Roll as the layout type from the Layout Type drop down
475. the File menu The File Open option opens a job file in the Play List it does not open image files The following table describes the available import options Logo Compose is a single file application you can only have one file open at a time Import Options Description Import Image e imports a bitmap file Import Image Sized To Fit imports a bitmap file sized to fit the current canvas size Import Image As imports a bitmap file as a transformation in Transformation the current image once you deselect the transformation you can no longer move it separately Import Selection imports a bitmap file as a selection e once you deselect the selection you can no longer move it separately from the image Save or Export a File When you want to save an image in Logo Compose you have to export it The following table describes all of the export options available in Logo Compose Export Options Description Export Image e exports current file as a bitmap image Export Selection e exports selection outline as a bitmap image Export Selection Contents exports selection contents as a bitmap 230 Logo Compose If you save your image as a lgo file the alpha channel is retained when you use the image elsewhere in CG S If you select the File gt Save option CG S saves the current Play List not the Logo Compose image Import and Export Selections Importing and exporting image selections gives you greater cont
476. the Grid checkbox on the View tab Then select the line color and line type from the drop down lists and enter a line spacing value The View tab offers three cursor options Brush Preview cursor Small Crosshair and Large Crosshair Each option is enabled or disabled by selecting the appropriate checkbox on the View tab Video Safe Title Area Video Aspect Ratio Tools and Aspect Ratio The Brush Preview cursor previews the current brush tool It lets you see the size shape opacity and other attributes before you start painting Small Crosshair replaces the standard cursors with a fine crosshair You can also access the small cursor by pressing CAPS LOCK The small cursor is useful when you need to edit an image pixel by pixel Large Crosshair extends the crosshairs to the edge of your image This is useful for finding the precise corners on square objects just line the crosshair up with the edges of the object The Video Safe Title Area option displays the video safe area defined in CG The video safe area is the portion of the image normally visible when viewed on an output monitor or television See Video Safe Title Area on page 121 for details All views and initial brush settings are corrected for the current video aspect ratio The current video aspect ratio is set in the Inscribe ini file You need three values to set the video aspect ratio the actual aspect ratio the horizontal resolution and
477. the face is set to blue and purple both blue and purple are combined with the colors in the texture image You can adjust the color and transparency tint applied to a texture To apply a tint to a texture you must adjust the value in the Mix field The Mix eld changes the proportion of color transparency and texture A value of 100 displays the texture without color and texture tint A value of 0 displays only color and transparency without texture The graphic below shows you how adjusting the Mix value changes the ratio of color and transparency to texture Mix 0 Mix 50 Mix 100 Apply and Tint a Texture 1 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 6 Cycle back to Color Picker Set the top two color chips to bright drop down list on the CG toolbar Type the word Tint red and set Trans to 42 2 Use the Move tool to centre your text vertically On the Size amp 7 Set the bottom left color chip to yellow and the bottom right Attributes tab set the text Height to 318 and the Width to color chip to orange 111 Select the Embellished type style 9 Set Mix to 41 3 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab Cycle to Edge and set edge la thic size to 10 and all four color chips to black using the middle ue color chip selector 4 Cycle to Face Cycle to Texture Click on the Texture box and select the first blank slot on the Texture dialog Click on Define 5 Select the abstrawav jpg file from the CGS
478. the time code input in the Current Time Code field is incorrect consider 1 Is the trigger type set to Timecode 2 Is your preference standard set correctly NTSC or PAL If there is no time code input in the Current Time Code field ask yourself the following questions Is the time code source attached to a working COM port Is the time code source connected properly to that COM port Is the time code source powered up Are the dip switches for the baud rate and other parameters set correctly oh Te a T Is CG S in online mode To help you check these values try running Ittest exe included with CG S This program uses the initialization data from Inscribe ini to try to retrieve time codes Ittest exe provides a multiple line report including a check on each line of the Inscribe ini file In particular check the following lines e Time code type LTC or VITC e COM port make sure this matches e COM port settings e Was the device found If line 19 reads Fail to verify device either the device is not turned on or it is not configured properly Check the device documentation to make sure that the dip switch settings are set properly and try again If line 19 reads Cannot open Port Com X the test program could not locate the COM port identified in line 10 Check the following Is the COM port properly configured Line 11 lists the COM port settings selected for that port baud rate parity data b
479. ther filters that let you modify the image You can switch back and forth between the filter displays until you save the image See Using the Image Filters on page 220 for details If you want to go back to the live display and try again click on the Live Video button You can switch back and forth between the live input and the image you have grabbed by clicking on the Still Graphic and Live Video buttons You may need to do this to compare your grab to the input signal when you are trying to decide whether the grab is okay or whether you need to change the filter options Some frame buffers leave a ragged edge on the top and bottom of each image It may look like the grab actually starts half way across a scan line Normally this rough area is well outside the safe title area but if you need to you can use the cropping features to cut off part of the image Frame Grab always centers crops Adjust the area of the crop by changing the value in the Crop field on the Frame Grab tab A white border in the Grab window marks Gra 2 the crop boundary When you save the image Frame Grab only saves the image information inside the marker Cropping the image will decrease the size of your image file Since you are cropping 4 3 or 16 9 images depending on your video input you can smoothly scale the images up to full screen again when you use them in Logo Compose You may notice that the image quality is degraded if you enlarge the cro
480. tics These statistics tell you about current system performance The values change over time and with the operations you are performing Online Output Folders When CG S displays a layout online it renders it to a disk file first and then displays the rendered file By default the rendered files are saved in a folder with a name that matches the Inscriber file If you create a file called Boats sly the rendered files for the images in that Play List are saved in a folder called Boats onlinefiles If you keep rendered files for repeated use your hard drive will quickly fill up Storing Rendered One solution to the problem is to store all the rendered images on a large fast Images network drive In the Sequencer Preferences dialog you can designate a folder as the OnlineOuput folder When this folder is set CG S creates a folder in that folder for each job that goes online All the rendered images are centralized in one place If you use a job that someone else rendered in the past you can use the same rendered file for output In most situations you can playback the images across the network Jobs with very quick image changes may not be able to keep up with heavy network traffic or slow systems As an example if you designate the CGS41_files folder as the OnlineOutput folder and then create three jobs CG S creates the following files Folder Files Contents CGS41 Inscriber CG S folder CGS41_files online folder set for out
481. ting Experiment with News Edit Table Format Codes l 2 Enter these lines in a text editor and save them as a text file 6 Click on the 0 Imported News Edit Table entry in the Title called experiment txt Templates dialog Then click on Load and Close 20Warning 7 Click on Append All on the News Edit Tab Your layout should 1200 Not Adjust look like the graphic below Rok 14 Effects are 9 temporary i ea 26Stay tuned for more information aiana Not Adjust 1sEffects are 17 temporary Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry az6stay tuned for nore information and switch to the View Tab Change the layer value to 3 and click on the current text line Now on the View tab adjust the baseline to 60 Switch to the News Edit tab Then select File Import lmport News Edit Table and import the file EFFECTS ARE temporary you created in Step 1 StayitUnedifommorelinformation CG 163 Formatting Tabs in News Edit Tables News Edit tables containing tab formatting can be prepared in any text editor as long as the editor does not insert special formatting codes or control characters in the file Tab formatting affects the appearance of text in one of three ways cascading text column text and a combination of both Create the file in your text editor and save it as text Add Tabs Create Cascading Text Reset Cascaded Text 164 CG Underscore characters _ are used to inser
482. tings You can save modifications to the default template to better suit your environment Depth In CG A text element that adds a hard extruded edge to the combined face and edge elements DigiMix A brand of frame buffer Display Latency The lag time between first accessing a rendered file and having it appear on screen Latency is caused by the time required to read rendered files from disk or from a remote location the time to decompress files and the time to transfer files to the frame buffer card Display latency varies from system to system and with network activity level Glossary 277 Distort In CG An effect that changes the face shape of individual text characters along the X and Y axes Available with all type styles except Classic Inscriber Distortion Filters In Logo Compose Inscriber filters that let you apply special effects to your images to give the impression of distortion or a different medium Dither Filter In CG and Frame Grab A filter that removes contouring in imported graphics with a generalized noise filter Dodge Tool In Logo Compose An image editing tool used to lighten an image by moving pixel color values towards their maximum Contrast with Burn Tool Drop Shadow In CG An effect where text or graphic objects appear to have a three dimensional shadow extending from the object to a specified distance behind the object Drop shadows apply color gradients from the front to
483. tion The process of matching the output on your computer monitor to your video output so that colors look the same on both monitors Canvas Size In Logo Compose The size of your painting area Your canvas size can be larger or smaller than your image size If your canvas size is smaller than your image size some of the image is clipped If your canvas size is larger than your image size an empty area appears around the image See also Image Size Capture In Frame Grab An action that allows you to capture or grab a frame from a video feed Center Tab In CG A tab alignment option that evenly distributes text characters around the horizontal center of the layout Center Vertically In CG A text alignment option that evenly distributes text lines around the vertical center of the layout CG CG S module that acts as a full featured character generator allowing you to create still roll crawl and reveal layouts for display to video CG layouts can also be exported to an animation application such as FX for 3D effects CG Effects See Effect Event Channel In Logo Compose The storage location for color and transparency information in an image Each layer in an image has four channels red green blue and alpha Each channel stores information about one aspect of the image The red green and blue channels store all of the color information for the image The alpha channel stores all of the transparency inf
484. tion Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and switch to the graphic layer rectangle When you make a copy CG automatically selects the copy so you don t have to click on it before you make changes to it 2 Select Style 9 from the Formatting palette A rectangle appears Create three more copies and set the Baseline and Edge values in the lower half of the layout to the following 3 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and change the Vertical and 1 150 238 Horizontal values to 100 Now change the shadow value to 0 2 183 308 and the edge value to 10 3 199 252 4 Select Flat as the edge type and switch to the View tab Now Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab select the Use Background change the Baseline to 253 and the Left Edge to 263 radio button as your Face type and check the Outlined Only 5 Press ENTER not the number pad key to create a copy of the checkbox CG 145 Changing and Moving Graphic Objects Size Graphic Objects Position Graphic Objects Nudge Graphic Objects Use the Grid 146 CG Every graphic object is surrounded by an outline rectangle with grab handles at each corner and midpoint You can use these grab erab Handle handles to change the size of the object Click and drag one of the i corner grab handles to resize both the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the rectangle Click and drag one of the midpoint i grab handles to resize only the vertical or
485. to run the job nto Sequencer 193 194 Understanding Effect Events Effect events are image files that use motion effects Sequencer supports four effect events rolls crawls reveals and animations These events are called CG effects All CG effects except animations are created in CG Animations are created in an external animation application or in FX if you have purchased the Xtreme plug in option for CG S Applying a transition to an effect event can permanently remove the motion effect from your event See Choosing a Layout Type on page 48 for more information on creating motion effects Rolls and Crawls Reveals Animations Sequencer Reveals Animation Rolls scroll text and graphics up or down on a static background Rolls are often used for credits at the end of a show Crawls display a running line of text such as an announcement or warning horizontally across the screen Rolls and crawls are created entirely in CG and output in Sequencer You can extend or shorten the effect duration using the Frames field and add wait time with the Wait field See Rolls and Crawls on page 48for details Reveals display the text in a layout one line or character at a time over top of a static background Reveals are created entirely in CG and can be output in Sequencer Unlike other events the reveal duration is measured in characters or lines per second depending on whether the reveal is revealing characters or lines
486. together The four color chips on Edge set the color and transparency of the outer two edges together Color cannot be applied to individual edges Shadow Edge amp Sheen lets you adjust sheen highlight size and angle for each of the four edges Size determines the size of the sheen Angle determines the angle at which the sheen is displayed The graphic below shows you different sheen angle values Angle 90 Angle 45 os 15 lt f Innermost Edge 7 lt se st Inside Edge 0 lt Outside Edge o lt e Dutermost Edge Edge amp Sheen wY Angle 0 Angle 45 Angle 90 Shadows are soft offset highlights of the side of an object opposite an imaginary light source they follow the shape of the entire object On Shadow you can set shadow options See Shadow on page 102 for details Customize Sheen Type Style l Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar and make sure the cursor is between the brackets in the CG Editor Type the word Sheen Use the Move tool to center rn the line of text and increase the text size Select the Sheen type style on the Size amp Attributes tab Switch to the Color amp Texture tab Cycle to Face Set the Face color chips to red oP Cycle to Edge amp Sheen Together set the edge ss a color chips to blue Set the oe econ Edge Size value to 92 by
487. trained lines are not linked to tab stops and can be moved left aligned line EWG N fon tab constraihed line vertically and horizontally to any position on the layout You can tell whether or not a line is tab constrained or non tab constrained by placing the cursor on the line Tab constrained lines are surrounded by open brackets Non tab constrained lines are surrounded by a box You can convert a line from tab constrained to non tab constrained or vice versa by selecting Element Constrain Text to Tabs or by pressing CTRL TAB You can use the mouse to move both tab constrained and non tab constrained lines to new positions in the layout To move a line hold down CTRL and drag the line to a new position Move Lines with the Keyboard Layers If you are dragging a tab constrained line the line only moves vertically If you are dragging a non tab constrained line the line follows the position of the mouse pointer on the layout You can use the Baseline and Left edge fields on the View tab to position lines exactly using scan lines and pixels The Baseline value measures the vertical position of the line in scan lines with 0 at the top of the layout The Left Edge value measures the horizontal position of the line in pixels with 0 at the left edge of the layout If a line is tab constrained and you adjust the Left Edge value the line is converted to a non tab constrained line Each layout contains ten text l
488. tributes Kerning tab To change the kerning for a single pair of letters Adusted place the cursor between the two letters hold down the Wee a CTRL key and press MINUS or PLUS on the number pad to herming i decrease or increase the space between them Leading and kerning controls are not available for double byte or glyph processed languages When you rotate text using the Rotation field on the Size amp Attributes tab your text is displayed with a thin gray rectangle surrounding the rotated line You can change the formatting of text in rotated lines but you can t change characters in the line To change the characters reset the rotation to zero make your changes and then rotate the line again Q CG rotates the entire line of text along the same rotation lt side e baseline If you want to rotate individual ae aa characters in a word place each character on a wa separate non tab constrained line set the rotation and position separately for each line and then position the lines side by side See Tab Constrained vs Non Tab Constrained Lines on page 116 for details s A INe ON N7 A qe 1A Ai ro Wy TA AN uus _ F QY Q Q Any percentage other than zero in the Small Caps field changes all lower case letters to upper case letters displayed at a percentage of the normal upper case letter size Upper case letters numbers and punctuation symbols are not modified Us
489. tributes tab Notice how the appearance 3 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab Now change the Height of your text changes value to 175 the Width value to 100 the Edging value to 8 Select Concave as your bevel type and select Bevel In as your 25 and change the Kerning value to 20 edge type and select Flat as your Bevel type 4 Select Bevel Out as your edge type from the edge type drop 9 Experiment with different bevel types and edging values until down list and change the shadow value to 0 you are comtortable applying bevels 5 Switch to the Color amp Texture tab and select HLS as your color model CG 93 94 Understanding Text Color The options on the Color amp Texture tab let you select colors transparencies gradients and textures for the face edge and shadow of Classic and other type style text and graphic objects The Color amp Texture tab does not look the same for both text and graphic objects You can select a character or line option for Classic type style text objects but not for graphic objects See Defining Classic Textures on page 130 and Using Classic Textures on page 136 for details on texture options Differences between the Color amp Texture tab for Classic type styles and the other type styles are described in Understanding Type Styles on page 86 Color amp Texture Tab Face Edge and Shadow Selection Color Selection GG Classic Type Style options on the Color a
490. tte ssaismiaiseinvarcen 4 Freeform color eee 45 73 74 Graphic objects svscsvessesovarveeesss 72 139 Color group continued TOROS ET EE EEE 153 OVENI E Wachira 45 Right click mentean 74 OKA EEN E T 41 72 COLOR erop S e Ea 34 70 C lor log0nnsonan 153 Color modelisisssirutrenseisii annii 58 61 BASICS EEEN A E tenn eases 58 LS E E A E 60 64 a OAE E E 58 64 la A CE E EE A T EEE 58 60 DeB Sas eaaa 60 ROD arnee 60 64 Saturation ssssseessssssseesesssseee 58 60 MANIC aaa a R 58 ColorPicker BOX aiana 64 Color selection tools res vsaecaupisaessiavs 64 COLOE SELEGIOR eaaa 64 Clr SlU eranan aaan 64 COlOE VIEW eohi a Gmelennae 258 Column Selection tool eseeseeeees 242 Comments in News Edit eeeeeee 163 Complex selections cseceseeeeseeeees 244 Compositing textures 134 135 Concepts in Logo Compose 228 Concurrent Display wioserssaredesssestensasses 38 OPP GM iu diataesUretesteas annaa teat 38 OPR nonante 38 Constrain Gradient See Lock Constrain Transparency e s 69 98 See also Lock Contents of selection ssssssesssessese 240 Context sensitive Menus s ssesessess 22i in Logo COMPOSE sssssssessesessessesees 221 Contracting selection eeeeeseeees 244 Contraste nites 228 255 264 MACS MAET Soheir aneen 255 Control characterS 00eeeeee 162 173 Control Panel FOntS i 0 sccsuicawsausasseatsns 80 Control points seonscocse
491. ttern Size value to 4 and in the Angle field set the gradient angle to 30 6 Create a video gradient by changing the Top transparency value to 75 and the Bottom transparency value to 25 Switch to the Background tab and select Color as your background type by You can see some of the video fill pattern through the color selecting the Color radio button background when you change the transparency values Click on the Solid Blend cycle box to cycle to TOP and use the indicating that your live video feed is partially visible through color selection tools to select red for the top color the background color Pattern elements are not transparent Click on the Solid Blend cycle box to cycle to BOTTOM and use YOV Background tab should now look like this the color selection tools to select blue for the bottom color Select Blocks from the Pattern List You can see the name of each pattern if you place the mouse over the pattern icon in the list and wait a second for the Tool Tip to appear ui l Top 75 S Bottom 25 2 p Top roo Bottom 0 Angle 30 fa i Over CG 67 68 Using Video and Image Backgrounds Image and video backgrounds are additional options that you can use in your backgrounds CG S lets you create complex graphics in Logo Compose and use those graphics in your CG layouts Video backgrounds combined with transparency options let you incorporate a video feed into your layout Transparen
492. tyle or color group Freeform Style affects style groups and Freeform Color affects color groups You can turn Freeform Style and Freeform Color on or off by right clicking on a style or color chip and selecting Freeform Style or Freeform Color from the right click menu You must turn it on or off separately for each style or color chip Update line to style 10 Update all style 10 lines Freeform Style If Freeform Style or Freeform Color is off any changes you make to a selected line of text or graphic object affect all other lines of text or graphic objects formatted with the same style or color group Use Text and Graphic Object Style and Color Groups l 2 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry drop down list on the CG toolbar Type the following as four lines of text style group 12 style group 24 color group 1 color group 2 Switch to the Size amp Attributes tab and leading s change the Leading to 18 Kerning 0 Click on the first sentence and select Element Apply Leading Switch to the Styles tab and click on Style Group 12 6 Click on the second line in the layout and click on Style Group 24 Click on the third line in the layout and click on Color Group 1 on the Formatting palette Click on the fourth line in the layout and click on Color Group 2 When you click on a style group the font as well as the color of the text changes When you click on a color
493. u can choose to display only the names of your installed fonts or both the names and the font faces of your installed fonts in the Attributes Font menu To show font faces select Attributes Font Show Font Faces When the Show Font Faces menu item is checked CG displays font faces as well as font names When not checked CG displays font names only The graphic below shows you the difference between the two types of displays Font Names Only Displayed Font Names and Font Faces Displayed TrueType Fonts Font Database TrueType and Inscriber Fonts GG Attributes Font Size Shadow Edging Attributes Show Font Faces Font gt Size gt Abadi MT Shadow gt Algerian __ Edging gt v Show Font Faces Abadi MT ALGERIAN Amanda Amasis MT Andale Andy MT Bold Arial Amanda Amasis MT Andale Andy MT Bold Arial TrueType fonts have a ttf extension and are found in the Windows System folder or in their own separate fonts folder TrueType fonts are available to all Windows applications and each font is its own separate file TrueType fonts are specific to each computer so if you run CG S on multiple computers you need to make sure that the same TrueType fonts are installed on each one TrueType fonts are recommended over Inscriber format fonts because they offer better anti aliasing The font database keeps all of your fonts including TrueType fonts and Inscriber ift fonts in one place and
494. u can select any combination of hours minutes and seconds for your clock display You can display hours minutes and seconds separately or in combination The Format drop down list shows you all of the possible options If you check the Show Leading Zeros checkbox you can add leading zeroes to the hours figure of the clock so that the hours minutes and seconds are always two digits wide Separators You can select any separator from the Separator drop down lists The separator is the character that divides the hours seconds and minutes from each other AM and PM You can add AM and PM designators to your Designations clock by checking the Pos checkbox on the 10 SADA Ne Senn Effects Settings tab You can place the AM and PM designators on either the left or the AMIO i AV B A right side of your clock The AM and PM GG Take a Clock to Video Countups and Countdowns Clock Attributes Clock Fonts drop down lists let you select the format that AM and PM appear in You can also choose to display only one of AM or PM or display them both at appropriate times by checking the checkbox beside both AM and PM When you do a take of a clock the clock is sent to your program channel and begins to show the correct time incrementing in seconds or minutes or hours depending on what you select Because the clock is running in realtime you can t continue to edit other layouts in CG In order to stop the take press ESC CG st
495. u control all online activity including takes transitions trigger information and board assignment information The Sequencer interface is equipped with several organizational tools to help you output your projects quickly and easily In this Section Sequencer OVERVIEW sated aderees 176 177 Run Tab and Rendering 202 205 Managing and Outputting Events 182 185 Aigheey alliemae ere ee een rs reer wee 206 207 Using the Event Editor Tab 186 187 Channel Setup Tips and Tricks 208 213 Transitions and Events 188 195 Setting Sequencer Preferences 214 215 Triper AY DES pretest Ane RANA 196 201 Sequencer Interface Overview Sequencer manages edits and outputs a series of events The Sequencer tools help you output your projects quickly and easily giving you control over all online activities including takes transitions trigger types and board assignment information There are six main Sequencer components Sequencer toolbar Event List Sequencer tabs Play List and Program Preview palette Inscriber CG Supreme BETA 4 1 0 10 D GRAPHICS LAYOUTS 6PM_NEWS_J15 INS Fa File Edit Playlist Tools Help l l x Dota sa 2 gt Ale alsa nr ee 2 Sequencer Toolbar 00000 Evening News 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 15 00 00 02 15 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 nooo oag Event List 00 00 00 00 00 7
496. ubtitle Format Text Formatted Text Plain Set Timing Values When you select Open to import your subtitle file the Subtitle Import dialog appears and indicates how many pages of subtitles you are importing After you import a subtitle format save the Play List using FileSave When you import a Subtitle Only file you have to set timing values for each layout When you import a timecoded or EBU formatted subtitle file CG automatically converts the timecodes to a usable format These subtitles can be taken to video without modifying or editing the timing or transitions You can view timing components in Sequencer For subtitle only files you need to set the timing values for each subtitle using Sequencer You can either mark the in and out points for each page or mark the in points and modify the duration for each page See Understanding Event Duration on page 192 for details Sequencer changes the out point values to fill any gaps before you can play back the sequence In Sequencer timecodes must be consecutive with no gaps in the sequence If you want blank screens between some subtitle pages you can set a transition duration on a cut transition The display then clears the output to video after the duration elapses The display stays at full video until the next event in the Play List is triggered See Configuring for Time Code Use on page 200 for details For timecoded subtitles in points are maintained The tim
497. udysntentouatane 162 Modine ae a 161 REBIS aeiaai 160 SIE AE ERT 160 News Edit tables continued Searc DNE enini aAa 167 Tab Stp Sanna 163 164 TTE Suina 160 Updating scccscipia sors senemtenhetcan ans 166 Node cache annessa 30 Non tab constrained lines 43 116 BYACKEIS nenea 116 NOTA CAGE aneneen aoi 142 NESC oenen voltaic 95 COTO TEC TON aanne awtarnendan 28 NTSC VideO trail annae 259 263 Illegal color Vales av isiasicperavsatevente 95 Nid Euan 118 146 Graphic ODI ECS suse ssissitssenidis 146 TEXT ODJ ECIS aeua 118 IN GID CL uenra 177 Event MUMDERS ued insects 177 Numeric value fields cccceesesseeeees 11 Coloana a 64 Object See Graphic objects ODES aE 70 71 Das OS 70 Pree OTMI eega 246 Graphi CS era aantiehocss ccecee 70 MOVING sinnini i 246 Rotal ecaa a narenccten 246 Seal aa 246 SIC WITS asoring naei 246 LEX e E E T 70 Transformi Ne innean 246 TYDE Seron 70 Oige THOGE pas vesgesdestsicdssn cocedniveiens 184 Offline takes tn CGn 5l OS aa n upeet wacuaneisoncenesnessnannavans 88 SHAdGW wiseatursarti nE 88 Timecodis emen 210 A E cere ayer re 256 ONNE eesnik aeueo 184 Logging activity essssesseseessessessssese 213 MOE aeriana E 184 Output directory s ssessessessesssssesese 215 Program Preview channels 208 Running sequences 4 184 202 Usine RUN taD 202 Online Folder extensions 18 212 Online Mode aiasinisataentrniain 184 ODACILY aa 255 Op
498. uminance Subtract Saturation Add Description paints with image data you can set the clone source and clone destination or copy the image data to use as the clone source fills with image data you can set the clone source and clone destination or copy the image data to use as the clone source smears the image e blurs the image offsets the image and wraps the edges e lightens the image by moving the color values for the pixels up to their maximum RGB 255 72 0 will dodge to 255 255 0 e darkens the image by moving color values for the pixels to their minimum RGB 255 72 0 will burn to 255 0 0 lightens the image by adding luminance in HLS color space all colors start to move towards white e darkens the image by subtracting luminance in HLS color space all colors start to move towards black e adds chroma to the image by adding saturation in HLS color space If the image is monochrome Saturation Add acts like a tint tool using the foreground color to tint Tool Description Saturation e subtracts chroma from the image by re z n d Subtract removing saturation in HLS color space All colors move towards gray Smear Settings The Smear tool is sensitive to the speed of your stroke The slower you move the smear tool across the image the more you will smear the image colors In the image to the right the Smear tool was moved very quickly across the color bou
499. ur aa boards or you can scroll through the agg display to see each board separately Click on the arrow buttons to show or PaM PRV CLR hide additional board thumbnails See Using the Program Preview Palette on page 14 for details Sequencer 177 Getting Started in Sequencer In Sequencer you manage and output events created in CG S or imported from other applications The Event List is an output organizer that provides controls and information for running event sequences online This topic provides a brief overview to get you started using the main functions in Sequencer Group In Point Group Total Duration Expand Collapse Arrow Group Out Point a pti ons Group Headers Trigger Type PILE Label Effect Events DUSI Opening Credits Timed 00 000s 00 00 007 4 15 00 00 T2 15 paoor Talkshow Name caefect frizo p1 wis on00 0s00 0000091500000 fon002 show Topic carnet fre 61 wan 00000915 0000 10 28 00 00 0 O0003 Show Guests Louvre me Fr 6d a W142 00 00 10 23 00 00 17 15 00 00 0 Pe OG During the Talk Show Manual LG W 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 i 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 46 Selected 01002 Guest 2s Mother Louvre mm Fro f1 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 O1O0S Guest s s Brother Tile AC Fr 0 W 1508400 00 00 00 0013 58 00 001 3 58 0 SSSR Final Credits PY Clock mew 1 58 00 00 1 3 59 00 00 00 07 0 00 Tt oapoz crew ___ ogefect_
500. ur layout first you can figure out how many characters fit on each line and set up your word processor accordingly Position the first line of your roll or crawl Hold down CTRL and drag the first line to the correct position If you don t type any text into the layout l the first line is marked by two brackets surrounding a flashing cursor Your first line can be either tab constrained or non tab constrained You can also use tabs to position the insertion point at a tab stop See Using Tabs and Text Entry Features on page 122 for details First Line for Roll Layout First Line for Crawl Layout Once the first line is positioned properly you can save the layout as a template if you are going to create more rolls or crawls using the same defaults See Moving Text Lines on page 118 for details on positioning lines of text See Using Templates on page 156 for details on creating templates You can also determine how many letters you can safely use per line by entering a line of random characters Remember that if you are using a proportional font the cc 2 cced letter m takes up more room than the letter P Prepare a Roll In your word processor you can set the margins based on the number of Text File characters each line in your layout can hold CG automatically wraps lines if they are too long but you may want to control your line breaks manually Enter the text you want to use for the roll i
501. uration on the Event Editor tab Select a new transition from the Transition Type drop down list assign a direction from the buttons below the Transition Type list set the size in the Size field and the duration in the Frames field See Creating Transition Events on page 188 for details Set In and Out Points In and out points determine when Sequencer begins and ends a take for each Frames E L Size iE Wait IHE evnt The way you set wand on p oinite 00 00 00 00 a 0000 03 25 a 00 00 0325 changes depending on the group trigger foonon00 a Trigger Times E type but all in and out points can be set using the In Point and Out Point fields on Sequencer the Event Editor tab See Understanding Event Duration on page 192 and Understanding Trigger Types on page 196 for details Change the Render Location The Event Editor tab lets you determine where the final events are rendered when you go online You have three choices local disk local RAM or remote location Each option is useful in different situations You also control whether images are rendered to disk or memory file before Sequencer runs Pre rendered images are displayed much faster than images that must be read from a remote network drive but pre rendered images take up significant local disk drive space or RAM See Render Location and Rendered Images on page 204 for details on selecting the render location and pre rendering your events
502. ure tab Color Chips gme Z E Preview Color Chip Alpha 0 The Color Options drop down list available for many of the text elements contains four color display options to create complex text Color Ramp Bevel Full Alpha and Eliminate See Color color kamp See Understanding Text Color on page 94 for details on setting text color See Transparency on page 98 for details on setting transparency Options on page 101 for details on each item and Using Color Ramp Additional Beveled Text on page 104 for details on creating a bevels Eliminate You can adjust the size of the tube using the Tube Size field On Glow you can adjust the glow options Glow centers a single color highlight behind the tube Neon adjusts the intensity of the glow Offset sets the distance between the glow and the text element The graphic below shows you different offset values Offset 0 Offset 5 Offset 10 Offset 15 Offset 20 You can also set the amount of transparency applied to the glow See Transparency on page 98 for details Angle specifies where the glow is displayed See Shadow on page 102 for details on glow angle values Soft determines how fuzzy or diffuse the edge of the glow will be A softness value near zero gives a hard edged glow similar to an offset shadow A higher softness value gives a diffuse indistinct glow See Shadow Softness on page 89 for details Transparency va
503. ure tab Cycle to Face Set each of the 7 Select Color Ramp from the Color color kamp Face color chips to different shades of red Options drop down box Select the Ghost pesiar tamp l checkbox The face is drawn without Bevel 5 Cycle to Edge Set each of the edge color chips to shades of color and transparency or texture but Full Alpha green Set the Edge Size to 20 the element casts a shadow aet 6 Cycle to Depth and leave the color chips black Set the depth 10 Cycle to Edge Select the Ghost checkbox The edge is drawn value to 25 and the Angle to 51 without color and transparency or texture but it casts a shadow cG 109 Changing 10 Edges Settings The 10 Edges type style lets you add up to ten edges to the text face Each of the ten edges can contain individual color and transparency values as well as a visibility setting Face Color and Texture Options Edge Color and Texture Options Visible Layer Checkbox Inside Edge Checkbox 110 CG CG lets you customize the shape color transparency and bistor x jo texture of your text On Face adjust the values in the Distort X and Distort Y fields to manipulate the shape of each character PTI os For details on distorting text shape see Distort Text on page 100 Text elements can contain up to four colors and four transparency values Use the Color Picker options to set color chips and transparency values You can also apply a texture to face edge or
504. ures folder in your CGS 41 folder contains JPEG images you can use as sample texture maps If you change the texture in a slot the new texture is applied to all objects formatted with that texture number In a complex image you can change the texture on the texture map and have your change ripple through the layout Texture Map Definitions You can insert several images into the texture map at a time Images are i Ans oH f Define Un define G 5356028 pcd aE Cancel 130 CG Textures from the Scrapbook inserted in the map beginning at the selected slot Any slots after the selected slot that contain textures are overwritten by the new textures You can replace any texture in the map by clicking on it and selecting a new image To undefine an image and leave the slot blank select the texture and click Undefine If the old texture was used anywhere in the layout it is removed and replaced with the current color definition the next time the image is redrawn or rendered If an image cannot be found on the specified path CG looks in the Samples folder directly below the CG S program files Any missing textures appear as black and grey bars in the texture slot Items in the Scrapbook can be used as textures Select Use Texture from the Scrapbook right click menu to add the current Scrapbook item to the texture map If the current Scrapbook item is a layout it is rendered to bitmap format before b
505. uses Sequencer to highlight each event in the Event List as it is being output to video If this option is not enabled the Event List is static as the job is being run This option is enabled by default Live Playlist Checkbox Enabling the Live Playlist option causes Sequencer to highlight each event in the Play List as it is being output to video If this option is not enabled the Play List is static as the job is being run This option is enabled by default 1 Create a Play List that uses the Timed trigger type and switch to 6 On the Run tab click in the Cycle checkbox morem Sequencer to turn Event List cycling on and clickon I Live Update EE 2 the Run Job button Sequencer replays the L tire Playlist Al al fo ask SN Event List over and over until you press ESC 2 Click on the Online Toggle button to go online F or click on the Stop button 3 Click on the Number button on the Rub tab and type 7 Run the job and watch the Event and Play Lists Sequencer an event number That event is automatically highlighted in highlights each event in the Event List as it is output to video the Event List and outlines each event in the Play List with a colored box 4 Press ENTER Sequencer does a take of the event 8 Click on the Live Update checkbox to disable live Event List updates and run the job again The Event List no longer 5 Click on the Label button and type an Number highlights each event as it is output to video event name into the
506. using any font place characters in the Characters to Copy field and then click on Copy e in CG place the cursor where you want the characters to appear and then select Edit Paste The Inscriber Character Map can be opened using Edit Character Map Character Map Charactos Map ee ne ee a ee Re eee al OOTASASUO E HOI IAOM2isi4iSi6i7sioit_islEle IGAIBICDIEIFIGHILVIKILIMNIGPIGRISTUMMXVIZIDMOAL Uialb icldllelf lalh i i k II mhn lol alr Ist lu v weky z T E e CL A HEA AS a E e SIE NS Ib oY LILIES ITIGE kOe L Ee e iT E E I AAA AAAAAAACEEHEHET I IT TI NOOOOOAUUUUMEIR lallalalalalaledc le lee le ATS IA le i a u yy Use the Character Map Use Keycodes Double Byte and Glyph Processed Fonts You can click on a character on the Character Map to insert it at the cursor position in the current text line You can also place your mouse pointer over any character on the Character Map to find out the ASCII keycode for the character You may have to wait a few seconds before the ASCII keycode appears in a small box under the pointer You must have the NumLock turned on to use keycodes The Character Map always displays the character set for the current font If you want to display another font you need to switch to the font using the Size amp Attributes tab and then open the Character Map again The OK button accepts the characters that you entered on the current line The Cancel button erases all of the characters that you ente
507. ut in your Play List Add a Clock to a You can add a digital clock to a layout by selecting Clock as your ok E Layout layout type CG automatically places a default clock on the layout You can then use the options on the Effect Settings tab to change the placement and features of the clock Any elements already on your layout are not changed and you can add additional text and graphic objects to the layout after you add a clock View Size amp Attributes Color amp Texture Styles Logos Background News Edit Effect Settings Type count Up Iv Pos Left v AM am PM Pm Format fhh mm 7 E mE sf sp 4 A Separator a I End Time M a e a jo s p a 5 pocio f si Reset to Defaults Take Clock Types You can select one of four types of clocks from the Type drop down list on the Effect Settings tab The 12hr and 24hr clocks let you display the current system time in either 12 or 24 hour format The Count Up clock lets you start the clock at a specific time and then count up The Count Down clock lets you start the clock at a specific time and then count down to zero You can start or end the Count Up and Count Down clocks at zero or enter a specific time for their start PROVEA and end times Both the start and end times are set at zero by default To change the end time you need to select the End Time checkbox and then change the 14eS7 o12 numbers in the end time fields Clock Formats Yo
508. uttons beside the Value fields to adjust the values once you are close to the desired number CG provides you with an easy way to set your background to full black If you click on the Full Black button just below the Solid Blend cycle box the current color definition is replaced with black and the video transparency is reset to 0 i Color i File C Over 5 Click on the Color Picker and drag it on top of the thumbnail of the first layout in the Play List The color in the Color Picker box changes as you drag the Color Picker across the screen but the Solid Blend cycle box doesn t change color Release the mouse button The Solid Blend cycle box changes color to show the color in the Color Picker box which becomes the new background color CG 65 Using Complex Color Backgrounds Gradients and transparency can be added to the basic CG background to create complex layouts Gradients are smooth transitions from one color or transparency level to another and patterns are basic elements such as vertical or horizontal lines placed on top of a color background or gradient See Using Transparency on page 98 for details on transparency Gradients Change Gradient Values Change Gradient Angles 66 GG A gradient is a smooth transition from one color to another color You can use any of the color selection methods to select the top and bottom colors for a gradient The Solid Blend cycle box controls whether
509. vaiaden 62 OVERVIEW annonae 46 62 Pa tte titi sccesscdatvaivedeustucidectovs 63 66 67 Reveal inse 69 Background continued Roll actintateitn ann wore aes 69 DIZE10 Ml Zone ea 68 LAD is apts ces E E E hueeiah di 63 Transparency ninaninata 67 PAIS ATON binanan 66 69 ML WOFCOLO TN aee 64 TLV Des E EES AE T E 62 VIGCO REENE SE ES 62 68 Video till pattern orisirisi 62 Background color avevsy socseiessnonnnixs 64 67 Chane ne neari nnna rii 65 DCLEC EIN aa eT 65 Background image ssssssessessesssssessesee 68 T PATS par iyoten anse 68 Background tab sssseessesseseesesssssssees 63 Backing up templates registry 156 Baseline sec annans 79 120 121 146 BOVGl iy EEEE E 101 Bevel direction changing 64 147 Beveled edge wisssisducadurasasdvs 109 142 147 APPIE a a 93 Bitmap iMag Siar e 262 Plendas en E 65 Solid Blend Box ssnivnainasanniens 65 BUS Channel tnoccsimenngercaveaucaweat 260 Body Depi iisa taricoe 107 Bold terie TE 76 Bold version of FNT font eeeeeee 85 Borde eon aaa 50 TOE C1AW S naa a ronetens 50 TOT TOUS oiaren ae ve lsoncnenanigs 50 aIl AE E 50 SELEC ENG A AT E TEET 244 SEES EE 50 A E EN 50 Bottom Gradient Value ee eeeeeees 66 Bottom Transparency Value 69 Boxed tei adina av ueatns 124 BEACKEIS uae aN 46 116 Non tab constrained lines 116 Tab constrained lines cesses 116 TCI EE ETT E S 46 Pre NNESS ii nnne riot 228 255 mage M
510. vailable from other sources Texture Options All of the texture options are found on the Color amp Texture tab Clicking on the texture box lets you select a texture from the texture map In Pee ea order to apply the texture to the he ure 23 LSP tint se Size Button current object you must click on in ES Hone e Compositing the Enable Texture checkbox gt invert List Texture Enable Tile Tint Texture Button Invert See Mapping and Compositing Tetta Classic Textures on page 134 and Using Classic Textures on page 136 for details on using the texture options Alignment Buttons Texture Map Before you can apply textures to text and graphic objects you need to add them to the texture map The texture map keeps track of textures used in a layout Each layout has its own texture map and the texture maps are not interchangeable When you apply a texture on the Color amp Texture tab the texture number from the map is recorded and that texture is applied to the object To add a texture to the texture map click on the texture box CG opens the Texture Map dialog Click on a slot and then click on Define or double click on a slot to display the Open Image dialog Select the image you want to use as a texture You can use images in any of the supported bitmap formats as textures When you select OK CG inserts an image thumbnail of the texture image into the appropriate slot in the texture map A Basic_text
511. ve a small black arrow at the bottom right corner of the tool icon Pattern In CG A repeating design that adds visual interest to backgrounds Patterns can be selected on the Color amp Texture tab You can modify the size color gradient and video transparency of patterns in your layouts PC Clock Trigger Type In Sequencer A group trigger type that uses the 24 hour PC personal computer clock as a time source for takes Perspective In Logo Compose An element of drawing on a two dimensional surface so that objects give the impression of relative position size and lighting angles Perspective can be applied to an object in Logo Compose by using the Freeform tool or Depth fields on the Transform tab PGM Button A Program Preview palette button that sets automatic online updates for the current Program channel Pickle Device See GPI Trigger Pixel A single sample of picture information Pixel is short for picture cell Pixel Shape The shape of a pixel as determined by its proportion of length to width Pixel shape differs between computer and video output In computer or print media pixels are square In video and television media pixels are slightly rectangular Pixelize Filter In Logo Compose A distortion filter that replaces groups of pixels in an image with the average color values of the pixels in each group Play Direct Button In Sequencer Takes the entire event list in sequence wh
512. vent to appear in the new group and selecting Edit Insert Group Header If you select multiple events and select Edit Insert Group Header Sequencer inserts a header for every event selected See Create a Group and Change the Trigger Type on page 181 for details To delete a group header select the group header and then select Edit Delete Group Header When you delete group headers only the headers are removed the events remain intact You can only insert and delete group headers in Sequencer To add a blank event to the Event List using the current Registry template use the Log Event Up or Log Event Down buttons The Log Event Up button inserts an event above the selected event re while the Log Event Down button inserts an event below the selected event You can also insert an event below the selected event by selecting Playlist Log Event Log Event Up r Log Event Down Cut and Delete Events Copy Events Paste Events Select Event or Group Attributes You can cut and delete events using the asis Playlist menu from any CG S module To Undo cut or delete an event select the event sean allies ake Event umPad Enter select Playlist Cut Event or click on Log Event Cull the Cut Event button on the Sequencer Change Render File Name Ctrl Renumber All Render File Names toolbar The event is deleted if you copy r ut Event or cut another event before pasting the Suey ee first event You can cut
513. viewed on a A waa Unsafe computer screen but cause problems when sent Box Color to video If you define an unsafe color a warning symbol appears near the Color Picker ie PALI PAL tool The warning indicates that the current olor Unsafe color is NTSC or PAL unsafe and shows you the Box Color nearest video safe color using both luminance and chrominance correction To select the safe color click on the Suggested Color box CG does not check for hot colors in logos or external bitmaps but you can use the Filter tab in Logo Compose to check for legal colors See Apply Filters and Create Effects on page 229 for details Select and Modify Colors l 2 3 Select the Documentation Template from the Templates registry 7 Click on the Edge color chip and click on the Solid Blend cycle drop down list on the CG toolbar and enter a line of text box until SOLID appears Change the color values to H 234 Select the Classic type style on the Size amp Attributes tab L 56 S 84 Select Style 10 from the Formatting palette or the Styles tab 8 Click on the Solid Blend cycle box until BOTTOM and switch to the Size amp Attributes tab Now change the appears and change the L value to 87 Now Shadow size to 10 and the Edge size to 4 change the Top gradient value to 90 and the Bottom gradient value to 10 and change the Switch to the Color amp Texture tab and click on the FACE color Gradient angle to 20 chip Make sure your colo
514. w and take events E urPedNna ka using the various options on te NAPE the Playlist menu rer oer Renumber All Render File Names Cut Event Copy Event Paste Event Overview 13 Using the Program Preview Palette The Program Preview palette allows you to view the contents of the Program Channels and Preview Channels You can configure CG S to automatically update all channels You can perform quick takes by dragging an image thumbnail of an event from the Play List or Store to any of the Program Preview windows The Program Preview palette is integrated with every CG S module CG Br Sequencer Frame Grab and Logo Compose By default the Program BE Preview palette is located on the bottom left side of the display but you can convert it to a floating palette by dragging it anywhere on the screen with the mouse ron pe A ES pa Why Use the In a one board system you usually have only one online monitor In this situation Palette the Program Preview palette is used to clear the frame buffer view the Program Channel view the Preview Channel and perform quick takes takes made while CG S is offline Frame Buffer Online Monitor In multi channel situations where you have multiple frame buffers and monitors the Program Preview palette lets you view the contents of any Program Channel view the contents of any Preview Channel clear any of the frame buffers perform quick takes perform quick previews The Pro
515. want press the DOWN arrow key The selection bar jumps to that item Press ENTER to insert the item in your layout Adding Editing and Updating a News Edit Table This procedure assumes that you have completed the previous 5 Change the word Results to Coverage and add a logo of procedure Experiment with News Edit Table Format Codes on your choice to the end of the line by using the number page 163 formatting codes where number is the logo tile number 1 Select File Import Import News Edit Table and import the The tab formatting changes because the logo pushes the text file you created called election txt CG displays the Title line toward the left Template dialog 6 When you have changed the text and added the logo click on Insert ltem or press the INSERT key The new item is added to z the current table but the original item is still displayed on the screen 7 Delete the original item by selecting it and pressing the DELETE key then exit CG S You are not prompted to save your changes to the News Edit Table 8 Reload G S Switch to the CG module Switch to the News Edit 2 Click on an existing News Edit Table then click on Add tab Load your imported table Your News Edit Table contains the text change and logo addition 3 Enter a new name and registry number for your table and click OK Notice how your imported file has now been added to the News Edit registry Now click on Load then Close 4
516. wer Third 10 Stil Ej The options on the Attributes tabs control the appearance of both the workspace and your text and graphic objects You can modify your text and graphic objects style groups change layout backgrounds and access logos and news edit To display the contents of a tab click on the tab name The tools on the Formatting palette ools give you a quick way to access text nr a Q A and graphic tools color groups and style groups The text and graphic DD tools let you select what kind of text D GO or graphic object you want to create JOO You can use the style and color groups to apply styles and colors to text and graphic objects Style and color groups can also be modified based on the selected text or graphic objects Colors And Styles FACE EDGE G ag 60 EraserDust The Formatting palette changes slightly depending on whether you Text Object Graphic Object are working on a text layer or a Formatting Palette Formatting Palette graphic layer See Using the Formatting Palette on page 40 for details Play List Scrapbook Right Click Menu Floating Palettes Utilities The Play List is a palette that contains image thumbnails of the events in the Event List In CG the Play List is used to view thumbnails and create new layouts Each layout is an event in the Play List As you work on a layout the thumbnail in the Play List is automatically updated to reflect your c
517. ws dit Names Spell Check Re Wrap Selection If the Spell Checker does not find a spelling error you will not see the Spell Check dialog However if the Spell Checker does find a spelling error it opens the Spell Check dialog The dialog lets you correct your spelling and manage your Spell Check dictionaries and options Using the Spell Check dialog you can choose to ignore the spelling error or you can correct it using the options Unknown Word available thee Replace The incorrectly spelled word appears T Fee in the Unknown Word field CG displays a primary suggestion along with a list of other possible words To use the primary suggestion click on Replace To use a word from the Suggestion List click on the word and then click on Replace You can also double click on a word in the Suggestion List Double clicking replaces the spelling error with the new word Suggestions Suggestion List Add Add to Default Options Quit Checking PEE RE CG does not update the spelling in your layouts until the entire spell check is done You can add industry specific terms or names that you use consistently to any active dictionary Spell Check Options If you click on the Add to Default button the word is added to the default dictionary and does not appear as a spelling error again If you click on Add you can select the dictionary file that the word is added to You can select
518. xtin a textbox can be ATN automatically reflowed Ahext y You can place text along a curved path in order to create more complex layouts CG creates a default path called a spline that you can modify to any kind of curve Text that you enter automatically shifts position to follow the path when you make changes To create a text path select the Text Path tool from the Formatting palette E You can then draw a box in your layout and enter text along the default Y path The basic path has four control points in addition to grab handles on the corners of the bounding rectangle Click on any control point and drag it and change the path shape To add another control point click on an existing control point and press CTRL SPACEBAR The new control point appears on top of the old one and can be dragged to a new position To delete a control point click on it and press CTRL BACKSPACE Increase letter kerning up to 35 to force text to follow tight curves You can reset your text path to the default spline by selecting Element Constrain Default Spline from the CG menu bar or by selecting Constrain Default Spline from the right click menu Text in a Circle Vertical Text Processing Check Text Spelling You can also change your text path to a circle by selecting Element Constrain Circle from the CG menu bar or by selecting Constrain Circle from the right click menu You may need to adjust the bound
519. xture box Use the color selection tools to select a color and click on the Tint checkbox Click on Size and then click on Tile to see the difference in the way CG sizes the texture Choose Composite Red trom the drop down list to make part of the texture transparent or select Composite None from the drop down list to make the texture Opaque again Composite Mone Composite Mone Composite Red Composite Green Composite Blue Composite Alpha CG 131 Detining Additional Textures Textures are image files applied to the surfaces of text and graphic objects Textures can replace colors defined for objects or they can be blended with colors and transparency for a subtle effect CG keeps track of the textures used in each layout in the Texture Map dialog CG is shipped with sample texture images You can also create your own textures in Logo Compose Texture Options Texture Mapping 132 CG You can access the texture options by toggling between the Color Picker options and the texture options on the Color amp Texture tab Clicking on the texture box lets you select a texture from the texture map In order to apply the texture to the current object you must click on the Enable Texture checkbox Texture Enable Tile Tint Texture Checkbox Radio Button Texture Box Mix 50 lt siee Size Radio Button Horizontal jo l Vertical jo l Alignment Fields See Texture Map on page 130
520. y Inscriber fonts not TrueType fonts T Tab Alignment In CG Determines how text is positioned in relation to the 10 available tab stops Tab Constrained Line In CG A line of text that is not completely free to move in all directions Text can be constrained to a left center or right tab Contrast with Non Tab Constrained Line Tablet See Graphics Tablet Take Sends a rendered image or event file out to the frame buffer for output to video Glossary 293 Take Button Takes the current event and loads the next event into the Preview Channel The Take button is on the CG S toolbar that appears across the top of the workspace in all modules In Sequencer A button on the Run tab that takes the current event Targa 64 32P A brand of frame buffer Template In CG A pre defined layout Templates can contain any objects or settings that might be found in a layout from lower thirds to complex full screen layouts using logos and other graphic objects See also Motion Template Template Registry In CG Location where all the layout templates are stored You can use it to add update rename delete or load layouts See also Motion Template Registry Text Line In CG A single line of text Text lines are enclosed by square brackets or a white rectangle The line is the basic text unit in CG CG works with lines not paragraphs Text Object In CG A line of text containing characters or logos
521. y partially selected Seeing these differences is very helpful when you are using the Brush Selection tool to select pixels at less than 100 opacity Fully unselected Fully selected The Selection Channel thumbnail helps you keep track of how changes will be applied to your selection Partially selected Pixels that are 100 selected will be affected differently than pixels that are 50 selected when you edit them 240 Logo Compose Opacity and Level of Selection Pixels can be selected at a range of values from 1 to 100 The level of selection of the pixels determines the degree to which the changes are applied when you edit the selection For example if you select an area at 50 then apply a filter the filter is applied to the selection at 50 opacity You can only select pixels at less than 100 opacity with the Brush Selection tool Like all brush based tools you set the opacity level for this tool in the Opacity field on the Brush tab When you make your selection the Selection Channel shows the varying levels of selection of the pixels as a grayscale image Import and Export Selections You can import and export selections to give you greater control over your work To export a selection outline select File Import Export Export Selection You can export the selection in a variety of file formats To import a selection select FileImport Export Import Selection This imports the selection or image outline n
522. y stored in the ae rc original alpha information is lost Scrapbook and is available to all 7 of the CG S modules Frame Grab 219 220 Using the Image Filters Video signals contain two interlaced fields slightly offset in time Any grabbed frame flickers because of this offset Decoded NTSC and PAL signals may have a certain amount of degradation or color distortions Frame Grab offers different filter options to minimize flicker and clean up any distortion Image Filters Frame Grab The following topics list the available filter effects in Frame Grab Repeat Field 1 Duplicates the odd numbered scan lines replacing the even numbered ones The image will appear to shift down Repeat Field 2 Duplicates the even numbered scan lines replacing the odd numbered ones The image will appear to shift up The Repeat Field filters successfully remove field flicker without blurring the image However since they completely remove one of the fields they tend to add visual steps in the image Interpolate Field 1 Computes new data for even numbered scan lines from the scan lines directly above and below The odd numbered scan lines remain unchanged Interpolate Field 2 Filter and Clean up Options M Repeat Field 1 M Repeat Field 2 M Interpolate Field 1 Interpolate Field 2 lV Adaptive Field 1 M Adaptive Field 2 I Average Field 1 M Average Field 2 MV Horizontal Flip P Vertical Flip J Blur Filter IV Sharpen
523. yes do not see it as having many colors but as having many shades of red The red you see is the chrominance of the ball and the shades of red are the different luminance values Classic Inscriber Type Style In CG One of seven available type styles consisting of three elements face edge and shadow The Color amp Texture tab adjusts format settings Cleanup In Logo Compose The process of using Logo Compose tools and filters to remove alpha and make other adjustments to a logo or image Clip Art Images commonly available from third party sources that can be quickly inserted into an image Clipped Corner Rectangle In CG A rectangle that has its corners clipped flat at a 45 angle The size of the clipping region is set by the Edge value Glossary 275 Clone Fill Tool In Logo Compose An image editing tool that fills with image data allowing you to quickly copy large areas of an image or tile image elements Clone Tool In Logo Compose An image editing tool that paints with image data allowing you to copy areas of an image to other locations on the image CLR button A Program Preview palette button that clears the current channel CMYK An acronym for Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black All printed images are a combination of these four colors CMYK is not relevant to video display but computer generated images must be converted to CMYK if they are to be printed Color Adjustment Filters In Logo C
524. yle selected from the Style drop down list on the Brush tab Logo Compose has three brush styles Hard Edge Soft Edge and Soft Edge Buildup The Hard Edge style does not use the Softness attribute The Hard Edge style applies the tool like a pencil The Soft Edge style applies the tool like a brush The Soft Edge Buildup style applies the tool like an airbrush The Opacity field on the Brush tab sets the opacity for the selected tool All image editing and alpha tools use the opacity setting The Brush Selection tool also uses the opacity setting so you can make selections at less than 100 opacity See Understanding Selections on page 240 for details on the Brush Selection tool Logo Compose supports graphic tablets with pressure and erasers Pressure translates into tool opacity for brush based tools The eraser end of the tablet pen uses the Alpha Add tool Experiment with Tools 1 Select File lImport Image and select an image in the Open 6 Switch to the brush tab and change the Size to 30 the Aspect dialog to 1 4 and the Angle to 45 and try out your new brush 2 Select the Zoom tool from the Tool palette and click E 7 Enter 50 in the Opacity field and try out the brush The Alpha in the Logo Compose workspace to see the image in Add tool now adds only partial transparency to your image greater detail 8 Select Soft Edge from the Style drop down list on the Brush 3 Switch to the Scroll tool and drag the tool around
525. your background is a solid color or a gradient and always shows you the selected color s By clicking on the Solid Blend cycle box you can cycle through the SOLID TOP and BOTTOM options TOP and BOTTOM let you set the two gradient colors You can change the amount of the pure color used in the gradient as well as the angle of the gradient by changing the gradient values on the Background tab The percentage Top and Bottom values determine where on the layout the solid color stops and the gradient begins Simply count down from the top and up from the bottom of the screen and your leftover space in the middle is where the gradient occurs For example if you set the Top value to 70 and the Bottom value to 30 the middle 40 70 30 40 of the screen is gradient The graphic below illustrates how the balance between solid color and gradient shifts on the layout when you change the Top and Bottom values If you check the Lock toggle button both the Top and Bottom values are set to the same percentage with the gradient occurring on only 1 of the layout c Dre WEE ODE ee OE olor g ange g M Gradient ME Bottom Color The Angle field rotates the color gradient by up to 90 degrees negative or positive Gradient angles are defined in one degree increments If you set the Angle value to 90 degrees your gradient becomes horizontal moving from left to right instead of from top to bottom Top Gradient Value 75 Bottom
526. your output monitor and your frame buffer Soft Shadow In CG An offset shadow with a diffuse fuzzy edge instead of a sharp edge See also Offset Shadow Source File The data file where all image information is stored Speed In CG A parameter used for specifying duration of rolls and crawls in real time instead of specifying duration in frames Still In CG A static screen image See also Layout Type Still Graphic Button In Frame Grab Toggles the online monitor to view the captured image Stop Button In Sequencer A button on the Run tab that stops the current take sequence Store Inscriber application that is a searchable database of still images clips and animations that can be used in other Inscriber applications Only available with VMP Studio and VideoCarte Straps See Lower Third Style Group In CG A set of font size attribute color and texture information for text and graphic objects located on the Formatting palette Text and graphic objects do not share color groups Color group options can be changed on the Size amp Attributes and Color amp Texture tabs Contrast with Color Group Sub Pixel Processing In CG Makes rolls appear smoother at a wider variety of speeds especially very slow speeds Sub pixel processing is not available on all frame buffers System Fonts List In CG The collection of fonts maintained by the Font Manager The list consists of onl
527. ype shadow size and shadow angle Soft shadows require and additional value softness All of the shadow values can be set on the Size amp Attributes tab The shadow options are the same for text and graphic objects See Understanding Classic Shadow on page 88 for details on shadow type size direction and softness Unlike text edges the edge options for graphic objects have several Shadow fo Edging o variables depending on the type of t i Normal object and the edge selections All fe Flat objects can have Normal edges Round Some shapes can have beveled 2 f Tube edges The flat round and tube sort 3 l outlined Only options set the type of bevel You can set the edging size on the Size amp Attributes tab or use the quick selection options on the Attributes Edging menu A normal edge is the same as a text outline edge surrounding the edges of a graphic object with extra pixels of color Flat round and tube edges are all types of beveled edges which are shaded so that they appear three dimensional Only rectangular objects with 90 angles can be beveled Objects that can be beveled include rectangles horizontal panels and vertical panels Logos inserted as graphic objects can have a rectangular beveled edge surrounding them Normal Flat Round Depending on the graphic object type and edge type the edge size has several meanings Shape Edging Value Rectangle e sets the size of the edge

CGS Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents